all | frequencies |
|
|
exhibits | applications |
---|---|---|---|---|---|
manuals |
app s | submitted / available | |||||||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
1 2 |
|
Manual | Users Manual | 3.43 MiB | March 04 2009 | |||
1 2 |
|
User Manual | Users Manual | 3.39 MiB | April 09 2009 | |||
1 2 | Cover Letter(s) | April 09 2009 | ||||||
1 2 | Cover Letter(s) | April 09 2009 | ||||||
1 2 | Cover Letter(s) | April 09 2009 | ||||||
1 2 | External Photos | April 09 2009 | ||||||
1 2 | Internal Photos | April 09 2009 | ||||||
1 2 | ID Label/Location Info | / April 09 2009 | ||||||
1 2 | ID Label/Location Info | / April 09 2009 | ||||||
1 2 | RF Exposure Info | April 09 2009 | ||||||
1 2 | Test Report | April 09 2009 | ||||||
1 2 | Test Report | April 09 2009 | ||||||
1 2 | Test Setup Photos | April 09 2009 | ||||||
1 2 | Test Setup Photos | April 09 2009 | ||||||
1 2 | Attestation Statements | March 04 2009 | ||||||
1 2 | Operational Description | March 04 2009 | ||||||
1 2 | RF Exposure Info | March 04 2009 | ||||||
1 2 | Test Report | March 04 2009 |
1 2 | Manual | Users Manual | 3.43 MiB | March 04 2009 |
NBG-417N Wireless N-lite Home Router Default Login Details IP Address Password http://192.168.1.1 1234 Firmware Version 1.0 Edition 1, 1/2009 www.zyxel.com www.zyxel.com Copyright 2009 ZyXEL Communications Corporation About This User's Guide About This User's Guide Intended Audience This manual is intended for people who want to configure the NBG-417N using the Web Configurator. You should have at least a basic knowledge of TCP/IP networking concepts and topology. Related Documentation Quick Start Guide The Quick Start Guide is designed to help you get up and running right away. It contains information on setting up your network and configuring for Internet access. Supporting Disc Refer to the included CD for support documents. ZyXEL Web Site Please refer to www.zyxel.com for additional support documentation and product certifications. User Guide Feedback Help us help you. Send all User Guide-related comments, questions or suggestions for improvement to the following address, or use e-mail instead. Thank you!
The Technical Writing Team, ZyXEL Communications Corp., 6 Innovation Road II, Science-Based Industrial Park, Hsinchu, 300, Taiwan. E-mail: techwriters@zyxel.com.tw NBG-417N Users Guide 3 About This User's Guide Customer Support In the event of problems that cannot be solved by using this manual, you should contact your vendor. If you cannot contact your vendor, then contact a ZyXEL office for the region in which you bought the device. See http://www.zyxel.com/
web/contact_us.php for contact information. Please have the following information ready when you contact an office. Product model and serial number. Warranty Information. Date that you received your device. Brief description of the problem and the steps you took to solve it. 4 NBG-417N Users Guide Document Conventions Document Conventions Warnings and Notes These are how warnings and notes are shown in this Users Guide. Warnings tell you about things that could harm you or your device. Note: Notes tell you other important information (for example, other things you may need to configure or helpful tips) or recommendations. Syntax Conventions The NBG-417N may be referred to as the NBG-417N, the device, the product or the system in this Users Guide. Product labels, screen names, field labels and field choices are all in bold font. A key stroke is denoted by square brackets and uppercase text, for example,
[ENTER] means the enter or return key on your keyboard. Enter means for you to type one or more characters and then press the
[ENTER] key. Select or choose means for you to use one of the predefined choices. A right angle bracket ( > ) within a screen name denotes a mouse click. For example, Maintenance > Log > Log Setting means you first click Maintenance in the navigation panel, then the Log sub menu and finally the Log Setting tab to get to that screen. Units of measurement may denote the metric value or the scientific value. For example, k for kilo may denote 1000 or 1024, M for mega may denote 1000000 or 1048576 and so on. e.g., is a shorthand for for instance, and i.e., means that is or in other words. NBG-417N Users Guide 5 Document Conventions Icons Used in Figures Figures in this Users Guide may use the following generic icons. The NBG-417N icon is not an exact representation of your device. NBG-417N Computer Notebook computer Server DSLAM Firewall Telephone Switch Router Modem 6 NBG-417N Users Guide Safety Warnings Safety Warnings Do NOT use this product near water, for example, in a wet basement or near a swimming pool. Do NOT expose your device to dampness, dust or corrosive liquids. Do NOT store things on the device. Do NOT install, use, or service this device during a thunderstorm. There is a remote risk of electric shock from lightning. Connect ONLY suitable accessories to the device. Do NOT open the device or unit. Opening or removing covers can expose you to dangerous high voltage points or other risks. ONLY qualified service personnel should service or disassemble this device. Please contact your vendor for further information. Make sure to connect the cables to the correct ports. Place connecting cables carefully so that no one will step on them or stumble over them. Always disconnect all cables from this device before servicing or disassembling. Use ONLY an appropriate power adaptor or cord for your device. Connect the power adaptor or cord to the ri ght supply voltage (for example, 110V AC in North America or 230V AC in Europe). Do NOT allow anything to rest on the power adaptor or cord and do NOT place the product where anyone can walk on the power adaptor or cord. Do NOT use the device if the power adaptor or cord is damaged as it might cause electrocution. If the power adaptor or cord is damaged, remove it from the power outlet. Do NOT attempt to repair the power adaptor or cord. Contact your local vendor to order a new one. Do not use the device outside, and make sure all the connections are indoors. There is a remote risk of electric shock from lightning. Do NOT obstruct the device ventilation slots, as insufficient airflow may harm your device. Antenna Warning! This device meets ETSI and FCC certification requirements when using the included antenna(s). Only use the included antenna(s). If you wall mount your device, make sure that no electrical lines, gas or water pipes will be damaged. Your product is marked with this symbol, which is known as the WEEE mark. WEEE stands for Waste Electronics and Electrical Equipment. It means that used electrical and electronic products should not be mixed with general waste. Used electrical and electronic equipment should be treated separately. NBG-417N Users Guide 7 Safety Warnings 8 NBG-417N Users Guide Contents Overview Contents Overview Introduction ............................................................................................................................19 Getting to Know Your NBG-417N ..............................................................................................21 The WPS Button ........................................................................................................................25 Introducing the Web Configurator ..............................................................................................27 Connection Wizard ....................................................................................................................39 AP Mode ....................................................................................................................................53 Tutorials .....................................................................................................................................61 Network ...................................................................................................................................69 Wireless LAN .............................................................................................................................71 WAN ..........................................................................................................................................91 LAN ..........................................................................................................................................103 DHCP Server ...........................................................................................................................107 Network Address Translation (NAT) .........................................................................................113 Dynamic DNS ..........................................................................................................................123 Security .................................................................................................................................127 Firewall ....................................................................................................................................129 Content Filtering ......................................................................................................................135 Management .........................................................................................................................141 Static Route .............................................................................................................................143 Bandwidth Management ..........................................................................................................147 Remote Management ..............................................................................................................155 Universal Plug-and-Play (UPnP) .............................................................................................159 Maintenance and Troubleshooting .....................................................................................173 System .....................................................................................................................................175 Logs .........................................................................................................................................181 Tools ........................................................................................................................................183 Sys OP Mode ..........................................................................................................................189 Language .................................................................................................................................193 Troubleshooting .......................................................................................................................195 Appendices and Index .........................................................................................................203 NBG-417N Users Guide 9 Contents Overview 10 NBG-417N Users Guide Table of Contents Table of Contents About This User's Guide..........................................................................................................3 Document Conventions............................................................................................................5 Safety Warnings........................................................................................................................7 Contents Overview...................................................................................................................9 Table of Contents....................................................................................................................11 Part I: Introduction.................................................................................19 Chapter 1 Getting to Know Your NBG-417N..........................................................................................21 1.1 Overview ..............................................................................................................................21 1.2 Applications .........................................................................................................................21 1.3 Ways to Manage the NBG-417N .........................................................................................22 1.4 Good Habits for Managing the NBG-417N ..........................................................................22 1.5 LEDs ....................................................................................................................................22 Chapter 2 The WPS Button......................................................................................................................25 2.1 Overview ..............................................................................................................................25 Chapter 3 Introducing the Web Configurator........................................................................................27 3.1 Web Configurator Overview .................................................................................................27 3.2 Accessing the Web Configurator .........................................................................................27 3.3 Resetting the NBG-417N .....................................................................................................29 3.3.1 Procedure to Use the Reset Button ...........................................................................29 3.4 Navigating the Web Configurator ......................................................................................29 3.5 The Status Screen in Router Mode .....................................................................................30 3.5.1 Navigation Panel ........................................................................................................32 3.5.2 Summary: DHCP Table ...........................................................................................34 3.5.3 Summary: Packet Statistics .....................................................................................35 3.5.4 Summary: WLAN Station Status ............................................................................36 Chapter 4 Connection Wizard.................................................................................................................39 NBG-417N Users Guide 11 Table of Contents 4.1 Wizard Setup .......................................................................................................................39 4.2 Connection Wizard: STEP 1: System Information ...............................................................40 4.2.1 System Name .............................................................................................................40 4.2.2 Domain Name ............................................................................................................41 4.3 Connection Wizard: STEP 2: Wireless LAN ........................................................................42 4.3.1 Extend (WPA-PSK or WPA2-PSK) Security ...............................................................43 4.4 Connection Wizard: STEP 3: Internet Configuration ...........................................................43 4.4.1 Ethernet Connection ..................................................................................................44 4.4.2 PPPoE Connection ....................................................................................................44 4.4.3 PPTP Connection .......................................................................................................46 4.4.4 Your IP Address .........................................................................................................47 4.4.5 WAN IP Address Assignment .....................................................................................48 4.4.6 IP Address and Subnet Mask .....................................................................................48 4.4.7 DNS Server Address Assignment ..............................................................................49 4.4.8 WAN IP and DNS Server Address Assignment .........................................................50 4.4.9 WAN MAC Address ....................................................................................................51 4.5 Connection Wizard Complete ..............................................................................................52 Chapter 5 AP Mode...................................................................................................................................53 5.1 AP Mode Overview ..............................................................................................................53 5.2 Setting your NBG-417N to AP Mode ...................................................................................53 5.3 The Status Screen in AP Mode ...........................................................................................54 5.3.1 Navigation Panel ........................................................................................................56 5.4 Configuring Your Settings ....................................................................................................57 5.4.1 LAN Settings ..............................................................................................................57 5.4.2 WLAN and Maintenance Settings ..............................................................................58 5.5 Logging in to the Web Configurator in AP Mode .................................................................58 Chapter 6 Tutorials...................................................................................................................................61 6.1 How to Connect to the Internet from an AP .........................................................................61 6.2 Configure Wireless Security Using WPS on both your NBG-417N and Wireless Client .....61 6.2.1 Push Button Configuration (PBC) ..............................................................................62 6.2.2 PIN Configuration .......................................................................................................63 6.3 Enable and Configure Wireless Security without WPS on your NBG-417N ........................65 6.4 Configure Your Notebook ....................................................................................................66 Part II: Network.......................................................................................69 Chapter 7 Wireless LAN...........................................................................................................................71 12 NBG-417N Users Guide Table of Contents 7.1 Overview ..............................................................................................................................71 7.2 What You Can Do In the Wireless LAN Screen ...................................................................72 7.3 What You Should Know About Wireless LAN ......................................................................72 7.3.1 Wireless Security Overview .......................................................................................72 7.4 General Wireless LAN Screen ............................................................................................75 7.4.1 No Security .................................................................................................................76 7.4.2 WEP Encryption .........................................................................................................77 7.4.3 WPA-PSK/WPA2-PSK ................................................................................................79 7.5 MAC Filter ............................................................................................................................80 7.6 Wireless LAN Advanced Screen .........................................................................................82 7.7 Quality of Service (QoS) Screen .........................................................................................83 7.7.1 Application Priority Configuration ...............................................................................85 7.8 WPS Screen ........................................................................................................................87 7.9 WPS Station Screen ............................................................................................................88 7.10 Scheduling Screen ............................................................................................................88 Chapter 8 WAN..........................................................................................................................................91 8.1 Overview ..............................................................................................................................91 8.2 What You Can Do In the WAN Screens ...............................................................................91 8.3 What You Need To Know About WAN .................................................................................92 8.3.1 Configuring Your Internet Connection ........................................................................92 8.3.2 Multicast .....................................................................................................................93 8.3.3 NetBIOS over TCP/IP ................................................................................................94 8.3.4 Auto-Bridge ................................................................................................................94 8.4 Internet Connection .............................................................................................................95 8.4.1 Ethernet Encapsulation ..............................................................................................95 8.4.2 PPPoE Encapsulation ................................................................................................96 8.4.3 PPTP Encapsulation ..................................................................................................98 8.5 Advanced WAN Screen .....................................................................................................101 Chapter 9 LAN.........................................................................................................................................103 9.1 Overview ............................................................................................................................103 9.2 What You Can Do in the LAN Screen ................................................................................103 9.3 What You Need To Know About LAN ................................................................................104 9.3.1 IP Pool Setup ...........................................................................................................104 9.3.2 LAN TCP/IP ..............................................................................................................104 9.4 LAN IP Screen ...................................................................................................................105 Chapter 10 DHCP Server..........................................................................................................................107 10.1 Overview ..........................................................................................................................107 NBG-417N Users Guide 13 Table of Contents 10.2 What You Can Do in the DHCP Server Screens .............................................................107 10.3 What You Need To Know About the DHCP Server Screens ...........................................107 10.4 General Screen ...............................................................................................................108 10.5 Advanced Screen .........................................................................................................108 10.6 Client List Screen .............................................................................................................110 Chapter 11 Network Address Translation (NAT)....................................................................................113 11.1 Overview ........................................................................................................................113 11.2 What You Can Do in the NAT Screens .............................................................................114 11.3 What You Need To Know About NAT ................................................................................114 11.3.1 What NAT Does .......................................................................................................115 11.3.2 How NAT Works ......................................................................................................115 11.4 General NAT Screen .........................................................................................................116 11.5 NAT Application Screen ..................................................................................................117 11.6 NAT Advanced Screen ......................................................................................................119 11.7 Technical Reference ........................................................................................................120 11.8 Using NATPort Forwarding: Services and Port Numbers ................................................120 11.8.1 Configuring Servers Behind Port Forwarding Example ..........................................120 11.9 Trigger Port Forwarding ...................................................................................................121 11.9.1 Trigger Port Forwarding Example ...........................................................................122 11.9.2 Two Points To Remember About Trigger Ports ......................................................122 Chapter 12 Dynamic DNS........................................................................................................................123 12.1 Overview .........................................................................................................................123 12.2 What You Can Do in the DDNS Screen ...........................................................................123 12.3 What You Need To Know About DDNS ...........................................................................123 12.3.1 DynDNS Wildcard ..................................................................................................123 12.4 Dynamic DNS Screen ....................................................................................................124 Part III: Security....................................................................................127 Chapter 13 Firewall...................................................................................................................................129 13.1 Overview ........................................................................................................................129 13.2 What You Can Do in the Firewall Screens .......................................................................129 13.3 What You Need To Know About Firewall .........................................................................130 13.3.1 What is a Firewall? .................................................................................................130 13.3.2 Stateful Inspection Firewall ....................................................................................130 13.3.3 About the NBG-417N Firewall ................................................................................130 14 NBG-417N Users Guide Table of Contents 13.3.4 Guidelines For Enhancing Security With Your Firewall ..........................................131 13.4 General Firewall Screen ...............................................................................................132 13.5 Services Screen ...........................................................................................................132 Chapter 14 Content Filtering...................................................................................................................135 14.1 Overview ..........................................................................................................................135 14.2 What You Can Do in the Content Filtering Screen ..........................................................135 14.3 What You Need To Know About Content Filtering ...........................................................135 14.3.1 Content Filtering Profiles ........................................................................................135 14.4 Filter Screen ....................................................................................................................137 14.5 Technical Reference ........................................................................................................138 14.5.1 Customizing Keyword Blocking URL Checking ......................................................138 Part IV: Management............................................................................141 Chapter 15 Static Route...........................................................................................................................143 15.1 Overview ..........................................................................................................................143 15.2 What You Can Do in the IP Static Route Screens ...........................................................144 15.3 IP Static Route Screen ....................................................................................................144 15.3.1 Static Route Setup Screen ...................................................................................145 Chapter 16 Bandwidth Management.......................................................................................................147 16.1 Overview .........................................................................................................................147 16.2 What You Can Do in the Bandwidth Management Screen ..............................................147 16.3 What You Need To Know About Bandwidth Management ...............................................148 16.4 Bandwidth Management General Configuration .............................................................148 16.5 Bandwidth Management Advanced Configuration ..........................................................150 16.5.1 Rule Configuration: User Defined Service Rule Configuration ............................152 16.6 Technical References ......................................................................................................153 16.6.1 Application and Subnet-based Bandwidth Management .......................................153 16.6.2 Bandwidth Management Priorities .........................................................................153 16.6.3 Predefined Bandwidth Management Services .......................................................154 16.6.4 Services and Port Numbers ...................................................................................154 Chapter 17 Remote Management............................................................................................................155 17.1 Overview ..........................................................................................................................155 17.2 What You Can Do in the Remote Management Screens ................................................155 NBG-417N Users Guide 15 Table of Contents 17.3 What You Need To Know About Remote Management ...................................................155 17.3.1 Remote Management Limitations ..........................................................................155 17.3.2 Remote Management and NAT ..............................................................................156 17.3.3 System Timeout ....................................................................................................156 17.4 WWW Screen ...............................................................................................................157 Chapter 18 Universal Plug-and-Play (UPnP)..........................................................................................159 18.1 Overview .........................................................................................................................159 18.2 What You Can Do in the UPnP Screen ...........................................................................159 18.3 What You Need to Know About UPnP .............................................................................159 18.4 UPnP Screen ...................................................................................................................161 18.5 Technical Reference ........................................................................................................161 18.5.1 Installing UPnP in Windows Example ....................................................................162 Part V: Maintenance and Troubleshooting........................................173 Chapter 19 System...................................................................................................................................175 19.1 Overview ..........................................................................................................................175 19.2 What You Can Do in the System Screens .......................................................................175 19.3 System General Screen .................................................................................................175 19.4 Time Setting Screen ........................................................................................................177 Chapter 20 Logs.......................................................................................................................................181 20.1 Overview ..........................................................................................................................181 20.2 What You Can Do in the Log Screens .............................................................................181 20.3 What You Need to Know About Logs ..............................................................................181 20.4 View Log Screen ..............................................................................................................182 Chapter 21 Tools.......................................................................................................................................183 21.1 Overview ..........................................................................................................................183 21.2 What You Can Do in the Tools Screen ............................................................................183 21.3 Firmware Upload Screen .................................................................................................183 21.4 Configuration Screen .......................................................................................................186 21.4.1 Backup Configuration .............................................................................................186 21.4.2 Restore Configuration ............................................................................................187 21.4.3 Back to Factory Defaults ........................................................................................188 21.5 Restart Screen .................................................................................................................188 16 NBG-417N Users Guide Table of Contents Chapter 22 Sys OP Mode.........................................................................................................................189 22.1 Overview ..........................................................................................................................189 22.2 What You Can Do in the Sys OP Mode Screen ...............................................................189 22.3 What You Need to Know About Sys OP Mode ................................................................190 22.4 General Screen ...............................................................................................................191 Chapter 23 Language...............................................................................................................................193 23.1 Language Screen ............................................................................................................193 Chapter 24 Troubleshooting....................................................................................................................195 24.1 Power, Hardware Connections, and LEDs ......................................................................195 24.2 NBG-417N Access and Login ..........................................................................................196 24.3 Internet Access ................................................................................................................198 24.4 Resetting the NBG-417N to Its Factory Defaults .............................................................200 24.5 Wireless Router/AP Troubleshooting ...............................................................................200 Part VI: Appendices and Index...........................................................203 Appendix A Product Specifications.......................................................................................205 Appendix B Pop-up Windows, JavaScripts and Java Permissions......................................209 Appendix C IP Addresses and Subnetting...........................................................................217 Appendix D Setting up Your Computers IP Address...........................................................227 24.5.1 Verifying Settings ...................................................................................................244 Appendix E Wireless LANs..................................................................................................245 24.5.2 WPA(2)-PSK Application Example .........................................................................255 24.5.3 WPA(2) with RADIUS Application Example ...........................................................255 Appendix F Services............................................................................................................257 Appendix G Legal Information..............................................................................................261 Index.......................................................................................................................................265 NBG-417N Users Guide 17 Table of Contents 18 NBG-417N Users Guide PART I Introduction Getting to Know Your NBG-417N (21) The WPS Button (25) Introducing the Web Configurator (27) Connection Wizard (39) AP Mode (53) Tutorials (61) 19 20 CHAPTER 1 Getting to Know Your NBG-417N 1.1 Overview This chapter introduces the main features and applications of the NBG-417N. The NBG-417N extends the range of your existing wired network without additional wiring, providing easy network access to mobile users. You can set up a wireless network with other IEEE 802.11b/g/n compatible devices. A range of services such as a firewall and content filtering are also available for secure Internet computing. You can use media bandwidth management to efficiently manage traffic on your network. Bandwidth management features allow you to prioritize time-sensitive or highly important applications such as Voice over the Internet (VoIP). 1.2 Applications Your can create the following networks using the NBG-417N:
Wired. You can connect network devices via the Ethernet ports of the NBG-
417N so that they can communicate with each other and access the Internet. Wireless. Wireless clients can connect to the NBG-417N to access network resources. WAN. Connect to a broadband modem/router for Internet access. Figure 1 NBG-417N Network LAN 1 LAN 2 LAN 3 LAN 4 NBG-417N WLAN NBG-417N Users Guide 21 Chapter 1Getting to Know Your NBG-417N 1.3 Ways to Manage the NBG-417N Use any of the following methods to manage the NBG-417N. WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup). You can use the WPS button or the WPS section of the Web Configurator to set up a wireless network with your ZyXEL Device. Web Configurator. This is recommended for everyday management of the NBG-
417N using a (supported) web browser. 1.4 Good Habits for Managing the NBG-417N Do the following things regularly to make the NBG-417N more secure and to manage the NBG-417N more effectively. Change the password. Use a password thats not easy to guess and that consists of different types of characters, such as numbers and letters. Write down the password and put it in a safe place. Back up the configuration (and make sure you know how to restore it). Restoring an earlier working configuration may be useful if the device becomes unstable or even crashes. If you forget your password, you will have to reset the NBG-417N to its factory default settings. If you backed up an earlier configuration file, you would not have to totally re-configure the NBG-417N. You could simply restore your last configuration. 1.5 LEDs Figure 2 Front Panel 22 NBG-417N Users Guide Chapter 1Getting to Know Your NBG-417N The following table describes the LEDs and the WPS button. Table 1 Front Panel LEDs and WPS Button LED COLOR STATUS DESCRIPTION POWERGreenOnThe NBG-417N is receiving power and functioning properly. OffThe NBG-417N is not receiving power. WLAN / WPSGreenOnThe NBG-417N is ready, but is not sending/
receiving data through the wireless LAN. BlinkingThe NBG-417N is sending/receiving data through the wireless LAN. The NBG-417N is negotiating a WPS connection with a wireless client. OffThe wireless LAN is not ready or has failed. WANGreenOnThe NBG-417N has a successful 10/100MB WAN connection. BlinkingThe NBG-417N is sending/receiving data through the WAN. OffThe WAN connection is not ready, or has failed. LAN 1-4GreenOnThe NBG-417N has a successful 10/100MB Ethernet connection. BlinkingThe NBG-417N is sending/receiving data through the LAN. OffThe LAN is not connected. WPS ButtonPress this button for 1 second to set up a wireless connection via WiFi Protected Setup with another WPS-enabled client. You must press the WPS button on the client side within 120 seconds for a successful connection. NBG-417N Users Guide 23 Chapter 1Getting to Know Your NBG-417N 24 NBG-417N Users Guide CHAPTER 2 The WPS Button 2.1 Overview Your NBG-417N supports WiFi Protected Setup (WPS), which is an easy way to set up a secure wireless network. WPS is an industry standard specification, defined by the WiFi Alliance. WPS allows you to quickly set up a wireless network with strong security, without having to configure security settings manually. Each WPS connection works between two devices. Both devices must support WPS (check each devices documentation to make sure). Depending on the devices you have, you can either press a button (on the device itself, or in its configuration utility) or enter a PIN (a unique Personal Identification Number that allows one device to authenticate the other) in each of the two devices. When WPS is activated on a device, it has two minutes to find another device that also has WPS activated. Then, the two devices connect and set up a secure network by themselves. For more information on using WPS, see Section 6.2 on page 61. NBG-417N Users Guide 25 Chapter 2The WPS Button 26 NBG-417N Users Guide CHAPTER 3 Introducing the Web Configurator This chapter describes how to access the NBG-417N Web Configurator and provides an overview of its screens. 3.1 Web Configurator Overview The Web Configurator is an HTML-based management interface that allows easy setup and management of the NBG-417N via Internet browser. Use Internet Explorer 6.0 and later or Netscape Navigator 7.0 and later versions or Safari 2.0 or later versions. The recommended screen resolution is 1024 by 768 pixels. In order to use the Web Configurator you need to allow:
Web browser pop-up windows from your device. Web pop-up blocking is enabled by default in Windows XP SP (Service Pack) 2. JavaScripts (enabled by default). Java permissions (enabled by default). Refer to the Troubleshooting chapter to see how to make sure these functions are allowed in Internet Explorer. 3.2 Accessing the Web Configurator 1 Make sure your NBG-417N hardware is properly connected and prepare your computer or computer network to connect to the NBG-417N (refer to the Quick Start Guide). 2 3 Launch your web browser. Type "http://192.168.1.1" as the website address. NBG-417N Users Guide 27 Chapter 3Introducing the Web Configurator Your computer must be in the same subnet in order to access this website address. 4 5 Type "1234" (default) as the password and click Login. In some versions, the default password appears automatically - if this is the case, click Login. You should see a screen asking you to change your password (highly recommended) as shown next. Type a new password (and retype it to confirm) and click Apply or click Ignore. Figure 3 Change Password Screen Note: The management session automatically times out when the time period set in the Administrator Inactivity Timer field expires (default five minutes). Simply log back into the NBG-417N if this happens. 6 Select the setup mode you want to use. Click Go to Wizard Setup to use the Configuration Wizard for basic Internet and Wireless setup. Click Go to Advanced Setup to view and configure all the NBG-417Ns settings. 28 NBG-417N Users Guide Chapter 3Introducing the Web Configurator Select a language to go to the basic Web Configurator in that language. To change to the advanced configurator see Chapter 23 on page 193. Figure 4 Selecting the setup mode 3.3 Resetting the NBG-417N If you forget your password or IP address, or you cannot access the Web Configurator, you will need to use the RESET button at the back of the NBG-417N to reload the factory-default configuration file. This means that you will lose all configurations that you had previously saved, the password will be reset to 1234 and the IP address will be reset to 192.168.1.1. 3.3.1 Procedure to Use the Reset Button 1 Make sure the power LED is on. 2 3 Press the RESET button for longer than 1 second to restart/reboot the NBG-417N. Press the RESET button for longer than five seconds to set the NBG-417N back to its factory-default configurations. 3.4 Navigating the Web Configurator The following summarizes how to navigate the Web Configurator from the Status screen in Router Mode and AP Mode. NBG-417N Users Guide 29 Chapter 3Introducing the Web Configurator 3.5 The Status Screen in Router Mode Click on Status. The screen below shows the status screen in Router Mode.
(For information on the status screen in AP Mode see Chapter 5 on page 54.) Figure 5 Web Configurator Status Screen The following table describes the icons shown in the Status screen. Table 2 Status Screen Icon Key ICON DESCRIPTION Click this icon to open the setup wizard. Click this icon to view copyright and a link for related product information. Click this icon at any time to exit the Web Configurator. Select a number of seconds or None from the drop-down list box to refresh all screen statistics automatically at the end of every time interval or to not refresh the screen statistics. Click this button to refresh the status screen statistics. 30 NBG-417N Users Guide The following table describes the labels shown in the Status screen. Chapter 3Introducing the Web Configurator Table 3 Web Configurator Status Screen LABEL Device Information DESCRIPTION System NameThis is the System Name you enter in the Maintenance > System >
General screen. It is for identification purposes. s IP address. s subnet mask. s DHCP role - Client or None. Firmware VersionThis is the firmware version and the date created. WAN Information
- MAC AddressThis shows the WAN Ethernet adapter MAC Address of your device.
- IP AddressThis shows the WAN port
- IP Subnet MaskThis shows the WAN port
- DHCPThis shows the WAN port LAN Information
- MAC AddressThis shows the LAN Ethernet adapter MAC Address of your device.
- IP AddressThis shows the LAN port
- IP Subnet MaskThis shows the LAN port
- DHCPThis shows the LAN port WLAN Information
- MAC AddressThis shows the wireless adapter MAC Address of your device.
- StatusThis shows the current status of the Wireless LAN -
s IP address. s subnet mask. s DHCP role - Server or None. On, Off or Off by scheduler.
- Name (SSID)This shows a descriptive name used to identify the NBG-417N in the wireless LAN.
- ChannelThis shows the channel number which you select manually.
- Operating ChannelThis shows the channel number which the NBG-417N is currently using over the wireless LAN.
- Security ModeThis shows the level of wireless security the NBG-417N is using.
- 802.11 ModeThis shows the wireless standard.
- WPSThis displays Configured when the WPS has been set up. This displays Unconfigured if the WPS has not been set up. Click the status to display Network > Wireless LAN > WPS screen. System Status System Up TimeThis is the total time the NBG-417N has been on. Current Date/TimeThis field displays your NBG-417N System Resource
- CPU UsageThis displays what percentage s present date and time. of the NBG-417Ns processing ability is currently used. When this percentage is close to 100%, the NBG-417N is running at full load, and the throughput is not going to improve anymore. If you want some applications to have more throughput, you should turn off other applications (for example, using bandwidth management. NBG-417N Users Guide 31 Chapter 3Introducing the Web Configurator Table 3 Web Configurator Status Screen (continued) LABEL DESCRIPTION
- Memory UsageThis shows what percentage of the heap memory the NBG-417N is using. Heap memory refers to the memory that is not used by ZyNOS (ZyXEL Network Operating System) and is thus available for running processes like NAT and the firewall. System Setting
- FirewallThis shows whether the firewall is active or not.
- Bandwidth Management
- UPnPThis shows whether UPnP is active or not. This shows whether the bandwidth management is active or not. Interface Status InterfaceThis displays the NBG-417N port types. The port types are:
WAN, LAN and WLAN. StatusFor the LAN and WAN ports, this field displays Down (line is down) or Up
(line is up or connected). For the WLAN, it displays Up when the WLAN is enabled or Down when the WLAN is disabled. RateFor the LAN ports, this displays the port speed and duplex setting or N/A when the line is disconnected. For the WAN port, it displays the port speed and duplex setting if you re using Ethernet encapsulation and Idle (line (ppp) idle), Dial (starting to trigger a call) and Drop (dropping a call) if you're using PPPoE or PPTP encapsulation. This field displays N/A when the line is disconnected. For the WLAN, it displays the maximum transmission rate when the WLAN is enabled and N/A when the WLAN is disabled. Summary DHCP TableUse this screen to view current DHCP client information. Packet StatisticsUse this screen to view port status and packet specific statistics. WLAN Station StatusUse this screen to view the wireless stations that are currently associated to the NBG-417N. 3.5.1 Navigation Panel Use the sub-menus on the navigation panel to configure NBG-417N features. The following table describes the sub-menus. Table 4 Screens Summary LINK Status TAB Network FUNCTION This screen shows the NBG-417Ns general device, system and interface status information. Use this screen to access the wizard, and summary statistics tables. 32 NBG-417N Users Guide Table 4 Screens Summary LINK Wireless LAN WAN LAN DHCP Server NAT DDNS Security Firewall TAB General MAC Filter Advanced QoS WPS WPS Station Scheduling Internet Connection Advanced IP General Advanced Client List General Application Advanced General General Services Content Filter Filter Management Static Route IP Static Route Chapter 3Introducing the Web Configurator FUNCTION Use this screen to configure wireless LAN. Use the MAC filter screen to configure the NBG-417N to block access to devices or block the devices from accessing the NBG-417N. This screen allows you to configure advanced wireless settings. Use this screen to configure Wi-Fi Multimedia Quality of Service (WMM QoS). WMM QoS allows you to prioritize wireless traffic according to the delivery requirements of individual services. Use this screen to configure WPS. Use this screen to add a wireless station using WPS. Use this screen to schedule the times the Wireless LAN is enabled. This screen allows you to configure ISP parameters, WAN IP address assignment, DNS servers and the WAN MAC address. Use this screen to configure other advanced properties. Use this screen to configure LAN IP address and subnet mask. Use this screen to enable the NBG-417N s DHCP server. Use this screen to assign IP addresses to specific individual computers based on their MAC addresses and to have DNS servers assigned by the DHCP server. Use this screen to view current DHCP client information and to always assign an IP address to a MAC address (and host name). Use this screen to enable NAT. Use this screen to configure servers behind the NBG-
417N. Use this screen to change your NBG-417Ns port triggering settings. Use this screen to set up dynamic DNS. Use this screen to activate/deactivate the firewall. This screen shows a summary of the firewall rules, and allows you to edit/add a firewall rule. Use this screen to block certain web features and sites containing certain keywords in the URL. Use this screen to configure IP static routes. NBG-417N Users Guide 33 Chapter 3Introducing the Web Configurator Table 4 Screens Summary LINK Bandwidth MGMT TAB General Advanced Remote MGMT WWW UPnP General Maintenance System General Time Setting View Log Firmware Configuratio n Restart General Logs Tools Sys OP Mode Language FUNCTION Use this screen to enable bandwidth management. Use this screen to set the upstream bandwidth and edit a bandwidth management rule. Use this screen to configure through which interface(s) and from which IP address(es) users can use HTTP to manage the NBG-417N. Use this screen to enable UPnP on the NBG-417N. Use this screen to view and change administrative settings such as system and domain names, password and inactivity timer. Use this screen to change your NBG-417Ns time and date. Use this screen to view the logs for the categories that you selected. Use this screen to upload firmware to your NBG-417N. Use this screen to backup and restore the configuration or reset the factory defaults to your NBG-417N. This screen allows you to reboot the NBG-417N without turning the power off. This screen allows you to select whether your device acts as a Router or a Access Point. This screen allows you to select the language you prefer. 3.5.2 Summary: DHCP Table DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol, RFC 2131 and RFC 2132) allows individual clients to obtain TCP/IP configuration at start-up from a server. You can configure the NBG-417Ns LAN as a DHCP server or disable it. When configured as a server, the NBG-417N provides the TCP/IP configuration for the clients. If DHCP service is disabled, you must have another DHCP server on that network, or else the computer must be manually configured. Click the DHCP Table (Details...) hyperlink in the Status screen. Read-only information here relates to your DHCP status. The DHCP table shows current 34 NBG-417N Users Guide Chapter 3Introducing the Web Configurator DHCP client information (including IP Address, Host Name and MAC Address) of all network clients using the NBG-417Ns DHCP server. Figure 6 Summary: DHCP Table The following table describes the labels in this screen. DESCRIPTION Table 5 Summary: DHCP Table LABEL
# This is the index number of the host computer. IP AddressThis field displays the IP address relative to the # field listed above. Host Name This field displays the computer host name. MAC AddressThis field shows the MAC address of the computer with the name in the Host Name field. Every Ethernet device has a unique MAC (Media Access Control) address which uniquely identifies a device. The MAC address is assigned at the factory and consists of six pairs of hexadecimal characters, for example, 00:A0:C5:00:00:02. RefreshClick Refresh to renew the screen. 3.5.3 Summary: Packet Statistics Click the Packet Statistics (Details...) hyperlink in the Status screen. Read-
only information here includes port status, packet specific statistics and the
"system up time". The Poll Interval(s) field is configurable and is used for refreshing the screen. Figure 7 Summary: Packet Statistics NBG-417N Users Guide 35 Chapter 3Introducing the Web Configurator The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 6 Summary: Packet Statistics LABEL Port Status DESCRIPTION This is the NBG-417Ns port type. For the LAN ports, this displays the port speed and duplex setting or Down when the line is disconnected. For the WAN port, it displays the port speed and duplex setting if youre using Ethernet encapsulation and Idle (line (ppp) idle), Dial
(starting to trigger a call) and Drop (dropping a call) if you're using PPPoE or PPTP encapsulation. This field displays Down when the line is disconnected. For the WLAN, it displays the maximum transmission rate when the WLAN is enabled and Down when the WLAN is disabled. This is the number of transmitted packets on this port. This is the number of received packets on this port. This is the number of collisions on this port. This displays the transmission speed in bytes per second on this port. This displays the reception speed in bytes per second on this port. This is the total time the NBG-417N has been on. Enter the time interval for refreshing statistics in this field. Click this button to apply the new poll interval you entered in the Poll Interval(s) field. Click Stop to stop refreshing statistics. TxPkts RxPkts Collisions Tx B/s Rx B/s System Up Time Poll Interval(s) Set Interval Stop 3.5.4 Summary: WLAN Station Status Click the WLAN Station Status (Details...) hyperlink in the Status screen. View the wireless stations that are currently associated to the NBG-417N in the Association List. Association means that a wireless client (for example, your network or computer with a wireless network card) has connected successfully to the AP (or wireless router) using the same SSID, channel and security settings. Figure 8 Summary: Wireless Association List 36 NBG-417N Users Guide The following table describes the labels in this screen. Chapter 3Introducing the Web Configurator Table 7 Summary: Wireless Association List LABEL
MAC Address Association Time DESCRIPTION This is the index number of an associated wireless station. This field displays the MAC address of an associated wireless station. This field displays the time a wireless station first associated with the NBG-417Ns WLAN network. Click Refresh to reload the list. Refresh NBG-417N Users Guide 37 Chapter 3Introducing the Web Configurator 38 NBG-417N Users Guide CHAPTER 4 Connection Wizard This chapter provides information on the wizard setup screens in the Web Configurator. 4.1 Wizard Setup The Web Configurators wizard setup helps you configure your device to access the Internet. Refer to your ISP (Internet Service Provider) checklist in the Quick Start Guide to know what to enter in each field. Leave a field blank if you dont have that information. 1 After you access the NBG-417N Web Configurator, click the Go to Wizard setup hyperlink. You can click Go to Advanced setup hyperlink to skip this wizard setup and configure basic or advanced features accordingly. Figure 9 Select Wizard or Advanced Mode NBG-417N Users Guide 39 Chapter 4Connection Wizard 2 Choose a language by clicking on the languages button. The screen will update. Click the Next button to proceed to the next screen. Figure 10 Select a Language 3 Read the on-screen information and click Next. Figure 11 Welcome to the Connection Wizard 4.2 Connection Wizard: STEP 1: System Information System Information contains administrative and system-related information. 4.2.1 System Name System Name is for identification purposes. However, because some ISPs check this name you should enter your computer's "Computer Name". In Windows 95/98 click Start, Settings, Control Panel, Network. Click the Identification tab, note the entry for the Computer Name field and enter it as the System Name. In Windows 2000, click Start, Settings and Control Panel and then double-
click System. Click the Network Identification tab and then the Properties button. Note the entry for the Computer name field and enter it as the System Name. 40 NBG-417N Users Guide In Windows XP, click Start, My Computer, View system information and then click the Computer Name tab. Note the entry in the Full computer name field and enter it as the NBG-417N System Name. Chapter 4Connection Wizard 4.2.2 Domain Name The Domain Name entry is what is propagated to the DHCP clients on the LAN. If you leave this blank, the domain name obtained by DHCP from the ISP is used. While you must enter the host name (System Name) on each individual computer, the domain name can be assigned from the NBG-417N via DHCP. Click Next to configure the NBG-417N for Internet access. Figure 12 Wizard Step 1: System Information The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 8 Wizard Step 1: System Information LABEL System Name DESCRIPTION System Name is a unique name to identify the NBG-417N in an Ethernet network. Enter a descriptive name. This name can be up to 30 alphanumeric characters long. Spaces are not allowed, but dashes "-" and underscores "_" are accepted. Type the domain name (if you know it) here. If you leave this field blank, the ISP may assign a domain name via DHCP. The domain name entered by you is given priority over the ISP assigned domain name. Click Back to display the previous screen. Click Next to proceed to the next screen. Click Exit to close the wizard screen without saving. Domain Name Back Next Exit NBG-417N Users Guide 41 Chapter 4Connection Wizard 4.3 Connection Wizard: STEP 2: Wireless LAN Set up your wireless LAN using the following screen. Figure 13 Wizard Step 2: Wireless LAN The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 9 Wizard Step 2: Wireless LAN LABEL Name
(SSID) DESCRIPTION Enter a descriptive name (up to 32 printable 7-bit ASCII characters) for the wireless LAN. If you change this field on the NBG-417N, make sure all wireless stations use the same SSID in order to access the network. Select a Security level from the drop-down list box. Security Choose Auto (WPA2-PSK) to have the NBG-417N generate a pre-shared key automatically. After you click Next a screen pops up displaying the generated pre-shared key. Write down the key for use later when connecting other wireless devices to your network. Click OK to continue. Choose None to have no wireless LAN security configured. If you do not enable any wireless security on your NBG-417N, your network is accessible to any wireless networking device that is within range. If you choose this option, skip directly to Section 4.4 on page 43. Choose Extend (WPA-PSK or WPA2-PSK) security to configure a Pre-
Shared Key. Choose this option only if your wireless clients support WPA-
PSK or WPA2-PSK respectively. If you choose this option, skip directly to Section 4.3.1 on page 43. The range of radio frequencies used by IEEE 802.11b/g/n wireless devices is called a channel. The device will automatically select the channel with the least interference. Click Back to display the previous screen. Click Next to proceed to the next screen. Click Exit to close the wizard screen without saving. Channel Selection Back Next Exit 42 NBG-417N Users Guide Chapter 4Connection Wizard Note: The wireless stations and NBG-417N must use the same SSID, channel ID, WPA-PSK (if WPA-PSK is enabled) or WPA2-PSK (if WPA2-PSK is enabled) for wireless communication. 4.3.1 Extend (WPA-PSK or WPA2-PSK) Security Choose Extend (WPA-PSK) or Extend (WPA2-PSK) security in the Wireless LAN setup screen to set up a Pre-Shared Key. Figure 14 Wizard Step 2: Extend (WPA-PSK or WPA2-PSK) Security The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 10 Wizard Step 2: Extend (WPA-PSK or WPA2-PSK) Security LABEL Pre-Shared Key DESCRIPTION Type from 8 to 63 case-sensitive ASCII or HEX characters. You can set up the most secure wireless connection by configuring WPA in the wireless LAN screens. You need to configure an authentication server to do this. Click Back to display the previous screen. Click Next to proceed to the next screen. Click Exit to close the wizard screen without saving. Back Next Exit 4.4 Connection Wizard: STEP 3: Internet Configuration The NBG-417N offers three Internet connection types. They are Ethernet, PPP over Ethernet or PPTP. The wizard attempts to detect which WAN connection type you are using. If the wizard does not detect a connection type, you must select one from the drop-down list box. Check with your ISP to make sure you use the correct type. NBG-417N Users Guide 43 Chapter 4Connection Wizard This wizard screen varies according to the connection type that you select. Figure 15 Wizard Step 3: ISP Parameters. The following table describes the labels in this screen, Table 11 Wizard Step 3: ISP Parameters CONNECTION TYPE EthernetSelect the DESCRIPTION Ethernet option when the WAN port is used as a regular PPPoE Ethernet. Select the PPP over Ethernet option for a dial-up connection. If your ISP gave you an IP address and/or subnet mask, then select PPTP. PPTPSelect the PPTP option for a dial-up connection. 4.4.1 Ethernet Connection Choose Ethernet when the WAN port is used as a regular Ethernet. Continue to Section 4.4.4 on page 47. Figure 16 Wizard Step 3: Ethernet Connection 4.4.2 PPPoE Connection Point-to-Point Protocol over Ethernet (PPPoE) functions as a dial-up connection. PPPoE is an IETF (Internet Engineering Task Force) standard specifying how a host 44 NBG-417N Users Guide Chapter 4Connection Wizard personal computer interacts with a broadband modem (for example DSL, cable, wireless, etc.) to achieve access to high-speed data networks. For the service provider, PPPoE offers an access and authentication method that works with existing access control systems (for instance, RADIUS). One of the benefits of PPPoE is the ability to let end users access one of multiple network services, a function known as dynamic service selection. This enables the service provider to easily create and offer new IP services for specific users. Operationally, PPPoE saves significant effort for both the subscriber and the ISP/
carrier, as it requires no specific configuration of the broadband modem at the subscribers site. By implementing PPPoE directly on the NBG-417N (rather than individual computers), the computers on the LAN do not need PPPoE software installed, since the NBG-417N does that part of the task. Furthermore, with NAT, all of the LAN's computers will have Internet access. Refer to the appendix for more information on PPPoE. Figure 17 Wizard Step 3: PPPoE Connection The following table describes the labels in this screen. Select the PPP over Ethernet option for a dial-up connection. Table 12 Wizard Step 3: PPPoE Connection DESCRIPTION LABEL ISP Parameter for Internet Access Connection Type Service Name User Name Password Back Next Exit Type the name of your service provider. Type the user name given to you by your ISP. Type the password associated with the user name above. Click Back to return to the previous screen. Click Next to continue. Click Exit to close the wizard screen without saving. NBG-417N Users Guide 45 Chapter 4Connection Wizard 4.4.3 PPTP Connection Point-to-Point Tunneling Protocol (PPTP) is a network protocol that enables transfers of data from a remote client to a private server, creating a Virtual Private Network (VPN) using TCP/IP-based networks. PPTP supports on-demand, multi-protocol, and virtual private networking over public networks, such as the Internet. Refer to the appendix for more information on PPTP. Note: The NBG-417N supports one PPTP server connection at any given time. Figure 18 Wizard Step 3: PPTP Connection The following table describes the fields in this screen Table 13 Wizard Step 3: PPTP Connection LABEL DESCRIPTION ISP Parameters for Internet Access Connection TypeSelect PPTP from the drop-down list box. To configure a PPTP client, you must configure the User Name and Password fields for a PPP connection and the PPTP parameters for a PPTP connection. Type the user name given to you by your ISP. Type the password associated with the User Name above. Type the IP address of the PPTP server. User Name Password PPTP Configuration Server IP Address 46 NBG-417N Users Guide Chapter 4Connection Wizard Table 13 Wizard Step 3: PPTP Connection LABEL Connection ID/
Name DESCRIPTION Enter the connection ID or connection name in this field. It must follow the "c:id" and "n:name" format. For example, C:12 or N:My ISP. Get automatically from ISP Use fixed IP address My IP Address My IP Subnet Mask This field is optional and depends on the requirements of your ISP. Select this radio button if your ISP did not assign you a fixed IP address. Select this radio button, provided by your ISP to give the NBG-417N a fixed, unique IP address. Type the (static) IP address assigned to you by your ISP. Type the subnet mask assigned to you by your ISP (if given). Back Next Exit Click Back to return to the previous screen. Click Next to continue. Click Exit to close the wizard screen without saving. 4.4.4 Your IP Address The following wizard screen allows you to assign a fixed IP address or give the NBG-417N an automatically assigned IP address depending on your ISP. Figure 19 Wizard Step 3: Your IP Address The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 14 Wizard Step 3: Your IP Address LABEL Get automatically from your ISP DESCRIPTION Select this option If your ISP did not assign you a fixed IP address. This is the default selection. If you choose this option, skip directly to Section 4.4.9 on page 51. Select this option if you were given IP address and/or DNS server settings by the ISP. The fixed IP address should be in the same subnet as your broadband modem or router. Click Back to return to the previous screen. Click Next to continue. Click Exit to close the wizard screen without saving. Use fixed IP address provided by your ISP Back Next Exit NBG-417N Users Guide 47 Chapter 4Connection Wizard 4.4.5 WAN IP Address Assignment Every computer on the Internet must have a unique IP address. If your networks are isolated from the Internet, for instance, only between your two branch offices, you can assign any IP addresses to the hosts without problems. However, the Internet Assigned Numbers Authority (IANA) has reserved the following three blocks of IP addresses specifically for private networks. Table 15 Private IP Address Ranges 10.0.0.0 172.16.0.0 192.168.0.0 10.255.255.255 172.31.255.255 192.168.255.255
You can obtain your IP address from the IANA, from an ISP or have it assigned by a private network. If you belong to a small organization and your Internet access is through an ISP, the ISP can provide you with the Internet addresses for your local networks. On the other hand, if you are part of a much larger organization, you should consult your network administrator for the appropriate IP addresses. Note: Regardless of your particular situation, do not create an arbitrary IP address;
always follow the guidelines above. For more information on address assignment, please refer to RFC 1597, Address Allocation for Private Internets and RFC 1466, Guidelines for Management of IP Address Space. 4.4.6 IP Address and Subnet Mask Similar to the way houses on a street share a common street name, so too do computers on a LAN share one common network number. Where you obtain your network number depends on your particular situation. If the ISP or your network administrator assigns you a block of registered IP addresses, follow their instructions in selecting the IP addresses and the subnet mask. If the ISP did not explicitly give you an IP network number, then most likely you have a single user account and the ISP will assign you a dynamic IP address when the connection is established. The Internet Assigned Number Authority (IANA) reserved this block of addresses specifically for private use; please do not use any other number unless you are told otherwise. Let's say you select 192.168.1.0 as the network number; which covers 254 individual addresses, from 192.168.1.1 to 192.168.1.254 (zero and 255 are reserved). In other words, the first three numbers specify the network number while the last number identifies an individual computer on that network. 48 NBG-417N Users Guide Chapter 4Connection Wizard Once you have decided on the network number, pick an IP address that is easy to remember, for instance, 192.168.1.1, for your NBG-417N, but make sure that no other device on your network is using that IP address. The subnet mask specifies the network number portion of an IP address. Your NBG-417N will compute the subnet mask automatically based on the IP address that you entered. You don't need to change the subnet mask computed by the NBG-417N unless you are instructed to do otherwise. 4.4.7 DNS Server Address Assignment Use DNS (Domain Name System) to map a domain name to its corresponding IP address and vice versa, for instance, the IP address of www.zyxel.com is 204.217.0.2. The DNS server is extremely important because without it, you must know the IP address of a computer before you can access it. The NBG-417N can get the DNS server addresses in the following ways. 1 2 The ISP tells you the DNS server addresses, usually in the form of an information sheet, when you sign up. If your ISP gives you DNS server addresses, enter them in the DNS Server fields in the Wizard and/or WAN > Internet Connection screen. If the ISP did not give you DNS server information, leave the DNS Server fields set to 0.0.0.0 in the Wizard screen and/or set to From ISP in the WAN >
Internet Connection screen for the ISP to dynamically assign the DNS server IP addresses. NBG-417N Users Guide 49 Chapter 4Connection Wizard 4.4.8 WAN IP and DNS Server Address Assignment The following wizard screen allows you to assign a fixed WAN IP address and DNS server addresses. Figure 20 Wizard Step 3: WAN IP and DNS Server Addresses The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 16 Wizard Step 3: WAN IP and DNS Server Addresses LABEL WAN IP Address Assignment My WAN IP AddressEnter your WAN IP address in this field. The WAN IP address DESCRIPTION should be in the same subnet as your DSL/Cable modem or router. Enter the IP subnet mask in this field. My WAN IP Subnet Mask Gateway IP Address Enter the gateway IP address in this field. System DNS Server Address Assignment (if applicable) DNS (Domain Name System) is for mapping a domain name to its corresponding IP address and vice versa. The DNS server is extremely important because without it, you must know the IP address of a computer before you can access it. The NBG-417N uses a system DNS server (in the order you specify here) to resolve domain names for DDNS and the time server. First DNS Server Enter the DNS server's IP address in the fields provided. Second DNS Server If you do not configure a system DNS server, you must use IP addresses when configuring DDNS and the time server. Back Next Exit Click Back to return to the previous screen. Click Next to continue. Click Exit to close the wizard screen without saving. 50 NBG-417N Users Guide 4.4.9 WAN MAC Address Chapter 4Connection Wizard Every Ethernet device has a unique MAC (Media Access Control) address. The MAC address is assigned at the factory and consists of six pairs of hexadecimal characters, for example, 00:A0:C5:00:00:02. Table 17 Example of Network Properties for LAN Servers with Fixed IP Addresses Choose an IP address Subnet mask Gateway (or default route) 192.168.1.2-192.168.1.32; 192.168.1.65-192.168.1.254. 255.255.255.0 192.168.1.1(NBG-417N LAN IP) This screen allows users to configure the WAN port's MAC address by either using the NBG-417Ns MAC address, copying the MAC address from a computer on your LAN or manually entering a MAC address. Once it is successfully configured, the address will be copied to configuration file. It is advisable to clone the MAC address from a computer on your LAN even if your ISP does not presently require MAC address authentication. Figure 21 Wizard Step 3: WAN MAC Address The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 18 Wizard Step 3: WAN MAC Address LABEL Factory DefaultSelect DESCRIPTION Factory Default to use the factory assigned default MAC Clone the computers MAC address Set WAN MAC Address Back Next Exit address. Select this option and enter the IP address of the computer on the LAN whose MAC you are cloning. It is advisable to clone the MAC address from a computer on your LAN even if your ISP does not presently require MAC address authentication. Select this option and enter the MAC address you want to use. Click Back to return to the previous screen. Click Next to continue. Click Exit to close the wizard screen without saving. NBG-417N Users Guide 51 Chapter 4Connection Wizard 4.5 Connection Wizard Complete Click Finish to complete the wizard setup. Figure 22 Connection Wizard Complete Well done! You have successfully set up your NBG-417N to operate on your network and access the Internet. 52 NBG-417N Users Guide CHAPTER 5 AP Mode This chapter discusses how to configure settings while your NBG-417N is set to AP Mode. Many screens that are available in Router Mode are not available in AP Mode. Note: See Chapter 6 on page 61 for an example of setting up a wireless network in AP mode. 5.1 AP Mode Overview Use your NBG-417N as an AP if you already have a router or gateway on your network. In this mode your device bridges a wired network (LAN) and wireless LAN (WLAN) in the same subnet. See the figure below for an example. Figure 23 Wireless Internet Access in AP Mode A B 5.2 Setting your NBG-417N to AP Mode 1 Log into the Web Configurator if you havent already. See the Quick start Guide for instructions on how to do this. NBG-417N Users Guide 53 Chapter 5AP Mode 2 To set your NBG-417N to AP Mode, go to Maintenance > Sys OP Mode >
General and select Access Point. Figure 24 Maintenance > Sys OP Mode > General 3 A pop-up appears providing information on this mode. Click OK in the pop-up message window. (See Section 22.4 on page 191 for more information on the pop-up.) Click Apply. Your NBG-417N is now in AP Mode. Note: You have to log in to the Web Configurator again when you change modes. 5.3 The Status Screen in AP Mode Click on Status. The screen below shows the status screen in AP Mode. Figure 25 Status: AP Mode 54 NBG-417N Users Guide Chapter 5AP Mode The following table describes the labels shown in the Status screen. Table 19 Web Configurator Status Screen LABEL Device Information DESCRIPTION System NameThis is the System Name you enter in the Maintenance > System >
General screen. It is for identification purposes. Firmware VersionThis is the firmware version and the date created. LAN Information
- MAC AddressThis shows the LAN Ethernet adapter MAC Address of your device.
- IP AddressThis shows the LAN port
- IP Subnet MaskThis shows the LAN port
- DHCPThis shows the LAN port WLAN Information
- MAC AddressThis shows the wireless adapter MAC Address of your device.
- StatusThis shows the current status of the Wireless LAN -
s IP address. s subnet mask. s DHCP role - None. On, Off or Off by scheduler.
- Name (SSID)This shows a descriptive name used to identify the NBG-417N in the wireless LAN.
- ChannelThis shows the channel number which you select manually.
- Operating ChannelThis shows the channel number which the NBG-417N is currently using over the wireless LAN.
- Security ModeThis shows the level of wireless security the NBG-417N is using.
- 802.11 ModeThis shows the IEEE 802.11 standard that the NBG-417N supports. Wireless clients must support the same standard in order to be able to connect to the NBG-417N
- WPSThis shows the WPS (WiFi Protected Setup) Status. Click the status to display Network > Wireless LAN > WPS screen. System Status System UptimeThis is the total time the NBG-417N has been on. Current Date/TimeThis field displays your NBG-417N System Resource
- CPU UsageThis displays what percentage s present date and time. of the NBG-417Ns processing ability is currently used. When this percentage is close to 100%, the NBG-417N is running at full load, and the throughput is not going to improve anymore. If you want some applications to have more throughput, you should turn off other applications (for example, using bandwidth management).
- Memory UsageThis shows what percentage of the heap memory the NBG-417N is using. Heap memory refers to the memory that is not used by ZyNOS (ZyXEL Network Operating System) and is thus available for running processes like NAT and the firewall. Interface Status InterfaceThis displays the NBG-417N port types. The port types are:
LAN and WLAN. NBG-417N Users Guide 55 Chapter 5AP Mode Table 19 Web Configurator Status Screen (continued) LABEL DESCRIPTION StatusFor the LAN port, this field displays Down (line is down) or Up (line is up or connected). For the WLAN, it displays Up when the WLAN is enabled or Down when the WLAN is disabled. RateFor the LAN ports, this displays the port speed and duplex setting or N/A when the line is disconnected. For the WLAN, it displays the maximum transmission rate when the WLAN is enabled and N/A when the WLAN is disabled. Summary Packet StatisticsUse this screen to view port status and packet specific statistics. WLAN Station StatusUse this screen to view the wireless stations that are currently associated to the NBG-417N. 5.3.1 Navigation Panel Use the menu in the navigation panel to configure NBG-417N features in AP Mode. The following screen and table show the features you can configure in AP Mode. Figure 26 Menu: AP Mode The following table describes the sub-menus. Table 20 Screens Summary LINK Status TAB Network FUNCTION This screen shows the NBG-417Ns general device, system and interface status information. Use this screen to access the wizard, and summary statistics tables. 56 NBG-417N Users Guide Table 20 Screens Summary LINK Wireless LAN TAB General MAC Filter Advanced QoS WPS WPS Station Scheduling LAN IP Maintenance System General Time Setting View Log Firmware Configuratio n Restart General Logs Tools Sys OP Mode Language Chapter 5AP Mode FUNCTION Use this screen to configure wireless LAN. Use the MAC filter screen to configure the NBG-417N to block access to devices or block the devices from accessing the NBG-417N. This screen allows you to configure advanced wireless settings. Use this screen to configure Wi-Fi Multimedia Quality of Service (WMM QoS). WMM QoS allows you to prioritize wireless traffic according to the delivery requirements of individual services. Use this screen to configure WPS. Use this screen to add a wireless station using WPS. Use this screen to schedule the times the Wireless LAN is enabled. Use this screen to configure LAN IP address and subnet mask or to get the LAN IP address from a DHCP server. Use this screen to view and change administrative settings such as system and domain names, password and inactivity timer. Use this screen to change your NBG-417Ns time and date. Use this screen to view the logs for the categories that you selected. Use this screen to upload firmware to your NBG-417N. Use this screen to backup and restore the configuration or reset the factory defaults to your NBG-417N. This screen allows you to reboot the NBG-417N without turning the power off. This screen allows you to select whether your device acts as a Router or a Access Point. This screen allows you to select the language you prefer. 5.4 Configuring Your Settings 5.4.1 LAN Settings Use this section to configure your LAN settings while in AP Mode. Click Network > LAN to see the screen below. NBG-417N Users Guide 57 Chapter 5AP Mode Note: If you change the IP address of the NBG-417N in the screen below, you will need to log into the NBG-417N again using the new IP address. Figure 27 Network > LAN > IP The table below describes the labels in the screen. Table 21 Network > LAN > IP LABEL IP Address DESCRIPTION Type the IP address in dotted decimal notation. The default setting is 192.168.1.2. If you change the IP address you will have to log in again with the new IP address. The subnet mask specifies the network number portion of an IP address. Your NBG-417N will automatically calculate the subnet mask based on the IP address that you assign. Unless you are implementing subnetting, use the subnet mask computed by the NBG-417N. Click Apply to save your changes to the NBG-417N. Click Reset to reload the previous configuration for this screen. IP Subnet Mask Apply Reset 5.4.2 WLAN and Maintenance Settings The configuration of wireless and maintenance settings in AP Mode is the same as for Router Mode. See Chapter 5 on page 69 for information on the configuring your wireless network. See Maintenance and Troubleshooting (173) for information on the configuring your Maintenance settings. 5.5 Logging in to the Web Configurator in AP Mode 1 Connect your computer to the LAN port of the NBG-417N. 58 NBG-417N Users Guide Chapter 5AP Mode 2 The default IP address of the NBG-417N is 192.168.1.2. In this case, your computer must have an IP address in the range between 192.168.1.3 and 192.168.1.254. 3 Click Start > Run on your computer in Windows. 4 5 Type cmd in the dialog box. Type ipconfig to show your computers IP address. If your computers IP address is not in the correct range then see Appendix D on page 227 for information on changing your computers IP address. 6 After youve set your computers IP address, open a web browser such as Internet Explorer and type 192.168.1.2 as the web address in your web browser. See Chapter 6 on page 61 for a tutorial on setting up a network with an AP. NBG-417N Users Guide 59 Chapter 5AP Mode 60 NBG-417N Users Guide CHAPTER 6 Tutorials This chapter provides tutorials on wireless configurations your NBG-417N. 6.1 How to Connect to the Internet from an AP This section gives you an example of how to set up an access point (AP) and wireless client (a notebook (B), in this example) for wireless communication. B can access the Internet through the AP wirelessly. Figure 28 Wireless AP Connection to the Internet B AP Internet 6.2 Configure Wireless Security Using WPS on both your NBG-417N and Wireless Client This section gives you an example of how to set up wireless network using WPS. This example uses the NBG-417N as the AP and NWD210N as the wireless client which connects to a notebook. Note: The wireless client must be a WPS-aware device (for example, a WPS USB adapter or PCI card). There are two WPS methods for creating a secure connection. This tutorial shows you how to do both. Push Button Configuration (PBC) - create a secure wireless network simply by pressing a button. See Section 6.2.1 on page 62.This is the easier method. NBG-417N Users Guide 61 Chapter 6Tutorials PIN Configuration - create a secure wireless network simply by entering a wireless client's PIN (Personal Identification Number) in the NBG-417Ns interface. See Section 6.2.2 on page 63. This is the more secure method, since one device can authenticate the other. 6.2.1 Push Button Configuration (PBC) 1 Make sure that your NBG-417N is turned on and that it is within range of your computer. 2 Make sure that you have installed the wireless client (this example uses the NWD210N) driver and utility in your notebook. 3 4 In the wireless client utility, find the WPS settings. Enable WPS and press the WPS button (Start or WPS button) Log into NBG-417Ns Web Configurator and press the Push Button button in the Network > Wireless Client > WPS Station screen. Note: Your NBG-417N has a WPS button located on its panel, as well as a WPS button in its configuration utility. Both buttons have exactly the same function;
you can use one or the other. Note: It doesnt matter which button is pressed first. You must press the second button within two minutes of pressing the first one. The NBG-417N sends the proper configuration settings to the wireless client. This may take up to two minutes. Then the wireless client is able to communicate with the NBG-417N securely. 62 NBG-417N Users Guide Chapter 6Tutorials The following figure shows you an example to set up wireless network and security by pressing a button on both NBG-417N and wireless client (the NWD210N in this example). Figure 29 Example WPS Process: PBC Method Wireless Client NBG-417N WITHIN 2 MINUTES SECURITY INFO COMMUNICATION 6.2.2 PIN Configuration When you use the PIN configuration method, you need to use both NBG-417Ns configuration interface and the clients utilities. 1 Launch your wireless clients configuration utility. Go to the WPS settings and select the PIN method to get a PIN number. 2 Enter the PIN number to the PIN field in the Network > Wireless LAN > WPS Station screen on the NBG-417N. 3 Click Start buttons (or button next to the PIN field) on both the wireless client utility screen and the NBG-417Ns WPS Station screen within two minutes. The NBG-417N authenticates the wireless client and sends the proper configuration settings to the wireless client. This may take up to two minutes. Then the wireless client is able to communicate with the NBG-417N securely. NBG-417N Users Guide 63 Chapter 6Tutorials The following figure shows you the example to set up wireless network and security on NBG-417N and wireless client (ex. NWD210N in this example) by using PIN method. Figure 30 Example WPS Process: PIN Method Wireless Client NBG-417N WITHIN 2 MINUTES Authentication by PIN SECURITY INFO COMMUNICATION 64 NBG-417N Users Guide Chapter 6Tutorials 6.3 Enable and Configure Wireless Security without WPS on your NBG-417N This example shows you how to configure wireless security settings with the following parameters on your NBG-417N. SSID Channel Security SSID_Example3 6 WPA-PSK
(Pre-Shared Key: ThisismyWPA-PSKpre-sharedkey) Follow the steps below to configure the wireless settings on your NBG-417N. The instructions require that your hardware is connected (see the Quick Start Guide) and you are logged into the Web Configurator through your LAN connection
(see Section 3.2 on page 27). 1 Open the Wireless LAN > General screen in the APs Web Configurator. 2 Make sure the Enable Wireless LAN check box is selected. 3 Enter SSID_Example3 as the SSID and select a channel. 4 Set security mode to WPA-PSK and enter ThisismyWPA-PSKpre-sharedkey in the Pre-Shared Key field. Click Apply. Figure 31 Tutorial: Network > Wireless LAN > General NBG-417N Users Guide 65 Chapter 6Tutorials 5 Open the Status screen. Verify your wireless and wireless security settings under Device Information and check if the WLAN connection is up under Interface Status. Figure 32 Tutorial: Status: AP Mode 6.4 Configure Your Notebook Note: We use the ZyXEL M-302 wireless adapter utility screens as an example for the wireless client. The screens may vary for different models. 1 The NBG-417N supports IEEE 802.11b, IEEE 802.11g and IEEE 802.11n wireless clients. Make sure that your notebook or computers wireless adapter supports one of these standards. 2 Wireless adapters come with software sometimes called a utility that you install on your computer. See your wireless adapters Users Guide for information on how to do that. 3 After youve installed the utility, open it. If you cannot see your utilitys icon on your screen, go to Start > Programs and click on your utility in the list of programs that appears. The utility displays a list of APs within range, as shown in the example screen below. 66 NBG-417N Users Guide 4 Select SSID_Example3 and click Connect. Figure 33 Connecting a Wireless Client to a Wireless Network t Chapter 6Tutorials 5 Select WPA-PSK and type the security key in the following screen. Click Next. Figure 34 Security Settings 6 The Confirm Save window appears. Check your settings and click Save to continue. Figure 35 Confirm Save NBG-417N Users Guide 67 Chapter 6Tutorials 7 Check the status of your wireless connection in the screen below. If your wireless connection is weak or you have no connection, see the Troubleshooting section of this Users Guide. Figure 36 Link Status If your connection is successful, open your Internet browser and enter http://
www.zyxel.com or the URL of any other web site in the address bar. If you are able to access the web site, your wireless connection is successfully configured. 68 NBG-417N Users Guide PART II Network Wireless LAN (71) WAN (91) LAN (103) DHCP Server (107) Network Address Translation (NAT) (113) Dynamic DNS (123) 69 70 CHAPTER 7 Wireless LAN 7.1 Overview This chapter discusses how to configure the wireless network settings in your NBG-417N. See the appendices for more detailed information about wireless networks. The following figure provides an example of a wireless network. Figure 37 Example of a Wireless Network AP The wireless network is the part in the blue circle. In this wireless network, devices A and B are called wireless clients. The wireless clients use the access point (AP) to interact with other devices (such as the printer) or with the Internet. Your NBG-417N is the AP. NBG-417N Users Guide 71 Chapter 7Wireless LAN 7.2 What You Can Do In the Wireless LAN Screen Use the General screen (Section 7.4 on page 75) to enable the Wireless LAN, enter the SSID and select the wireless security mode. Use the MAC Filter screen (Section 7.5 on page 80) to allow or deny wireless stations based on their MAC addresses from connecting to the NBG-417N. Use the Advanced screen (Section 7.6 on page 82) to allow intra-BSS networking and set the RTS/CTS Threshold. Use the QoS screen (Section 7.7 on page 83) to set priority levels to services, such as e-mail, VoIP, chat, and so on. Use the WPS screen (Section 7.8 on page 87) to quickly set up a wireless network with strong security, without having to configure security settings manually. Use the WPS Station screen (Section 7.9 on page 88) to add a wireless station using WPS. Use the Scheduling screen (Section 7.10 on page 88) to set the times your wireless LAN is turned on and off. 7.3 What You Should Know About Wireless LAN Every wireless network must follow these basic guidelines. Every wireless client in the same wireless network must use the same SSID. The SSID is the name of the wireless network. It stands for Service Set IDentity. If two wireless networks overlap, they should use different channels. Like radio stations or television channels, each wireless network uses a specific channel, or frequency, to send and receive information. Every wireless client in the same wireless network must use security compatible with the AP. Security stops unauthorized devices from using the wireless network. It can also protect the information that is sent in the wireless network. 7.3.1 Wireless Security Overview The following sections introduce different types of wireless security you can set up in the wireless network. 7.3.1.1 SSID Normally, the AP acts like a beacon and regularly broadcasts the SSID in the area. You can hide the SSID instead, in which case the AP does not broadcast the SSID. 72 NBG-417N Users Guide Chapter 7Wireless LAN In addition, you should change the default SSID to something that is difficult to guess. This type of security is fairly weak, however, because there are ways for unauthorized devices to get the SSID. In addition, unauthorized devices can still see the information that is sent in the wireless network. 7.3.1.2 MAC Address Filter Every wireless client has a unique identification number, called a MAC address.1 A MAC address is usually written using twelve hexadecimal characters2; for example, 00A0C5000002 or 00:A0:C5:00:00:02. To get the MAC address for each wireless client, see the appropriate Users Guide or other documentation. You can use the MAC address filter to tell the AP which wireless clients are allowed or not allowed to use the wireless network. If a wireless client is allowed to use the wireless network, it still has to have the correct settings (SSID, channel, and security). If a wireless client is not allowed to use the wireless network, it does not matter if it has the correct settings. This type of security does not protect the information that is sent in the wireless network. Furthermore, there are ways for unauthorized devices to get the MAC address of an authorized wireless client. Then, they can use that MAC address to use the wireless network. 7.3.1.3 User Authentication You can make every user log in to the wireless network before they can use it. This is called user authentication. However, every wireless client in the wireless network has to support IEEE 802.1x to do this. For wireless networks, there are two typical places to store the user names and passwords for each user. In the AP: this feature is called a local user database or a local database. In a RADIUS server: this is a server used in businesses more than in homes. If your AP does not provide a local user database and if you do not have a RADIUS server, you cannot set up user names and passwords for your users. Unauthorized devices can still see the information that is sent in the wireless network, even if they cannot use the wireless network. Furthermore, there are ways for unauthorized wireless users to get a valid user name and password. Then, they can use that user name and password to use the wireless network. 1. 2. Some wireless devices, such as scanners, can detect wireless networks but cannot use wireless networks. These kinds of wireless devices might not have MAC addresses. Hexadecimal characters are 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, A, B, C, D, E, and F. NBG-417N Users Guide 73 Chapter 7Wireless LAN Local user databases also have an additional limitation that is explained in the next section. 7.3.1.4 Encryption Wireless networks can use encryption to protect the information that is sent in the wireless network. Encryption is like a secret code. If you do not know the secret code, you cannot understand the message. The types of encryption you can choose depend on the type of user authentication. (See Section 7.3.1.3 on page 73 for information about this.) Table 22 Types of Encryption for Each Type of Authentication NO AUTHENTICATION RADIUS SERVER No SecurityWPA Static WEP WPA-PSK WPA2-PSKWPA2 Weakest Stronges t For example, if the wireless network has a RADIUS server, you can choose WPA or WPA2. If users do not log in to the wireless network, you can choose no encryption, Static WEP, WPA-PSK, or WPA2-PSK. Usually, you should set up the strongest encryption that every wireless client in the wireless network supports. For example, suppose the AP does not have a local user database, and you do not have a RADIUS server. Therefore, there is no user authentication. Suppose the wireless network has two wireless clients. Device A only supports WEP, and device B supports WEP and WPA. Therefore, you should set up Static WEP in the wireless network. Note: It is recommended that wireless networks use WPA-PSK, WPA, or stronger encryption. IEEE 802.1x and WEP encryption are better than none at all, but it is still possible for unauthorized devices to figure out the original information pretty quickly. Note: It is not possible to use WPA-PSK, WPA or stronger encryption with a local user database. In this case, it is better to set up stronger encryption with no authentication than to set up weaker encryption with the local user database. When you select WPA2 or WPA2-PSK in your NBG-417N, you can also select an option (WPA Compatible) to support WPA as well. In this case, if some wireless clients support WPA and some support WPA2, you should set up WPA2-PSK or WPA2 (depending on the type of wireless network login) and select the WPA Compatible option in the NBG-417N. 74 NBG-417N Users Guide Many types of encryption use a key to protect the information in the wireless network. The longer the key, the stronger the encryption. Every wireless client in the wireless network must have the same key. Chapter 7Wireless LAN 7.3.1.5 WPS WiFi Protected Setup (WPS) is an industry standard specification, defined by the WiFi Alliance. WPS allows you to quickly set up a wireless network with strong security, without having to configure security settings manually. Depending on the devices in your network, you can either press a button (on the device itself, or in its configuration utility) or enter a PIN (Personal Identification Number) in the devices. Then, they connect and set up a secure network by themselves. See how to set up a secure wireless network using WPS in the Section 6.2 on page 61. 7.4 General Wireless LAN Screen Use this screen to enable the Wireless LAN, enter the SSID and select the wireless security mode. Note: If you are configuring the NBG-417N from a computer connected to the wireless LAN and you change the NBG-417Ns SSID, channel or security settings, you will lose your wireless connection when you press Apply to confirm. You must then change the wireless settings of your computer to match the NBG-417Ns new settings. Click Network > Wireless LAN to open the General screen. Figure 38 Network > Wireless LAN > General NBG-417N Users Guide 75 Chapter 7Wireless LAN The following table describes the general wireless LAN labels in this screen. Table 23 Network > Wireless LAN > General LABEL Enable Wireless LAN Name(SSID) DESCRIPTION Click the check box to activate wireless LAN. Hide SSID Channel Selection Auto Channel Selection Operating Channel Channel Width Security Mode
(Service Set IDentity) The SSID identifies the Service Set with which a wireless station is associated. Wireless stations associating to the access point (AP) must have the same SSID. Enter a descriptive name (up to 32 printable 7-bit ASCII characters) for the wireless LAN. Select this check box to hide the SSID in the outgoing beacon frame so a station cannot obtain the SSID through scanning using a site survey tool. Set the operating frequency/channel depending on your particular region. Select a channel from the drop-down list box. The options vary depending on the frequency band and the country you are in. Refer to the Connection Wizard chapter for more information on channels. This option is only available if Auto Channel Selection is disabled. Select this check box for the NBG-417N to automatically choose the channel with the least interference. Deselect this check box if you wish to manually select the channel using the Channel Section field. This displays the channel the NBG-417N is currently using. Select whether the NBG-417N uses a wireless channel width of 20 or 40 MHz. A standard 20 MHz channel offers transfer speeds of up to 150Mbps whereas a 40MHz channel uses two standard channels and offers speeds of up to 300 Mbps. Because not all devices support 40 MHz channels, select Auto 20/40MHz to allow the NBG-417N to adjust the channel bandwidth automatically. Select WPA-PSK or WPA2-PSK to add security on this wireless network. The wireless clients which want to associate to this network must have same wireless security settings as this device. After you select to use a security, additional options appears in this screen. See 7.4.2 and 7.4.3 sections. Or you can select No Security to allow any client to associate this network without authentication. Note: If you enable the WPS function, only No Security, WPA-PSK and WPA2-PSK are available in this field. Apply Reset Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG-417N. Click Reset to reload the previous configuration for this screen. See the rest of this chapter for information on the other labels in this screen. 7.4.1 No Security Select No Security to allow wireless stations to communicate with the access points without any data encryption. 76 NBG-417N Users Guide Chapter 7Wireless LAN Note: If you do not enable any wireless security on your NBG-417N, your network is accessible to any wireless networking device that is within range. Figure 39 Network > Wireless LAN > General: No Security The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 24 Wireless No Security LABEL Security Mode Apply Reset DESCRIPTION Choose No Security from the drop-down list box. Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG-417N. Click Reset to reload the previous configuration for this screen. 7.4.2 WEP Encryption WEP encryption scrambles the data transmitted between the wireless stations and the access points to keep network communications private. It encrypts unicast and multicast communications in a network. Both the wireless stations and the access points must use the same WEP key. Your NBG-417N allows you to configure up to four 64-bit or 128-bit WEP keys but only one key can be enabled at any one time. NBG-417N Users Guide 77 Chapter 7Wireless LAN In order to configure and enable WEP encryption; click Network > Wireless LAN to display the General screen. Select Static WEP from the Security Mode list. Figure 40 Network > Wireless LAN > General: Static WEP The following table describes the wireless LAN security labels in this screen. Table 25 Network > Wireless LAN > General: Static WEP LABEL WEP Encryption Authenticatio n Method DESCRIPTION Select 64-bit WEP or 128-bit WEP to enable data encryption. This field is activated when you select 64-bit WEP or 128-bit WEP in the WEP Encryption field. Select Auto, Open System or Shared Key from the drop-down list box. This field specifies whether the wireless clients have to provide the WEP key to login to the wireless client. Keep this setting at Auto or Open System unless you want to force a key verification before communication between the wireless client and the ZyXEL Device occurs. Select Shared Key to force the clients to provide the WEP key prior to communication. Select this option in order to enter ASCII characters as WEP key. ASCII 78 NBG-417N Users Guide Chapter 7Wireless LAN Table 25 Network > Wireless LAN > General: Static WEP LABEL Hex DESCRIPTION Select this option in order to enter hexadecimal characters as a WEP key. The preceding "0x", that identifies a hexadecimal key, is entered automatically. The WEP keys are used to encrypt data. Both the NBG-417N and the wireless stations must use the same WEP key for data transmission. Key 1 to Key 4 If you chose 64-bit WEP, then enter any 5 ASCII characters or 10 hexadecimal characters ("0-9", "A-F"). If you chose 128-bit WEP, then enter 13 ASCII characters or 26 hexadecimal characters ("0-9", "A-F"). You must configure at least one key, only one key can be activated at any one time. The default key is key 1. Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG-417N. Click Reset to reload the previous configuration for this screen. Apply Reset 7.4.3 WPA-PSK/WPA2-PSK Click Network > Wireless LAN to display the General screen. Select WPA-PSK or WPA2-PSK from the Security Mode list. Figure 41 Network > Wireless LAN > General: WPA-PSK/WPA2-PSK NBG-417N Users Guide 79 Chapter 7Wireless LAN The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 26 Network > Wireless LAN > General: WPA-PSK/WPA2-PSK LABEL WPA Compatible DESCRIPTION This check box is available only when you select WPA2-PSK in the Security Mode field. Select the check box to have both WPA2 and WPA wireless clients be able to communicate with the NBG-417N even when the NBG-417N is using WPA2-PSK. WPA-PSK/WPA2-PSK uses a simple common password for authentication. Type a pre-shared key from 8 to 63 case-sensitive ASCII characters
(including spaces and symbols). Type a pre-shared key less than 64 case-sensitive HEX characters ("0-
9", "A-F"). The Group Key Update Timer is the rate at which the AP (if using WPA-PSK/WPA2-PSK key management) or RADIUS server (if using WPA/WPA2 key management) sends a new group key out to all clients. The re-keying process is the WPA/WPA2 equivalent of automatically changing the WEP key for an AP and all stations in a WLAN on a periodic basis. Setting of the Group Key Update Timer is also supported in WPA-PSK/WPA2-PSK mode. The default is 1800 seconds (30 minutes). Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG-417N. Click Reset to reload the previous configuration for this screen. Pre-Shared Key Group Key Update Timer Apply Reset 7.5 MAC Filter The MAC filter screen allows you to configure the NBG-417N to give exclusive access to up to 16 devices (Allow) or exclude up to 16 devices from accessing the NBG-417N (Deny). Every Ethernet device has a unique MAC (Media Access Control) address. The MAC address is assigned at the factory and consists of six pairs of hexadecimal characters, for example, 00:A0:C5:00:00:02. You need to know the MAC address of the devices to configure this screen. 80 NBG-417N Users Guide Chapter 7Wireless LAN To change your NBG-417Ns MAC filter settings, click Network > Wireless LAN >
MAC Filter. The screen appears as shown. Figure 42 Network > Wireless LAN > MAC Filter The following table describes the labels in this menu. Table 27 Network > Wireless LAN > MAC Filter LABEL Active Filter Action Define the filter action for the list of MAC addresses in the MAC Address DESCRIPTION Select Yes from the drop down list box to enable MAC address filtering. table. Select Deny to block access to the NBG-417N, MAC addresses not listed will be allowed to access the NBG-417N Select Allow to permit access to the NBG-417N, MAC addresses not listed will be denied access to the NBG-417N. This is the index number of the MAC address. Enter the MAC addresses of the wireless station that are allowed or denied access to the NBG-417N in these address fields. Enter the MAC addresses in a valid MAC address format, that is, six hexadecimal character pairs, for example, 12:34:56:78:9a:bc. Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG-417N. Click Reset to reload the previous configuration for this screen. Set MAC Address Apply Reset NBG-417N Users Guide 81 Chapter 7Wireless LAN 7.6 Wireless LAN Advanced Screen Click Network > Wireless LAN > Advanced. The screen appears as shown. Figure 43 Network > Wireless LAN > Advanced The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 28 Network > Wireless LAN > Advanced LABEL Wireless Advanced Setup RTS/CTS Threshold DESCRIPTION Data with its frame size larger than this value will perform the RTS
(Request To Send)/CTS (Clear To Send) handshake. Fragmentatio n Threshold Enter a value between 0 and 2432. The threshold (number of bytes) for the fragmentation boundary for directed messages. It is the maximum data fragment size that can be sent. Enter an even number between 256 and 2346. Beacon Interval DTIM This field is not available when Super Mode is selected. When a wirelessly networked device sends a beacon, it includes with it a beacon interval. This specifies the time period before the device sends the beacon again. The interval tells receiving devices on the network how long they can wait in low-power mode before waking up to handle the beacon. This value can be set from 20ms to 1000ms. A high value helps save current consumption of the access point. Delivery Traffic Indication Message (DTIM) is the time period after which broadcast and multicast packets are transmitted to mobile clients in the Active Power Management mode. A high DTIM value can cause clients to lose connectivity with the network. This value can be set from 1 to 100. PreambleA preamble affects the timing in your wireless network. There are two preamble modes: long and short. If a device uses a different preamble mode than the NBG-417N does, it cannot communicate with the NBG-
417N. 82 NBG-417N Users Guide Chapter 7Wireless LAN Table 28 Network > Wireless LAN > Advanced LABEL CTS Protection DESCRIPTION When set to None, the NBG-417N protects wireless communication against interference. When set to Always, the NBG-417N improves performance within mixed wireless modes. Select Auto to let the NBG-417N determine whether to turn this feature on or off in the current environment. Tx PowerThis field controls the transmission power of the NBG-417N. When using the NBG-417N with a notebook computer, select a lower transmission power level when you are close to the AP in order to conserve battery power. A Basic Service Set (BSS) exists when all communications between wireless clients or between a wireless client and a wired network client go through one access point (AP). Intra-BSS traffic is traffic between wireless clients in the BSS. When Intra-
BSS is enabled, wireless client A and B can access the wired network and communicate with each other. When Intra-BSS is disabled, wireless client A and B can still access the wired network but cannot communicate with each other. Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG-417N. Click Reset to reload the previous configuration for this screen. Enable Intra-
BSS Traffic Apply Reset 7.7 Quality of Service (QoS) Screen The QoS screen allows you to automatically give a service (such as e-mail, VoIP or FTP) a priority level. NBG-417N Users Guide 83 Chapter 7Wireless LAN Click Network > Wireless LAN > QoS. The following screen appears. Figure 44 Network > Wireless LAN > QoS The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 29 Network > Wireless LAN > QoS LABEL WMM QoS PolicySelect DESCRIPTION Default to have the NBG-417N automatically give a service a priority level according to the ToS value in the IP header of packets it sends. WMM QoS (Wifi MultiMedia Quality of Service) gives high priority to voice and video, which makes them run more smoothly. Select Application Priority from the drop-down list box to display a table of application names, services, ports and priorities to which you want to apply WMM QoS. The table appears only if you select Application Priority in WMM QoS Policy.
#This is the number of an individual application entry. NameThis field displays a description given to an application entry. ServiceThis field displays either FTP, WWW, E-mail or a User Defined service to which you want to apply WMM QoS. Dest PortThis field displays the destination port number to which the application sends traffic. 84 NBG-417N Users Guide Chapter 7Wireless LAN Table 29 Network > Wireless LAN > QoS (continued) LABEL PriorityThis field displays the priority of the application. DESCRIPTION Highest - Typically used for voice or video that should be high-
quality. High - Typically used for voice or video that can be medium-quality. Mid - Typically used for applications that do not fit into another priority. For example, Internet surfing. Low - Typically used for non-critical background applications, such as large file transfers and print jobs that should not affect other applications. Click the Edit icon to open the Application Priority Configuration screen. Modify an existing application entry or create a application entry in the Application Priority Configuration screen. Click the Remove icon to delete an application entry. Click Apply to save your changes to the NBG-417N. Modify Apply 7.7.1 Application Priority Configuration Use this screen to edit a WMM QoS application entry. Click the edit icon under Modify. The following screen displays. Figure 45 Network > Wireless LAN > QoS: Application Priority Configuration See Appendix F on page 257 for a list of commonly-used services and destination ports. The following table describes the fields in this screen. Network > Wireless LAN > QoS: Application Priority Configuration LABEL NameType a description of the application priority. DESCRIPTION NBG-417N Users Guide 85 Chapter 7Wireless LAN Network > Wireless LAN > QoS: Application Priority Configuration (continued) LABEL ServiceThe following is a description of the applications you can prioritize DESCRIPTION with WMM QoS. Select a service from the drop-down list box. E-Mail Electronic mail consists of messages sent through a computer network to specific groups or individuals. Here are some default ports for e-mail:
POP3 - port 110 IMAP - port 143 SMTP - port 25 HTTP - port 80 FTP File Transfer Protocol enables fast transfer of files, including large files that it may not be possible to send via e-mail. FTP uses port number 21. WWW The World Wide Web is an Internet system to distribute graphical, hyper-linked information, based on Hyper Text Transfer Protocol
(HTTP) - a client/server protocol for the World Wide Web. The Web is not synonymous with the Internet; rather, it is just one service on the Internet. Other services on the Internet include Internet Relay Chat and Newsgroups. The Web is accessed through use of a browser. User-Defined User-defined services are user specific services configured using known ports and applications. Dest PortThis displays the port the selected service uses. Type a port number in the field provided if you want to use a different port to the default port. PrioritySelect a priority from the drop-down list box. Apply Cancel Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG-417N. Click Cancel to return to the previous screen. 86 NBG-417N Users Guide Chapter 7Wireless LAN 7.8 WPS Screen Use this screen to enable/disable WPS, view or generate a new PIN number and check current WPS status. To open this screen, click Network > Wireless LAN >
WPS tab. Figure 46 WPS The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 30 WPS LABEL WPS Setup Enable WPS PIN Number WPS Status Status Release Configuration Apply Refresh DESCRIPTION Select this to enable the WPS feature. This displays a PIN number last time system generated. Click Generate to generate a new PIN number. This displays Configured when the NBG-417N has connected to a wireless network using WPS or when Enable WPS is selected and wireless or wireless security settings have been changed. The current wireless and wireless security settings also appear in the screen. This displays Unconfigured if WPS is disabled and there are no wireless or wireless security changes on the NBG-417N or you click Release_Configuration to remove the configured wireless and wireless security settings. This button is only available when the WPS status displays Configured. Click this button to remove all configured wireless and wireless security settings for WPS connections on the NBG-417N. Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG-417N. Click Refresh to get this screen information afresh. NBG-417N Users Guide 87 Chapter 7Wireless LAN 7.9 WPS Station Screen Use this screen when you want to add a wireless station using WPS. To open this screen, click Network > Wireless LAN > WPS Station tab. Note: Note: After you click Push Button on this screen, you have to press a similar button in the wireless station utility within 2 minutes. To add the second wireless station, you have to press these buttons on both device and the wireless station again after the first 2 minutes. Figure 47 WPS Station The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 31 WPS Station LABEL Push Button DESCRIPTION Use this button when you use the PBC (Push Button Configuration) method to configure wireless stationss wireless settings. See Section 6.2.1 on page 62. Or input stations PIN number Click this to start WPS-aware wireless station scanning and the wireless security information synchronization. Use this button when you use the PIN Configuration method to configure wireless stations wireless settings. See Section 6.2.2 on page 63. Type the same PIN number generated in the wireless stations utility. Then click Start to associate to each other and perform the wireless security information synchronization. 7.10 Scheduling Screen Use this screen to set the times your wireless LAN is turned on and off. Wireless LAN scheduling is disabled by default. The wireless LAN can be scheduled to turn 88 NBG-417N Users Guide Chapter 7Wireless LAN on or off on certain days and at certain times. To open this screen, click Network
> Wireless LAN > Scheduling tab. Figure 48 Scheduling The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 32 Scheduling LABEL Enable Wireless LAN Scheduling Action Day Except for the following times
(24-Hour Format) DESCRIPTION Select this to enable Wireless LAN scheduling. Select On or Off to specify whether the Wireless LAN is turned on or off. This field works in conjunction with the Day and Except for the following times fields. Select Everyday or the specific days to turn the Wireless LAN on or off. If you select Everyday you can not select any specific days. This field works in conjunction with the Except for the following times field. Select a begin time using the first set of hour and minute (min) drop down boxes and select an end time using the second set of hour and minute (min) drop down boxes. If you have chosen On earlier for the WLAN Status the Wireless LAN will turn off between the two times you enter in these fields. If you have chosen Off earlier for the WLAN Status the Wireless LAN will turn on between the two times you enter in these fields. Note: Entering the same begin time and end time will mean the whole day. Apply Reset Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG-417N. Click Reset to reload the previous configuration for this screen. NBG-417N Users Guide 89 Chapter 7Wireless LAN 90 NBG-417N Users Guide CHAPTER 8 WAN 8.1 Overview This chapter discusses the NBG-417Ns WAN screens. Use these screens to configure your NBG-417N for Internet access. A WAN (Wide Area Network) connection is an outside connection to another network or the Internet. It connects your private networks (such as a LAN (Local Area Network) and other networks, so that a computer in one location can communicate with computers in other locations. Figure 49 LAN and WAN LAN WAN See the chapter about the connection wizard for more information on the fields in the WAN screens. 8.2 What You Can Do In the WAN Screens Use the Internet Connection (Section 8.4 on page 95) screen to enter your ISP information and set how the computer acquires its IP, DNS and WAN MAC addresses. Use the Advanced (Section 8.5 on page 101) screen to enable multicasting, configure Windows networking and bridge. NBG-417N Users Guide 91 Chapter 8WAN 8.3 What You Need To Know About WAN The information in this section can help you configure the screens for your WAN connection, as well as enable/disable some advanced features of your NBG-417N. 8.3.1 Configuring Your Internet Connection Encapsulation Method Encapsulation is used to include data from an upper layer protocol into a lower layer protocol. To set up a WAN connection to the Internet, you need to use the same encapsulation method used by your ISP (Internet Service Provider). If your ISP offers a dial-up Internet connection using PPPoE (PPP over Ethernet) or PPTP
(Point-to-Point Tunneling Protocol), they should also provide a username and password (and service name) for user authentication. WAN IP Address The WAN IP address is an IP address for the NBG-417N, which makes it accessible from an outside network. It is used by the NBG-417N to communicate with other devices in other networks. It can be static (fixed) or dynamically assigned by the ISP each time the NBG-417N tries to access the Internet. If your ISP assigns you a static WAN IP address, they should also assign you the subnet mask and DNS server IP address(es) (and a gateway IP address if you use the Ethernet or ENET ENCAP encapsulation method). DNS Server Address Assignment Use Domain Name System (DNS) to map a domain name to its corresponding IP address and vice versa, for instance, the IP address of www.zyxel.com is 204.217.0.2. The DNS server is extremely important because without it, you must know the IP address of a computer before you can access it. The NBG-417N can get the DNS server addresses in the following ways. 1 2 The ISP tells you the DNS server addresses, usually in the form of an information sheet, when you sign up. If your ISP gives you DNS server addresses, manually enter them in the DNS server fields. If your ISP dynamically assigns the DNS server IP addresses (along with the NBG-
417Ns WAN IP address), set the DNS server fields to get the DNS server address from the ISP. 92 NBG-417N Users Guide Chapter 8WAN WAN MAC Address The MAC address screen allows users to configure the WAN port's MAC address by either using the factory default or cloning the MAC address from a computer on your LAN. Choose Factory Default to select the factory assigned default MAC Address. Otherwise, click Clone the computer's MAC address - IP Address and enter the IP address of the computer on the LAN whose MAC you are cloning. Once it is successfully configured, the address will be copied to configuration file. It is recommended that you clone the MAC address prior to hooking up the WAN Port. 8.3.2 Multicast Traditionally, IP packets are transmitted in one of either two ways - Unicast (1 sender - 1 recipient) or Broadcast (1 sender - everybody on the network). Multicast delivers IP packets to a group of hosts on the network - not everybody and not just 1. Figure 50 Multicast Example A B C D NBG-417N Server In the multicast example above, systems A and D comprise one multicast group. In multicasting, the server only needs to send one data stream and this is delivered to systems A and D. IGMP (Internet Group Multicast Protocol) is a network-layer protocol used to establish membership in a multicast group - it is not used to carry user data. The NBG-417N supports both IGMP version 1 (IGMP-v1) and IGMP version 2 (IGMP-
v2). At start up, the NBG-417N queries all directly connected networks to gather group membership. After that, the NBG-417N periodically updates this information. IP multicasting can be enabled/disabled on the NBG-417N LAN and/or WAN interfaces in the Web Configurator (LAN; WAN). Select None to disable IP multicasting on these interfaces. NBG-417N Users Guide 93 Chapter 8WAN 8.3.3 NetBIOS over TCP/IP NetBIOS (Network Basic Input/Output System) are TCP or UDP broadcast packets that enable a computer to connect to and communicate with a LAN. For some dial-
up services such as PPPoE or PPTP, NetBIOS packets cause unwanted calls. However it may sometimes be necessary to allow NetBIOS packets to pass through to the WAN in order to find a computer on the WAN. 8.3.4 Auto-Bridge In the rear panel of your NBG-417N, you can see four LAN ports (1 to 4) and one WAN port. The WAN port is for your Internet access connection, and the LAN ports are for your network devices. The WAN port has a different IP address from the LAN ports. When you enable auto-bridging in your NBG-417N, all five ports (4 LAN ports and the WAN port) share the same IP address as shown in the figure below. Figure 51 Autobridging Example IP Address: 192.168.1.20 This might happen if you put the NBG-417N behind a NAT router that assigns it this IP address. When the NBG-417N is in auto-bridge mode, the NBG-417N acts as an AP and all the interfaces (LAN, WAN and WLAN) are bridged. In this mode, your NAT, DHCP server, firewall and bandwidth management (rules) on the NBG-
417N are not available. You do not have to reconfigure them if you return to router mode. Auto-bridging only works under the following conditions:
The WAN IP must be 192.168.x.y (where x and y must be from zero to nine). If the LAN IP address and the WAN IP address are in the same subnet but x or y is greater than nine, the device operates in router mode (with firewall and bandwidth management available). The device must be in Router Mode (see Chapter 22 on page 189 for more information) for auto-bridging to become active. 94 NBG-417N Users Guide Chapter 8WAN 8.4 Internet Connection Use this screen to change your NBG-417Ns Internet access settings. Click Network > WAN. The screen differs according to the encapsulation you choose. 8.4.1 Ethernet Encapsulation This screen displays when you select Ethernet encapsulation. Figure 52 Network > WAN > Internet Connection: Ethernet Encapsulation The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 33 Network > WAN > Internet Connection: Ethernet Encapsulation LABEL Connection Type You must choose the Ethernet option when the WAN port is used as a DESCRIPTION regular Ethernet. WAN IP Address Assignment Get automatically from ISP Use Fixed IP Address Select this option If your ISP did not assign you a fixed IP address. This is the default selection. Select this option If the ISP assigned a fixed IP address. NBG-417N Users Guide 95 Chapter 8WAN Table 33 Network > WAN > Internet Connection: Ethernet Encapsulation LABEL DESCRIPTION Enter your WAN IP address in this field if you selected Use Fixed IP Address. Enter the IP Subnet Mask in this field. IP Address IP Subnet Mask Gateway IP Address DNS Servers First DNS Server Second DNS Server WAN MAC Address Factory default Clone the computers MAC address - IP Address Set WAN MAC Address Apply Reset Enter a Gateway IP Address (if your ISP gave you one) in this field. Select From ISP if your ISP dynamically assigns DNS server information (and the NBG-417N's WAN IP address). The field to the right displays the (read-only) DNS server IP address that the ISP assigns. Select User-Defined if you have the IP address of a DNS server. Enter the DNS server's IP address in the field to the right. If you chose User-
Defined, but leave the IP address set to 0.0.0.0, User-Defined changes to None after you click Apply. If you set a second choice to User-Defined, and enter the same IP address, the second User-
Defined changes to None after you click Apply. Select None if you do not want to configure DNS servers. If you do not configure a DNS server, you must know the IP address of a computer in order to access it. The MAC address section allows users to configure the WAN port's MAC address by either using the NBG-417Ns MAC address, copying the MAC address from a computer on your LAN or manually entering a MAC address. Select Factory default to use the factory assigned default MAC Address. Select Clone the computer's MAC address - IP Address and enter the IP address of the computer on the LAN whose MAC you are cloning. Once it is successfully configured, the address will be copied to the rom file (ZyNOS configuration file). It will not change unless you change the setting or upload a different ROM file. Select this option and enter the MAC address you want to use. Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG-417N. Click Reset to begin configuring this screen afresh. 8.4.2 PPPoE Encapsulation The NBG-417N supports PPPoE (Point-to-Point Protocol over Ethernet). PPPoE is an IETF standard (RFC 2516) specifying how a personal computer (PC) interacts with a broadband modem (DSL, cable, wireless, etc.) connection. The PPP over Ethernet option is for a dial-up connection using PPPoE. For the service provider, PPPoE offers an access and authentication method that works with existing access control systems (for example Radius). 96 NBG-417N Users Guide Chapter 8WAN One of the benefits of PPPoE is the ability to let you access one of multiple network services, a function known as dynamic service selection. This enables the service provider to easily create and offer new IP services for individuals. Operationally, PPPoE saves significant effort for both you and the ISP or carrier, as it requires no specific configuration of the broadband modem at the customer site. By implementing PPPoE directly on the NBG-417N (rather than individual computers), the computers on the LAN do not need PPPoE software installed, since the NBG-417N does that part of the task. Furthermore, with NAT, all of the LANs computers will have access. This screen displays when you select PPPoE encapsulation. Figure 53 Network > WAN > Internet Connection: PPPoE Encapsulation The following table describes the labels in this screen. DESCRIPTION Table 34 Network > WAN > Internet Connection: PPPoE Encapsulation LABEL ISP Parameters for Internet Access Connection Type Service Name Select PPP over Ethernet if you connect to your Internet via dial-up. Type the PPPoE service name provided to you. PPPoE uses a service name to identify and reach the PPPoE server. Type the user name given to you by your ISP. User Name NBG-417N Users Guide 97 Chapter 8WAN Table 34 Network > WAN > Internet Connection: PPPoE Encapsulation LABEL Password Retype to Confirm Nailed-Up Connection Idle Timeout DESCRIPTION Type the password associated with the user name above. Type your password again to make sure that you have entered is correctly. Select Nailed-Up Connection if you do not want the connection to time out. This value specifies the time in minutes that elapses before the router automatically disconnects from the PPPoE server. DNS Servers First DNS Server Second DNS Server WAN MAC Address Select From ISP if your ISP dynamically assigns DNS server information
(and the NBG-417N's WAN IP address). The field to the right displays the
(read-only) DNS server IP address that the ISP assigns. Select User-Defined if you have the IP address of a DNS server. Enter the DNS server's IP address in the field to the right. If you chose User-
Defined, but leave the IP address set to 0.0.0.0, User-Defined changes to None after you click Apply. If you set a second choice to User-Defined, and enter the same IP address, the second User-
Defined changes to None after you click Apply. Select None if you do not want to configure DNS servers. If you do not configure a DNS server, you must know the IP address of a computer in order to access it. The MAC address section allows users to configure the WAN port's MAC address by using the NBG-417Ns MAC address, copying the MAC address from a computer on your LAN or manually entering a MAC address. Factory default Select Factory default to use the factory assigned default MAC Clone the computers MAC address -
IP Address Set WAN MAC Address Apply Reset Address. Select Clone the computer's MAC address - IP Address and enter the IP address of the computer on the LAN whose MAC you are cloning. Once it is successfully configured, the address will be copied to the rom file (ZyNOS configuration file). It will not change unless you change the setting or upload a different ROM file. Select this option and enter the MAC address you want to use. Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG-417N. Click Reset to begin configuring this screen afresh. 8.4.3 PPTP Encapsulation Point-to-Point Tunneling Protocol (PPTP) is a network protocol that enables secure transfer of data from a remote client to a private server, creating a Virtual Private Network (VPN) using TCP/IP-based networks. PPTP supports on-demand, multi-protocol and virtual private networking over public networks, such as the Internet. 98 NBG-417N Users Guide This screen displays when you select PPTP encapsulation. Figure 54 Network > WAN > Internet Connection: PPTP Encapsulation Chapter 8WAN The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 35 Network > WAN > Internet Connection: PPTP Encapsulation LABEL ISP Parameters for Internet Access Connection Type DESCRIPTION Point-to-Point Tunneling Protocol (PPTP) is a network protocol that enables secure transfer of data from a remote client to a private server, creating a Virtual Private Network (VPN) using TCP/IP-based networks. PPTP supports on-demand, multi-protocol, and virtual private networking over public networks, such as the Internet. The NBG-417N supports only one PPTP server connection at any given time. To configure a PPTP client, you must configure the User Name and Password fields for a PPP connection and the PPTP parameters for a PPTP connection. Type the user name given to you by your ISP. User Name NBG-417N Users Guide 99 Chapter 8WAN Table 35 Network > WAN > Internet Connection: PPTP Encapsulation LABEL Password Retype to Confirm Type your password again to make sure that you have entered is DESCRIPTION Type the password associated with the User Name above. Nailed-up Connection Idle Timeout PPTP Configuration Server IP Address/
Domain Connection ID/
Name Get automatically from ISP Use Fixed IP Address My WAN IP Address My IP Subnet Mask correctly. Select Nailed-Up Connection if you do not want the connection to time out. This value specifies the time in minutes that elapses before the NBG-417N automatically disconnects from the PPTP server. Type the IP address of the PPTP server. Type your identification name for the PPTP server. Select this option If your ISP did not assign you a fixed IP address. This is the default selection. Select this option If the ISP assigned a fixed IP address. Enter your WAN IP address in this field if you selected Use Fixed IP Address. Your NBG-417N will automatically calculate the subnet mask based on the IP address that you assign. Unless you are implementing subnetting, use the subnet mask computed by the NBG-417N. WAN IP Address Assignment Get automatically from ISP DNS Servers First DNS Server Select this to get your WAN IP address from your ISP. Second DNS Server WAN MAC Address Factory default Select From ISP if your ISP dynamically assigns DNS server information (and the NBG-417N's WAN IP address). The field to the right displays the (read-only) DNS server IP address that the ISP assigns. Select User-Defined if you have the IP address of a DNS server. Enter the DNS server's IP address in the field to the right. If you chose User-Defined, but leave the IP address set to 0.0.0.0, User-
Defined changes to None after you click Apply. If you set a second choice to User-Defined, and enter the same IP address, the second User-Defined changes to None after you click Apply. Select None if you do not want to configure DNS servers. If you do not configure a DNS server, you must know the IP address of a computer in order to access it. The MAC address section allows users to configure the WAN port's MAC address by either using the NBG-417Ns MAC address, copying the MAC address from a computer on your LAN or manually entering a MAC address. Select Factory default to use the factory assigned default MAC Address. 100 NBG-417N Users Guide Chapter 8WAN Table 35 Network > WAN > Internet Connection: PPTP Encapsulation LABEL Clone the computers MAC address - IP Address DESCRIPTION Select Clone the computer's MAC address - IP Address and enter the IP address of the computer on the LAN whose MAC you are cloning. Once it is successfully configured, the address will be copied to the rom file (ZyNOS configuration file). It will not change unless you change the setting or upload a different ROM file. Select this option and enter the MAC address you want to use. Set WAN MAC Address Apply Reset Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG-417N. Click Reset to begin configuring this screen afresh. 8.5 Advanced WAN Screen Use this screen to enable Multicast, allow Windows Networking and enable Auto-bridge. Note: The three categories shown in this screen are independent of each other. To change your NBG-417Ns advanced WAN settings, click Network > WAN >
Advanced. The screen appears as shown. Figure 55 Network > WAN > Advanced NBG-417N Users Guide 101 Chapter 8WAN The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 36 WAN > Advanced LABEL Multicast Setup Multicast DESCRIPTION Check this to enable multicasting. This applies to traffic routed from the WAN to the LAN. Leaving this blank may cause incoming traffic to be dropped or sent to all connected network devices. Windows Networking (NetBIOS over TCP/IP) Allow between LAN and WAN Select this check box to forward NetBIOS packets from the LAN to the WAN and from the WAN to the LAN. If your firewall is enabled with the default policy set to block WAN to LAN traffic, you also need to enable the default WAN to LAN firewall rule that forwards NetBIOS traffic. Allow Trigger Dial Auto-bridge Enable Auto-bridge mode Clear this check box to block all NetBIOS packets going from the LAN to the WAN and from the WAN to the LAN. Select this option to allow NetBIOS packets to initiate calls. Select this option to have the NBG-417N switch to bridge mode automatically when the NBG-417N gets a WAN IP address in the range of 192.168.x.y (where x and y are from zero to nine) no matter what the LAN IP address is. ApplyClick Reset Apply to save your changes back to the NBG-417N. Click Reset to begin configuring this screen afresh. 102 NBG-417N Users Guide CHAPTER 9 LAN 9.1 Overview This chapter describes how to configure LAN settings. A Local Area Network (LAN) is a shared communication system to which many computers are attached. A LAN is a computer network limited to the immediate area, usually the same building or floor of a building. The LAN screens can help you configure a LAN DHCP server, manage IP addresses, and partition your physical network into logical networks. LAN DSL NBG-417N The LAN screens can help you configure a LAN DHCP server and manage IP addresses. 9.2 What You Can Do in the LAN Screen Use the IP (Section 9.4 on page 105) screen to change your basic LAN settings. NBG-417N Users Guide 103 Chapter 9LAN 9.3 What You Need To Know About LAN The actual physical connection determines whether the NBG-417N ports are LAN or WAN ports. There are two separate IP networks, one inside the LAN network and the other outside the WAN network as shown next. Figure 56 LAN and WAN IP Addresses LAN WAN The LAN parameters of the NBG-417N are preset in the factory with the following values:
IP address of 192.168.1.1 with subnet mask of 255.255.255.0 (24 bits) DHCP server enabled with 32 client IP addresses starting from 192.168.1.33. These parameters should work for the majority of installations. If your ISP gives you explicit DNS server address(es), read the embedded Web Configurator help regarding what fields need to be configured. 9.3.1 IP Pool Setup The NBG-417N is pre-configured with a pool of 32 IP addresses starting from 192.168.1.33 to 192.168.1.64. This configuration leaves 31 IP addresses
(excluding the NBG-417N itself) in the lower range (192.168.1.2 to 192.168.1.32) for other server computers, for instance, servers for mail, FTP, TFTP, web, etc., that you may have. Refer to Section 4.4.6 on page 48 for information on IP Address and Subnet Mask. 9.3.2 LAN TCP/IP The NBG-417N has built-in DHCP server capability that assigns IP addresses and DNS servers to systems that support DHCP client capability. Refer to the Section 4.4.7 on page 49 section for information on System DNS Servers. 104 NBG-417N Users Guide Chapter 9LAN 9.4 LAN IP Screen Use this screen to change your basic LAN settings. Click Network > LAN. Figure 57 Network > LAN > IP The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 37 Network > LAN > IP LABEL IP Address DESCRIPTION Type the IP address of your NBG-417N in dotted decimal notation 192.168.1.1 (factory default). The subnet mask specifies the network number portion of an IP address. Your NBG-417N will automatically calculate the subnet mask based on the IP address that you assign. Unless you are implementing subnetting, use the subnet mask computed by the NBG-417N. Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG-417N. Click Reset to begin configuring this screen afresh. IP Subnet Mask Apply Reset NBG-417N Users Guide 105 Chapter 9LAN 106 NBG-417N Users Guide CHAPTER 10 DHCP Server 10.1 Overview DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol, RFC 2131 and RFC 2132) allows individual clients to obtain TCP/IP configuration at start-up from a server. You can configure the NBG-417Ns LAN as a DHCP server or disable it. When configured as a server, the NBG-417N provides the TCP/IP configuration for the clients. If DHCP service is disabled, you must have another DHCP server on your LAN, or else the computer must be manually configured. 10.2 What You Can Do in the DHCP Server Screens Use the General (Section 10.4 on page 108) screen to enable the DHCP server. Use the Advanced (Section 10.5 on page 108) screen to assign IP addresses on the LAN to specific individual computers based on their MAC Addresses. Use the Client List (Section 10.6 on page 110) screen to view the current DHCP client information. 10.3 What You Need To Know About the DHCP Server Screens Every Ethernet device has a unique MAC (Media Access Control) address. The MAC address is assigned at the factory and consists of six pairs of hexadecimal characters, for example, 00:A0:C5:00:00:02. Find out the MAC addresses of your network devices if you intend to add them to the DHCP Client List screen. Refer to Section 4.4.6 on page 48 for information on IP Address and Subnet Mask. Refer to the Section 4.4.7 on page 49 section for information on System DNS Servers. NBG-417N Users Guide 107 Chapter 10DHCP Server 10.4 General Screen Use this screen to enable the DHCP server. Click Network > DHCP Server. The following screen displays. Figure 58 Network > DHCP Server > General The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 38 Network > DHCP Server > General LABEL Enable DHCP Server DESCRIPTION Enable or Disable DHCP for LAN. DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol, RFC 2131 and RFC 2132) allows individual clients (computers) to obtain TCP/IP configuration at startup from a server. Leave the Enable DHCP Server check box selected unless your ISP instructs you to do otherwise. Clear it to disable the NBG-417N acting as a DHCP server. When configured as a server, the NBG-417N provides TCP/IP configuration for the clients. If not, DHCP service is disabled and you must have another DHCP server on your LAN, or else the computers must be manually configured. When set as a server, fill in the following four fields. This field specifies the first of the contiguous addresses in the IP address pool for LAN. This field specifies the size, or count of the IP address pool for LAN. Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG-417N. Click Reset to begin configuring this screen afresh. IP Pool Starting Address Pool Size Apply Reset 10.5 Advanced Screen This screen allows you to assign IP addresses on the LAN to specific individual computers based on their MAC addresses. You can also use this screen to configure the DNS server information that the NBG-417N sends to the DHCP clients. 108 NBG-417N Users Guide Chapter 10DHCP Server To change your NBG-417Ns static DHCP settings, click Network > DHCP Server
> Advanced. The following screen displays. Figure 59 Network > DHCP Server > Advanced The following table describes the labels in this screen. DESCRIPTION Table 39 Network > DHCP Server > Advanced LABEL Static DHCP Table
#This is the index number of the static IP table entry (row). MAC Address IP Address DNS Server DNS Servers Assigned by DHCP Server Type the MAC address (with colons) of a computer on your LAN. Type the LAN IP address of a computer on your LAN. The NBG-417N passes a DNS (Domain Name System) server IP address (in the order you specify here) to the DHCP clients. The NBG-
417N only passes this information to the LAN DHCP clients when you select the Enable DHCP Server check box. When you clear the Enable DHCP Server check box, DHCP service is disabled and you must have another DHCP sever on your LAN, or else the computers must have their DNS server addresses manually configured. NBG-417N Users Guide 109 Chapter 10DHCP Server Table 39 Network > DHCP Server > Advanced LABEL First DNS Server DESCRIPTION Select From ISP if your ISP dynamically assigns DNS server information (and the NBG-417N's WAN IP address). The field to the right displays the (read-only) DNS server IP address that the ISP assigns. Second DNS Server Apply Reset Select User-Defined if you have the IP address of a DNS server. Enter the DNS server's IP address in the field to the right. If you chose User-Defined, but leave the IP address set to 0.0.0.0, User-Defined changes to None after you click Apply. If you set a second choice to User-Defined, and enter the same IP address, the second User-
Defined changes to None after you click Apply. Select DNS Relay to have the NBG-417N act as a DNS proxy. The NBG-417N's LAN IP address displays in the field to the right (read-
only). The NBG-417N tells the DHCP clients on the LAN that the NBG-
417N itself is the DNS server. When a computer on the LAN sends a DNS query to the NBG-417N, the NBG-417N forwards the query to the NBG-417N's system DNS server (configured in the WAN > Internet Connection screen) and relays the response back to the computer. You can only select DNS Relay for one of the three servers; if you select DNS Relay for a second or third DNS server, that choice changes to None after you click Apply. Select None if you do not want to configure DNS servers. If you do not configure a DNS server, you must know the IP address of a computer in order to access it. Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG-417N. Click Reset to begin configuring this screen afresh. 10.6 Client List Screen The DHCP table shows current DHCP client information (including IP Address, Host Name and MAC Address) of network clients using the NBG-417Ns DHCP servers. Configure this screen to always assign an IP address to a MAC address (and host name). Click Network > DHCP Server > Client List. Note: You can also view a read-only client list by clicking the DHCP Table (Details...) hyperlink in the Status screen. 110 NBG-417N Users Guide The following screen displays. Figure 60 Network > DHCP Server > Client List Chapter 10DHCP Server The following table describes the labels in this screen. DESCRIPTION Table 40 Network > DHCP Server > Client List LABEL
# This is the index number of the host computer. IP AddressThis field displays the IP address relative to the # field listed above. Host Name This field displays the computer host name. MAC AddressThe MAC (Media Access Control) or Ethernet address on a LAN
(Local Area Network) is unique to your computer (six pairs of hexadecimal notation). A network interface card such as an Ethernet adapter has a hardwired address that is assigned at the factory. This address follows an industry standard that ensures no other adapter has a similar address. ReserveSelect this check box in the DHCP Setup section to have the NBG-
417N always assign the IP address(es) to the MAC address(es) (and host name(s)). After you click Apply, the MAC address and IP address also display in the Advanced screen (where you can edit them). ApplyClick RefreshClick Apply to save your settings. Refresh to reload the DHCP table. NBG-417N Users Guide 111 Chapter 10DHCP Server 112 NBG-417N Users Guide CHAPTER 11 Network Address Translation
(NAT) 11.1 Overview NAT (Network Address Translation - NAT, RFC 1631) is the translation of the IP address of a host in a packet. For example, the source address of an outgoing packet, used within one network is changed to a different IP address known within another network. The figure below is a simple illustration of a NAT network. You want to assign ports 21-25 to one FTP, Telnet and SMTP server (A in the example), port 80 to another
(B in the example) and assign a default server IP address of 192.168.1.35 to a third (C in the example). You assign the LAN IP addresses to the devices (A to D) connected to your NBG-
417N. The ISP assigns the WAN IP address. The NAT network appears as a single host on the Internet. All traffic coming from A to D going out to the Internet use the IP address of the NBG-417N, which is 192.168.1.1. Figure 61 NAT Example A: 192.168.1.33 FTP, Telnet, SNMP Ports 21 to 25 LAN WAN 192.168.1.1 B: 192.168.1.34 Port 80 C: 192.168.1.35 NBG-417N IP address assigned by ISP This chapter discusses how to configure NAT on the NBG-417N. NBG-417N Users Guide 113 Chapter 11Network Address Translation (NAT) Note: You must create a firewall rule in addition to setting up NAT, to allow traffic from the WAN to be forwarded through the NBG-417N. 11.2 What You Can Do in the NAT Screens Use the General (Section 11.4 on page 116) screen to enable NAT and set a default server. Use the Application (Section 11.5 on page 117) screen to change your NBG-
417Ns port forwarding settings. Use the Advanced (Section 11.9 on page 121) screen to change your NBG-
417Ns trigger port settings. 11.3 What You Need To Know About NAT Read on for basic information on NAT and for details that can help you understand and configure the NAT screens of your NBG-417N. Note the following definitions that are used in this section. Inside/outside This denotes where a host is located relative to the NBG-417N, for example, the computers of your subscribers are the inside hosts, while the web servers on the Internet are the outside hosts. Global/local This denotes the IP address of a host in a packet as the packet traverses a router, for example, the local address refers to the IP address of a host when the packet is in the local network, while the global address refers to the IP address of the host when the same packet is traveling in the WAN side. Note: Inside/outside refers to the location of a host, while global/local refers to the IP address of a host used in a packet. An inside local address (ILA) is the IP address of an inside host in a packet when the packet is still in the local network, while an inside global address (IGA) is the 114 NBG-417N Users Guide Chapter 11Network Address Translation (NAT) IP address of the same inside host when the packet is on the WAN side. The following table summarizes this information. Table 41 NAT Definitions ITEM Inside Outside Local Global DESCRIPTION This refers to the host on the LAN. This refers to the host on the WAN. This refers to the packet address (source or destination) as the packet travels on the LAN. This refers to the packet address (source or destination) as the packet travels on the WAN. Note: NAT never changes the IP address (either local or global) of an outside host. 11.3.1 What NAT Does In the simplest form, NAT changes the source IP address in a packet received from a subscriber (the inside local address) to another (the inside global address) before forwarding the packet to the WAN side. When the response comes back, NAT translates the destination address (the inside global address) back to the inside local address before forwarding it to the original inside host. Note that the IP address (either local or global) of an outside host is never changed. The global IP addresses for the inside hosts can be either static or dynamically assigned by the ISP. In addition, you can designate servers, for example, a web server and a telnet server, on your local network and make them accessible to the outside world. If you do not define any servers , NAT offers the additional benefit of firewall protection. With no servers defined, your NBG-417N filters out all incoming inquiries, thus preventing intruders from probing your network. For more information on IP address translation, refer to RFC 1631, The IP Network Address Translator (NAT). 11.3.2 How NAT Works Each packet has two addresses a source address and a destination address. For outgoing packets, the ILA (Inside Local Address) is the source address on the LAN, and the IGA (Inside Global Address) is the source address on the WAN. For incoming packets, the ILA is the destination address on the LAN, and the IGA is the destination address on the WAN. NAT maps private (local) IP addresses to globally unique ones required for communication with hosts on other networks. It replaces the original IP source address in each packet and then forwards it to the Internet. The NBG-417N keeps track of the original addresses and port numbers NBG-417N Users Guide 115 Chapter 11Network Address Translation (NAT) so incoming reply packets can have their original values restored. The following figure illustrates this. Figure 62 How NAT Works NBG-417N 11.4 General NAT Screen Use this screen to enable NAT and set a default server. Click Network > NAT to open the General screen. Figure 63 Network > NAT > General The following table describes the labels in this screen. DESCRIPTION Table 42 Network > NAT > General LABEL NAT Setup Enable Network Address Translation Network Address Translation (NAT) allows the translation of an Internet protocol address used within one network (for example a private IP address used in a local network) to a different IP address known within another network (for example a public IP address used on the Internet). Select the check box to enable NAT. 116 NBG-417N Users Guide Chapter 11Network Address Translation (NAT) Table 42 Network > NAT > General LABEL Default Server Setup DESCRIPTION Server IP Address In addition to the servers for specified services, NAT supports a default server. A default server receives packets from ports that are not specified in the Application screen. If you do not assign a Default Server IP address, the NBG-417N discards all packets received for ports that are not specified in the Application screen or remote management. Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG-417N. Click Reset to begin configuring this screen afresh. Apply Reset 11.5 NAT Application Screen Port forwarding allows you to define the local servers to which the incoming services will be forwarded. To change your NBG-417Ns port forwarding settings, click Network > NAT > Application. The screen appears as shown. Note: If you do not assign a Default Server IP address in the NAT > General screen, the NBG-417N discards all packets received for ports that are not specified in this screen or remote management. Refer to Appendix F on page 257 for port numbers commonly used for particular services. Figure 64 Network > NAT > Application NBG-417N Users Guide 117 Chapter 11Network Address Translation (NAT) The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 43 NAT Application LABEL Add Application Rule Active DESCRIPTION Select the check box to enable this rule and the requested service can be forwarded to the host with a specified internal IP address. Service Name Local Port Range Public Port Range Server IP Address Apply Reset Clear the checkbox to disallow forwarding of these ports to an inside server without having to delete the entry. Type a name (of up to 31 printable characters) to identify this rule in the first field next to Service Name. Otherwise, select a predefined service in the second field next to Service Name. The predefined service name and port number(s) will display in the Service Name and Port fields. Type a port number(s) to be forwarded. To specify a range of ports, enter a hyphen (-) between the first port and the last port, such as 10-20. To specify two or more non-consecutive port numbers, separate them by a comma without spaces, such as 123,567. Type the inside IP address of the server that receives packets from the port(s) specified in the Port field. Click Apply to save your changes to the Application Rules Summary table. Click Reset to not save and return your new changes in the Service Name and Port fields to the previous one. Application Rules Summary
Active Name Local Start/End Port This is the number of an individual port forwarding server entry. This icon is turned on when the rule is enabled. This field displays a name to identify this rule. This field displays the port number(s). Public Start/End Port Server IP Address Modify This field displays the inside IP address of the server. Click the Edit icon to display and modify an existing rule setting in the fields under Add Application Rule. Click the Remove icon to delete a rule. 118 NBG-417N Users Guide Chapter 11Network Address Translation (NAT) 11.6 NAT Advanced Screen To change your NBG-417Ns trigger port settings, click Network > NAT >
Advanced. The screen appears as shown. Note: Only one LAN computer can use a trigger port (range) at a time. Figure 65 Network > NAT > Advanced The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 44 Network > NAT > Advanced LABEL
Name DESCRIPTION This is the rule index number (read-only). Type a unique name (up to 15 characters) for identification purposes. All characters are permitted - including spaces. Incoming is a port (or a range of ports) that a server on the WAN uses when it sends out a particular service. The NBG-417N forwards the traffic with this port (or range of ports) to the client computer on the LAN that requested the service. Type a port number or the starting port number in a range of port numbers. Type a port number or the ending port number in a range of port numbers. The trigger port is a port (or a range of ports) that causes (or triggers) the NBG-417N to record the IP address of the LAN computer that sent the traffic to a server on the WAN. Type a port number or the starting port number in a range of port numbers. Type a port number or the ending port number in a range of port numbers. Incoming Start Port End Port Trigger Start Port End Port NBG-417N Users Guide 119 Chapter 11Network Address Translation (NAT) Table 44 Network > NAT > Advanced LABEL Apply Reset DESCRIPTION Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG-417N. Click Reset to begin configuring this screen afresh. 11.7 Technical Reference The following section contains additional technical information about the NBG-
417N features described in this chapter. 11.8 Using NATPort Forwarding: Services and Port Numbers A port forwarding set is a list of inside (behind NAT on the LAN) servers, for example, web or FTP, that you can make accessible to the outside world even though NAT makes your whole inside network appear as a single machine to the outside world. Use the Application screen to forward incoming service requests to the server(s) on your local network. You may enter a single port number or a range of port numbers to be forwarded, and the local IP address of the desired server. The port number identifies a service; for example, web service is on port 80 and FTP on port 21. In some cases, such as for unknown services or where one server can support more than one service (for example both FTP and web service), it might be better to specify a range of port numbers. In addition to the servers for specified services, NAT supports a default server. A service request that does not have a server explicitly designated for it is forwarded to the default server. If the default is not defined, the service request is simply discarded. Note: Many residential broadband ISP accounts do not allow you to run any server processes (such as a Web or FTP server) from your location. Your ISP may periodically check for servers and may suspend your account if it discovers any active services at your location. If you are unsure, refer to your ISP. 11.8.1 Configuring Servers Behind Port Forwarding Example Let's say you want to assign ports 21-25 to one FTP, Telnet and SMTP server (A in the example), port 80 to another (B in the example) and assign a default server IP 120 NBG-417N Users Guide Chapter 11Network Address Translation (NAT) address of 192.168.1.35 to a third (C in the example). You assign the LAN IP addresses and the ISP assigns the WAN IP address. The NAT network appears as a single host on the Internet. Figure 66 Multiple Servers Behind NAT Example NBG-417N 11.9 Trigger Port Forwarding Some services use a dedicated range of ports on the client side and a dedicated range of ports on the server side. With regular port forwarding you set a forwarding port in NAT to forward a service (coming in from the server on the WAN) to the IP address of a computer on the client side (LAN). The problem is that port forwarding only forwards a service to a single LAN IP address. In order to use the same service on a different LAN computer, you have to manually replace the LAN computer's IP address in the forwarding port with another LAN computer's IP address. Trigger port forwarding solves this problem by allowing computers on the LAN to dynamically take turns using the service. The NBG-417N records the IP address of a LAN computer that sends traffic to the WAN to request a service with a specific port number and protocol (a "trigger" port). When the NBG-417N's WAN port receives a response with a specific port number and protocol ("incoming" port), the NBG-417N forwards the traffic to the LAN IP address of the computer that sent the request. After that computers connection for that service closes, another computer on the LAN can use the service in the same manner. This way you do not need to configure a new IP address each time you want a different LAN computer to use the application. NBG-417N Users Guide 121 Chapter 11Network Address Translation (NAT) 11.9.1 Trigger Port Forwarding Example The following is an example of trigger port forwarding. Figure 67 Trigger Port Forwarding Process: Example NBG-417N 1 2 3 4 Jane requests a file from the Real Audio server (port 7070). Port 7070 is a trigger port and causes the NBG-417N to record Janes computer IP address. The NBG-417N associates Jane's computer IP address with the
"incoming" port range of 6970-7170. The Real Audio server responds using a port number ranging between 6970-7170. The NBG-417N forwards the traffic to Janes computer IP address. 5 Only Jane can connect to the Real Audio server until the connection is closed or times out. The NBG-417N times out in three minutes with UDP (User Datagram Protocol), or two hours with TCP/IP (Transfer Control Protocol/Internet Protocol). 11.9.2 Two Points To Remember About Trigger Ports 1 2 Trigger events only happen on data that is going coming from inside the NBG-
417N and going to the outside. If an application needs a continuous data stream, that port (range) will be tied up so that another computer on the LAN cant trigger it. 122 NBG-417N Users Guide CHAPTER 12 Dynamic DNS 12.1 Overview Dynamic DNS (DDNS) services let you use a domain name with a dynamic IP address. 12.2 What You Can Do in the DDNS Screen Use the Dynamic DNS screen (Section 12.4 on page 124) to enable DDNS and configure the DDNS settings on the NBG-417N. 12.3 What You Need To Know About DDNS Dynamic DNS allows you to update your current dynamic IP address with one or many dynamic DNS services so that anyone can contact you (in NetMeeting, CU-
SeeMe, etc.). You can also access your FTP server or Web site on your own computer using a domain name (for instance myhost.dhs.org, where myhost is a name of your choice) that will never change instead of using an IP address that changes each time you reconnect. Your friends or relatives will always be able to call you even if they don't know your IP address. 12.3.1 DynDNS Wildcard Enabling the wildcard feature for your host causes *.yourhost.dyndns.org to be aliased to the same IP address as yourhost.dyndns.org. This feature is useful if you want to be able to use, for example, www.yourhost.dyndns.org and still reach your hostname. Note: If you have a private WAN IP address, then you cannot use Dynamic DNS. You must have a public WAN IP address. NBG-417N Users Guide 123 Chapter 12Dynamic DNS 12.4 Dynamic DNS Screen To change your NBG-417Ns DDNS, click Network > DDNS. The screen appears as shown. Figure 68 Dynamic DNS The following table describes the labels in this screen. DESCRIPTION Table 45 Dynamic DNS LABEL Dynamic DNS Setup Enable Dynamic DNS Service Provider Dynamic DNS Type Select this check box to use dynamic DNS. Select the name of your Dynamic DNS service provider. Select the type of service that you are registered for from your Dynamic DNS service provider. Enter a host names in the field provided. You can specify up to two host names in the field separated by a comma (","). Enter your user name. Enter the password assigned to you. Enter your client authorization key provided by the server to update DynDNS records. This field is configurable only when you select WWW.REGFISH.COM in the Service Provider field. Select the check box to enable DynDNS Wildcard. Host Name User Name Password Token Enable Wildcard Option 124 NBG-417N Users Guide Chapter 12Dynamic DNS Table 45 Dynamic DNS LABEL Enable off line option DESCRIPTION This option is available when CustomDNS is selected in the DDNS Type field. Check with your Dynamic DNS service provider to have traffic redirected to a URL (that you can specify) while you are off line. IP Address Update Policy:
Use WAN IP Address Select this option to update the IP address of the host name(s) to Dynamic DNS server auto detect IP Address Use specified IP Address Apply Reset the WAN IP address. Select this option to update the IP address of the host name(s) automatically by the DDNS server. It is recommended that you select this option. Type the IP address of the host name(s). Use this if you have a static IP address. Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG-417N. Click Reset to begin configuring this screen afresh. NBG-417N Users Guide 125 Chapter 12Dynamic DNS 126 NBG-417N Users Guide PART III Security Firewall (129) Content Filtering (135) 127 128 CHAPTER 13 Firewall 13.1 Overview Use these screens to enable and configure the firewall that protects your NBG-
417N and your LAN from unwanted or malicious traffic. Enable the firewall to protect your LAN computers from attacks by hackers on the Internet and control access between the LAN and WAN. By default the firewall:
allows traffic that originates from your LAN computers to go to all of the networks. blocks traffic that originates on the other networks from going to the LAN. The following figure illustrates the default firewall action. User A can initiate an IM
(Instant Messaging) session from the LAN to the WAN (1). Return traffic for this session is also allowed (2). However other traffic initiated from the WAN is blocked
(3 and 4). Figure 69 Default Firewall Action LAN WAN A 1 2 3 4 13.2 What You Can Do in the Firewall Screens Use the General (Section 13.4 on page 132) screen to enable or disable the NBG-417Ns firewall. Use the Services () screen to NBG-417N Users Guide 129 Chapter 13Firewall 13.3 What You Need To Know About Firewall The NBG-417Ns firewall feature physically separates the LAN and the WAN and acts as a secure gateway for all data passing between the networks. 13.3.1 What is a Firewall?
Originally, the term firewall referred to a construction technique designed to prevent the spread of fire from one room to another. The networking term
"firewall" is a system or group of systems that enforces an access-control policy between two networks. It may also be defined as a mechanism used to protect a trusted network from a network that is not trusted. Of course, firewalls cannot solve every security problem. A firewall is one of the mechanisms used to establish a network security perimeter in support of a network security policy. It should never be the only mechanism or method employed. For a firewall to guard effectively, you must design and deploy it appropriately. This requires integrating the firewall into a broad information-security policy. In addition, specific policies must be implemented within the firewall itself. 13.3.2 Stateful Inspection Firewall Stateful inspection firewalls restrict access by screening data packets against defined access rules. They make access control decisions based on IP address and protocol. They also "inspect" the session data to assure the integrity of the connection and to adapt to dynamic protocols. These firewalls generally provide the best speed and transparency; however, they may lack the granular application level access control or caching that some proxies support. Firewalls, of one type or another, have become an integral part of standard security solutions for enterprises. 13.3.3 About the NBG-417N Firewall The NBG-417N firewall is a stateful inspection firewall and is designed to protect against Denial of Service attacks when activated (click the General tab under Firewall and then click the Enable Firewall check box). The NBG-417N's purpose is to allow a private Local Area Network (LAN) to be securely connected to the Internet. The NBG-417N can be used to prevent theft, destruction and modification of data, as well as log events, which may be important to the security of your network. The NBG-417N is installed between the LAN and a broadband modem connecting to the Internet. This allows it to act as a secure gateway for all data passing between the Internet and the LAN. 130 NBG-417N Users Guide Chapter 13Firewall The NBG-417N has one Ethernet WAN port and four Ethernet LAN ports, which are used to physically separate the network into two areas.The WAN (Wide Area Network) port attaches to the broadband (cable or DSL) modem to the Internet. The LAN (Local Area Network) port attaches to a network of computers, which needs security from the outside world. These computers will have access to Internet services such as e-mail, FTP and the World Wide Web. However, "inbound access" is not allowed (by default) unless the remote host is authorized to use a specific service. 13.3.4 Guidelines For Enhancing Security With Your Firewall 1 Change the default password via Web Configurator. 2 3 Think about access control before you connect to the network in any way, including attaching a modem to the port. Limit who can access your router. 4 Don't enable any local service (such as NTP) that you don't use. Any enabled service could present a potential security risk. A determined hacker might be able to find creative ways to misuse the enabled services to access the firewall or the network. 5 6 For local services that are enabled, protect against misuse. Protect by configuring the services to communicate only with specific peers, and protect by configuring rules to block packets for the services at specific interfaces. Protect against IP spoofing by making sure the firewall is active. 7 Keep the firewall in a secured (locked) room. NBG-417N Users Guide 131 Chapter 13Firewall 13.4 General Firewall Screen Use this screen to enable or disable the NBG-417Ns firewall, and set up firewall logs. Click Security > Firewall to open the General screen. Figure 70 Security > Firewall > General l The following table describes the labels in this screen. DESCRIPTION Table 46 Security > Firewall > General LABEL Enable FirewallSelect this check box to activate the firewall. The NBG-417N performs access control and protects against Denial of Service (DoS) attacks when the firewall is activated. Click Apply to save the settings. Click Reset to start configuring this screen again. Apply Reset 13.5 Services Screen If an outside user attempts to probe an unsupported port on your NBG-417N, an ICMP response packet is automatically returned. This allows the outside user to know the NBG-417N exists. Use this screen to prevent the ICMP response packet from being sent. This keeps outsiders from discovering your NBG-417N when unsupported ports are probed. You can also use this screen to enable service blocking, enter/delete/modify the services you want to block and the date/time you want to block them. 132 NBG-417N Users Guide Click Security > Firewall > Services. The screen appears as shown next. Figure 71 Security > Firewall > Services l Chapter 13Firewall The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 47 Security > Firewall > Services LABEL ICMP DESCRIPTION Internet Control Message Protocol is a message control and error-
reporting protocol between a host server and a gateway to the Internet. ICMP uses Internet Protocol (IP) datagrams, but the messages are processed by the TCP/IP software and directly apparent to the application user. The NBG-417N will not respond to any incoming Ping requests when Disable is selected. Select LAN to reply to incoming LAN Ping requests. Select WAN to reply to incoming WAN Ping requests. Otherwise select LAN & WAN to reply to all incoming LAN and WAN Ping requests. Select this option to prevent hackers from finding the NBG-417N by probing for unused ports. If you select this option, the NBG-417N will not respond to port request(s) for unused ports, thus leaving the unused ports and the NBG-417N unseen. By default this option is not selected and the NBG-417N will reply with an ICMP Port Unreachable packet for a port probe on its unused UDP ports, and a TCP Reset packet for a port probe on its unused TCP ports. Respond to Ping on Do not respond to requests for unauthorized services Note that the probing packets must first traverse the NBG-417N's firewall mechanism before reaching this anti-probing mechanism. Therefore if the firewall mechanism blocks a probing packet, the NBG-
417N reacts based on the firewall policy, which by default, is to send a TCP reset packet for a blocked TCP packet. You can use the command
"sys firewall tcprst rst [on|off]" to change this policy. When the firewall mechanism blocks a UDP packet, it drops the packet without sending a response packet. Click Apply to save the settings. Click Reset to start configuring this screen again. Apply Reset NBG-417N Users Guide 133 Chapter 13Firewall 134 NBG-417N Users Guide CHAPTER 14 Content Filtering 14.1 Overview This chapter provides a brief overview of content filtering using the embedded web GUI. Internet content filtering allows you to create and enforce Internet access policies tailored to your needs. Content filtering is the ability to block certain web features or specific URL keywords. 14.2 What You Can Do in the Content Filtering Screen Use the Filter (Section 14.4 on page 137) screen to restrict web features, add key-
words for blocking and designate a trusted computer. 14.3 What You Need To Know About Content Filtering Content filtering allows you to block certain web features, such as cookies, and/or block access to specific web sites. For example, you can configure one policy that blocks John Does access to arts and entertainment web pages. 14.3.1 Content Filtering Profiles A content filtering profile conveniently stores your custom settings for the following features. NBG-417N Users Guide 135 Chapter 14Content Filtering Restrict Web Features The NBG-417N can disable web proxies and block web features such as ActiveX controls, Java applets and cookies. Keyword Blocking URL Checking The NBG-417N checks the URLs domain name (or IP address) and file path separately when performing keyword blocking. The URLs domain name or IP address is the characters that come before the first slash in the URL. For example, with the URL www.zyxel.com.tw/news/
pressroom.php, the domain name is www.zyxel.com.tw. The file path is the characters that come after the first slash in the URL. For example, with the URL www.zyxel.com.tw/news/pressroom.php, the file path is news/pressroom.php. Since the NBG-417N checks the URLs domain name (or IP address) and file path separately, it will not find items that go across the two. For example, with the URL www.zyxel.com.tw/news/pressroom.php, the NBG-417N would find tw in the domain name (www.zyxel.com.tw). It would also find news in the file path
(news/pressroom.php) but it would not find tw/news. 136 NBG-417N Users Guide Chapter 14Content Filtering 14.4 Filter Screen Use this screen to restrict web features, add keywords for blocking and designate a trusted computer. Click Security > Content Filter to open the Filter screen. Figure 72 Security > Content Filter > Filter The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 48 Security > Content Filter > Filter LABEL Enable URL Keyword Blocking DESCRIPTION The NBG-417N can block Web sites with URLs that contain certain keywords in the domain name or IP address. For example, if the keyword "bad" was enabled, all sites containing this keyword in the domain name or IP address will be blocked, e.g., URL http://
www.website.com/bad.html would be blocked. Select this check box to enable this feature. Type a keyword in this field. You may use any character (up to 64 characters). Wildcards are not allowed. You can also enter a numerical IP address. This list displays the keywords already added. Click Add after you have typed a keyword. Repeat this procedure to add other keywords. Up to 64 keywords are allowed. When you try to access a web page containing a keyword, you will get a message telling you that the content filter is blocking this request. Highlight a keyword in the lower box and click Delete to remove it. The keyword disappears from the text box after you click Apply. Click this button to remove all of the listed keywords. Keyword Keyword List Add Delete Clear All NBG-417N Users Guide 137 Chapter 14Content Filtering Table 48 Security > Content Filter > Filter LABEL Apply Reset DESCRIPTION Click Apply to save your changes. Click Reset to begin configuring this screen afresh 14.5 Technical Reference The following section contains additional technical information about the NBG-
417N features described in this chapter. 14.5.1 Customizing Keyword Blocking URL Checking You can use commands to set how much of a websites URL the content filter is to check for keyword blocking. See the appendices for information on how to access and use the command interpreter. Domain Name or IP Address URL Checking By default, the NBG-417N checks the URLs domain name or IP address when performing keyword blocking. This means that the NBG-417N checks the characters that come before the first slash in the URL. For example, with the URL www.zyxel.com.tw/news/pressroom.php, content filtering only searches for keywords within www.zyxel.com.tw. Full Path URL Checking Full path URL checking has the NBG-417N check the characters that come before the last slash in the URL. For example, with the URL www.zyxel.com.tw/news/pressroom.php, full path URL checking searches for keywords within www.zyxel.com.tw/news/. Use the ip urlfilter customize actionFlags 6 [disable | enable]
command to extend (or not extend) the keyword blocking search to include the URL's full path. File Name URL Checking Filename URL checking has the NBG-417N check all of the characters in the URL. 138 NBG-417N Users Guide Chapter 14Content Filtering For example, filename URL checking searches for keywords within the URL www.zyxel.com.tw/news/pressroom.php. Use the ip urlfilter customize actionFlags 8 [disable | enable]
command to extend (or not extend) the keyword blocking search to include the URL's complete filename. NBG-417N Users Guide 139 Chapter 14Content Filtering 140 NBG-417N Users Guide PART IV Management Static Route (143) Bandwidth Management (147) Remote Management (155) Universal Plug-and-Play (UPnP) (159) 141 142 CHAPTER 15 Static Route 15.1 Overview This chapter shows you how to configure static routes for your NBG-417N. The NBG-417N usually uses the default gateway to route outbound traffic from computers on the LAN to the Internet. To have the NBG-417N send data to devices not reachable through the default gateway, use static routes. For example, the next figure shows a computer (A) connected to the NBG-417Ns LAN interface. The NBG-417N routes most traffic from A to the Internet through the NBG-417Ns default gateway (R1). You create one static route to connect to services offered by your ISP behind router R2. You create another static route to communicate with a separate network behind a router R3 connected to the LAN. Figure 73 Example of Static Routing Topology A R3 LAN WAN NBG-417N R1 R2 NBG-417N Users Guide 143 Chapter 15Static Route Table 49 Management > Static Route > IP Static Route LABEL Gateway DESCRIPTION This is the IP address of the gateway. The gateway is an immediate neighbor of your NBG-417N that will forward the packet to the destination. On the LAN, the gateway must be a router on the same segment as your NBG-417N; over the WAN, the gateway must be the IP address of one of the remote nodes. Click the Edit icon to open the static route setup screen. Modify a static route or create a new static route in the Static Route Setup screen. Modify Click the Remove icon to delete a static route. 15.3.1 Static Route Setup Screen To edit a static route, click the edit icon under Modify. The following screen displays. Fill in the required information for each static route. Figure 75 Management > Static Route > IP Static Route: Static Route Setup The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 50 Management > Static Route > IP Static Route: Static Route Setup LABEL Route Name DESCRIPTION Enter the name of the IP static route. Leave this field blank to delete this static route. This field allows you to activate/deactivate this static route. This parameter specifies the IP network address of the final destination. Routing is always based on network number. If you need to specify a route to a single host, use a subnet mask of 255.255.255.255 in the subnet mask field to force the network number to be identical to the host ID. Active Destination IP Address IP Subnet Mask Enter the IP subnet mask here. Gateway IP Address Enter the IP address of the gateway. The gateway is an immediate neighbor of your NBG-417N that will forward the packet to the destination. On the LAN, the gateway must be a router on the same segment as your NBG-417N; over the WAN, the gateway must be the IP address of one of the Remote Nodes. NBG-417N Users Guide 145 Chapter 15Static Route Table 50 Management > Static Route > IP Static Route: Static Route Setup LABEL Metric DESCRIPTION Metric represents the cost of transmission for routing purposes. IP routing uses hop count as the measurement of cost, with a minimum of 1 for directly connected networks. Enter a number that approximates the cost for this link. The number need not be precise, but it must be between 1 and 15. In practice, 2 or 3 is usually a good number. Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG-417N. Click Cancel to return to the previous screen and not save your changes. Apply Cancel 146 NBG-417N Users Guide CHAPTER 16 Bandwidth Management 16.1 Overview This chapter contains information about configuring bandwidth management, editing rules and viewing the NBG-417Ns bandwidth management logs. ZyXELs Bandwidth Management allows you to specify bandwidth management rules based on an application and/or subnet. You can allocate specific amounts of bandwidth capacity (bandwidth budgets) to different bandwidth rules. You can create bandwidth classes based on individual applications (like VoIP, Web, FTP, E-mail and Video for example). You can also create bandwidth classes based on subnets. The following figure shows LAN subnets. You could configure one bandwidth class for subnet A and another for subnet B. Figure 76 Subnet-based Bandwidth Management Example NBG-417N 16.2 What You Can Do in the Bandwidth Management Screen Use the General screen (Section 16.4 on page 148) to enable bandwidth management and assign bandwidth values. NBG-417N Users Guide 147 Chapter 16Bandwidth Management Use the Advanced screen (Section 16.5 on page 150) to configure bandwidth managements rule for the pre-defined service, other applications and/or subnets. 16.3 What You Need To Know About Bandwidth Management The NBG-417N applies bandwidth management to traffic that it forwards out through an interface. The NBG-417N does not control the bandwidth of traffic that comes into an interface. Bandwidth management applies to all traffic flowing out of the router, regardless of the traffic's source. The sum of the bandwidth allotments that apply to the WAN interface (LAN to WAN, WLAN to WAN, WAN to WAN / NBG-417N) must be less than or equal to the Upstream Bandwidth that you configure in the Bandwidth Management Advanced screen. The sum of the bandwidth allotments that apply to the LAN port (WAN to LAN, WLAN to LAN, LAN to LAN / NBG-417N) must be less than or equal to 100,000 kbps (you cannot configure the bandwidth budget for the LAN port). The sum of the bandwidth allotments that apply to the WLAN port (LAN to WLAN, WAN to WLAN, WLAN to WLAN / NBG-417N) must be less than or equal to 54,000 kbps (you cannot configure the bandwidth budget for the WLAN port). 16.4 Bandwidth Management General Configuration Click Management > Bandwidth MGMT to open the bandwidth management General screen. Figure 77 Management > Bandwidth MGMT > General 148 NBG-417N Users Guide The following table describes the labels in this screen. Chapter 16Bandwidth Management Table 51 Management > Bandwidth MGMT > General LABEL Enable Bandwidth Management DESCRIPTION This field allows you to have NBG-417N apply bandwidth management. Enable bandwidth management to give traffic that matches a bandwidth rule priority over traffic that does not match a bandwidth rule. Enabling bandwidth management also allows you to control the maximum or minimum amounts of bandwidth that can be used by traffic that matches a bandwidth rule. Select Priority Queue to allocate bandwidth based on the pre-defined priority assigned to an application. Select Bandwidth Allocation allocate specific amounts of bandwidth to specific applications and/or subnets. Apply Reset Select Disable if you do not want to use this feature. Click Apply to save your customized settings. Click Reset to begin configuring this screen afresh. NBG-417N Users Guide 149 Chapter 16Bandwidth Management 16.5 Bandwidth Management Advanced Configuration Click Management > Bandwidth MGMT > Advanced to open the bandwidth management Advanced screen. Figure 78 Management > Bandwidth MGMT > Advanced The following table describes the labels in this screen. DESCRIPTION Table 52 Management > Bandwidth MGMT > Advanced LABEL Unlimited Priority Queue Local IP Address Priority Queue Enter the IP address of the computer for which you want to allot the highest bandwidth priority. Use this table to allocate specific amounts of bandwidth based on the pre-defined service. This is the number of an individual bandwidth management rule. Select this check box to have the NBG-417N apply this bandwidth management rule.
Enable 150 NBG-417N Users Guide Chapter 16Bandwidth Management Table 52 Management > Bandwidth MGMT > Advanced (continued) LABEL Service Priority Specific Port DESCRIPTION This is the name of the service. Select a priority from the drop down list box. Choose High or Low. This displays the port/s assigned to the service. You can also specify the port/s to services you want to allocate bandwidth for. Choose either Both, TCP or UDP in the drop-down menu and enter the port or range of ports in the provided boxes. Use this table to allocate specific amounts of bandwidth to specific applications and/or subnets. This is the number of an individual bandwidth management rule. Select this check box to have the NBG-417N apply this bandwidth management rule. This displays the range of IP addresses for which the bandwidth management rule applies. These read-only labels represent the physical interfaces. Bandwidth management applies to all traffic flowing out of the router through the interface, regardless of the traffics source. To LAN applies bandwidth management to traffic that the NBG-417N forwards to the LAN. To WAN applies bandwidth management to traffic that the NBG-417N forwards to the WAN. Both applies bandwidth management to traffic that the NBG-417N forwards to both the LAN and the WAN. This displays the range of ports for which the bandwidth management rule applies. This displays either Max (maximum) or Min (minimum) and refers to the maximum or minimum bandwidth allowed for the rule in kilobits per second in the field below. This is the maximum or minimum bandwidth allowed (refer to the field above) for the rule in kilobits per second. Click the Edit icon to open the Rule Configuration screen. Modify an existing rule or create a new rule in the Rule Configuration screen. See Section 16.5.1 on page 152 for more information. Click the Remove icon to delete a rule. Click Apply to save your customized settings. Click Reset to begin configuring this screen afresh. Bandwidth Allocation
Enable LAN IP Range Direction Port Range Policy Rate Modify Apply Reset NBG-417N Users Guide 151 Chapter 16Bandwidth Management 16.5.1 Rule Configuration: User Defined Service Rule Configuration If you want to edit a bandwidth management rule for other applications and/or subnets, click the Edit icon in the User-defined Service table of the Advanced screen. The following screen displays. Figure 79 Management > Bandwidth MGMT > Advanced: User-defined Service Rule Configuration The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 53 Management > Bandwidth MGMT > Advanced: User-defined Service Rule Configuration LABEL Active Direction DESCRIPTION Select this check box to turn on this bandwidth management rule. Bandwidth management applies to all traffic flowing out of the router through the interface, regardless of the traffic s source. Select To LAN applies bandwidth management to traffic that the NBG-
417N forwards to the LAN. Select To WAN applies bandwidth management to traffic that the NBG-
417N forwards to the WAN. Select Both applies bandwidth management to traffic that the NBG-
417N forwards to both the LAN and the WAN. Specify the range of IP addresses for which the bandwidth management rule applies. Select the protocol (TCP, UDP, SMTP, HTTP, POP3, FTP or ALL) for which the bandwidth management rule applies. Enter the range of ports for which the bandwidth management rule applies. Select Max or Min and specify the maximum or minimum bandwidth allowed for the rule in kilobits per second in the field below. Enter the maximum or minimum bandwidth allowed (refer to the field above) for the rule in bits per second. LAN IP Range Protocol Port Range Policy Rate (bps) 152 NBG-417N Users Guide Chapter 16Bandwidth Management LABEL OK Cancel DESCRIPTION Click OK to save your customized settings. Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving. 16.6 Technical References The following section contains additional technical information about the NBG-
417N features described in this chapter. 16.6.1 Application and Subnet-based Bandwidth Management You could also create bandwidth classes based on a combination of a subnet and an application. The following example table shows bandwidth allocations for application specific traffic from separate LAN subnets. Table 54 Application and Subnet-based Bandwidth Management Example FROM SUBNET B TRAFFIC TYPE 64 Kbps VoIP Web 64 Kbps 64 Kbps FTP 64 Kbps E-mail Video 64 Kbps FROM SUBNET A 64 Kbps 64 Kbps 64 Kbps 64 Kbps 64 Kbps 16.6.2 Bandwidth Management Priorities The following table describes the priorities that you can apply to traffic that the NBG-417N forwards out through an interface. Table 55 Bandwidth Management Priorities PRIORITY LEVELS: TRAFFIC WITH A HIGHER PRIORITY GETS THROUGH FASTER WHILE TRAFFIC WITH A LOWER PRIORITY IS DROPPED IF THE NETWORK IS CONGESTED. HighTypically used for voice traffic or video that is especially sensitive to jitter (jitter is the variations in delay). LowThis is typically used for non-critical background traffic such as bulk transfers that are allowed but that should not affect other applications and users. NBG-417N Users Guide 153 Chapter 16Bandwidth Management 16.6.3 Predefined Bandwidth Management Services The following is a description of the services that you can select and to which you can apply media bandwidth management in the Management > Bandwidth MGMT > Advanced screen. Table 56 Media Bandwidth Management Setup: Services SERVICE FTPFile Transfer Program enables fast transfer of files, including large files DESCRIPTION that may not be possible by e-mail. FTP uses port number 21. WWWThe World Wide Web (WWW) is an Internet system to distribute graphical, hyper-linked information, based on Hyper Text Transfer Protocol (HTTP) - a client/server protocol for the World Wide Web. The Web is not synonymous with the Internet; rather, it is just one service on the Internet. Other services on the Internet include Internet Relay Chat and Newsgroups. The Web is accessed through use of a browser. WWW uses port 80. TelnetTelnet is the login and terminal emulation protocol common on the Internet and in UNIX environments. It operates over TCP/IP networks. Its primary function is to allow users to log into remote host systems. Telnet uses port 23. E-MailElectronic mail consists of messages sent through a computer network to specific groups or individuals. Here are some default ports for e-mail:
POP3 - port 110 SMTP - port 25 VoIP (SIP)Sending voice signals over the Internet is called Voice over IP or VoIP. Session Initiated Protocol (SIP) is an internationally recognized standard for implementing VoIP. SIP is an application-layer control
(signaling) protocol that handles the setting up, altering and tearing down of voice and multimedia sessions over the Internet. SIP is transported primarily over UDP but can also be transported over TCP, using the default port number 5060. BitTorrentBitTorrent is a free P2P (peer-to-peer) sharing tool allowing you to distribute large software and media files using ports 6881 to 6889. BitTorrent requires you to search for a file with a searching engine yourself. It distributes files by corporation and trading, that is, the client downloads the file in small pieces and share the pieces with other peers to get other half of the file. GamingOnline gaming services lets you play multiplayer games on the Internet via broadband technology. One example is Microsofts Xbox Live, which uses port 3074. 16.6.4 Services and Port Numbers See Appendix F on page 257 for commonly used services and port numbers. 154 NBG-417N Users Guide CHAPTER 17 Remote Management 17.1 Overview This chapter provides information on the Remote Management screens. Remote management allows you to determine which services/protocols can access which NBG-417N interface (if any) from which computers. You may manage your NBG-417N from a remote location via:
LAN only LAN and WAN Note: When you configure remote management to allow management from the LAN
& WAN in the options above, you still need to configure a firewall rule to allow access. See the firewall chapters for details on configuring firewall rules. 17.2 What You Can Do in the Remote Management Screens Use the WWW screen (Section 17.4 on page 157) to change your NBG-417Ns World Wide Web settings. 17.3 What You Need To Know About Remote Management To disable remote management of a service, select Disable in the corresponding Server Access field. You may only have one remote management session running at a time. 17.3.1 Remote Management Limitations Remote management over LAN or WAN will not work when:
NBG-417N Users Guide 155 Chapter 17Remote Management 1 2 3 4 You have disabled that service in one of the remote management screens. The IP address in the Secured Client IP Address field does not match the client IP address. If it does not match, the NBG-417N will disconnect the session immediately. There is already another remote management session with an equal or higher priority running. You may only have one remote management session running at one time. There is a firewall rule that blocks it. 17.3.2 Remote Management and NAT When NAT is enabled:
Use the NBG-417Ns WAN IP address when configuring from the WAN. Use the NBG-417Ns LAN IP address when configuring from the LAN. 17.3.3 System Timeout There is a default system management idle timeout of five minutes (three hundred seconds). The NBG-417N automatically logs you out if the management session remains idle for longer than this timeout period. The management session does not time out when a statistics screen is polling. You can change the timeout period in the System screen 156 NBG-417N Users Guide Chapter 17Remote Management 17.4 WWW Screen To change your NBG-417Ns World Wide Web settings, click Management >
Remote MGMT to display the WWW screen. Figure 80 Management > Remote MGMT > WWW The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 57 Management > Remote MGMT > WWW LABEL Server Port DESCRIPTION You may change the server port number for a service if needed, however you must use the same port number in order to use that service for remote management. Select the interface(s) through which a computer may access the NBG-
417N using this service. A secured client is a trusted computer that is allowed to communicate with the NBG-417N using this service. Server Access Secured Client IP Address Select All to allow any computer to access the NBG-417N using this service. Choose Selected to just allow the computer with the IP address that you specify to access the NBG-417N using this service. Apply Reset Note: This only applies on WAN IP. Click Apply to save your customized settings and exit this screen. Click Reset to begin configuring this screen afresh. NBG-417N Users Guide 157 Chapter 17Remote Management 158 NBG-417N Users Guide CHAPTER 18 Universal Plug-and-Play (UPnP) 18.1 Overview This chapter introduces the UPnP feature in the Web Configurator. Universal Plug and Play (UPnP) is a distributed, open networking standard that uses TCP/IP for simple peer-to-peer network connectivity between devices. A UPnP device can dynamically join a network, obtain an IP address, convey its capabilities and learn about other devices on the network. In turn, a device can leave a network smoothly and automatically when it is no longer in use. 18.2 What You Can Do in the UPnP Screen Use the UPnP screen (Section 18.4 on page 161) to enable UPnP on the NBG-
417N. 18.3 What You Need to Know About UPnP How do I know if I'm using UPnP?
UPnP hardware is identified as an icon in the Network Connections folder
(Windows XP). Each UPnP compatible device installed on your network will appear as a separate icon. Selecting the icon of a UPnP device will allow you to access the information and properties of that device. NAT Traversal UPnP NAT traversal automates the process of allowing an application to operate through NAT. UPnP network devices can automatically configure network addressing, announce their presence in the network to other UPnP devices and enable exchange of simple product and service descriptions. NAT traversal allows the following:
NBG-417N Users Guide 159 Chapter 18Universal Plug-and-Play (UPnP) Dynamic port mapping Learning public IP addresses Assigning lease times to mappings Windows Messenger is an example of an application that supports NAT traversal and UPnP. See the NAT chapter for more information on NAT. Cautions with UPnP The automated nature of NAT traversal applications in establishing their own services and opening firewall ports may present network security issues. Network information and configuration may also be obtained and modified by users in some network environments. When a UPnP device joins a network, it announces its presence with a multicast message. For security reasons, the NBG-417N allows multicast messages on the LAN only. All UPnP-enabled devices may communicate freely with each other without additional configuration. Disable UPnP if this is not your intention. UPnP and ZyXEL ZyXEL has achieved UPnP certification from the Universal Plug and Play Forum UPnP Implementers Corp. (UIC). ZyXEL's UPnP implementation supports Internet Gateway Device (IGD) 1.0. See the following sections for examples of installing and using UPnP. 160 NBG-417N Users Guide Chapter 18Universal Plug-and-Play (UPnP) 18.4 UPnP Screen Use this screen to enable UPnP. Click the Management > UPnP to open the following screen. Figure 81 Management > UPnP > General The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 58 Management > UPnP > General LABEL Enable the Universal Plug and Play (UPnP) Feature DESCRIPTION Select this check box to activate UPnP. Be aware that anyone could use a UPnP application to open the Web Configurator's login screen without entering the NBG-417N's IP address
(although you must still enter the password to access the Web Configurator). Select this check box to allow UPnP-enabled applications to automatically configure the NBG-417N so that they can communicate through the NBG-417N, for example by using NAT traversal, UPnP applications automatically reserve a NAT forwarding port in order to communicate with another UPnP enabled device; this eliminates the need to manually configure port forwarding for the UPnP enabled application. Click Apply to save the setting to the NBG-417N. Click Reset to begin configuring this screen afresh. Allow users to make port forwarding changes through UPnP Apply Reset 18.5 Technical Reference The following section contains additional technical information about the NBG-
417N features described in this chapter. NBG-417N Users Guide 161 Chapter 18Universal Plug-and-Play (UPnP) 18.5.1 Installing UPnP in Windows Example This section shows how to install UPnP in Windows Me and Windows XP. 18.5.1.1 Installing UPnP in Windows Me Follow the steps below to install the UPnP in Windows Me. 1 Click Start and Control Panel. Double-click Add/Remove Programs. 2 Click on the Windows Setup tab and select Communication in the Components selection box. Click Details. Figure 82 Add/Remove Programs: Windows Setup: Communication 162 NBG-417N Users Guide Chapter 18Universal Plug-and-Play (UPnP) 3 In the Communications window, select the Universal Plug and Play check box in the Components selection box. Figure 83 Add/Remove Programs: Windows Setup: Communication: Components 4 Click OK to go back to the Add/Remove Programs Properties window and click Next. 5 Restart the computer when prompted. Installing UPnP in Windows XP Follow the steps below to install the UPnP in Windows XP. 1 Click Start and Control Panel. 2 Double-click Network Connections. 3 In the Network Connections window, click Advanced in the main menu and select Optional Networking Components . Figure 84 Network Connections NBG-417N Users Guide 163 Chapter 18Universal Plug-and-Play (UPnP) 4 The Windows Optional Networking Components Wizard window displays. Select Networking Service in the Components selection box and click Details. Figure 85 Windows Optional Networking Components Wizard 164 NBG-417N Users Guide Chapter 18Universal Plug-and-Play (UPnP) 5 In the Networking Services window, select the Universal Plug and Play check box. Figure 86 Networking Services 6 Click OK to go back to the Windows Optional Networking Component Wizard window and click Next. 18.5.1.2 Using UPnP in Windows XP Example This section shows you how to use the UPnP feature in Windows XP. You must already have UPnP installed in Windows XP and UPnP activated on the NBG-417N. Make sure the computer is connected to a LAN port of the NBG-417N. Turn on your computer and the NBG-417N. Auto-discover Your UPnP-enabled Network Device 1 Click Start and Control Panel. Double-click Network Connections. An icon displays under Internet Gateway. NBG-417N Users Guide 165 Chapter 18Universal Plug-and-Play (UPnP) 2 Right-click the icon and select Properties. Figure 87 Network Connections 166 NBG-417N Users Guide Chapter 18Universal Plug-and-Play (UPnP) 3 In the Internet Connection Properties window, click Settings to see the port mappings there were automatically created. Figure 88 Internet Connection Properties NBG-417N Users Guide 167 Chapter 18Universal Plug-and-Play (UPnP) 4 You may edit or delete the port mappings or click Add to manually add port mappings. Figure 89 Internet Connection Properties: Advanced Settings Figure 90 Internet Connection Properties: Advanced Settings: Add 5 When the UPnP-enabled device is disconnected from your computer, all port mappings will be deleted automatically. 168 NBG-417N Users Guide Chapter 18Universal Plug-and-Play (UPnP) 6 Select Show icon in notification area when connected option and click OK. An icon displays in the system tray. Figure 91 System Tray Icon 7 Double-click on the icon to display your current Internet connection status. Figure 92 Internet Connection Status Web Configurator Easy Access With UPnP, you can access the web-based configurator on the NBG-417N without finding out the IP address of the NBG-417N first. This comes helpful if you do not know the IP address of the NBG-417N. Follow the steps below to access the Web Configurator. 1 Click Start and then Control Panel. 2 Double-click Network Connections. NBG-417N Users Guide 169 Chapter 18Universal Plug-and-Play (UPnP) 3 Select My Network Places under Other Places. Figure 93 Network Connections 4 An icon with the description for each UPnP-enabled device displays under Local Network. 170 NBG-417N Users Guide Chapter 18Universal Plug-and-Play (UPnP) 5 Right-click on the icon for your NBG-417N and select Invoke. The Web Configurator login screen displays. Figure 94 Network Connections: My Network Places 6 Right-click on the icon for your NBG-417N and select Properties. A properties window displays with basic information about the NBG-417N. Figure 95 Network Connections: My Network Places: Properties: Example NBG-417N Users Guide 171 Chapter 18Universal Plug-and-Play (UPnP) 172 NBG-417N Users Guide PART V Maintenance and Troubleshooting System (175) Logs (181) Tools (183) Sys OP Mode (189) Language (193) Troubleshooting (195) 173 174 CHAPTER 19 System 19.1 Overview This chapter provides information on the System screens. See the chapter about wizard setup for more information on the next few screens. 19.2 What You Can Do in the System Screens Use the General screen (Section 19.3 on page 175) to enter a name to identify the NBG-417N in the network and set the password. Use the Time Setting screen (Section 19.4 on page 177) to change your NBG-
417Ns time and date. 19.3 System General Screen Use this screen to enter a name to identify the NBG-417N in the network and set the password. Click Maintenance > System. The following screen displays. Figure 96 Maintenance > System > General NBG-417N Users Guide 175 Chapter 19System The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 59 Maintenance > System > General LABEL System Setup System Name DESCRIPTION System Name is a unique name to identify the NBG-417N in an Ethernet network. It is recommended you enter your computers Computer name in this field (see the chapter about wizard setup for how to find your computers name). Domain Name Administrator Inactivity Timer Password Setup Old Password New Password Retype to Confirm Apply Reset This name can be up to 30 alphanumeric characters long. Spaces are not allowed, but dashes - and underscores "_" are accepted. Enter the domain name (if you know it) here. If you leave this field blank, the ISP may assign a domain name via DHCP. The domain name entered by you is given priority over the ISP assigned domain name. Type how many minutes a management session can be left idle before the session times out. The default is 5 minutes. After it times out you have to log in with your password again. Very long idle timeouts may have security risks. A value of "0" means a management session never times out, no matter how long it has been left idle (not recommended). Change your NBG-417Ns password (recommended) using the fields as shown. Type the default password or the existing password you use to access the system in this field. Type your new system password (up to 30 characters). Note that as you type a password, the screen displays an asterisk (*) for each character you type. Type the new password again in this field. Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG-417N. Click Reset to begin configuring this screen afresh. 176 NBG-417N Users Guide Chapter 19System 19.4 Time Setting Screen To change your NBG-417Ns time and date, click Maintenance > System > Time Setting. The screen appears as shown. Use this screen to configure the NBG-
417Ns time based on your local time zone. Figure 97 Maintenance > System > Time Setting he following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 60 Maintenance > System > Time Setting LABEL Current Time and Date Current Time DESCRIPTION This field displays the time of your NBG-417N. Current Date Each time you reload this page, the NBG-417N synchronizes the time with the time server. This field displays the date of your NBG-417N. Each time you reload this page, the NBG-417N synchronizes the date with the time server. Time and Date Setup Manual Select this radio button to enter the time and date manually. If you configure a new time and date, Time Zone and Daylight Saving at the same time, the new time and date you entered has priority and the Time Zone and Daylight Saving settings do not affect it. NBG-417N Users Guide 177 Chapter 19System Table 60 Maintenance > System > Time Setting LABEL New Time DESCRIPTION This field displays the last updated time from the time server or the last time configured manually.
(hh:mm:ss) New Date
(yyyy/mm/dd) Get from Time Server Auto User Defined Time Server Address Time Zone Setup Time Zone Daylight Savings Start Date When you set Time and Date Setup to Manual, enter the new time in this field and then click Apply. This field displays the last updated date from the time server or the last date configured manually. When you set Time and Date Setup to Manual, enter the new date in this field and then click Apply. Select this radio button to have the NBG-417N get the time and date from the time server you specified below. Select Auto to have the NBG-417N automatically search for an available time server and synchronize the date and time with the time server after you click Apply. Select User Defined Time Server Address and enter the IP address or URL (up to 20 extended ASCII characters in length) of your time server. Check with your ISP/network administrator if you are unsure of this information. Choose the time zone of your location. This will set the time difference between your time zone and Greenwich Mean Time (GMT). Daylight saving is a period from late spring to early fall when many countries set their clocks ahead of normal local time by one hour to give more daytime light in the evening. Select this option if you use Daylight Saving Time. Configure the day and time when Daylight Saving Time starts if you selected Daylight Savings. The o'clock field uses the 24 hour format. Here are a couple of examples:
Daylight Saving Time starts in most parts of the United States on the first Sunday of April. Each time zone in the United States starts using Daylight Saving Time at 2 A.M. local time. So in the United States you would select First, Sunday, April and type 2 in the o'clock field. Daylight Saving Time starts in the European Union on the last Sunday of March. All of the time zones in the European Union start using Daylight Saving Time at the same moment (1 A.M. GMT or UTC). So in the European Union you would select Last, Sunday, March. The time you type in the o'clock field depends on your time zone. In Germany for instance, you would type 2 because Germany's time zone is one hour ahead of GMT or UTC (GMT+1). 178 NBG-417N Users Guide Chapter 19System Table 60 Maintenance > System > Time Setting LABEL End Date DESCRIPTION Configure the day and time when Daylight Saving Time ends if you selected Daylight Savings. The o'clock field uses the 24 hour format. Here are a couple of examples:
Daylight Saving Time ends in the United States on the last Sunday of October. Each time zone in the United States stops using Daylight Saving Time at 2 A.M. local time. So in the United States you would select Last, Sunday, October and type 2 in the o'clock field. Daylight Saving Time ends in the European Union on the last Sunday of October. All of the time zones in the European Union stop using Daylight Saving Time at the same moment (1 A.M. GMT or UTC). So in the European Union you would select Last, Sunday, October. The time you type in the o'clock field depends on your time zone. In Germany for instance, you would type 2 because Germany's time zone is one hour ahead of GMT or UTC (GMT+1). Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG-417N. Click Reset to begin configuring this screen afresh. Apply Reset NBG-417N Users Guide 179 Chapter 19System 180 NBG-417N Users Guide CHAPTER 20 Logs 20.1 Overview This chapter contains information about configuring general log settings and viewing the NBG-417Ns logs. Refer to the appendices for example log message explanations. The Web Configurator allows you to look at all of the NBG-417Ns logs in one location. 20.2 What You Can Do in the Log Screens Use the View Log screen (Section 20.4 on page 182) to see the logs for the catego-
ries such as system maintenance, system errors, access control, allowed or blocked web sites, blocked web features, and so on. 20.3 What You Need to Know About Logs An alert is a type of log that warrants more serious attention. They include system errors, attacks (access control) and attempted access to blocked web sites or web sites with restricted web features such as cookies, active X and so on. Some categories such as System Errors consist of both logs and alerts. You may differentiate them by their color in the View Log screen. Alerts display in red and logs display in black. Alerts are e-mailed as soon as they happen. Logs may be e-mailed as soon as the log is full (see Log Schedule). Selecting many alert and/or log categories
(especially Access Control) may result in many e-mails being sent. NBG-417N Users Guide 181 Chapter 20Logs 20.4 View Log Screen Use the View Log screen to see the logged messages for the NBG-417N. Options include logs about system maintenance, system errors, access control, allowed or blocked web sites, blocked web features (such as ActiveX controls, Java and cookies), attacks (such as DoS) and IPSec. Log entries in red indicate system error logs. The log wraps around and deletes the old entries after it fills. Click a column heading to sort the entries. A triangle indicates ascending or descending sort order. Click Maintenance > Logs to open the View Log screen. Figure 98 Maintenance > Logs > View Log The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 61 Maintenance > Logs > View Log LABEL Refresh Clear Log
Time DESCRIPTION Click Refresh to renew the log screen. Click Clear Log to delete all the logs. This is the index number of the log entry. This field displays the time the log was recorded. See the chapter on system maintenance and information to configure the NBG-417N s time and date. This field states the reason for the log. Message 182 NBG-417N Users Guide CHAPTER 21 Tools 21.1 Overview This chapter shows you how to upload a new firmware, upload or save backup configuration files and restart the NBG-417N. 21.2 What You Can Do in the Tools Screen Use the Firmware screen (Section 21.3 on page 183) to upload firmware to your NBG-417N. Use the Configuration screen (Section 21.4 on page 186) to view information related to factory defaults, backup configuration, and restoring configuration. Use the Restart screen (Section 21.5 on page 188) to have the NBG-417N reboot. 21.3 Firmware Upload Screen Find firmware at www.zyxel.com in a file that (usually) uses the system model name with a *.bin extension, e.g., NBG-417N.bin. The upload process uses HTTP (Hypertext Transfer Protocol) and may take up to two minutes. After a successful upload, the system will reboot. NBG-417N Users Guide 183 Chapter 21Tools Click Maintenance > Tools. Follow the instructions in this screen to upload firmware to your NBG-417N. Figure 99 Maintenance > Tools > Firmware The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 62 Maintenance > Tools > Firmware LABEL File Path DESCRIPTION Type in the location of the file you want to upload in this field or click Browse... to find it. Click Browse... to find the .bin file you want to upload. Remember that you must decompress compressed (.zip) files before you can upload them. Click Upload to begin the upload process. This process may take up to two minutes. Browse... Upload Note: Do not turn off the NBG-417N while firmware upload is in progress!
After you see the Firmware Upload In Process screen, wait two minutes before logging into the NBG-417N again. Figure 100 Upload Warning 184 NBG-417N Users Guide Chapter 21Tools The NBG-417N automatically restarts in this time causing a temporary network disconnect. In some operating systems, you may see the following icon on your desktop. Figure 101 Network Temporarily Disconnected After two minutes, log in again and check your new firmware version in the Status screen. If the upload was not successful, the following screen will appear. Click Return to go back to the Firmware screen. Figure 102 Upload Error Message NBG-417N Users Guide 185 Chapter 21Tools 21.4 Configuration Screen Click Maintenance > Tools > Configuration. Information related to factory defaults, backup configuration, and restoring configuration appears as shown next. Figure 103 Maintenance > Tools > Configuration 21.4.1 Backup Configuration Backup configuration allows you to back up (save) the NBG-417Ns current configuration to a file on your computer. Once your NBG-417N is configured and functioning properly, it is highly recommended that you back up your configuration file before making configuration changes. The backup configuration file will be useful in case you need to return to your previous settings. Click Backup to save the NBG-417Ns current configuration to your computer. 186 NBG-417N Users Guide 21.4.2 Restore Configuration Restore configuration allows you to upload a new or previously saved configuration file from your computer to your NBG-417N. Chapter 21Tools Table 63 Maintenance Restore Configuration LABEL File Path DESCRIPTION Type in the location of the file you want to upload in this field or click Browse... to find it. Click Browse... to find the file you want to upload. Remember that you must decompress compressed (.ZIP) files before you can upload them. Click Upload to begin the upload process. Browse... Upload Note: Do not turn off the NBG-417N while configuration file upload is in progress After you see a configuration upload successful screen, you must then wait one minute before logging into the NBG-417N again. Figure 104 Configuration Restore Successful The NBG-417N automatically restarts in this time causing a temporary network disconnect. In some operating systems, you may see the following icon on your desktop. Figure 105 Temporarily Disconnected If you uploaded the default configuration file you may need to change the IP address of your computer to be in the same subnet as that of the default NBG-
417N IP address (192.168.1.1). See Appendix D on page 227 for details on how to set up your computers IP address. NBG-417N Users Guide 187 Chapter 21Tools If the upload was not successful, the following screen will appear. Click Return to go back to the Configuration screen. Figure 106 Configuration Restore Error 21.4.3 Back to Factory Defaults Pressing the Reset button in this section clears all user-entered configuration information and returns the NBG-417N to its factory defaults. You can also press the RESET button on the rear panel to reset the factory defaults of your NBG-417N. Refer to the chapter about introducing the Web Configurator for more information on the RESET button. 21.5 Restart Screen System restart allows you to reboot the NBG-417N without turning the power off. Click Maintenance > Tools > Restart. Click Restart to have the NBG-417N reboot. This does not affect the NBG-417N's configuration. Figure 107 Maintenance > Tools > Restart 188 NBG-417N Users Guide CHAPTER 22 Sys OP Mode 22.1 Overview The Sys OP Mode (System Operation Mode) function lets you configure whether your NBG-417N is a router or AP. You can choose between Router Mode and AP Mode depending on your network topology and the features you require from your device. See Section 1.1 on page 21 for more information on which mode to choose. 22.2 What You Can Do in the Sys OP Mode Screen Use the General screen (Section 22.4 on page 191) to select how you connect to the Internet. NBG-417N Users Guide 189 Chapter 22Sys OP Mode 22.3 What You Need to Know About Sys OP Mode Router A router connects your local network with another network, such as the Internet. The router has two IP addresses, the LAN IP address and the WAN IP address. Figure 108 LAN and WAN IP Addresses in Router Mode WAN LAN Internet LAN IP NBG-417N WAN IP AP An AP extends one network and so has just one IP address. All Ethernet ports on the AP have the same IP address. To connect to the Internet, another device, such as a router, is required. Figure 109 IP Address in AP Mode LAN 1 IP NBG-417N Internet 190 NBG-417N Users Guide Chapter 22Sys OP Mode 22.4 General Screen Use this screen to select how you connect to the Internet. Figure 110 Maintenance > Sys OP Mode > General If you select Router Mode, the following pop-up message window appears. Figure 111 Maintenance > Sys Op Mode > General: Router In this mode there are both LAN and WAN ports. The LAN Ethernet and WAN Ethernet ports have different IP addresses. The DHCP server on your device is enabled and allocates IP addresses to other devices on your local network. The LAN IP address of the device on the local network is set to 192.168.1.1. You can configure the IP address settings on your WAN port. Contact your ISP or system administrator for more information on appropriate settings. If you select Access Point the following pop-up message window appears. Figure 112 Maintenance > Sys Op Mode > General: AP In AP Mode all Ethernet ports have the same IP address. All ports on the rear panel of the device are LAN ports, including the port labeled WAN. There is no WAN port. NBG-417N Users Guide 191 Chapter 22Sys OP Mode The DHCP server on your device is disabled. In AP mode there must be a device with a DHCP server on your network such as a router or gateway which can allocate IP addresses. The IP address of the device on the local network is set to 192.168.1.2. The following table describes the labels in the General screen. Table 64 Maintenance > Sys OP Mode > General LABEL System Operation Mode Router DESCRIPTION Select Router if your device routes traffic between a local network and another network such as the Internet. This mode offers services such as a firewall or bandwidth management. Select Access Point if your device bridges traffic between clients on the same network. Click Apply to save your settings. Click Reset to return your settings to the default ( Router) Access Point Apply Reset Note: If you select the incorrect System Operation Mode you cannot connect to the Internet. 192 NBG-417N Users Guide CHAPTER 23 Language 23.1 Language Screen Use this screen to change the language for the Web Configurator display. Click the language you prefer. The Web Configurator language changes after a while without restarting the NBG-417N. Figure 113 Language NBG-417N Users Guide 193 Chapter 23Language 194 NBG-417N Users Guide CHAPTER 24 Troubleshooting This chapter offers some suggestions to solve problems you might encounter. The potential problems are divided into the following categories. Power, Hardware Connections, and LEDs NBG-417N Access and Login Internet Access Resetting the NBG-417N to Its Factory Defaults Wireless Router/AP Troubleshooting 24.1 Power, Hardware Connections, and LEDs The NBG-417N does not turn on. None of the LEDs turn on. 1 Make sure you are using the power adaptor or cord included with the NBG-417N. 2 Make sure the power adaptor or cord is connected to the NBG-417N and plugged in to an appropriate power source. Make sure the power source is turned on. 3 Disconnect and re-connect the power adaptor or cord to the NBG-417N. 4 If the problem continues, contact the vendor. One of the LEDs does not behave as expected. 1 Make sure you understand the normal behavior of the LED. See Section 1.5 on page 22. 2 Check the hardware connections. See the Quick Start Guide. NBG-417N Users Guide 195 2 If this does not work, you have to reset the device to its factory defaults. See Section 24.4 on page 200. Chapter 24Troubleshooting I cannot see or access the Login screen in the Web Configurator. 1 Make sure you are using the correct IP address. The default IP address is 192.168.1.1. If you changed the IP address (Section 7.3 on page 102), use the new IP address. If you changed the IP address and have forgotten it, see the troubleshooting suggestions for I dont know the IP address of my NBG-417N. 2 Check the hardware connections, and make sure the LEDs are behaving as expected. See the Quick Start Guide. 3 Make sure your Internet browser does not block pop-up windows and has JavaScripts and Java enabled. See Appendix B on page 209. 4 Make sure your computer is in the same subnet as the NBG-417N. (If you know that there are routers between your computer and the NBG-417N, skip this step.) If there is a DHCP server on your network, make sure your computer is using a dynamic IP address. See Section 7.3 on page 102. If there is no DHCP server on your network, make sure your computers IP address is in the same subnet as the NBG-417N. See Section 7.3 on page 102. 5 Reset the device to its factory defaults, and try to access the NBG-417N with the default IP address. See Section 7.3 on page 102. 6 If the problem continues, contact the network administrator or vendor, or try one of the advanced suggestions. Advanced Suggestions Try to access the NBG-417N using another service, such as Telnet. If you can access the NBG-417N, check the remote management settings and firewall rules to find out why the NBG-417N does not respond to HTTP. If your computer is connected to the WAN port or is connected wirelessly, use a computer that is connected to a LAN/ETHERNET port. I can see the Login screen, but I cannot log in to the NBG-417N. NBG-417N Users Guide 197 Chapter 24Troubleshooting 1 Make sure you have entered the password correctly. The default password is 1234. This field is case-sensitive, so make sure [Caps Lock] is not on. 2 3 You cannot log in to the Web Configurator while someone is using Telnet to access the NBG-417N. Log out of the NBG-417N in the other session, or ask the person who is logged in to log out. This can happen when you fail to log out properly from your last session. Try logging in again after 5 minutes. 4 Disconnect and re-connect the power adaptor or cord to the NBG-417N. 5 If this does not work, you have to reset the device to its factory defaults. See Section 24.4 on page 200. 24.3 Internet Access I cannot access the Internet. 1 Check the hardware connections, and make sure the LEDs are behaving as expected. See the Quick Start Guide. 2 Make sure you entered your ISP account information correctly in the wizard. These fields are case-sensitive, so make sure [Caps Lock] is not on. 3 If you are trying to access the Internet wirelessly, make sure the wireless settings in the wireless client are the same as the settings in the AP. Go to Network > Wireless LAN > General > WDS and check if the NBG-417N is set to bridge mode. Select Disable and try to connect to the Internet again. 4 Disconnect all the cables from your device, and follow the directions in the Quick Start Guide again. 5 Go to Maintenance > Sys OP Mode > General. Check your System Operation Mode setting. Select Router if your device routes traffic between a local network and another network such as the Internet. Select Access Point if your device bridges traffic between clients on the same network. 6 If the problem continues, contact your ISP. 198 NBG-417N Users Guide Chapter 24Troubleshooting I cannot access the Internet anymore. I had access to the Internet (with the NBG-
417N), but my Internet connection is not available anymore. 1 Check the hardware connections, and make sure the LEDs are behaving as expected. See the Quick Start Guide and Section 1.5 on page 22. 2 Reboot the NBG-417N. 3 If the problem continues, contact your ISP. The Internet connection is slow or intermittent. 1 There might be a lot of traffic on the network. Look at the LEDs, and check Section 1.5 on page 22. If the NBG-417N is sending or receiving a lot of information, try closing some programs that use the Internet, especially peer-to-peer applications. 2 Check the signal strength. If the signal strength is low, try moving the NBG-417N closer to the AP if possible, and look around to see if there are any devices that might be interfering with the wireless network (for example, microwaves, other wireless networks, and so on). 3 Reboot the NBG-417N. 4 If the problem continues, contact the network administrator or vendor, or try one of the advanced suggestions. Advanced Suggestions Check the settings for bandwidth management. If it is disabled, you might consider activating it. If it is enabled, you might consider changing the allocations. Check the settings for QoS. If it is disabled, you might consider activating it. If it is enabled, you might consider raising or lowering the priority for some applications. NBG-417N Users Guide 199 Chapter 24Troubleshooting 24.4 Resetting the NBG-417N to Its Factory Defaults If you reset the NBG-417N, you lose all of the changes you have made. The NBG-
417N re-loads its default settings, and the password resets to 1234. You have to make all of your changes again. You will lose all of your changes when you push the RESET button. To reset the NBG-417N, 1 Make sure the power LED is on. 2 3 Press the RESET button for longer than 1 second to restart/reboot the NBG-417N. Press the RESET button for longer than five seconds to set the NBG-417N back to its factory-default configurations. If the NBG-417N restarts automatically, wait for the NBG-417N to finish restarting, and log in to the Web Configurator. The password is 1234. If the NBG-417N does not restart automatically, disconnect and reconnect the NBG-417Ns power. Then, follow the directions above again. 24.5 Wireless Router/AP Troubleshooting I cannot access the NBG-417N or ping any computer from the WLAN (wireless AP or router). 1 Make sure the wireless LAN is enabled on the NBG-417N 2 Make sure the wireless adapter on the wireless station is working properly. 3 Make sure the wireless adapter installed on your computer is IEEE 802.11 compatible and supports the same wireless standard as the NBG-417N. 4 Make sure your computer (with a wireless adapter installed) is within the transmission range of the NBG-417N. 200 NBG-417N Users Guide Chapter 24Troubleshooting 5 Check that both the NBG-417N and your wireless station are using the same wireless and wireless security settings. 6 Make sure traffic between the WLAN and the LAN is not blocked by the firewall on the NBG-417N. 7 Make sure you allow the NBG-417N to be remotely accessed through the WLAN interface. Check your remote management settings. See the chapter on Wireless LAN in the Users Guide for more information. to select Router Mode. I set up URL keyword blocking, but I can still access a website that should be blocked. Make sure that you select the Enable URL Keyword Blocking check box in the Content Filtering screen. Make sure that the keywords that you type are listed in the Keyword List. If a keyword that is listed in the Keyword List is not blocked when it is found in a URL, customize the keyword blocking using commands. See the Customizing Keyword Blocking URL Checking section in the Content Filter chapter. I can access the Internet, but I cannot open my network folders. In the Network > LAN > Advanced screen, make sure Allow between LAN and WAN is checked. This is not checked by default to keep the LAN secure. If you still cannot access a network folder, make sure your account has access rights to the folder you are trying to open. I can access the Web Configurator after I switched to AP mode. When you change from router mode to AP mode, your computer must have an IP address in the range between 192.168.1.3 and 192.168.1.254. Refer to Appendix D on page 227 for instructions on how to change your computers IP address. NBG-417N Users Guide 201 Chapter 24Troubleshooting 202 NBG-417N Users Guide PART VI Appendices and Index Product Specifications (205) Pop-up Windows, JavaScripts and Java Permissions (209) IP Addresses and Subnetting (217) Setting up Your Computers IP Address
(227) Wireless LANs (245) Services (257) Legal Information (261) Index (265) 203 204 APPENDIX A Product Specifications The following tables summarize the NBG-417Ns hardware and firmware features. Table 65 Hardware Features Dimensions (W x D x H) Weight Power Specification 140 mm x 110 mm x 30 mm 190 g Input: 120~240 AC, 50~60 Hz Output: 12 V DC 1A Ethernet portsAuto-negotiating: 10 Mbps, 100 Mbps in either half-duplex or full-
duplex mode. 4-5 Port Switch Auto-crossover: Use either crossover or straight-through Ethernet cables. A combination of switch and router makes your NBG-417N a cost-
effective and viable network solution. You can add up to four computers to the NBG-417N without the cost of a hub when connecting to the Internet through the WAN port. You can add up to five computers to the NBG-417N when you connect to the Internet in AP mode. Add more than four computers to your LAN by using a hub. LEDsPWR, LAN1-4, WAN, WLAN/WPS Reset Button WPS button Antenna Operation Environment Storage Environment The reset button is built into the rear panel. Use this button to restore the NBG-417N to its factory default settings. Press for 1 second to restart the device. Press for 5 seconds to restore to factory default settings. Press the WPS on two WPS enabled devices within 120 seconds for a security-enabled wireless connection. The NBG-417N is equipped with three 2dBi (2.4GHz) detachable antennas to provide clear radio transmission and reception on the wireless network. Temperature: 0 C ~ 40 C / 32F ~ 104F Humidity: 20% ~ 90%
Temperature: -30 C ~ 70 C / -22F ~ 158F Humidity: 20% ~ 95%
NBG-417N Users Guide 205 Appendix AProduct Specifications Table 66 Firmware Features FEATURE Default IP Address DESCRIPTION 192.168.1.1 (router) 192.168.1.2. (AP) 255.255.255.0 (24 bits) 1234 192.168.1.33 to 192.168.1.64 Default Subnet Mask Default Password DHCP Pool Wireless InterfaceWireless LAN Default Wireless SSIDWireless LAN: ZyXEL Wireless LAN when WPS enabled: ZyXEL WPS Wireless LAN: Same as LAN (192.168.1.1) Default Wireless IP Address Default Wireless Subnet Mask Default Wireless DHCP Pool Size Device ManagementUse the Web Configurator to easily configure the rich range of Wireless LAN: Same as LAN (32 from 192.168.1.33 to 192.168.1.64) Wireless LAN: Same as LAN (255.255.255.0) Wireless FunctionalityAllows IEEE 802.11b and/or IEEE 802.11g wireless clients to features on the NBG-417N. connect to the NBG-417N wirelessly. Enable wireless security (
WPA(2)-PSK) and/or MAC filtering to protect your wireless network. Note: The NBG-417N may be prone to RF (Radio Frequency) interference from other 2.4 GHz devices such as microwave ovens, wireless phones, Bluetooth enabled devices, and other wireless LANs. Firmware UpgradeDownload new firmware (when available) from the ZyXEL web site and use the Web Configurator to put it on the NBG-417N. Configuration Backup &
Restoration Network Address Translation (NAT) Note: Only upload firmware for your specific model!
Make a copy of the NBG-417Ns configuration and put it back on the NBG-417N later if you decide you want to revert back to an earlier configuration. Each computer on your network must have its own unique IP address. Use NAT to convert a single public IP address to multiple private IP addresses for the computers on your network. FirewallYou can configure firewall on the NBG-417N for secure Internet access. When the firewall is on, by default, all incoming traffic from the Internet to your network is blocked unless it is initiated from your network. This means that probes from the outside to your network are not allowed, but you can safely browse the Internet and download files for example. 206 NBG-417N Users Guide Appendix AProduct Specifications Table 66 Firmware Features FEATURE Content FilterThe NBG-417N blocks or allows access to web sites that you DESCRIPTION specify and blocks access to web sites with URLs that contain keywords that you specify. You can define time periods and days during which content filtering is enabled. You can also include or exclude particular computers on your network from content filtering. You can also subscribe to category-based content filtering that allows your NBG-417N to check web sites against an external database. Bandwidth Management You can efficiently manage traffic on your network by reserving bandwidth and giving priority to certain types of traffic and/or to particular computers. Remote ManagementThis allows you to decide whether a service (HTTP or FTP traffic for example) from a computer on a network (LAN or WAN for example) can access the NBG-417N. Wireless LAN SchedulerYou can schedule the times the Wireless LAN is enabled/
disabled. Time and DateGet the current time and date from an external server when you turn on your NBG-417N. You can also set the time manually. These dates and times are then used in logs. Port ForwardingIf you have a server (mail or web server for example) on your DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) network, then use this feature to let people access it from the Internet. Use this feature to have the NBG-417N assign IP addresses, an IP default gateway and DNS servers to computers on your network. Dynamic DNS SupportWith Dynamic DNS (Domain Name System) support, you can use a fixed URL, www.zyxel.com for example, with a dynamic IP address. You must register for this service with a Dynamic DNS service provider. IP MulticastIP Multicast is used to send traffic to a specific group of computers. The NBG-417N supports versions 1 and 2 of IGMP
(Internet Group Management Protocol) used to join multicast groups (see RFC 2236). LoggingUse logs for troubleshooting. You can view logs in the Web Configurator. PPPoEPPPoE mimics a dial-up Internet access connection. PPTP EncapsulationPoint-to-Point Tunneling Protocol (PPTP) enables secure Universal Plug and Play
(UPnP) transfer of data through a Virtual Private Network (VPN). The NBG-417N supports one PPTP connection at a time. The NBG-417N can communicate with other UPnP enabled devices in a network. NBG-417N Users Guide 207 Appendix AProduct Specifications 208 NBG-417N Users Guide APPENDIX B Pop-up Windows, JavaScripts and Java Permissions In order to use the Web Configurator you need to allow:
Web browser pop-up windows from your device. JavaScripts (enabled by default). Java permissions (enabled by default). Note: Internet Explorer 6 screens are used here. Screens for other Internet Explorer versions may vary. Internet Explorer Pop-up Blockers You may have to disable pop-up blocking to log into your device. Either disable pop-up blocking (enabled by default in Windows XP SP (Service Pack) 2) or allow pop-up blocking and create an exception for your devices IP address. Disable pop-up Blockers 1 In Internet Explorer, select Tools, Pop-up Blocker and then select Turn Off Pop-up Blocker. Figure 114 Pop-up Blocker You can also check if pop-up blocking is disabled in the Pop-up Blocker section in the Privacy tab. NBG-417N Users Guide 209 Appendix BPop-up Windows, JavaScripts and Java Permissions 1 In Internet Explorer, select Tools, Internet Options, Privacy. 2 Clear the Block pop-ups check box in the Pop-up Blocker section of the screen. This disables any web pop-up blockers you may have enabled. Figure 115 Internet Options: Privacy 3 Click Apply to save this setting. Enable pop-up Blockers with Exceptions Alternatively, if you only want to allow pop-up windows from your device, see the following steps. 1 In Internet Explorer, select Tools, Internet Options and then the Privacy tab. 210 NBG-417N Users Guide Appendix BPop-up Windows, JavaScripts and Java Permissions 2 Select Settingsto open the Pop-up Blocker Settings screen. Figure 116 Internet Options: Privacy 3 Type the IP address of your device (the web page that you do not want to have blocked) with the prefix http://. For example, http://192.168.167.1. NBG-417N Users Guide 211 Appendix BPop-up Windows, JavaScripts and Java Permissions 4 Click Add to move the IP address to the list of Allowed sites. Figure 117 Pop-up Blocker Settings 5 Click Close to return to the Privacy screen. 6 Click Apply to save this setting. JavaScripts If pages of the Web Configurator do not display properly in Internet Explorer, check that JavaScripts are allowed. 212 NBG-417N Users Guide Appendix BPop-up Windows, JavaScripts and Java Permissions 1 In Internet Explorer, click Tools, Internet Options and then the Security tab. Figure 118 Internet Options: Security 2 Click the Custom Level... button. 3 Scroll down to Scripting. 4 Under Active scripting make sure that Enable is selected (the default). 5 Under Scripting of Java applets make sure that Enable is selected (the default). NBG-417N Users Guide 213 Appendix BPop-up Windows, JavaScripts and Java Permissions 6 Click OK to close the window. Figure 119 Security Settings - Java Scripting Java Permissions 1 From Internet Explorer, click Tools, Internet Options and then the Security tab. 2 Click the Custom Level... button. 3 Scroll down to Microsoft VM. 4 Under Java permissions make sure that a safety level is selected. 214 NBG-417N Users Guide Appendix BPop-up Windows, JavaScripts and Java Permissions 5 Click OK to close the window. Figure 120 Security Settings - Java JAVA (Sun) 1 From Internet Explorer, click Tools, Internet Options and then the Advanced tab. 2 Make sure that Use Java 2 for <applet> under Java (Sun) is selected. NBG-417N Users Guide 215 Appendix BPop-up Windows, JavaScripts and Java Permissions 3 Click OK to close the window. Figure 121 Java (Sun) 216 NBG-417N Users Guide APPENDIX C IP Addresses and Subnetting This appendix introduces IP addresses and subnet masks. IP addresses identify individual devices on a network. Every networking device
(including computers, servers, routers, printers, etc.) needs an IP address to communicate across the network. These networking devices are also known as hosts. Subnet masks determine the maximum number of possible hosts on a network. You can also use subnet masks to divide one network into multiple sub-networks. Introduction to IP Addresses One part of the IP address is the network number, and the other part is the host ID. In the same way that houses on a street share a common street name, the hosts on a network share a common network number. Similarly, as each house has its own house number, each host on the network has its own unique identifying number - the host ID. Routers use the network number to send packets to the correct network, while the host ID determines to which host on the network the packets are delivered. Structure An IP address is made up of four parts, written in dotted decimal notation (for example, 192.168.1.1). Each of these four parts is known as an octet. An octet is an eight-digit binary number (for example 11000000, which is 192 in decimal notation). Therefore, each octet has a possible range of 00000000 to 11111111 in binary, or 0 to 255 in decimal. NBG-417N Users Guide 217 Appendix CIP Addresses and Subnetting The following figure shows an example IP address in which the first three octets
(192.168.1) are the network number, and the fourth octet (16) is the host ID. Figure 122 Network Number and Host ID How much of the IP address is the network number and how much is the host ID varies according to the subnet mask. Subnet Masks A subnet mask is used to determine which bits are part of the network number, and which bits are part of the host ID (using a logical AND operation). The term subnet is short for sub-network. A subnet mask has 32 bits. If a bit in the subnet mask is a 1 then the corresponding bit in the IP address is part of the network number. If a bit in the subnet mask is 0 then the corresponding bit in the IP address is part of the host ID. The following example shows a subnet mask identifying the network number (in bold text) and host ID of an IP address (192.168.1.2 in decimal). Table 67 Subnet Mask - Identifying Network Number 1ST OCTET:
(192) 2ND OCTET:
(168) 3RD OCTET:
(1) 4TH OCTET
(2) IP Address (Binary)11000000101010000000000100000010 Subnet Mask (Binary) 111111111111111111111111 00000000 218 NBG-417N Users Guide Table 67 Subnet Mask - Identifying Network Number Appendix CIP Addresses and Subnetting 1ST OCTET:
(192) 110000001010100000000001 2ND OCTET:
(168) 3RD OCTET:
(1) 4TH OCTET
(2) Network Number Host ID00000010 By convention, subnet masks always consist of a continuous sequence of ones beginning from the leftmost bit of the mask, followed by a continuous sequence of zeros, for a total number of 32 bits. Subnet masks can be referred to by the size of the network number part (the bits with a 1 value). For example, an 8-bit mask means that the first 8 bits of the mask are ones and the remaining 24 bits are zeroes. Subnet masks are expressed in dotted decimal notation just like IP addresses. The following examples show the binary and decimal notation for 8-bit, 16-bit, 24-bit and 29-bit subnet masks. Table 68 Subnet Masks BINARY 1ST OCTET 8-bit mask 11111111 11111111 16-bit mask 24-bit mask 29-bit mask 11111111 11111111 2ND OCTET 00000000 11111111 3RD OCTET 00000000 00000000 4TH OCTET 00000000 00000000 DECIMAL 255.0.0.0 255.255.0.0 11111111 11111111 00000000 255.255.255.0 11111111 11111111 11111000 255.255.255.24 8 Network Size The size of the network number determines the maximum number of possible hosts you can have on your network. The larger the number of network number bits, the smaller the number of remaining host ID bits. An IP address with host IDs of all zeros is the IP address of the network
(192.168.1.0 with a 24-bit subnet mask, for example). An IP address with host IDs of all ones is the broadcast address for that network (192.168.1.255 with a 24-bit subnet mask, for example). NBG-417N Users Guide 219 Appendix CIP Addresses and Subnetting As these two IP addresses cannot be used for individual hosts, calculate the maximum number of possible hosts in a network as follows:
Table 69 Maximum Host Numbers SUBNET MASK HOST ID SIZE MAXIMUM NUMBER OF HOSTS 8 bits255.0.0.024 bits 16 bits255.255.0.016 bits 24 bits255.255.255.08 bits 29 bits255.255.255.2 3 bits 2 2 2 24 216777214 16 265534 8 2254 23 2 6 48 Notation Since the mask is always a continuous number of ones beginning from the left, followed by a continuous number of zeros for the remainder of the 32 bit mask, you can simply specify the number of ones instead of writing the value of each octet. This is usually specified by writing a / followed by the number of bits in the mask after the address. For example, 192.1.1.0 /25 is equivalent to saying 192.1.1.0 with subnet mask 255.255.255.128. The following table shows some possible subnet masks using both notations.
/26 LAST OCTET
(BINARY) 0000 0000 1000 0000 ALTERNATIVE NOTATION
/24
/25 Table 70 Alternative Subnet Mask Notation SUBNET MASK 255.255.255.0 255.255.255.12 8 255.255.255.19 2 255.255.255.22 4 255.255.255.24 0 255.255.255.24 8 255.255.255.25 2 1111 1000 1111 1100 1111 0000 1100 0000 1110 0000
/29
/30
/28
/27 LAST OCTET
(DECIMAL) 0 128 192 224 240 248 252 220 NBG-417N Users Guide Appendix CIP Addresses and Subnetting Subnetting You can use subnetting to divide one network into multiple sub-networks. In the following example a network administrator creates two sub-networks to isolate a group of servers from the rest of the company network for security reasons. In this example, the company network address is 192.168.1.0. The first three octets of the address (192.168.1) are the network number, and the remaining octet is the host ID, allowing a maximum of 28 2 or 254 possible hosts. The following figure shows the company network before subnetting. Figure 123 Subnetting Example: Before Subnetting You can borrow one of the host ID bits to divide the network 192.168.1.0 into two separate sub-networks. The subnet mask is now 25 bits (255.255.255.128 or
/25). The borrowed host ID bit can have a value of either 0 or 1, allowing two subnets; 192.168.1.0 /25 and 192.168.1.128 /25. NBG-417N Users Guide 221 Appendix CIP Addresses and Subnetting The following figure shows the company network after subnetting. There are now two sub-networks, A and B. Figure 124 Subnetting Example: After Subnetting In a 25-bit subnet the host ID has 7 bits, so each sub-network has a maximum of 27 2 or 126 possible hosts (a host ID of all zeroes is the subnets address itself, all ones is the subnets broadcast address). 192.168.1.0 with mask 255.255.255.128 is subnet A itself, and 192.168.1.127 with mask 255.255.255.128 is its broadcast address. Therefore, the lowest IP address that can be assigned to an actual host for subnet A is 192.168.1.1 and the highest is 192.168.1.126. Similarly, the host ID range for subnet B is 192.168.1.129 to 192.168.1.254. Example: Four Subnets The previous example illustrated using a 25-bit subnet mask to divide a 24-bit address into two subnets. Similarly, to divide a 24-bit address into four subnets, you need to borrow two host ID bits to give four possible combinations (00, 01, 10 and 11). The subnet mask is 26 bits
(11111111.11111111.11111111.11000000) or 255.255.255.192. 222 NBG-417N Users Guide Appendix CIP Addresses and Subnetting Each subnet contains 6 host ID bits, giving 26 - 2 or 62 hosts for each subnet (a host ID of all zeroes is the subnet itself, all ones is the subnets broadcast address). Table 71 Subnet 1 IP/SUBNET MASK IP Address (Decimal) IP Address (Binary) Subnet Mask (Binary) Subnet Address:
192.168.1.0 Broadcast Address:
192.168.1.63 Table 72 Subnet 2 IP/SUBNET MASK IP Address IP Address (Binary) Subnet Mask (Binary) Subnet Address:
192.168.1.64 Broadcast Address:
192.168.1.127 Table 73 Subnet 3 IP/SUBNET MASK IP Address IP Address (Binary) Subnet Mask (Binary) Subnet Address:
192.168.1.128 Broadcast Address:
192.168.1.191 Table 74 Subnet 4 IP/SUBNET MASK IP Address IP Address (Binary) Subnet Mask (Binary) NETWORK NUMBER 192.168.1. 11000000.10101000.00000001. 00000000 11111111.11111111.11111111. 11000000 Lowest Host ID: 192.168.1.1 LAST OCTET BIT VALUE 0 Highest Host ID: 192.168.1.62 NETWORK NUMBER LAST OCTET BIT VALUE 64 192.168.1. 11000000.10101000.00000001. 01000000 11111111.11111111.11111111. 11000000 Lowest Host ID: 192.168.1.65 Highest Host ID: 192.168.1.126 NETWORK NUMBER LAST OCTET BIT VALUE 128 192.168.1. 11000000.10101000.00000001. 10000000 11111111.11111111.11111111. 11000000 Lowest Host ID: 192.168.1.129 Highest Host ID: 192.168.1.190 NETWORK NUMBER 192.168.1. 11000000.10101000.00000001
. 11111111.11111111.11111111
. LAST OCTET BIT VALUE 192 11000000 11000000 NBG-417N Users Guide 223 Appendix CIP Addresses and Subnetting Table 74 Subnet 4 (continued) IP/SUBNET MASK NETWORK NUMBER Subnet Address:
192.168.1.192 Broadcast Address:
192.168.1.255 Lowest Host ID: 192.168.1.193 Highest Host ID: 192.168.1.254 LAST OCTET BIT VALUE Example: Eight Subnets Similarly, use a 27-bit mask to create eight subnets (000, 001, 010, 011, 100, 101, 110 and 111). The following table shows IP address last octet values for each subnet. Table 75 Eight Subnets SUBNET SUBNET ADDRESS 0 32 64 96 128 160 192 224 FIRST ADDRESS LAST 1 33 65 97 129 161 193 225 ADDRESS 30 62 94 126 158 190 222 254 BROADCAST ADDRESS 31 63 95 127 159 191 223 255 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Subnet Planning The following table is a summary for subnet planning on a network with a 24-bit network number. SUBNET MASK Table 76 24-bit Network Number Subnet Planning NO. BORROWED HOST BITS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 255.255.255.128 (/25) 255.255.255.192 (/26) 255.255.255.224 (/27) 255.255.255.240 (/28) 255.255.255.248 (/29) 255.255.255.252 (/30) 255.255.255.254 (/31) NO. SUBNETS NO. HOSTS PER 2 4 8 16 32 64 128 SUBNET 126 62 30 14 6 2 1 224 NBG-417N Users Guide Appendix CIP Addresses and Subnetting The following table is a summary for subnet planning on a network with a 16-bit network number. SUBNET MASK Table 77 16-bit Network Number Subnet Planning NO. BORROWED HOST BITS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 255.255.128.0 (/17) 255.255.192.0 (/18) 255.255.224.0 (/19) 255.255.240.0 (/20) 255.255.248.0 (/21) 255.255.252.0 (/22) 255.255.254.0 (/23) 255.255.255.0 (/24) 255.255.255.128 (/25) 255.255.255.192 (/26) 255.255.255.224 (/27) 255.255.255.240 (/28) 255.255.255.248 (/29) 255.255.255.252 (/30) 255.255.255.254 (/31) NO. SUBNETS NO. HOSTS PER 2 4 8 16 32 64 128 256 512 1024 2048 4096 8192 16384 32768 SUBNET 32766 16382 8190 4094 2046 1022 510 254 126 62 30 14 6 2 1 Configuring IP Addresses Where you obtain your network number depends on your particular situation. If the ISP or your network administrator assigns you a block of registered IP addresses, follow their instructions in selecting the IP addresses and the subnet mask. If the ISP did not explicitly give you an IP network number, then most likely you have a single user account and the ISP will assign you a dynamic IP address when the connection is established. If this is the case, it is recommended that you select a network number from 192.168.0.0 to 192.168.255.0. The Internet Assigned Number Authority (IANA) reserved this block of addresses specifically for private use; please do not use any other number unless you are told otherwise. You must also enable Network Address Translation (NAT) on the NBG-417N. Once you have decided on the network number, pick an IP address for your NBG-
417N that is easy to remember (for instance, 192.168.1.1) but make sure that no other device on your network is using that IP address. The subnet mask specifies the network number portion of an IP address. Your NBG-417N will compute the subnet mask automatically based on the IP address NBG-417N Users Guide 225 Appendix CIP Addresses and Subnetting that you entered. You don't need to change the subnet mask computed by the NBG-417N unless you are instructed to do otherwise. Private IP Addresses Every machine on the Internet must have a unique address. If your networks are isolated from the Internet (running only between two branch offices, for example) you can assign any IP addresses to the hosts without problems. However, the Internet Assigned Numbers Authority (IANA) has reserved the following three blocks of IP addresses specifically for private networks:
10.0.0.0 10.255.255.255 172.16.0.0 172.31.255.255 192.168.0.0 192.168.255.255 You can obtain your IP address from the IANA, from an ISP, or it can be assigned from a private network. If you belong to a small organization and your Internet access is through an ISP, the ISP can provide you with the Internet addresses for your local networks. On the other hand, if you are part of a much larger organization, you should consult your network administrator for the appropriate IP addresses. Regardless of your particular situation, do not create an arbitrary IP address;
always follow the guidelines above. For more information on address assignment, please refer to RFC 1597, Address Allocation for Private Internets and RFC 1466, Guidelines for Management of IP Address Space. 226 NBG-417N Users Guide APPENDIX D Setting up Your Computers IP Address All computers must have a 10M or 100M Ethernet adapter card and TCP/IP installed. Windows 95/98/Me/NT/2000/XP, Macintosh OS 7 and later operating systems and all versions of UNIX/LINUX include the software components you need to install and use TCP/IP on your computer. Windows 3.1 requires the purchase of a third-
party TCP/IP application package. TCP/IP should already be installed on computers using Windows NT/2000/XP, Macintosh OS 7 and later operating systems. After the appropriate TCP/IP components are installed, configure the TCP/IP settings in order to "communicate" with your network. If you manually assign IP information instead of using dynamic assignment, make sure that your computers have IP addresses that place them in the same subnet as the Prestiges LAN port. NBG-417N Users Guide 227 Appendix DSetting up Your Computer s IP Address Windows 95/98/Me Click Start, Settings, Control Panel and double-click the Network icon to open the Network window. Figure 125 WIndows 95/98/Me: Network: Configuration Installing Components The Network window Configuration tab displays a list of installed components. You need a network adapter, the TCP/IP protocol and Client for Microsoft Networks. If you need the adapter:
1 In the Network window, click Add. 2 Select Adapter and then click Add. 3 Select the manufacturer and model of your network adapter and then click OK. If you need TCP/IP:
1 In the Network window, click Add. 2 Select Protocol and then click Add. 228 NBG-417N Users Guide Appendix DSetting up Your Computer s IP Address 3 Select Microsoft from the list of manufacturers. 4 Select TCP/IP from the list of network protocols and then click OK. If you need Client for Microsoft Networks:
1 Click Add. 2 Select Client and then click Add. 3 Select Microsoft from the list of manufacturers. 4 Select Client for Microsoft Networks from the list of network clients and then click OK. 5 Restart your computer so the changes you made take effect. Configuring 1 In the Network window Configuration tab, select your network adapter's TCP/IP entry and click Properties 2 Click the IP Address tab. If your IP address is dynamic, select Obtain an IP address automatically. If you have a static IP address, select Specify an IP address and type your information into the IP Address and Subnet Mask fields. Figure 126 Windows 95/98/Me: TCP/IP Properties: IP Address NBG-417N Users Guide 229 Appendix DSetting up Your Computer s IP Address 3 Click the DNS Configuration tab. If you do not know your DNS information, select Disable DNS. If you know your DNS information, select Enable DNS and type the information in the fields below (you may not need to fill them all in). Figure 127 Windows 95/98/Me: TCP/IP Properties: DNS Configuration 4 Click the Gateway tab. If you do not know your gateways IP address, remove previously installed gateways. If you have a gateway IP address, type it in the New gateway field and click Add. 5 Click OK to save and close the TCP/IP Properties window. 6 Click OK to close the Network window. Insert the Windows CD if prompted. 7 Turn on your Prestige and restart your computer when prompted. Verifying Settings 1 Click Start and then Run. 2 In the Run window, type "winipcfg" and then click OK to open the IP Configuration window. 230 NBG-417N Users Guide Appendix DSetting up Your Computer s IP Address 3 Select your network adapter. You should see your computer's IP address, subnet mask and default gateway. Windows 2000/NT/XP The following example figures use the default Windows XP GUI theme. 1 Click start (Start in Windows 2000/NT), Settings, Control Panel. Figure 128 Windows XP: Start Menu NBG-417N Users Guide 231 Appendix DSetting up Your Computer s IP Address 2 In the Control Panel, double-click Network Connections (Network and Dial-
up Connections in Windows 2000/NT). Figure 129 Windows XP: Control Panel 3 Right-click Local Area Connection and then click Properties. Figure 130 Windows XP: Control Panel: Network Connections: Properties 232 NBG-417N Users Guide Appendix DSetting up Your Computer s IP Address 4 Select Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) (under the General tab in Win XP) and then click Properties. Figure 131 Windows XP: Local Area Connection Properties 5 The Internet Protocol TCP/IP Properties window opens (the General tab in Windows XP). If you have a dynamic IP address click Obtain an IP address automatically. If you have a static IP address click Use the following IP Address and fill in the IP address, Subnet mask, and Default gateway fields. NBG-417N Users Guide 233 Appendix DSetting up Your Computer s IP Address Click Advanced. Figure 132 Windows XP: Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties 6 If you do not know your gateway's IP address, remove any previously installed gateways in the IP Settings tab and click OK. Do one or more of the following if you want to configure additional IP addresses:
In the IP Settings tab, in IP addresses, click Add. In TCP/IP Address, type an IP address in IP address and a subnet mask in Subnet mask, and then click Add. Repeat the above two steps for each IP address you want to add. Configure additional default gateways in the IP Settings tab by clicking Add in Default gateways. In TCP/IP Gateway Address, type the IP address of the default gateway in Gateway. To manually configure a default metric (the number of transmission hops), clear the Automatic metric check box and type a metric in Metric. Click Add. Repeat the previous three steps for each default gateway you want to add. 234 NBG-417N Users Guide Appendix DSetting up Your Computer s IP Address Click OK when finished. Figure 133 Windows XP: Advanced TCP/IP Properties 7 In the Internet Protocol TCP/IP Properties window (the General tab in Windows XP):
Click Obtain DNS server address automatically if you do not know your DNS server IP address(es). If you know your DNS server IP address(es), click Use the following DNS server addresses, and type them in the Preferred DNS server and Alternate DNS server fields. NBG-417N Users Guide 235 Appendix DSetting up Your Computer s IP Address If you have previously configured DNS servers, click Advanced and then the DNS tab to order them. Figure 134 Windows XP: Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties 8 Click OK to close the Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties window. 9 Click Close (OK in Windows 2000/NT) to close the Local Area Connection Properties window. 10 Close the Network Connections window (Network and Dial-up Connections in Windows 2000/NT). 11 Turn on your Prestige and restart your computer (if prompted). Verifying Settings 1 Click Start, All Programs, Accessories and then Command Prompt. 2 In the Command Prompt window, type "ipconfig" and then press [ENTER]. You can also open Network Connections, right-click a network connection, click Status and then click the Support tab. 236 NBG-417N Users Guide Appendix DSetting up Your Computer s IP Address Macintosh OS 8/9 1 Click the Apple menu, Control Panel and double-click TCP/IP to open the TCP/
IP Control Panel. Figure 135 Macintosh OS 8/9: Apple Menu NBG-417N Users Guide 237 Appendix DSetting up Your Computer s IP Address 2 Select Ethernet built-in from the Connect via list. Figure 136 Macintosh OS 8/9: TCP/IP 3 4 For dynamically assigned settings, select Using DHCP Server from the Configure: list. For statically assigned settings, do the following:
From the Configure box, select Manually. Type your IP address in the IP Address box. Type your subnet mask in the Subnet mask box. Type the IP address of your Prestige in the Router address box. 5 Close the TCP/IP Control Panel. 6 Click Save if prompted, to save changes to your configuration. 7 Turn on your Prestige and restart your computer (if prompted). Verifying Settings Check your TCP/IP properties in the TCP/IP Control Panel window. 238 NBG-417N Users Guide Appendix DSetting up Your Computer s IP Address Macintosh OS X 1 Click the Apple menu, and click System Preferences to open the System Preferences window. Figure 137 Macintosh OS X: Apple Menu 2 Click Network in the icon bar. Select Automatic from the Location list. Select Built-in Ethernet from the Show list. Click the TCP/IP tab. 3 For dynamically assigned settings, select Using DHCP from the Configure list. Figure 138 Macintosh OS X: Network NBG-417N Users Guide 239 Appendix DSetting up Your Computer s IP Address 4 For statically assigned settings, do the following:
From the Configure box, select Manually. Type your IP address in the IP Address box. Type your subnet mask in the Subnet mask box. Type the IP address of your Prestige in the Router address box. 5 Click Apply Now and close the window. 6 Turn on your Prestige and restart your computer (if prompted). Verifying Settings Check your TCP/IP properties in the Network window. Linux This section shows you how to configure your computers TCP/IP settings in Red Hat Linux 9.0. Procedure, screens and file location may vary depending on your Linux distribution and release version. Note: Make sure you are logged in as the root administrator. Using the K Desktop Environment (KDE) Follow the steps below to configure your computer IP address using the KDE. 1 Click the Red Hat button (located on the bottom left corner), select System Setting and click Network. Figure 139 Red Hat 9.0: KDE: Network Configuration: Devices 240 NBG-417N Users Guide Appendix DSetting up Your Computer s IP Address 2 Double-click on the profile of the network card you wish to configure. The Ethernet Device General screen displays as shown. Figure 140 Red Hat 9.0: KDE: Ethernet Device: General If you have a dynamic IP address click Automatically obtain IP address settings with and select dhcp from the drop down list. If you have a static IP address click Statically set IP Addresses and fill in the Address, Subnet mask, and Default Gateway Address fields. 3 Click OK to save the changes and close the Ethernet Device General screen. 4 If you know your DNS server IP address(es), click the DNS tab in the Network Configuration screen. Enter the DNS server information in the fields provided. Figure 141 Red Hat 9.0: KDE: Network Configuration: DNS NBG-417N Users Guide 241 Appendix DSetting up Your Computer s IP Address 5 Click the Devices tab. 6 Click the Activate button to apply the changes. The following screen displays. Click Yes to save the changes in all screens. Figure 142 Red Hat 9.0: KDE: Network Configuration: Activate 7 After the network card restart process is complete, make sure the Status is Active in the Network Configuration screen. Using Configuration Files Follow the steps below to edit the network configuration files and set your computer IP address. 1 Assuming that you have only one network card on the computer, locate the ifconfig-eth0 configuration file (where eth0 is the name of the Ethernet card). Open the configuration file with any plain text editor. If you have a dynamic IP address, enter dhcp in the BOOTPROTO= field. The following figure shows an example. Figure 143 Red Hat 9.0: Dynamic IP Address Setting in ifconfig-eth0 DEVICE=eth0 ONBOOT=yes BOOTPROTO=dhcp USERCTL=no PEERDNS=yes TYPE=Ethernet 242 NBG-417N Users Guide Appendix DSetting up Your Computer s IP Address If you have a static IP address, enter static in the BOOTPROTO= field. Type IPADDR= followed by the IP address (in dotted decimal notation) and type NETMASK= followed by the subnet mask. The following example shows an example where the static IP address is 192.168.1.10 and the subnet mask is 255.255.255.0. Figure 144 Red Hat 9.0: Static IP Address Setting in ifconfig-eth0 DEVICE=eth0 ONBOOT=yes BOOTPROTO=static IPADDR=192.168.1.10 NETMASK=255.255.255.0 USERCTL=no PEERDNS=yes TYPE=Ethernet 2 If you know your DNS server IP address(es), enter the DNS server information in the resolv.conf file in the /etc directory. The following figure shows an example where two DNS server IP addresses are specified. Figure 145 Red Hat 9.0: DNS Settings in resolv.conf nameserver 172.23.5.1 nameserver 172.23.5.2 3 After you edit and save the configuration files, you must restart the network card. Enter./network restart in the /etc/rc.d/init.d directory. The following figure shows an example. Figure 146 Red Hat 9.0: Restart Ethernet Card
[root@localhost init.d]# network restart Shutting down interface eth0: [OK]
Shutting down loopback interface: [OK]
Setting network parameters: [OK]
Bringing up loopback interface: [OK]
Bringing up interface eth0: [OK]
NBG-417N Users Guide 243 Appendix DSetting up Your Computer s IP Address 24.5.1 Verifying Settings Enter ifconfig in a terminal screen to check your TCP/IP properties. Figure 147 Red Hat 9.0: Checking TCP/IP Properties
[root@localhost]# ifconfig eth0 Link encap:Ethernet HWaddr 00:50:BA:72:5B:44 inet addr:172.23.19.129 Bcast:172.23.19.255 Mask:255.255.255.0 UP BROADCAST RUNNING MULTICAST MTU:1500 Metric:1 RX packets:717 errors:0 dropped:0 overruns:0 frame:0 TX packets:13 errors:0 dropped:0 overruns:0 carrier:0 collisions:0 txqueuelen:100 RX bytes:730412 (713.2 Kb) TX bytes:1570 (1.5 Kb) Interrupt:10 Base address:0x1000
[root@localhost]#
244 NBG-417N Users Guide APPENDIX E Wireless LANs Wireless LAN Topologies This section discusses ad-hoc and infrastructure wireless LAN topologies. Ad-hoc Wireless LAN Configuration The simplest WLAN configuration is an independent (Ad-hoc) WLAN that connects a set of computers with wireless stations (A, B, C). Any time two or more wireless adapters are within range of each other, they can set up an independent network, which is commonly referred to as an Ad-hoc network or Independent Basic Service Set (IBSS). The following diagram shows an example of notebook computers using wireless adapters to form an Ad-hoc wireless LAN. Figure 148 Peer-to-Peer Communication in an Ad-hoc Network BSS A Basic Service Set (BSS) exists when all communications between wireless stations or between a wireless station and a wired network client go through one access point (AP). Intra-BSS traffic is traffic between wireless stations in the BSS. When Intra-BSS is enabled, wireless station A and B can access the wired network and communicate NBG-417N Users Guide 245 Appendix EWireless LANs with each other. When Intra-BSS is disabled, wireless station A and B can still access the wired network but cannot communicate with each other. Figure 149 Basic Service Set ESS An Extended Service Set (ESS) consists of a series of overlapping BSSs, each containing an access point, with each access point connected together by a wired network. This wired connection between APs is called a Distribution System (DS). This type of wireless LAN topology is called an Infrastructure WLAN. The Access Points not only provide communication with the wired network but also mediate wireless network traffic in the immediate neighborhood. 246 NBG-417N Users Guide Appendix EWireless LANs An ESSID (ESS IDentification) uniquely identifies each ESS. All access points and their associated wireless stations within the same ESS must have the same ESSID in order to communicate. Figure 150 Infrastructure WLAN Channel A channel is the radio frequency(ies) used by IEEE 802.11a/b/g wireless devices. Channels available depend on your geographical area. You may have a choice of channels (for your region) so you should use a different channel than an adjacent AP (access point) to reduce interference. Interference occurs when radio signals from different access points overlap causing interference and degrading performance. Adjacent channels partially overlap however. To avoid interference due to overlap, your AP should be on a channel at least five channels away from a channel that an adjacent AP is using. For example, if your region has 11 channels and an adjacent AP is using channel 1, then you need to select a channel between 6 or 11. RTS/CTS A hidden node occurs when two stations are within range of the same access point, but are not within range of each other. The following figure illustrates a hidden node. Both stations (STA) are within range of the access point (AP) or NBG-417N Users Guide 247 Appendix EWireless LANs wireless gateway, but out-of-range of each other, so they cannot "hear" each other, that is they do not know if the channel is currently being used. Therefore, they are considered hidden from each other. Figure 151 RTS/CTS When station A sends data to the AP, it might not know that the station B is already using the channel. If these two stations send data at the same time, collisions may occur when both sets of data arrive at the AP at the same time, resulting in a loss of messages for both stations. RTS/CTS is designed to prevent collisions due to hidden nodes. An RTS/CTS defines the biggest size data frame you can send before an RTS (Request To Send)/CTS (Clear to Send) handshake is invoked. When a data frame exceeds the RTS/CTS value you set (between 0 to 2432 bytes), the station that wants to transmit this frame must first send an RTS
(Request To Send) message to the AP for permission to send it. The AP then responds with a CTS (Clear to Send) message to all other stations within its range to notify them to defer their transmission. It also reserves and confirms with the requesting station the time frame for the requested transmission. Stations can send frames smaller than the specified RTS/CTS directly to the AP without the RTS (Request To Send)/CTS (Clear to Send) handshake. You should only configure RTS/CTS if the possibility of hidden nodes exists on your network and the "cost" of resending large frames is more than the extra network overhead involved in the RTS (Request To Send)/CTS (Clear to Send) handshake. If the RTS/CTS value is greater than the Fragmentation Threshold value (see next), then the RTS (Request To Send)/CTS (Clear to Send) handshake will never occur as data frames will be fragmented before they reach RTS/CTS size. Note: Enabling the RTS Threshold causes redundant network overhead that could negatively affect the throughput performance instead of providing a remedy. 248 NBG-417N Users Guide Appendix EWireless LANs several intermediate rate steps between the maximum and minimum data rates. The IEEE 802.11g data rate and modulation are as follows:
MODULATION Table 78 IEEE 802.11g DATA RATE
(MBPS) 1DBPSK (Differential Binary Phase Shift Keyed) 2DQPSK (Differential Quadrature Phase Shift Keying) 5.5 / 11CCK (Complementary Code Keying) 6/9/12/18/24/36/
48/54 OFDM (Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing) IEEE 802.1x In June 2001, the IEEE 802.1x standard was designed to extend the features of IEEE 802.11 to support extended authentication as well as providing additional accounting and control features. It is supported by Windows XP and a number of network devices. Some advantages of IEEE 802.1x are:
User based identification that allows for roaming. Support for RADIUS (Remote Authentication Dial In User Service, RFC 2138, 2139) for centralized user profile and accounting management on a network RADIUS server. Support for EAP (Extensible Authentication Protocol, RFC 2486) that allows additional authentication methods to be deployed with no changes to the access point or the wireless stations. RADIUS RADIUS is based on a client-server model that supports authentication, authorization and accounting. The access point is the client and the server is the RADIUS server. The RADIUS server handles the following tasks:
Authentication Determines the identity of the users. Authorization Determines the network services available to authenticated users once they are connected to the network. Accounting Keeps track of the clients network activity. RADIUS is a simple package exchange in which your AP acts as a message relay between the wireless station and the network RADIUS server. 250 NBG-417N Users Guide Types of RADIUS Messages The following types of RADIUS messages are exchanged between the access point and the RADIUS server for user authentication:
Appendix EWireless LANs Access-Request Sent by an access point requesting authentication. Access-Reject Sent by a RADIUS server rejecting access. Access-Accept Sent by a RADIUS server allowing access. Access-Challenge Sent by a RADIUS server requesting more information in order to allow access. The access point sends a proper response from the user and then sends another Access-Request message. The following types of RADIUS messages are exchanged between the access point and the RADIUS server for user accounting:
Accounting-Request Sent by the access point requesting accounting. Accounting-Response Sent by the RADIUS server to indicate that it has started or stopped accounting. In order to ensure network security, the access point and the RADIUS server use a shared secret key, which is a password, they both know. The key is not sent over the network. In addition to the shared key, password information exchanged is also encrypted to protect the network from unauthorized access. Types of Authentication This appendix discusses some popular authentication types: EAP-MD5, EAP-TLS, EAP-TTLS, PEAP and LEAP. The type of authentication you use depends on the RADIUS server or the AP. Consult your network administrator for more information. EAP-MD5 (Message-Digest Algorithm 5) MD5 authentication is the simplest one-way authentication method. The authentication server sends a challenge to the wireless station. The wireless station proves that it knows the password by encrypting the password with the challenge and sends back the information. Password is not sent in plain text. NBG-417N Users Guide 251 Appendix EWireless LANs However, MD5 authentication has some weaknesses. Since the authentication server needs to get the plaintext passwords, the passwords must be stored. Thus someone other than the authentication server may access the password file. In addition, it is possible to impersonate an authentication server as MD5 authentication method does not perform mutual authentication. Finally, MD5 authentication method does not support data encryption with dynamic session key. You must configure WEP encryption keys for data encryption. EAP-TLS (Transport Layer Security) With EAP-TLS, digital certifications are needed by both the server and the wireless stations for mutual authentication. The server presents a certificate to the client. After validating the identity of the server, the client sends a different certificate to the server. The exchange of certificates is done in the open before a secured tunnel is created. This makes user identity vulnerable to passive attacks. A digital certificate is an electronic ID card that authenticates the senders identity. However, to implement EAP-TLS, you need a Certificate Authority (CA) to handle certificates, which imposes a management overhead. EAP-TTLS (Tunneled Transport Layer Service) EAP-TTLS is an extension of the EAP-TLS authentication that uses certificates for only the server-side authentications to establish a secure connection. Client authentication is then done by sending username and password through the secure connection, thus client identity is protected. For client authentication, EAP-
TTLS supports EAP methods and legacy authentication methods such as PAP, CHAP, MS-CHAP and MS-CHAP v2. PEAP (Protected EAP) Like EAP-TTLS, server-side certificate authentication is used to establish a secure connection, then use simple username and password methods through the secured connection to authenticate the clients, thus hiding client identity. However, PEAP only supports EAP methods, such as EAP-MD5, EAP-MSCHAPv2 and EAP-GTC (EAP-Generic Token Card), for client authentication. EAP-GTC is implemented only by Cisco. LEAP LEAP (Lightweight Extensible Authentication Protocol) is a Cisco implementation of IEEE 802.1x. Dynamic WEP Key Exchange The AP maps a unique key that is generated with the RADIUS server. This key expires when the wireless connection times out, disconnects or reauthentication times out. A new WEP key is generated each time reauthentication is performed. 252 NBG-417N Users Guide Appendix EWireless LANs If this feature is enabled, it is not necessary to configure a default encryption key in the Wireless screen. You may still configure and store keys here, but they will not be used while Dynamic WEP is enabled. Note: EAP-MD5 cannot be used with dynamic WEP key exchange For added security, certificate-based authentications (EAP-TLS, EAP-TTLS and PEAP) use dynamic keys for data encryption. They are often deployed in corporate environments, but for public deployment, a simple user name and password pair is more practical. The following table is a comparison of the features of authentication types. Table 79 Comparison of EAP Authentication Types Mutual Authentication Certificate Client Certificate Server Dynamic Key Exchange Credential Integrity Deployment Difficulty Client Identity Protection EAP-MD5 No No No No None Easy No EAP-TLS EAP-TTLS Yes Yes Yes Yes Strong Hard No Yes Optional Yes Yes Strong Moderate Yes LEAP PEAP Yes Yes No Optional No Yes Yes Yes Strong Moderate Moderate Moderate Yes No WPA(2) Wi-Fi Protected Access (WPA) is a subset of the IEEE 802.11i standard. WPA2
(IEEE 802.11i) is a wireless security standard that defines stronger encryption, authentication and key management than WPA. Key differences between WPA(2) and WEP are improved data encryption and user authentication. Encryption Both WPA and WPA2 improve data encryption by using Temporal Key Integrity Protocol (TKIP), Message Integrity Check (MIC) and IEEE 802.1x. In addition to TKIP, WPA2 also uses Advanced Encryption Standard (AES) in the Counter mode with Cipher block chaining Message authentication code Protocol (CCMP) to offer stronger encryption. Temporal Key Integrity Protocol (TKIP) uses 128-bit keys that are dynamically generated and distributed by the authentication server. It includes a per-packet key mixing function, a Message Integrity Check (MIC) named Michael, an extended initialization vector (IV) with sequencing rules, and a re-keying mechanism. NBG-417N Users Guide 253 Appendix EWireless LANs TKIP regularly changes and rotates the encryption keys so that the same encryption key is never used twice. The RADIUS server distributes a Pairwise Master Key (PMK) key to the AP that then sets up a key hierarchy and management system, using the pair-wise key to dynamically generate unique data encryption keys to encrypt every data packet that is wirelessly communicated between the AP and the wireless clients. This all happens in the background automatically. WPA2 AES (Advanced Encryption Standard) is a block cipher that uses a 256-bit mathematical algorithm called Rijndael. The Message Integrity Check (MIC) is designed to prevent an attacker from capturing data packets, altering them and resending them. The MIC provides a strong mathematical function in which the receiver and the transmitter each compute and then compare the MIC. If they do not match, it is assumed that the data has been tampered with and the packet is dropped. By generating unique data encryption keys for every data packet and by creating an integrity checking mechanism (MIC), TKIP makes it much more difficult to decode data on a Wi-Fi network than WEP, making it difficult for an intruder to break into the network. The encryption mechanisms used for WPA and WPA-PSK are the same. The only difference between the two is that WPA-PSK uses a simple common password, instead of user-specific credentials. The common-password approach makes WPA-
PSK susceptible to brute-force password-guessing attacks but it's still an improvement over WEP as it employs an easier-to-use, consistent, single, alphanumeric password. User Authentication WPA or WPA2 applies IEEE 802.1x and Extensible Authentication Protocol (EAP) to authenticate wireless clients using an external RADIUS database. If both an AP and the wireless clients support WPA2 and you have an external RADIUS server, use WPA2 for stronger data encryption. If you don't have an external RADIUS server, you should use WPA2 -PSK (WPA2 -Pre-Shared Key) that only requires a single (identical) password entered into each access point, wireless gateway and wireless client. As long as the passwords match, a wireless client will be granted access to a WLAN. If the AP or the wireless clients do not support WPA2, just use WPA or WPA-PSK depending on whether you have an external RADIUS server or not. Select WEP only when the AP and/or wireless clients do not support WPA or WPA2. WEP is less secure than WPA or WPA2. 254 NBG-417N Users Guide 24.5.2 WPA(2)-PSK Application Example A WPA(2)-PSK application looks as follows. Appendix EWireless LANs 1 2 3 4 First enter identical passwords into the AP and all wireless clients. The Pre-Shared Key (PSK) must consist of between 8 and 63 ASCII characters (including spaces and symbols). The AP checks each wireless client's password and (only) allows it to join the network if the password matches. The AP derives and distributes keys to the wireless clients. The AP and wireless clients use the TKIP or AES encryption process to encrypt data exchanged between them. Figure 152 WPA(2)-PSK Authentication 24.5.3 WPA(2) with RADIUS Application Example You need the IP address of the RADIUS server, its port number (default is 1812), and the RADIUS shared secret. A WPA(2) application example with an external RADIUS server looks as follows. "A" is the RADIUS server. "DS" is the distribution system. 1 2 3 The AP passes the wireless client's authentication request to the RADIUS server. The RADIUS server then checks the user's identification against its database and grants or denies network access accordingly. The RADIUS server distributes a Pairwise Master Key (PMK) key to the AP that then sets up a key hierarchy and management system, using the pair-wise key to dynamically generate unique data encryption keys to encrypt every data packet that is wirelessly communicated between the AP and the wireless clients. NBG-417N Users Guide 255 Appendix EWireless LANs Security Parameters Summary Refer to this table to see what other security parameters you should configure for each Authentication Method/ key management protocol type. MAC address filters are not dependent on how you configure these security features. Table 80 Wireless Security Relational Matrix AUTHENTICATION METHOD/ KEY MANAGEMENT PROTOCOL OpenNoneNoDisable ENCRYPTIO N METHOD ENTER MANUAL KEY IEEE 802.1X Open WEP No Shared WEP WPA WPA-PSK WPA2 WPA2-PSK TKIP TKIP AES AES Yes Yes No Yes Yes No Yes No Yes Enable without Dynamic WEP Key Enable with Dynamic WEP Key Enable without Dynamic WEP Key Disable Enable with Dynamic WEP Key Enable without Dynamic WEP Key Disable Enable Enable Enable Enable 256 NBG-417N Users Guide APPENDIX F Services The following table lists some commonly-used services and their associated protocols and port numbers. Name: This is a short, descriptive name for the service. You can use this one or create a different one, if you like. Protocol: This is the type of IP protocol used by the service. If this is TCP/
UDP, then the service uses the same port number with TCP and UDP. If this is User-Defined, the Port(s) is the IP protocol number, not the port number. Port(s): This value depends on the Protocol. If the Protocol is TCP, UDP, or TCP/UDP, this is the IP port number. If the Protocol is USER, this is the IP protocol number. Description: This is a brief explanation of the applications that use this service or the situations in which this service is used. Table 81 Examples of Services NAME AH
(IPSEC_TUNNEL) AIM AUTH BGP BOOTP_CLIENT BOOTP_SERVER CU-SEEME DNS PROTOCOL User-Defined TCP TCP TCP UDP UDP TCP/UDP TCP/UDP TCP/UDP ESP
(IPSEC_TUNNEL) User-Defined FINGER TCP PORT(S) DESCRIPTION 51 5190 113 179 68 67 7648 24032 53 50 79 The IPSEC AH (Authentication Header) tunneling protocol uses this service. AOLs Internet Messenger service. Authentication protocol used by some servers. Border Gateway Protocol. DHCP Client. DHCP Server. A popular videoconferencing solution from White Pines Software. Domain Name Server, a service that matches web names (e.g. www.zyxel.com) to IP numbers. The IPSEC ESP (Encapsulation Security Protocol) tunneling protocol uses this service. Finger is a UNIX or Internet related command that can be used to find out if a user is logged on. NBG-417N Users Guide 257 Appendix FServices Table 81 Examples of Services (continued) PORT(S) DESCRIPTION 20 PROTOCOL TCP TCP TCP TCP TCP NAME FTP H.323 HTTP HTTPS ICMP ICQ User-Defined 1 UDP 4000 IGMP
(MULTICAST) User-Defined 2 IKE IMAP4 IMAP4S IRC UDP TCP TCP TCP/UDP MSN Messenger TCP 21 1720 80 443 500 143 993 6667 1863 137 138 139 445 5190 144 2049 TCP/UDP TCP/UDP TCP/UDP TCP/UDP TCP TCP UDP TCP 119 User-Defined 1 NetBIOS NEW-ICQ NEWS NFS NNTP PING 258 File Transfer Program, a program to enable fast transfer of files, including large files that may not be possible by e-mail. NetMeeting uses this protocol. Hyper Text Transfer Protocol - a client/
server protocol for the world wide web. HTTPS is a secured http session often used in e-commerce. Internet Control Message Protocol is often used for diagnostic purposes. This is a popular Internet chat program. Internet Group Multicast Protocol is used when sending packets to a specific group of hosts. The Internet Key Exchange algorithm is used for key distribution and management. The Internet Message Access Protocol is used for e-mail. This is a more secure version of IMAP4 that runs over SSL. This is another popular Internet chat program. Microsoft Networks messenger service uses this protocol. The Network Basic Input/Output System is used for communication between computers in a LAN. An Internet chat program. A protocol for news groups. Network File System - NFS is a client/
server distributed file service that provides transparent file sharing for network environments. Network News Transport Protocol is the delivery mechanism for the USENET newsgroup service. Packet INternet Groper is a protocol that sends out ICMP echo requests to test whether or not a remote host is reachable. NBG-417N Users Guide Table 81 Examples of Services (continued) Appendix FServices PROTOCOL TCP PORT(S) DESCRIPTION 110 NAME POP3 POP3S PPTP TCP TCP 995 1723 PPTP_TUNNEL
(GRE) User-Defined 47 RCMD REAL_AUDIO TCP TCP REXEC RLOGIN ROADRUNNER RTELNET RTSP TCP TCP TCP/UDP TCP TCP/UDP SFTP SMTP SMTPS SNMP TCP TCP TCP TCP/UDP SNMP-TRAPS TCP/UDP SQL-NET TCP 512 7070 514 513 1026 107 554 115 25 465 161 162 1521 Post Office Protocol version 3 lets a client computer get e-mail from a POP3 server through a temporary connection (TCP/IP or other). This is a more secure version of POP3 that runs over SSL. Point-to-Point Tunneling Protocol enables secure transfer of data over public networks. This is the control channel. PPTP (Point-to-Point Tunneling Protocol) enables secure transfer of data over public networks. This is the data channel. Remote Command Service. A streaming audio service that enables real time sound over the web. Remote Execution Daemon. Remote Login. This is an ISP that provides services mainly for cable modems. Remote Telnet. The Real Time Streaming (media control) Protocol (RTSP) is a remote control for multimedia on the Internet. The Simple File Transfer Protocol is an old way of transferring files between computers. Simple Mail Transfer Protocol is the message-exchange standard for the Internet. SMTP enables you to move messages from one e-mail server to another. This is a more secure version of SMTP that runs over SSL. Simple Network Management Program. Traps for use with the SNMP
(RFC:1215). Structured Query Language is an interface to access data on many different types of database systems, including mainframes, midrange systems, UNIX systems and network servers. NBG-417N Users Guide 259 Appendix FServices Table 81 Examples of Services (continued) NAME SSDP PROTOCOL UDP SSH STRM WORKS SYSLOG TCP/UDP UDP UDP TACACS TELNET UDP TCP TFTP UDP VDOLIVE TCP UDP PORT(S) DESCRIPTION 1900 The Simple Service Discovery Protocol supports Universal Plug-and-Play
(UPnP). Secure Shell Remote Login Program. Stream Works Protocol. Syslog allows you to send system logs to a UNIX server. Login Host Protocol used for (Terminal Access Controller Access Control System). Telnet is the login and terminal emulation protocol common on the Internet and in UNIX environments. It operates over TCP/IP networks. Its primary function is to allow users to log into remote host systems. Trivial File Transfer Protocol is an Internet file transfer protocol similar to FTP, but uses the UDP (User Datagram Protocol) rather than TCP
(Transmission Control Protocol). A videoconferencing solution. The UDP port number is specified in the application. 22 1558 514 49 23 69 7000 user-
defined 260 NBG-417N Users Guide APPENDIX G Legal Information Copyright Copyright 2009 by ZyXEL Communications Corporation. The contents of this publication may not be reproduced in any part or as a whole, transcribed, stored in a retrieval system, translated into any language, or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, magnetic, optical, chemical, photocopying, manual, or otherwise, without the prior written permission of ZyXEL Communications Corporation. Published by ZyXEL Communications Corporation. All rights reserved. Disclaimer ZyXEL does not assume any liability arising out of the application or use of any products, or software described herein. Neither does it convey any license under its patent rights nor the patent rights of others. ZyXEL further reserves the right to make changes in any products described herein without notice. This publication is subject to change without notice. Trademarks ZyNOS (ZyXEL Network Operating System) is a registered trademark of ZyXEL Communications, Inc. Other trademarks mentioned in this publication are used for identification purposes only and may be properties of their respective owners. Certifications Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Interference Statement The device complies with Part 15 of FCC rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
This device may not cause harmful interference. NBG-417N Users Guide 261 Appendix GLegal Information This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operations. This device has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This device generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy, and if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this device does cause harmful interference to radio/television reception, which can be determined by turning the device off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:
1 Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. 2 Increase the separation between the equipment and the receiver. 3 Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. 4 Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. FCC Radiation Exposure Statement This transmitter must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. IEEE 802.11b or 802.11g operation of this product in the U.S.A. is firmware-
limited to channels 1 through 11. To comply with FCC RF exposure compliance requirements, a separation distance of at least 20 cm must be maintained between the antenna of this device and all persons. Industry Canada Statement This device complies with RSS-210 of the Industry Canada Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
this device may not cause interference and this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device NBG-417N Users Guide 1 2 262 Appendix GLegal Information This device has been designed to operate with an antenna having a maximum gain of 2dBi. Antenna having a higher gain is strictly prohibited per regulations of Industry Canada. The required antenna impedance is 50 ohms. To reduce potential radio interference to other users, the antenna type and its gain should be so chosen that the EIRP is not more than required for successful communication. IMPORTANT NOTE:
IC Radiation Exposure Statement:
This equipment complies with IC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment. This equipment should be installed and operated with minimum distance 20cm between the radiator & your body. Notices Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. This device has been designed for the WLAN 2.4 GHz network throughout the EC region and Switzerland, with restrictions in France. This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003. Cet appareil numrique de la classe B est conforme la norme NMB-003 du Canada. NBG-417N Users Guide 263 Appendix GLegal Information Viewing Certifications 1 Go to http://www.zyxel.com. 2 Select your product on the ZyXEL home page to go to that product's page. 3 Select the certification you wish to view from this page. ZyXEL Limited Warranty ZyXEL warrants to the original end user (purchaser) that this product is free from any defects in materials or workmanship for a period of up to two years from the date of purchase. During the warranty period, and upon proof of purchase, should the product have indications of failure due to faulty workmanship and/or materials, ZyXEL will, at its discretion, repair or replace the defective products or components without charge for either parts or labor, and to whatever extent it shall deem necessary to restore the product or components to proper operating condition. Any replacement will consist of a new or re-manufactured functionally equivalent product of equal or higher value, and will be solely at the discretion of ZyXEL. This warranty shall not apply if the product has been modified, misused, tampered with, damaged by an act of God, or subjected to abnormal working conditions. Note Repair or replacement, as provided under this warranty, is the exclusive remedy of the purchaser. This warranty is in lieu of all other warranties, express or implied, including any implied warranty of merchantability or fitness for a particular use or purpose. ZyXEL shall in no event be held liable for indirect or consequential damages of any kind to the purchaser. To obtain the services of this warranty, contact your vendor. You may also refer to the warranty policy for the region in which you bought the device at http://
www.zyxel.com/web/support_warranty_info.php. Registration Register your product online to receive e-mail notices of firmware upgrades and information at www.zyxel.com for global products, or at www.us.zyxel.com for North American products. 264 NBG-417N Users Guide Index Index backup 186 reset the factory defaults 188 restore 187 content filtering 135 by keyword (in URL) 136 by web feature 136 copyright 261 CPU usage 31, 55 CTS (Clear to Send) 248 D Daylight saving 178 DDNS 123 see also Dynamic DNS service providers 124 DHCP 34, 107 DHCP server see also Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol DHCP client information 110 DHCP client list 110 DHCP server 104, 107 DHCP table 34, 110 DHCP client information DHCP status Dimensions 205 disclaimer 261 DNS 49, 109 DNS server see also Domain name system DNS Server 92 DNS server 109 Domain name 41 vs host name. see also system name Domain Name System 109 Domain Name System. See DNS. duplex setting 32, 56 Dynamic DNS 123 Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol 107 A Address Assignment 92 Alert 181 alternative subnet mask notation 220 AP 21 AP (Access Point) 247 AP Mode menu 56 overview 53 status screen 54 AP+Bridge 21 Auto-bridge 102 B Backup configuration 186 Bandwidth management application-based 147 overview 147 priority 153 services 154 subnet-based 147 BitTorrent 154 Bridge/Repeater 21 BSS 245 C CA 252 Certificate Authority 252 certifications 261 notices 263 viewing 264 Channel 31, 55, 247 Interference 247 channel 72 Configuration NBG-417N Users Guide 265 Index Dynamic WEP Key Exchange 252 DynDNS 124 DynDNS see also DDNS 124 DynDNS Wildcard 123 E EAP Authentication 251 e-mail 86 Encryption 253 encryption 74 and local (user) database 74 key 75 WPA compatible 74 ESS 246 ESSID 200 Extended Service Set 246 Extended wireless security 43 F Factory LAN defaults 104, 107 FCC interference statement 261 File Transfer Program 154 Firewall 130 Firewall overview guidelines 131 ICMP packets 132 network security Stateful inspection 130 ZyXEL device firewall 130 firewall stateful inspection 129 Firmware upload 183 file extension using HTTP firmware version 31, 55 Fragmentation Threshold 249 FTP. see also File Transfer Program 154 G gateway 145 General wireless LAN screen 75 H Hidden Node 247 HTTP 154 Hyper Text Transfer Protocol 154 I IANA 226 IBSS 245 IEEE 802.11g 249 IGMP 93 see also Internet Group Multicast Protocol version IGMP version 93 Independent Basic Service Set 245 Install UPnP 162 Windows Me 162 Windows XP 163 Internet Assigned Numbers Authority See IANA Internet connection Ethernet PPPoE. see also PPP over Ethernet PPTP WAN connection Internet connection wizard 43 Internet Group Multicast Protocol 93 IP Address 105, 117 IP address 48 dynamic IP Pool 108 L LAN 103 266 NBG-417N Users Guide Index server 115 server sets 120 NAT traversal 159 Navigation Panel 32, 56 navigation panel 32, 56 NetBIOS 94 see also Network Basic Input/Output System 94 Network Address Translation 113, 116 O Operating Channel 31, 55 operating mode 21 P P2P 154 peer-to-peer 154 Point-to-Point Protocol over Ethernet 44, 96 Point-to-Point Tunneling Protocol 46, 98 Pool Size 108 Port forwarding 117, 120 default server 120 example 120 local server 117 port numbers services port speed 32, 56 Power Specification 205 PPPoE 44, 96 benefits 45 dial-up connection see also Point-to-Point Protocol over Ethernet 44 PPTP 46, 98 see also Point-to-Point Tunneling Protocol 46 Preamble Mode 249 product registration 264 IP pool setup 104 LAN overview 103 LAN setup 103 LAN TCP/IP 104 Language 193 Link type 32, 55 local (user) database 73 and encryption 74 Local Area Network 103 Log 182 M MAC 80 MAC address 73, 93 cloning 51, 93 MAC address filter 73 MAC address filtering 80 MAC filter 80 managing the device good habits 22 using the web configurator. See web configurator. using the WPS. See WPS. MBSSID 21 Media access control 80 Memory usage 32, 55 Metric 146 mode 21 Multicast 93 IGMP 93 N NAT 113, 116, 225 global 114 how it works 115 inside 114 local 114 outside 114 overview 113 port forwarding 120 see also Network Address Translation NBG-417N Users Guide 267 Index Q Quality of Service (QoS) 83 R RADIUS 250 Shared Secret Key 251 RADIUS Message Types 251 RADIUS Messages 251 RADIUS server 73 registration product 264 related documentation 3 Remote management 155 and NAT 156 and the firewall 155 limitations 155 remote management session 155 system timeout 156 Reset button 29, 188 Reset the device 29 Restore configuration 187 RF (Radio Frequency) 206 Roaming 82 RTS (Request To Send) 248 RTS Threshold 247, 248 RTS/CTS Threshold 72, 82 S safety warnings 7 Scheduling 88 Security Parameters 256 Service and port numbers 154 Service Set 76 Service Set IDentification 76 Service Set IDentity. See SSID. services and port numbers 257 and protocols 257 Session Initiated Protocol 154 SIP 154 SSID 31, 55, 72, 76 stateful inspection firewall 129 Static DHCP 108 Static Route 144 Status 30 subnet 217 Subnet Mask 105 subnet mask 49, 218 subnetting 221 Summary DHCP table 34 Packet statistics 35 Wireless station status 36 syntax conventions 5 Sys Op Mode 189 System General Setup 175 System Name 176 System name 40 vs computer name System restart 188 T TCP/IP configuration 107 Temperature 205 Time setting 177 trademarks 261 trigger port 121 Trigger port forwarding 121 example 122 process 122 U Universal Plug and Play 159 application 160 UPnP 159 forum 160 security issues 160 URL Keyword Blocking 137 Use Authentication 254 268 NBG-417N Users Guide Index security 72 SSID 72 Wireless security 72 overview 72 type 72 wireless security 200 Wireless tutorial 53, 61 WPS 61 Wizard setup 39 complete 52 Internet connection 43 system information 40 wireless LAN 42 WLAN Interference 247 Security Parameters 256 World Wide Web 154 WPA compatible 74 WPA, WPA2 253 WPS 22 WWW 86, 154 X Xbox Live 154 Z ZyNOS 31, 55 user authentication 73 local (user) database 73 RADIUS server 73 User Name 124 V VoIP 154 VPN 98 W WAN IP address assignment 48 WAN (Wide Area Network) 91 WAN advanced 101 WAN IP address 48 WAN IP address assignment 50 WAN MAC address 93 warranty 264 note 264 Web Configurator how to access 27 Overview 27 Web configurator navigating 29 web configurator 22 WEP Encryption 78 WEP encryption 77 WEP key 77 Wildcard 123 Wireless association list 36 wireless channel 200 wireless LAN 200 wireless LAN scheduling 88 Wireless LAN wizard 42 Wireless network basic guidelines 72 channel 72 encryption 74 example 71 MAC address filter 73 overview 71 NBG-417N Users Guide 269 Index 270 NBG-417N Users Guide
1 2 | User Manual | Users Manual | 3.39 MiB | April 09 2009 |
NBG4115 Wireless N-lite 3G Router Company Confidential Firmware Version 1.0 Edition 2, 7/2009 www.zyxel.com Default Login Details www.zyxel.com IP Address Password http://192.168.1.1 1234 Copyright 2009 ZyXEL Communications Corporation About This User's Guide Intended Audience it from http://www.adobe.com. About This User's Guide Tips for Reading Users Guides On-Screen When reading a ZyXEL Users Guide On-Screen, keep the following in mind:
If you dont already have the latest version of Adobe Reader, you can download Use the PDFs bookmarks to quickly navigate to the areas that interest you. Adobe Readers bookmarks pane opens by default in all ZyXEL Users Guide PDFs. If you know the page number or know vaguely which page-range you want to view, you can enter a number in the toolbar in Reader, then press [ENTER] to jump directly to that page. This manual is intended for people who want to configure the NBG4115 using the Web Configurator. You should have at least a basic knowledge of TCP/IP networking concepts and topology. Company Confidential The Quick Start Guide is designed to help you get your NBG4115 up and running right away. It contains information on setting up your network and configuring for Internet access. cursor into a hand with which you can grab the page and move it around freely on your screen. phrase. This can help you quickly pinpoint the information you require. You can also enter text directly into the toolbar in Reader. The embedded Web Help contains descriptions of individual screens and supplementary information. Embedded hyperlinks are actually cross-references to related text. Click them to To quickly move around within a page, press the [SPACE] bar. This turns your Type [CTRL]+[F] to open the Adobe Reader search utility and enter a word or Related Documentation Quick Start Guide jump to the corresponding section of the Users Guide PDF. Refer to the included CD for support documents. Supporting Disc Support Disc Users Guide 3 About This User's Guide Documentation Feedback Thank you!
Need More Help?
More help is available at www.zyxel.com. Send your comments, questions or suggestions to: techwriters@zyxel.com.tw The Technical Writing Team, ZyXEL Communications Corp., 6 Innovation Road II, Science-Based Industrial Park, Hsinchu, 30099, Taiwan. Company Confidential Search for the latest product updates and documentation from this link. Read the Tech Doc Overview to find out how to efficiently use the User Guide, Quick Start Guide and Command Line Interface Reference Guide in order to better understand how to use your product. If you have a specific question about your product, the answer may be here. This is a collection of answers to previously asked questions about ZyXEL products. This contains discussions on ZyXEL products. Learn from others who use ZyXEL products and share your experiences as well. Download Library Knowledge Base Forum 4 Users Guide About This User's Guide Customer Support Date that you received your device. Product model and serial number. Warranty Information. See http://www.zyxel.com/web/contact_us.php for contact information. Please have the following information ready when you contact an office. Should problems arise that cannot be solved by the methods listed above, you should contact your vendor. If you cannot contact your vendor, then contact a ZyXEL office for the region in which you bought the device. Company Confidential Users Guide 5 Document Conventions Document Conventions Warnings and Notes or the system in this Users Guide.
[ENTER] means the enter or return key on your keyboard. need to configure or helpful tips) or recommendations. These are how warnings and notes are shown in this Users Guide. Enter means for you to type one or more characters and then press the A key stroke is denoted by square brackets and uppercase text, for example, Product labels, screen names, field labels and field choices are all in bold font. Note: Notes tell you other important information (for example, other things you may Warnings tell you about things that could harm you or your device. Syntax Conventions The NBG4115 may be referred to as the NBG4115, the device, the product Company Confidential example, Maintenance > Log > Log Setting means you first click Maintenance in the navigation panel, then the Log sub menu and finally the Log Setting tab to get to that screen.
[ENTER] key. Select or choose means for you to use one of the predefined choices. For example, k for kilo may denote 1000 or 1024, M for mega may denote 1000000 or 1048576 and so on. Units of measurement may denote the metric value or the scientific value. e.g., is a shorthand for for instance, and i.e., means that is or in other A right angle bracket ( > ) within a screen name denotes a mouse click. For words. 6 Users Guide Document Conventions Icons Used in Figures Switch Server Router DSLAM Modem Firewall NBG4115 Computer Telephone Notebook computer Figures in this Users Guide may use the following generic icons. The NBG4115 icon is not an exact representation of your device. Company Confidential Users Guide 7 Safety Warnings Safety Warnings pool. of electric shock from lightning. North America or 230V AC in Europe). product where anyone can walk on the power adaptor or cord. Do NOT use the device if the power adaptor or cord is damaged as it might cause Do NOT allow anything to rest on the power adaptor or cord and do NOT place the Do NOT use this product near water, for example, in a wet basement or near a swimming dangerous high voltage points or other risks. ONLY qualified service personnel should service or disassemble this device. Please contact your vendor for further information. Connect ONLY suitable accessories to the device. Do NOT open the device or unit. Opening or removing covers can expose you to Do NOT expose your device to dampness, dust or corrosive liquids. Do NOT store things on the device. Do NOT install, use, or service this device during a thunderstorm. There is a remote risk Make sure to connect the cables to the correct ports. Place connecting cables carefully so that no one will step on them or stumble over them. Always disconnect all cables from this device before servicing or disassembling. Use ONLY an appropriate power adaptor or cord for your device. Connect the power adaptor or cord to the ri ght supply voltage (for example, 110V AC in Company Confidential Your product is marked with this symbol, which is known as the WEEE mark. WEEE stands for Waste Electronics and Electrical Equipment. It means that used electrical and electronic products should not be mixed with general waste. Used electrical and electronic equipment should be treated separately. If the power adaptor or cord is damaged, remove it from the power outlet. Do NOT attempt to repair the power adaptor or cord. Contact your local vendor to order a Antenna Warning! This device meets ETSI and FCC certification requirements when using Do not use the device outside, and make sure all the connections are indoors. There is a If you wall mount your device, make sure that no electrical lines, gas or water pipes will Do NOT obstruct the device ventilation slots, as insufficient airflow may harm your the included antenna(s). Only use the included antenna(s). remote risk of electric shock from lightning. be damaged. electrocution. new one. device. 8 Users Guide Contents Overview Contents Overview Introduction ............................................................................................................................19 Network ...................................................................................................................................79 Introduction ................................................................................................................................21 The WPS Button ........................................................................................................................25 The Web Configurator ...............................................................................................................27 Connection Wizard ....................................................................................................................39 AP Mode ....................................................................................................................................55 Tutorials .....................................................................................................................................63 Wireless LAN .............................................................................................................................81 WAN ........................................................................................................................................101 LAN ...........................................................................................................................................115 DHCP Server ............................................................................................................................119 NAT ..........................................................................................................................................125 DDNS ......................................................................................................................................135 Company Confidential System .....................................................................................................................................181 Logs .........................................................................................................................................187 Tools ........................................................................................................................................189 Sys OP Mode ..........................................................................................................................195 Language .................................................................................................................................199 Troubleshooting .......................................................................................................................201 Static Route .............................................................................................................................153 Bandwidth Management ..........................................................................................................157 Remote Management ..............................................................................................................165 UPnP .......................................................................................................................................169 Firewall ....................................................................................................................................141 Content Filtering ......................................................................................................................147 Maintenance and Troubleshooting .....................................................................................179 Security .................................................................................................................................139 Appendices and Index .........................................................................................................209 Management .........................................................................................................................151 Users Guide 9 Contents Overview Company Confidential 10 Users Guide Table of Contents Table of Contents Contents Overview...................................................................................................................9 About This User's Guide..........................................................................................................3 Table of Contents....................................................................................................................11 Safety Warnings........................................................................................................................8 Document Conventions............................................................................................................6 Part I: Introduction.................................................................................19 Chapter 1 Introduction.............................................................................................................................21 Company Confidential 3.1 Overview ..............................................................................................................................27 3.2 Accessing the Web Configurator .........................................................................................27 3.3 Resetting the NBG4115 .......................................................................................................29 3.3.1 Procedure to Use the Reset Button ...........................................................................29 3.4 Navigating the Web Configurator ......................................................................................29 3.5 The Status Screen in Router Mode .....................................................................................30 3.5.1 Navigation Panel ........................................................................................................32 3.5.2 Summary: DHCP Table ...........................................................................................34 3.5.3 Summary: Packet Statistics .....................................................................................35 3.5.4 Summary: WLAN Station Status ............................................................................36 1.1 Overview ..............................................................................................................................21 1.2 Applications .........................................................................................................................21 1.3 Ways to Manage the NBG4115 ...........................................................................................22 1.4 Good Habits for Managing the NBG4115 ............................................................................22 1.5 LEDs ....................................................................................................................................22 Chapter 3 The Web Configurator............................................................................................................27 Chapter 2 The WPS Button......................................................................................................................25 2.1 Overview ..............................................................................................................................25 Chapter 4 Connection Wizard.................................................................................................................39 Users Guide 11 Table of Contents Chapter 5 AP Mode...................................................................................................................................55 4.1 Overview ..............................................................................................................................39 4.2 Wizard Setup .......................................................................................................................39 4.3 STEP 1: System Information ...............................................................................................40 4.3.1 System Name .............................................................................................................40 4.3.2 Domain Name ............................................................................................................41 4.4 STEP 2: Wireless LAN ........................................................................................................42 4.4.1 Extend (WPA-PSK or WPA2-PSK) Security ...............................................................43 4.5 STEP 3: Internet Configuration ............................................................................................43 4.5.1 Ethernet Connection ..................................................................................................44 4.5.2 PPPoE Connection ....................................................................................................45 4.5.3 PPTP Connection .......................................................................................................46 4.5.4 Mobile 3G ...................................................................................................................48 4.5.5 Your IP Address .........................................................................................................49 4.5.6 WAN IP Address Assignment .....................................................................................49 4.5.7 IP Address and Subnet Mask .....................................................................................50 4.5.8 DNS Server Address Assignment ..............................................................................50 4.5.9 WAN IP and DNS Server Address Assignment .........................................................51 4.5.10 WAN MAC Address ..................................................................................................52 4.6 Connection Wizard Complete ..............................................................................................53 Company Confidential 6.1 Overview ..............................................................................................................................63 6.2 Set Up a 3G Connection ......................................................................................................63 6.3 Set Up the NBG4115 for Gaming ........................................................................................65 6.4 Set Up a Wireless Network with WPS .................................................................................68 6.4.1 Push Button Configuration (PBC) ..............................................................................68 6.4.2 PIN Configuration .......................................................................................................70 6.5 Configure Wireless Security without WPS ...........................................................................71 6.5.1 Configure Your Notebook ...........................................................................................72 6.6 Bandwidth Management ......................................................................................................74 6.6.1 Bandwidth Management by Application .....................................................................74 6.6.2 Custom Bandwidth Management ...............................................................................75 5.1 Overview ..............................................................................................................................55 5.2 Setting your NBG4115 to AP Mode .....................................................................................55 5.3 The Status Screen in AP Mode ...........................................................................................56 5.3.1 Navigation Panel ........................................................................................................58 5.4 LAN Settings ........................................................................................................................59 5.5 WLAN and Maintenance Settings ........................................................................................60 5.6 Logging in while in AP Mode ...............................................................................................61 Chapter 6 Tutorials...................................................................................................................................63 12 Users Guide Table of Contents 6.6.3 Bandwidth Management by IP or IP Range ...............................................................76 Part II: Network.......................................................................................79 Chapter 7 Wireless LAN...........................................................................................................................81 7.1 Overview ..............................................................................................................................81 7.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter ..............................................................................82 7.1.2 What You Should Know .............................................................................................82 7.2 General ...............................................................................................................................85 7.2.1 No Security .................................................................................................................87 7.2.2 WEP Encryption .........................................................................................................87 7.2.3 WPA-PSK/WPA2-PSK ................................................................................................89 7.3 MAC Filter ............................................................................................................................90 7.4 Advanced .............................................................................................................................92 7.5 QoS .....................................................................................................................................94 7.5.1 Application Priority Configuration ...............................................................................95 7.6 WPS ....................................................................................................................................97 7.7 WPS Station ........................................................................................................................98 7.8 Scheduling ...........................................................................................................................99 Company Confidential 8.1 Overview ............................................................................................................................101 8.2 What You Can Do in this Chapter ......................................................................................101 8.2.1 What You Need To Know .........................................................................................102 8.3 Internet Connection ...........................................................................................................105 8.3.1 Ethernet ....................................................................................................................105 8.3.2 PPPoE ......................................................................................................................106 8.3.3 PPTP ........................................................................................................................108 8.3.4 Mobile 3G ..................................................................................................................111 8.4 Advanced ............................................................................................................................113 9.1 Overview .............................................................................................................................115 9.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter .............................................................................115 9.2 What You Need To Know ....................................................................................................115 9.3 IP ........................................................................................................................................117 Chapter 8 WAN........................................................................................................................................101 Chapter 9 LAN.........................................................................................................................................115 Chapter 10 DHCP Server..........................................................................................................................119 Users Guide 13 Table of Contents Chapter 11 NAT.........................................................................................................................................125 10.1 Overview ...........................................................................................................................119 10.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter ...........................................................................119 10.1.2 What You Need To Know ........................................................................................119 10.2 General ............................................................................................................................120 10.3 Advanced ......................................................................................................................121 10.4 Client List ........................................................................................................................122 11.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................125 11.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter ...........................................................................126 11.1.2 What You Need To Know ........................................................................................126 11.2 General ............................................................................................................................128 11.3 Application .....................................................................................................................129 11.4 Advanced .........................................................................................................................131 11.5 Technical Reference ........................................................................................................132 11.5.1 NATPort Forwarding: Services and Port Numbers .................................................132 11.5.2 NAT Port Forwarding Example ...............................................................................132 11.5.3 Trigger Port Forwarding ..........................................................................................133 11.5.4 Trigger Port Forwarding Example ...........................................................................134 11.5.5 Two Points To Remember About Trigger Ports ......................................................134 Company Confidential 13.1 Overview ........................................................................................................................141 13.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter ..........................................................................141 13.1.2 What You Need To Know .......................................................................................142 13.2 General .........................................................................................................................144 13.3 Services .........................................................................................................................144 12.1 Overview .........................................................................................................................135 12.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter ..........................................................................135 12.1.2 What You Need To Know .......................................................................................135 12.2 General ..........................................................................................................................136 Chapter 12 DDNS......................................................................................................................................135 Chapter 14 Content Filtering...................................................................................................................147 Chapter 13 Firewall...................................................................................................................................141 Part III: Security....................................................................................139 14 Users Guide Table of Contents Part IV: Management............................................................................151 Chapter 16 Bandwidth Management.......................................................................................................157 Chapter 15 Static Route...........................................................................................................................153 15.1 Overview ..........................................................................................................................153 15.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter ..........................................................................153 15.2 IP Static Route ................................................................................................................154 15.2.1 Static Route Setup Screen ...................................................................................155 14.1 Overview ..........................................................................................................................147 14.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter ..........................................................................147 14.1.2 What You Need To Know .......................................................................................147 14.2 Filter .................................................................................................................................148 14.3 Technical Reference ........................................................................................................149 14.3.1 Customizing Keyword Blocking URL Checking ......................................................149 Company Confidential 16.1 Overview .........................................................................................................................157 16.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter ..........................................................................157 16.1.2 What You Need To Know .......................................................................................157 16.2 General ...........................................................................................................................158 16.3 Advanced ........................................................................................................................159 16.3.1 Pre-Configured Gaming Ports ................................................................................162 16.3.2 Priority Levels .........................................................................................................162 16.3.3 User Defined Service Rule Configuration ...........................................................162 16.3.4 Predefined Bandwidth Management Services .......................................................163 16.3.5 Services and Port Numbers ...................................................................................164 17.1 Overview ..........................................................................................................................165 17.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter ..........................................................................165 17.1.2 What You Need To Know .......................................................................................165 17.2 WWW ...........................................................................................................................166 18.1 Overview .........................................................................................................................169 18.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter ..........................................................................169 18.1.2 What You Need to Know ........................................................................................169 Chapter 17 Remote Management............................................................................................................165 Chapter 18 UPnP......................................................................................................................................169 Users Guide 15 Table of Contents Part V: Maintenance and Troubleshooting........................................179 18.2 General ............................................................................................................................170 18.3 Technical Reference ........................................................................................................171 18.3.1 Installing UPnP in Windows XP .............................................................................171 Chapter 19 System...................................................................................................................................181 Chapter 20 Logs.......................................................................................................................................187 Chapter 21 Tools.......................................................................................................................................189 20.1 Overview ..........................................................................................................................187 20.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter ..........................................................................187 20.2 View Log ..........................................................................................................................187 19.1 Overview ..........................................................................................................................181 19.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter ..........................................................................181 19.2 General ..........................................................................................................................181 19.3 Time Setting .....................................................................................................................183 Company Confidential 21.1 Overview ..........................................................................................................................189 21.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter ..........................................................................189 21.2 Firmware ..........................................................................................................................190 21.3 Configuration ...................................................................................................................192 21.3.1 Backup Configuration .............................................................................................192 21.3.2 Restore Configuration ............................................................................................193 21.3.3 Back to Factory Defaults ........................................................................................194 21.4 Restart .............................................................................................................................194 22.1 Overview ..........................................................................................................................195 22.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter ..........................................................................195 22.1.2 What You Need to Know ........................................................................................195 22.2 General ............................................................................................................................196 Chapter 23 Language...............................................................................................................................199 Chapter 22 Sys OP Mode.........................................................................................................................195 23.1 Overview ..........................................................................................................................199 23.2 Language .........................................................................................................................199 16 Users Guide Table of Contents Chapter 24 Troubleshooting....................................................................................................................201 Appendix B Pop-up Windows, JavaScripts and Java Permissions......................................215 Appendix C IP Addresses and Subnetting...........................................................................223 Appendix A Product Specifications.......................................................................................211 Part VI: Appendices and Index...........................................................209 Appendix D Setting up Your Computers IP Address...........................................................233 24.6.1 Verifying Settings ...................................................................................................250 24.1 Overview ..........................................................................................................................201 24.2 Power, Hardware Connections, and LEDs ......................................................................201 24.3 NBG4115 Access and Login ............................................................................................202 24.4 Internet Access ................................................................................................................204 24.5 Resetting the NBG4115 to Its Factory Defaults ...............................................................206 24.6 Wireless Router/AP Troubleshooting ...............................................................................206 Company Confidential Appendix E Wireless LANs..................................................................................................251 24.6.2 WPA(2)-PSK Application Example .........................................................................261 24.6.3 WPA(2) with RADIUS Application Example ...........................................................261 Index.......................................................................................................................................275 Appendix G Legal Information..............................................................................................267 Appendix F Services............................................................................................................263 Users Guide 17 Table of Contents Company Confidential 18 Users Guide AP Mode (55) Introduction (21) The WPS Button (25) Connection Wizard (39) The Web Configurator (27) PART I Introduction Company Confidential Tutorials (63) 19 Company Confidential 20 CHAPTER 1 1.1 Overview This chapter introduces the main features and applications of the NBG4115. Introduction A range of services such as a firewall and content filtering are also available for secure Internet computing. The NBG4115 extends the range of your existing wired network without additional wiring, providing easy network access to mobile users. You can set up a wireless network with other IEEE 802.11b/g/n compatible devices. Company Confidential Wired. You can connect network devices via the Ethernet ports of the NBG4115 WPS. Create an instant network connection with another WPS-compatabile 3G Wireless. Connect to a local 3G wireless network to take advantage of Wireless. Wireless clients can connect to the NBG4115 to access network 1.2 Applications so that they can communicate with each other and access the Internet. WAN. Connect to a broadband modem/router for Internet access. Your can create the following networks using the NBG4115:
superior connection speeds and improved download times. device, sharing your network connection with it. Figure 1 NBG4115 Network LAN 1 LAN 2 resources. WLAN Users Guide 21 Chapter 1Introduction 1.3 Ways to Manage the NBG4115 NBG4115 using a (supported) web browser. Write down the password and put it in a safe place. Use any of the following methods to manage the NBG4115. of different types of characters, such as numbers and letters. Back up the configuration (and make sure you know how to restore it). the Web Configurator to set up a wireless network with your ZyXEL Device. Web Configurator. This is recommended for everyday management of the WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup). You can use the WPS button or the WPS section of Change the password. Use a password thats not easy to guess and that consists Do the following things regularly to make the NBG4115 more secure and to manage the NBG4115 more effectively. 1.4 Good Habits for Managing the NBG4115 Company Confidential Restoring an earlier working configuration may be useful if the device becomes unstable or even crashes. If you forget your password, you will have to reset the NBG4115 to its factory default settings. If you backed up an earlier configuration file, you would not have to totally re-configure the NBG4115. You could simply restore your last configuration. 1.5 LEDs Figure 2 Front Panel 22 Users Guide Chapter 1Introduction the WAN. properly. connection. the wireless LAN. OffThe NBG4115 is not receiving power. receiving data through the wireless LAN. OffThe wireless LAN is not ready or has failed. COLOR STATUS DESCRIPTION OffThe WAN connection is not ready, or has failed. BlinkingThe NBG4115 is sending/receiving data through BlinkingThe NBG4115 is sending/receiving data through WLANGreenOnThe NBG4115 is ready, but is not sending/
LAN 1-2GreenOnThe NBG4115 has a successful 10/100MB WANGreenOnThe NBG4115 has a successful 10/100MB WAN The NBG4115 is negotiating a WPS connection with a wireless client. The following table describes the LEDs and the WPS button. Table 1 Front Panel LEDs and WPS Button LED POWERGreenOnThe NBG4115 is receiving power and functioning Company Confidential Protected Setup with another WPS-enabled client. You must press the WPS button on the client side within 120 seconds for a successful connection. through either the WAN or WLAN interface and can connect to the Internet. through either the WAN or WLAN interface and as such cannot connect to the Internet. WPS ButtonPress this button for 1 second to set up a wireless connection via WiFi InternetGreenOnThe NBG4115 has received an IP address BlinkingThe NBG4115 is sending/receiving data through 3GGreenOnThe NBG4115 has a 3G card installed and is BlinkingThe NBG4115 is transmitting and/or receiving OffThe NBG4115 has not received an IP address data from routers through an installed 3G card. OffThere is no 3G card installed. OffThe LAN is not connected. communicating with routers. Ethernet connection. the LAN. Users Guide 23 Chapter 1Introduction Company Confidential 24 Users Guide CHAPTER 2 2.1 Overview The WPS Button Your NBG4115 supports WiFi Protected Setup (WPS), which is an easy way to set up a secure wireless network. WPS is an industry standard specification, defined by the WiFi Alliance. WPS allows you to quickly set up a wireless network with strong security, without having to configure security settings manually. Each WPS connection works between two devices. Both devices must support WPS (check each devices documentation to make sure). Company Confidential Depending on the devices you have, you can either press a button (on the device itself, or in its configuration utility) or enter a PIN (a unique Personal Identification Number that allows one device to authenticate the other) in each of the two devices. When WPS is activated on a device, it has two minutes to find another device that also has WPS activated. Then, the two devices connect and set up a secure network by themselves. For more information on using WPS, see Section 6.4 on page 68. Users Guide 25 Chapter 2The WPS Button Company Confidential 26 Users Guide CHAPTER 3 In order to use the Web Configurator you need to allow:
3.1 Overview This chapter describes how to access the NBG4115 Web Configurator and provides an overview of its screens. The Web Configurator The Web Configurator is an HTML-based management interface that allows easy setup and management of the NBG4115 via Internet browser. Use Internet Explorer 6.0 and later or Netscape Navigator 7.0 and later versions or Safari 2.0 or later versions. The recommended screen resolution is 1024 by 768 pixels. Company Confidential Refer to the Troubleshooting chapter to see how to make sure these functions are allowed in Internet Explorer. computer or computer network to connect to the NBG4115 (refer to the Quick Start Guide). Your computer must be in the same subnet in order to access this website address. 3.2 Accessing the Web Configurator 1 Make sure your NBG4115 hardware is properly connected and prepare your Web browser pop-up windows from your device. Web pop-up blocking is enabled Type "http://192.168.1.1" as the website address. by default in Windows XP SP (Service Pack) 2. Java permissions (enabled by default). JavaScripts (enabled by default). Launch your web browser. 2 3 Users Guide 27 Chapter 3The Web Configurator 4 5 Type "1234" (default) as the password and click Login. In some versions, the default password appears automatically - if this is the case, click Login. You should see a screen asking you to change your password (highly recommended) as shown next. Type a new password (and retype it to confirm) and click Apply or click Ignore. Figure 3 Change Password Screen Company Confidential Note: The management session automatically times out when the time period set in the Administrator Inactivity Timer field expires (default five minutes). Simply log back into the NBG4115 if this happens. Click Go to Wizard Setup to use the Configuration Wizard for basic Internet Click Go to Advanced Setup to view and configure all the NBG4115s 6 Select the setup mode you want to use. and Wireless setup. settings. 28 Users Guide Chapter 3The Web Configurator Select a language to go to the basic Web Configurator in that language. To Figure 4 Selecting the setup mode change to the advanced configurator see Chapter 23 on page 199. 3.3 Resetting the NBG4115 Company Confidential If you forget your password or IP address, or you cannot access the Web Configurator, you will need to use the RESET button at the back of the NBG4115 to reload the factory-default configuration file. This means that you will lose all configurations that you had previously saved, the password will be reset to 1234 and the IP address will be reset to 192.168.1.1. Press the RESET button for longer than five seconds to set the NBG4115 back to its factory-default configurations. The following summarizes how to navigate the Web Configurator from the Status screen in Router Mode and AP Mode. 3.4 Navigating the Web Configurator 3.3.1 Procedure to Use the Reset Button Press the RESET button for longer than 1 second to restart/reboot the NBG4115. 1 Make sure the power LED is on. 2 3 Users Guide 29 Chapter 3The Web Configurator 3.5 The Status Screen in Router Mode Figure 5 Web Configurator Status Screen Click on Status. The screen below shows the status screen in Router Mode.
(For information on the status screen in AP Mode see Chapter 5 on page 56.) Company Confidential Select a number of seconds or None from the drop-down list box to refresh all screen statistics automatically at the end of every time interval or to not refresh the screen statistics. Click this button to refresh the status screen statistics. DESCRIPTION Click this icon to open the setup wizard. Table 2 Status Screen Icon Key ICON The following table describes the icons shown in the Status screen. Click this icon to view copyright and a link for related product information. Click this icon at any time to exit the Web Configurator. 30 Users Guide Chapter 3The Web Configurator The following table describes the labels shown in the Status screen. DESCRIPTION System NameThis is the provides information specific to it. General screen. It is for identification purposes. System Name you enter in the Maintenance > System >
s IP address. s subnet mask. s DHCP role - Client or None. Table 3 Web Configurator Status Screen LABEL Device Information Firmware VersionThis is the firmware version and the date created. WAN Information
- SIM Card Status(3G Only) When a 3G USB device is attached to the NBG4115, this
- MAC AddressThis shows the WAN Ethernet adapter MAC Address of your device.
- IP AddressThis shows the WAN port
- IP Subnet MaskThis shows the WAN port
- DHCPThis shows the WAN port LAN Information
- MAC AddressThis shows the LAN Ethernet adapter MAC Address of your device.
- IP AddressThis shows the LAN port
- IP Subnet MaskThis shows the LAN port
- DHCPThis shows the LAN port WLAN Information
- MAC AddressThis shows the wireless adapter MAC Address of your device.
- StatusThis shows the current status of the Wireless LAN -
Company Confidential System Up TimeThis is the total time the NBG4115 has been on. Current Date/TimeThis field displays your NBG4115 System Resource
- CPU UsageThis displays what percentage of the NBG4115
- Security ModeThis shows the level of wireless security the NBG4115 is using.
- 802.11 ModeThis shows the wireless standard.
- WPSThis displays
- ChannelThis shows the channel number which you select manually.
- Operating ChannelThis shows the channel number which the NBG4115 is currently using currently used. When this percentage is close to 100%, the NBG4115 is running at full load, and the throughput is not going to improve anymore. If you want some applications to have more throughput, you should turn off other applications. s IP address. s subnet mask. s DHCP role - Server or None.
- Name (SSID)This shows a descriptive name used to identify the NBG4115 in the Click the status to display Network > Wireless LAN > WPS screen. This displays Unconfigured if the WPS has not been set up. Configured when the WPS has been set up. s present date and time. over the wireless LAN. s processing ability is On, Off or Off by System Status wireless LAN. scheduler. Users Guide 31 Chapter 3The Web Configurator N/A WLAN. WAN, LAN and Interface Status DESCRIPTION Down (line is down) or Table 3 Web Configurator Status Screen (continued) LABEL Up (line is up or connected). when the line is disconnected. StatusFor the 3G, LAN and WAN ports, this field displays This shows whether bandwidth management is enabled or not. InterfaceThis displays the NBG4115 port types. The port types are:
RateFor the LAN ports, this displays the port speed and duplex setting or For the WLAN, it displays Up when the WLAN is enabled or Down when the WLAN is disabled. For the WAN port, it displays the port speed and duplex setting if you re using Ethernet encapsulation and Idle (line (ppp) idle), Dial (starting to trigger a call) and Drop (dropping a call) if you're using PPPoE or PPTP encapsulation. This field displays N/A when the line is disconnected.
- Memory UsageThis shows what percentage of the heap memory the NBG4115 is using. System Setting
- FirewallThis shows whether the firewall is active or not.
- Bandwidth Management
- UPnPThis shows whether UPnP is active or not. Company Confidential DHCP TableUse this screen to view current DHCP client information. Packet StatisticsUse this screen to view port status and packet specific statistics. WLAN Station StatusUse this screen to view the wireless stations that are currently associated The following table describes the sub-menus. Table 4 Screens Summary LINK Status FUNCTION This screen shows the NBG4115s general device, system and interface status information. Use this screen to access the wizard, and summary statistics tables. For the WLAN, it displays the maximum transmission rate when the WLAN is enabled and N/A when the WLAN is disabled. Use the sub-menus on the navigation panel to configure NBG4115 features. 3.5.1 Navigation Panel to the NBG4115. Summary Network TAB 32 Users Guide Chapter 3The Web Configurator Table 4 Screens Summary LINK TAB LAN QoS WAN Advanced Advanced MAC Filter Internet Connection Wireless LAN General WPS WPS Station Scheduling FUNCTION Use this screen to configure wireless LAN. Use the MAC filter screen to configure the NBG4115 to block access to devices or block the devices from accessing the NBG4115. This screen allows you to configure advanced wireless settings. Use this screen to configure Wi-Fi Multimedia Quality of Service (WMM QoS). WMM QoS allows you to prioritize wireless traffic according to the delivery requirements of individual services. Use this screen to configure WPS. Use this screen to add a wireless station using WPS. Use this screen to schedule the times the Wireless LAN is enabled. This screen allows you to configure ISP parameters, WAN IP address assignment, DNS servers and the WAN MAC address. Use this screen to configure other advanced properties. Use this screen to configure LAN IP address and subnet mask. Use this screen to enable the NBG4115s DHCP server. Use this screen to assign IP addresses to specific individual computers based on their MAC addresses and to have DNS servers assigned by the DHCP server. Use this screen to view current DHCP client information and to always assign an IP address to a MAC address (and host name). Use this screen to enable NAT. Use this screen to configureservers behind the NBG4115. Use this screen to change your NBG4115 s port triggering settings. Use this screen to set up dynamic DNS. Company Confidential Use this screen to activate/deactivate the firewall. This screen shows a summary of the firewall rules, and allows you to edit/add a firewall rule. Use this screen to block certain web features and sites containing certain keywords in the URL. Use this screen to configure IP static routes. General Application DHCP Server General DDNS Security General Services IP Static Route Content Filter Management Static Route Client List Advanced Advanced General Firewall Filter NAT IP Users Guide 33 Chapter 3The Web Configurator Table 4 Screens Summary LINK Logs UPnP Tools WWW System General General View Log Advanced Maintenance Time Setting Remote MGMT TAB General Bandwidth Management Firmware Configuration FUNCTION Use this screen to use pre-configured bandwidth management profiles for how your NBG4115 manages incoming and outgoing data. Use this screen to create your own bandwidth management profile for how your NBG4115 manages incoming and outgoing data. Use this screen to configure through which interface(s) and from which IP address(es) users can use HTTP to manage the NBG4115. Use this screen to enable UPnP on the NBG4115. Company Confidential Use this screen to view and change administrative settings such as system and domain names, password and inactivity timer. Use this screen to change your NBG4115 s time and date. Use this screen to view the logs for the categories that you selected. Use this screen to upload firmware to your NBG4115. Use this screen to backup and restore the configuration or reset the factory defaults to your NBG4115. This screen allows you to reboot the NBG4115 without turning the power off. This screen allows you to select whether your device acts as a Router or a Access Point. This screen allows you to select the language you prefer. DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol, RFC 2131 and RFC 2132) allows individual clients to obtain TCP/IP configuration at start-up from a server. You can configure the NBG4115s LAN as a DHCP server or disable it. When configured as a server, the NBG4115 provides the TCP/IP configuration for the clients. If DHCP service is disabled, you must have another DHCP server on that network, or else the computer must be manually configured. Click the DHCP Table (Details...) hyperlink in the Status screen. Read-only information here relates to your DHCP status. The DHCP table shows current 3.5.2 Summary: DHCP Table Sys OP Mode General Language Language Restart 34 Users Guide Chapter 3The Web Configurator Host Name field. DESCRIPTION Figure 6 Summary: DHCP Table DHCP client information (including IP Address, HostName and MAC Address) of all network clients using the NBG4115s DHCP server. The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 5 Summary: DHCP Table LABEL
# This is the index number of the host computer. IP AddressThis field displays the IP address relative to the # field listed above. Host Name This field displays the computer host name. MAC AddressThis field shows the MAC address of the computer with the name in the Company Confidential Click the Packet Statistics (Details...) hyperlink in the Status screen. Read-
only information here includes port status, packet specific statistics and the
"system up time". The Poll Interval(s) field is configurable and is used for refreshing the screen. Every Ethernet device has a unique MAC (Media Access Control) address which uniquely identifies a device. The MAC address is assigned at the factory and consists of six pairs of hexadecimal characters, for example, 00:A0:C5:00:00:02. 3.5.3 Summary: Packet Statistics Figure 7 Summary: Packet Statistics Refresh to renew the screen. RefreshClick Users Guide 35 Chapter 3The Web Configurator TxPkts RxPkts Collisions Tx B/s Rx B/s System Up Time Poll Interval(s) Set Interval The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 6 Summary: Packet Statistics LABEL Port Status For the WAN port, it displays the port speed and duplex setting if youre using Ethernet encapsulation and Idle (line (ppp) idle), Dial
(starting to trigger a call) and Drop (dropping a call) if you're using PPPoE or PPTP encapsulation. This field displays Down when the line is disconnected. DESCRIPTION This is the NBG4115s port type. For the LAN ports, this displays the port speed and duplex setting or Down when the line is disconnected. For the WLAN, it displays the maximum transmission rate when the WLAN is enabled and Down when the WLAN is disabled. This is the number of transmitted packets on this port. This is the number of received packets on this port. This is the number of collisions on this port. This displays the transmission speed in bytes per second on this port. This displays the reception speed in bytes per second on this port. This is the total time the NBG4115 has been on. Enter the time interval for refreshing statistics in this field. Click this button to apply the new poll interval you entered in the Poll Interval(s) field. Click Stop to stop refreshing statistics. Company Confidential Click the WLAN Station Status (Details...) hyperlink in the Status screen. View the wireless stations that are currently associated to the NBG4115 in the Association List. Association means that a wireless client (for example, your network or computer with a wireless network card) has connected successfully to the AP (or wireless router) using the same SSID, channel and security settings. 3.5.4 Summary: WLAN Station Status Figure 8 Summary: Wireless Association List Stop 36 Users Guide Chapter 3The Web Configurator Refresh The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 7 Summary: Wireless Association List LABEL
MAC Address Association Time DESCRIPTION This is the index number of an associated wireless station. This field displays the MAC address of an associated wireless station. This field displays the time a wireless station first associated with the NBG4115s WLAN network. Click Refresh to reload the list. Company Confidential Users Guide 37 Chapter 3The Web Configurator Company Confidential 38 Users Guide CHAPTER 4 4.1 Overview 4.2 Wizard Setup This chapter provides information on the wizard setup screens in the Web Configurator. Connection Wizard The Web Configurators wizard setup helps you configure your device to access the Internet. Refer to your ISP (Internet Service Provider) checklist in the Quick Start Guide to know what to enter in each field. Leave a field blank if you dont have that information. Company Confidential You can click Go to Advanced setup hyperlink to skip this wizard setup and configure basic or advanced features accordingly. Figure 9 Select Wizard or Advanced Mode 1 After you access the NBG4115 Web Configurator, click the Go to Wizard setup hyperlink. Users Guide 39 Chapter 4Connection Wizard 2 Choose a language by clicking on the languages button. The screen will update. Figure 11 Welcome to the Connection Wizard 3 Read the on-screen information and click Next. Click the Next button to proceed to the next screen. Figure 10 Select a Language Company Confidential click System. Click the Network Identification tab and then the Properties button. Note the entry for the Computer name field and enter it as the System Name. System Name is for identification purposes. However, because some ISPs check this name you should enter your computer's "Computer Name". then click the Computer Name tab. Note the entry in the Full computer name field and enter it as the NBG4115 System Name. 4.3 STEP 1: System Information In Windows XP, click Start > My Computer > View system information and In Windows 2000, click Start > Settings > Control Panel and then double-
System Information contains administrative and system-related information. 4.3.1 System Name 40 Users Guide Chapter 4Connection Wizard 4.3.2 Domain Name Click Next to configure the NBG4115 for Internet access. Figure 12 Wizard Step 1: System Information The Domain Name entry is what is propagated to the DHCP clients on the LAN. If you leave this blank, the domain name obtained by DHCP from the ISP is used. While you must enter the host name (System Name) on each individual computer, the domain name can be assigned from the NBG4115 via DHCP. Company Confidential DESCRIPTION System Name is a unique name to identify the NBG4115 in an Ethernet network. Enter a descriptive name. This name can be up to 30 alphanumeric characters long. Spaces are not allowed, but dashes "-" and underscores "_" are accepted. Type the domain name (if you know it) here. If you leave this field blank, the ISP may assign a domain name via DHCP. The domain name entered by you is given priority over the ISP assigned domain name. Click Back to display the previous screen. Click Next to proceed to the next screen. Click Exit to close the wizard screen without saving. Table 8 Wizard Step 1: System Information LABEL System Name The following table describes the labels in this screen. Back Next Exit Domain Name Users Guide 41 Chapter 4Connection Wizard 4.4 STEP 2: Wireless LAN Figure 13 Wizard Step 2: Wireless LAN Set up your wireless LAN using the following screen. DESCRIPTION Enter a descriptive name (up to 32 printable 7-bit ASCII characters) for the wireless LAN. The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 9 Wizard Step 2: Wireless LAN LABEL Name
(SSID) Company Confidential Choose Extend (WPA-PSK or WPA2-PSK) security to configure a Pre-
Shared Key. Choose this option only if your wireless clients support WPA-
PSK or WPA2-PSK respectively. If you choose this option, skip directly to Section 4.4.1 on page 43 . The range of radio frequencies used by IEEE 802.11b/g/n wireless devices is called a channel. The device will automatically select the channel with the least interference. Click Back to display the previous screen. Click Next to proceed to the next screen. Click Exit to close the wizard screen without saving. Choose None to have no wireless LAN security configured. If you do not enable any wireless security on your NBG4115, your network is accessible to any wireless networking device that is within range. If you choose this option, skip directly to Section 4.5 on page 43. Choose Auto (WPA2-PSK) to have the NBG4115 generate a pre-shared key automatically. After you click Next a screen pops up displaying the generated pre-shared key. Write down the key for use later when connecting other wireless devices to your network. Click OK to continue. If you change this field on the NBG4115, make sure all wireless stations use the same SSID in order to access the network. Select a Security level from the drop-down list box. Back Next Exit Channel Selection Security 42 Users Guide Chapter 4Connection Wizard Note: The wireless stations and NBG4115 must use the same SSID, channel ID, Figure 14 Wizard Step 2: Extend (WPA-PSK or WPA2-PSK) Security 4.4.1 Extend (WPA-PSK or WPA2-PSK) Security Choose Extend (WPA-PSK) or Extend (WPA2-PSK) security in the Wireless LAN setup screen to set up a Pre-Shared Key. WPA-PSK (if WPA-PSK is enabled) or WPA2-PSK (if WPA2-PSK is enabled) for wireless communication. Company Confidential DESCRIPTION Type from 8 to 63 case-sensitive ASCII or HEX characters. You can set up the most secure wireless connection by configuring WPA in the wireless LAN screens. You need to configure an authentication server to do this. Click Back to display the previous screen. Click Next to proceed to the next screen. Click Exit to close the wizard screen without saving. The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 10 Wizard Step 2: Extend (WPA-PSK or WPA2-PSK) Security LABEL Pre-Shared Key The NBG4115 offers four Internet connection types. They are Ethernet, PPP over Ethernet, PPTP or Mobile 3G. The wizard attempts to detect which WAN connection type you are using. If the wizard does not detect a connection type, you must select one from the drop-down list box. If you have an always-on connection, most likely you should use Ethernet. If your connection requires a user name and password to authenticate your connection, then choose either PPPoE or PPTP. Finally, if you are using a USB-based 3G device, select the Mobile 3G option. 4.5 STEP 3: Internet Configuration Back Next Exit Users Guide 43 Chapter 4Connection Wizard Note: When you select Mobile 3G, then all WAN connections are made through this. Figure 15 Wizard Step 3: ISP Parameters. Check with your ISP to make sure you use the correct type. This wizard screen varies according to the connection type that you select. The following table describes the labels in this screen, Table 11 Wizard Step 3: ISP Parameters CONNECTION TYPE EthernetSelect the Company Confidential Ethernet. Select the PPP over Ethernet option for a dial-up connection. If your ISP gave you an IP address and/or subnet mask, then select PPTP. Choose Ethernet when the WAN port is used as a regular Ethernet. Continue to Section 4.5.5 on page 49. PPTP option for a dial-up connection. Mobile 3G option for a USB 3G connection. 4.5.1 Ethernet Connection Figure 16 Wizard Step 3: Ethernet Connection Ethernet option when the WAN port is used as a regular PPTPSelect the Mobile 3GSelect the DESCRIPTION PPPoE 44 Users Guide Chapter 4Connection Wizard 4.5.2 PPPoE Connection For the service provider, PPPoE offers an access and authentication method that works with existing access control systems (for instance, RADIUS). Operationally, PPPoE saves significant effort for both the subscriber and the ISP/
carrier, as it requires no specific configuration of the broadband modem at the subscribers site. One of the benefits of PPPoE is the ability to let end users access one of multiple network services, a function known as dynamic service selection. This enables the service provider to easily create and offer new IP services for specific users. By implementing PPPoE directly on the NBG4115 (rather than individual computers), the computers on the LAN do not need PPPoE software installed, since the NBG4115 does that part of the task. Furthermore, with NAT, all of the LAN's computers will have Internet access. Point-to-Point Protocol over Ethernet (PPPoE) functions as a dial-up connection. PPPoE is an IETF (Internet Engineering Task Force) standard specifying how a host personal computer interacts with a broadband modem (for example DSL, cable, wireless, etc.) to achieve access to high-speed data networks. Company Confidential Table 12 Wizard Step 3: PPPoE Connection LABEL DESCRIPTION ISP Parameter for Internet Access Connection Type Service Name User Name Password Back Type the name of your service provider. Type the user name given to you by your ISP. Type the password associated with the user name above. Click Back to return to the previous screen. Figure 17 Wizard Step 3: PPPoE Connection The following table describes the labels in this screen. Select the PPP over Ethernet option for a dial-up connection. Users Guide 45 Chapter 4Connection Wizard Refer to the appendix for more information on PPTP. Figure 18 Wizard Step 3: PPTP Connection 4.5.3 PPTP Connection Note: The NBG4115 supports one PPTP server connection at any given time. Table 12 Wizard Step 3: PPPoE Connection LABEL Next Exit PPTP supports on-demand, multi-protocol, and virtual private networking over public networks, such as the Internet. DESCRIPTION Click Next to continue. Click Exit to close the wizard screen without saving. Point-to-Point Tunneling Protocol (PPTP) is a network protocol that enables transfers of data from a remote client to a private server, creating a Virtual Private Network (VPN) using TCP/IP-based networks. Company Confidential Table 13 Wizard Step 3: PPTP Connection LABEL DESCRIPTION ISP Parameters for Internet Access Connection TypeSelect PPTP from the drop-down list box. To configure a PPTP client, you must configure the User Name and Password fields for a PPP connection and the PPTP parameters for a PPTP connection. The following table describes the fields in this screen 46 Users Guide Chapter 4Connection Wizard Back Next Exit Type the IP address of the PPTP server. My IP Address My IP Subnet Mask Type the subnet mask assigned to you by your ISP (if given). Get automatically from ISP Use fixed IP address Enter the connection ID or connection name in this field. It must follow the "c:id" and "n:name" format. For example, C:12 or N:My ISP. This field is optional and depends on the requirements of your ISP. Select this radio button if your ISP did not assign you a fixed IP address. Select this radio button, provided by your ISP to give the NBG4115 a fixed, unique IP address. Type the (static) IP address assigned to you by your ISP. DESCRIPTION Type the user name given to you by your ISP. Type the password associated with the User Name above. Table 13 Wizard Step 3: PPTP Connection LABEL User Name Password PPTP Configuration Server IP Address Connection ID/
Name Company Confidential Click Back to return to the previous screen. Click Next to continue. Click Exit to close the wizard screen without saving. Users Guide 47 Chapter 4Connection Wizard 4.5.4 Mobile 3G Figure 19 Wizard Step 3: Mobile 3G Connection Note: When you use Mobile 3G, all WAN connections are made through it. Mobile 3G is a set of international third generation standards for the sending and receiving of voice, video, and wireless data in a mobile environment. For the NBG4115, this type of wireless connection requires a connected 3G-compatible USB device (see the included Quick Start Guide for installation information), and a 3G account with your local ISP. Company Confidential Enter the 4-digit 3G account PIN code given to you by your ISP. Enter the Access Point Name (APN) given to you by your ISP. Enter the phone number that must be dialed in order to login to your 3G account from the NBG4115. Type the user name given to you by your ISP. Type the password associated with the User Name above. Click Back to return to the previous screen. Click Next to continue. Click Exit to close the wizard screen without saving. The following table describes the fields in this screen Table 14 Wizard Step 3: Mobile 3G Connection DESCRIPTION LABEL ISP Parameters for Internet Access Connection TypeSelect Mobile3G from the drop-down list box. PIN Code APN Code Dial Number User Name Password Back Next Exit 48 Users Guide Chapter 4Connection Wizard 4.5.5 Your IP Address Figure 20 Wizard Step 3: Your IP Address The following wizard screen allows you to assign a fixed IP address or give the NBG4115 an automatically assigned IP address depending on your ISP. The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 15 Wizard Step 3: Your IP Address LABEL Get automatically from your ISP Company Confidential Every computer on the Internet must have a unique IP address. If your networks are isolated from the Internet, for instance, only between your two branch offices, you can assign any IP addresses to the hosts without problems. However, the Internet Assigned Numbers Authority (IANA) has reserved the following three blocks of IP addresses specifically for private networks. Table 16 Private IP Address Ranges 10.0.0.0 172.16.0.0 192.168.0.0 DESCRIPTION Select this option If your ISP did not assign you a fixed IP address. This is the default selection. If you choose this option, skip directly to Section 4.5.10 on page 52. Select this option if you were given IP address and/or DNS server settings by the ISP. The fixed IP address should be in the same subnet as your broadband modem or router. Click Back to return to the previous screen. Click Next to continue. Click Exit to close the wizard screen without saving. You can obtain your IP address from the IANA, from an ISP or have it assigned by a private network. If you belong to a small organization and your Internet access is through an ISP, the ISP can provide you with the Internet addresses for your 4.5.6 WAN IP Address Assignment 10.255.255.255 172.31.255.255 192.168.255.255 Use fixed IP address provided by your ISP Back Next Exit
Users Guide 49 Chapter 4Connection Wizard local networks. On the other hand, if you are part of a much larger organization, you should consult your network administrator for the appropriate IP addresses. 4.5.7 IP Address and Subnet Mask Note: Regardless of your particular situation, do not create an arbitrary IP address;
Similar to the way houses on a street share a common street name, so too do computers on a LAN share one common network number. always follow the guidelines above. For more information on address assignment, please refer to RFC 1597, Address Allocation for Private Internets and RFC 1466, Guidelines for Management of IP Address Space. Where you obtain your network number depends on your particular situation. If the ISP or your network administrator assigns you a block of registered IP addresses, follow their instructions in selecting the IP addresses and the subnet mask. Company Confidential If the ISP did not explicitly give you an IP network number, then most likely you have a single user account and the ISP will assign you a dynamic IP address when the connection is established. The Internet Assigned Number Authority (IANA) reserved this block of addresses specifically for private use; please do not use any other number unless you are told otherwise. Let's say you select 192.168.1.0 as the network number; which covers 254 individual addresses, from 192.168.1.1 to 192.168.1.254 (zero and 255 are reserved). In other words, the first three numbers specify the network number while the last number identifies an individual computer on that network. Use DNS (Domain Name System) to map a domain name to its corresponding IP address and vice versa, for instance, the IP address of www.zyxel.com is 204.217.0.2. The DNS server is extremely important because without it, you must know the IP address of a computer before you can access it. The subnet mask specifies the network number portion of an IP address. Your NBG4115 will compute the subnet mask automatically based on the IP address that you entered. You don't need to change the subnet mask computed by the NBG4115 unless you are instructed to do otherwise. Once you have decided on the network number, pick an IP address that is easy to remember, for instance, 192.168.1.1, for your NBG4115, but make sure that no other device on your network is using that IP address. 4.5.8 DNS Server Address Assignment The NBG4115 can get the DNS server addresses in the following ways. 50 Users Guide Chapter 4Connection Wizard 1 2 Figure 21 Wizard Step 3: WAN IP and DNS Server Addresses 4.5.9 WAN IP and DNS Server Address Assignment The following wizard screen allows you to assign a fixed WAN IP address and DNS server addresses. The ISP tells you the DNS server addresses, usually in the form of an information sheet, when you sign up. If your ISP gives you DNS server addresses, enter them in the DNS Server fields in the Wizard and/or WAN> Internet Connection screen. If the ISP did not give you DNS server information, leave the DNS Server fields set to 0.0.0.0 in the Wizard screen and/or set to From ISP in the WAN >
Internet Connection screen for the ISP to dynamically assign the DNS server IP addresses. Company Confidential Table 17 Wizard Step 3: WAN IP and DNS Server Addresses LABEL WAN IP Address Assignment My WAN IP AddressEnter your WAN IP address in this field. The WAN IP address DNS (Domain Name System) is for mapping a domain name to its corresponding IP address and vice versa. The DNS server is extremely important because without it, you must know the IP address of a computer before you can access it. The NBG4115 uses a system DNS server (in the order you specify here) to resolve domain names for DDNS and the time server. My WAN IP Subnet Mask Gateway IP Address Enter the gateway IP address in this field. System DNS Server Address Assignment (if applicable) should be in the same subnet as your DSL/Cable modem or router. Enter the IP subnet mask in this field. The following table describes the labels in this screen DESCRIPTION Users Guide 51 Chapter 4Connection Wizard Back Next Exit Second DNS Server 4.5.10 WAN MAC Address If you do not configure a system DNS server, you must use IP addresses when configuring DDNS and the time server. Table 17 Wizard Step 3: WAN IP and DNS Server Addresses LABEL First DNS Server DESCRIPTION Enter the DNS server's IP address in the fields provided. Click Back to return to the previous screen. Click Next to continue. Click Exit to close the wizard screen without saving. 192.168.1.2-192.168.1.32; 192.168.1.65-192.168.1.254. 255.255.255.0 192.168.1.1(NBG4115 LAN IP) Every Ethernet device has a unique MAC (Media Access Control) address. The MAC address is assigned at the factory and consists of six pairs of hexadecimal characters, for example, 00:A0:C5:00:00:02. Table 18 Example of Network Properties for LAN Servers with Fixed IP Addresses Choose an IP address Subnet mask Gateway (or default route) Company Confidential This screen allows users to configure the WAN port's MAC address by either using the NBG4115s MAC address, copying the MAC address from a computer on your LAN or manually entering a MAC address. Once it is successfully configured, the address will be copied to configuration file. It is advisable to clone the MAC address from a computer on your LAN even if your ISP does not presently require MAC address authentication. Figure 22 Wizard Step 3: WAN MAC Address 52 Users Guide Chapter 4Connection Wizard DESCRIPTION Clone the computers MAC address Click Finish to complete the wizard setup. Factory Default to use the factory assigned default MAC Set WAN MAC Address Back Next Exit 4.6 Connection Wizard Complete Click Back to return to the previous screen. Click Next to continue. Click Exit to close the wizard screen without saving. The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 19 Wizard Step 3: WAN MAC Address LABEL Factory DefaultSelect address. Select this option and enter the IP address of the computer on the LAN whose MAC you are cloning. It is advisable to clone the MAC address from a computer on your LAN even if your ISP does not presently require MAC address authentication. Select this option and enter the MAC address you want to use. Company Confidential You have successfully set up your NBG4115 to operate on your network and access the Internet. Figure 23 Connection Wizard Complete Users Guide 53 Chapter 4Connection Wizard Company Confidential 54 Users Guide CHAPTER 5 AP mode. 5.1 Overview AP Mode Note: See Chapter 6 on page 63 for an example of setting up a wireless network in Use your NBG4115 as an AP if you already have a router or gateway on your network. In this mode your device bridges a wired network (LAN) and wireless LAN (WLAN) in the same subnet. See the figure below for an example. This chapter discusses how to configure settings while your NBG4115 is set to AP Mode. Many screens that are available in Router Mode are not available in AP Mode. Company Confidential Log into the Web Configurator if you havent already. See the Quick start Guide for instructions on how to do this. 5.2 Setting your NBG4115 to AP Mode Figure 24 Wireless Internet Access in AP Mode A B 1 Users Guide 55 Chapter 5AP Mode 2 Note: You have to log in to the Web Configurator again when you change modes. To set your NBG4115 to AP Mode, go to Maintenance > Sys OP Mode >
General and select Access Point. Figure 25 Maintenance > Sys OP Mode > General 3 A pop-up appears providing information on this mode. Click OK in the pop-up message window. (See Section 22.2 on page 196 for more information on the pop-up.) Click Apply. Your NBG4115 is now in AP Mode. Company Confidential 5.3 The Status Screen in AP Mode Click on Status. The screen below shows the status screen in AP Mode. Figure 26 Status: AP Mode 56 Users Guide Chapter 5AP Mode The following table describes the labels shown in the Status screen. scheduler. wireless LAN. On, Off or Off by DESCRIPTION System NameThis is the General screen. It is for identification purposes. System Name you enter in the Maintenance > System >
- Name (SSID)This shows a descriptive name used to identify the NBG4115 in the s IP address. s subnet mask. s DHCP role - None. Table 20 Web Configurator Status Screen LABEL Device Information
- ChannelThis shows the channel number which you select manually.
- Operating ChannelThis shows the channel number which the NBG4115 is currently using Firmware VersionThis is the firmware version and the date created. LAN Information
- MAC AddressThis shows the LAN Ethernet adapter MAC Address of your device.
- IP AddressThis shows the LAN port
- IP Subnet MaskThis shows the LAN port
- DHCPThis shows the LAN port WLAN Information
- MAC AddressThis shows the wireless adapter MAC Address of your device.
- StatusThis shows the current status of the Wireless LAN -
Company Confidential System UptimeThis is the total time the NBG4115 has been on. Current Date/TimeThis field displays your NBG4115 System Resource
- CPU UsageThis displays what percentage of the NBG4115 currently used. When this percentage is close to 100%, the NBG4115 is running at full load, and the throughput is not going to improve anymore. If you want some applications to have more throughput, you should turn off other applications.
- Security ModeThis shows the level of wireless security the NBG4115 is using.
- 802.11 ModeThis shows the IEEE 802.11 standard that the NBG4115 supports.
- WPSThis shows the WPS (WiFi Protected Setup) Status. Click the status to display Network > Wireless LAN > WPS screen. Wireless clients must support the same standard in order to be able to connect to the NBG4115
- Memory UsageThis shows what percentage of the heap memory the NBG4115 is using. InterfaceThis displays the NBG4115 port types. The port types are:
StatusFor the LAN port, this field displays Down (line is down) or Up (line is up s present date and time. over the wireless LAN. s processing ability is Interface Status System Status or connected). For the WLAN, it displays Up when the WLAN is enabled or Down when the WLAN is disabled. LAN and WLAN. Users Guide 57 Chapter 5AP Mode N/A Summary to the NBG4115. DESCRIPTION Table 20 Web Configurator Status Screen (continued) LABEL when the line is disconnected. Figure 27 Menu: AP Mode RateFor the LAN ports, this displays the port speed and duplex setting or 5.3.1 Navigation Panel The following screen and table show the features you can configure in AP Mode. Use the menu in the navigation panel to configure NBG4115 features in AP Mode. For the WLAN, it displays the maximum transmission rate when the WLAN is enabled and N/A when the WLAN is disabled. Packet StatisticsUse this screen to view port status and packet specific statistics. WLAN Station StatusUse this screen to view the wireless stations that are currently associated Company Confidential The following table describes the sub-menus. Table 21 Screens Summary LINK Status FUNCTION This screen shows the NBG4115s general device, system and interface status information. Use this screen to access the wizard, and summary statistics tables. Network TAB 58 Users Guide Chapter 5AP Mode Note: If you change the IP address of the NBG4115 in the screen below, you will need Figure 28 Network > LAN > IP The table below describes the labels in the screen. to log into the NBG4115 again using the new IP address. Table 22 Network > LAN > IP DESCRIPTION LABEL Select this to let the DHCP server in the gateway assign the NBG4115 IP Get from address. DHCP Server User Defined Select this to give the NBG4115 a static IP address. LAN IP IP Address Company Confidential Type the IP address in dotted decimal notatiion. The default setting is 192.168.1.2. If you change the IP address you will have to log in again with the new IP address. The subnet mask specifies the network number portion of an IP address. Your NBG4115 will automatically calculate the subnet mask based on the IP address that you assign. Unless you are implementing subnetting, use the subnet mask computed by the NBG4115. Click Apply to save your changes to the NBG4115. Click Reset to reload the previous configuration for this screen. The configuration of wireless and maintenance settings in AP Mode is the same as for Router Mode. 5.5 WLAN and Maintenance Settings See Maintenance and Troubleshooting (179) for information on the configuring See Chapter 5 on page 69 for information on the configuring your wireless your Maintenance settings. IP Subnet Mask Apply Reset network. 60 Users Guide Chapter 5AP Mode 5.6 Logging in while in AP Mode 5 4 2 Type cmd in the dialog box. 3 Click Start > Run on your computer in Windows. 1 Connect your computer to the LAN port of the NBG4115. Explorer and type 192.168.1.2 as the web address in your web browser. See Chapter 6 on page 63 for a tutorial on setting up a network with an AP. 6 After youve set your computers IP address, open a web browser such as Internet The default IP address of the NBG4115 is 192.168.1.2. In this case, your computer must have an IP address in the range between 192.168.1.3 and 192.168.1.254. Type ipconfig to show your computers IP address. If your computers IP address is not in the correct range then see Appendix D on page 233 for information on changing your computers IP address. Company Confidential Users Guide 61 Chapter 5AP Mode Company Confidential 62 Users Guide CHAPTER 6 6.1 Overview This chapter provides tutorials for setting up your NBG4115. Tutorials 1 Use the Wizard, which was introduced in the Quick Start Guide. The wizard is 6.2 Set Up a 3G Connection This section shows you how to make a 3G connection with your NBG4115. There are two ways to set up your 3G options. Company Confidential access to other options not available in the Wizard, allowing you to have more control over your device. good for getting up and running in as little time as possible. It allows you to configure the minimum number of options required to get connected. 2 Use the Web Configurators Network options. This is handy because it gives you FIELD PIN CodeThis is the 4-digit Personal You will need the following information, which should be provided by your ISP:
(APN) of the 3G network to which you intend to connect. your 3G device to make its data connection to the 3G network. Identification Number (PIN) for your 3G devices SIM card. This tutorial shows you how to do the second one. Dial NumberThis is the number used to instruct APN CodeThis is the Access Point Name EXAMPLE 1234 DESCRIPTION mobile.p3.cz.co gprsinternet
*99***3#
*99#
Users Guide 63 Chapter 6Tutorials s password. EXAMPLE DESCRIPTION to Advanced setup. To set up a 3G connection:
PasswordThis is your account user name 0b1ken@kashiik.org
FIELD User NameThis is your account user name.dcmchale 1 Connect to the Web Configurator, as described in the Quick Start Guide. 2 When presented with the option to choose either Wizard or Advanced, click Go Company Confidential 3 Expand the Network submenu on the navigation pane, then click WAN. 64 Users Guide Chapter 6Tutorials 4 From the Connection Type menu, select Mobile 3G then configure your 3G settings when the screen updates itself.f 5 Click Apply to save your changes, then exit the Web Configurator. Note: Once you set up and enable a 3G device, all incoming and outgoing network Company Confidential Gaming is a very popular online activity, and one that can be extremely bandwidth sensitive. Some video games may have higher performance expectations than other types of software. As such, they tend to require more finely tuned Quality of Service (QoS) prioritization. If the data packets from a game are assigned a lower priority by the NBG4115, then they may take longer to reach their destination; but if they are given a higher priority, then they should arrive at their destination marginally faster. This is because Internet servers that rely on QoS to sort packets that are in transit generally pass higher priority packets on first, while lower priority packets are held back slightly longer. When this happens on a single server with a single data packet, your gameplay is not affected. When it happens over 15 servers from beginning to end with thousands of bytes of data, then the build up of low-priority latency can become significant. For Massively Multiplayer Online (MMOs) and First Person Shooters
(FPS) (which account for 3-4% of all Internet-related traffic) a latency difference of even 200 milliseconds is enough to ruin the gaming experience. 6.3 Set Up the NBG4115 for Gaming connections are made through it and not the WAN port on your NBG4115. Users Guide 65 Chapter 6Tutorials 1 This tutorial shows you how to set up your NBG4115 for gaming. In the Web Configurator, expand the navigation panes Management category and then select BandwidthMGMT Bandwidth management allows you to set up custom parameters on the NBG4115 so that whenever you play a game, the QoS is automatically upgraded to the highest priority in order to ensure your game data packets are plucked first from the pool of incoming information and sent on ahead of lower priority packets. Company Confidential 2 Select the Advanced tab. 66 Users Guide Chapter 6Tutorials 3 Enable the Gaming check box and set its Priority to High. Company Confidential The following gaming ports are preconfigured on your NBG4115 and are enabled when you select the gaming Service in the Management > Bandwidth MGMT
> Advanced screen:
Table 23 Preconfigured Gaming Ports APPLICATION TCP PORTS XBox 3603074, 3390, 3932, 55551900, 3776, 7777, 88, Playstation80, 443, 5223, 52233478, 3479, 3658, 4658 Battlenet40, 6112, 4000, 6113-
Note: If you need to customize specific ports, go to the next step. Otherwise, skip MSN Game Zone6667, 28800-290006667, 28800-29000 ahead to step 5. UDP PORTS 6119, 112 3074 Users Guide 67 Chapter 6Tutorials 4 Priority: Set this to High. To create a custom QoS setting for a specific game, enter the following information in the first available custom Priority Queue line:
5 Click Apply to save your changes, then exit the Web Configurator. Service: This is the name by which your custom service is labled. It can be anything with the limitation that it cannot be longer than 10 characters. 6.4 Set Up a Wireless Network with WPS Specific Port: From the list, select the communication protocol your game uses. In this example, our game uses TCP/IP so we choose TCP. If you are not sure, then select Both. Enter the starting port in the first port range box, then enter then last port in the second port range box. For our game, we used 6112 to 6119. Company Confidential This section gives you an example of how to set up wireless network using WPS. This example uses the NBG4115 as the AP and NWD210N as the wireless client which connects to a notebook. wireless client's PIN (Personal Identification Number) in the NBG4115s interface. See Section 6.4.2 on page 70. This is the more secure method, since one device can authenticate the other. There are two WPS methods for creating a secure connection. This tutorial shows you how to do both. 6.4.1 Push Button Configuration (PBC) Note: The wireless client must be a WPS-aware device (for example, a WPS USB 1 Make sure that your NBG4115 is turned on and that it is within range of your 2 Make sure that you have installed the wireless client (this example uses the Push Button Configuration (PBC) - create a secure wireless network simply PIN Configuration - create a secure wireless network simply by entering a by pressing a button. See Section 6.4.1 on page 68.This is the easier method. adapter or PCI card). computer. NWD210N) driver and utility in your notebook. 68 Users Guide Chapter 6Tutorials 3 4 button within two minutes of pressing the first one. Figure 29 Example WPS Process: PBC Method In the wireless client utility, find the WPS settings. Enable WPS and press the WPS button (Start or WPS button) Note: It doesnt matter which button is pressed first. You must press the second Log into NBG4115s Web Configurator and press the Push Button button in the Network > Wireless Client > WPS Station screen. The NBG4115 sends the proper configuration settings to the wireless client. This may take up to two minutes. Then the wireless client is able to communicate with the NBG4115 securely. The following figure shows you an example to set up wireless network and security by pressing a button on both NBG4115 and wireless client (the NWD210N in this example). Note: Your NBG4115 has a WPS button located on its panel, as well as a WPS button in its configuration utility. Both buttons have exactly the same function; you can use one or the other. Company Confidential ZyXEL Device Wireless Client WITHIN 2 MINUTES COMMUNICATION SECURITY INFO Users Guide 69 Chapter 6Tutorials 6.4.2 PIN Configuration 1 Station screen on the NBG4115. utility screen and the NBG4115s WPS Station screen within two minutes. 3 Click Start buttons (or button next to the PIN field) on both the wireless client 2 Enter the PIN number to the PIN field in the Network > Wireless LAN > WPS Launch your wireless clients configuration utility. Go to the WPS settings and select the PIN method to get a PIN number. When you use the PIN configuration method, you need to use both NBG4115s configuration interface and the clients utilities. The following figure shows you the example to set up wireless network and security on NBG4115 and wireless client (ex. NWD210N in this example) by using PIN method. The NBG4115 authenticates the wireless client and sends the proper configuration settings to the wireless client. This may take up to two minutes. Then the wireless client is able to communicate with the NBG4115 securely. Company Confidential Figure 30 Example WPS Process: PIN Method WITHIN 2 MINUTES ZyXEL Device Wireless Client 70 Users Guide Chapter 6Tutorials SSID Channel Security 6.5 Configure Wireless Security without WPS
(Pre-Shared Key: ThisismyWPA-PSKpre-sharedkey) SSID_Example3 6 WPA-PSK 3 Enter SSID_Example3 as the SSID and select a channel. 2 Make sure the Enable Wireless LAN check box is selected. Follow the steps below to configure the wireless settings on your NBG4115. 1 Open the Wireless LAN > General screen in the APs Web Configurator. This example shows you how to configure wireless security settings with the following parameters on your NBG4115. The instructions require that your hardware is connected (see the Quick Start Guide) and you are logged into the Web Configurator through your LAN connection
(see Section 3.2 on page 27). Company Confidential the Pre-Shared Key field. Click Apply. Figure 31 Tutorial: Network > Wireless LAN > General 4 Set security mode to WPA-PSK and enter ThisismyWPA-PSKpre-sharedkey in Users Guide 71 Chapter 6Tutorials 5 Open the Status screen. Verify your wireless and wireless security settings under Device Information and check if the WLAN connection is up under Interface Status. Figure 32 Tutorial: Status Screen Company Confidential your screen, go to Start > Programs and click on your utility in the list of programs that appears. The utility displays a list of APs within range, as shown in the example screen below. The NBG4115 supports IEEE 802.11b, IEEE 802.11g and IEEE 802.11n wireless clients. Make sure that your notebook or computers wireless adapter supports one of these standards. on your computer. See your wireless adapters Users Guide for information on how to do that. Note: We use the ZyXEL M-302 wireless adapter utility screens as an example for the 2 Wireless adapters come with software sometimes called a utility that you install 3 After youve installed the utility, open it. If you cannot see your utilitys icon on 6.5.1 Configure Your Notebook wireless client. The screens may vary for different models. 1 72 Users Guide Chapter 6Tutorials 4 Select SSID_Example3 and click Connect. Figure 34 Security Settings Figure 33 Connecting a Wireless Client to a Wireless Network t 5 Select WPA-PSK and type the security key in the following screen. Click Next. Company Confidential The Confirm Save window appears. Check your settings and click Save to continue. Figure 35 Confirm Save 6 Users Guide 73 Chapter 6Tutorials 6.6 Bandwidth Management If your connection is successful, open your Internet browser and enter http://
www.zyxel.com or the URL of any other web site in the address bar. If you are able to access the web site, your wireless connection is successfully configured. 7 Check the status of your wireless connection in the screen below. If your wireless connection is weak or you have no connection, see the Troubleshooting section of this Users Guide. Figure 36 Link Status Company Confidential This section shows you how to configure the bandwidth management feature on the NBG4115 to limit the bandwidth for specific kinds of outgoing traffic. ZyXEL's bandwidth management feature allows you to specify bandwidth management rules based on an application or subnet. In the Priority Queue table, VoIP and e-mail services are already pre-defined. However, you still need to add MSN Messenger in the list (refer to Section 6.6.2 on page 75). Use the Management > Bandwidth MGMT > Advanced screen to configure bandwidth management for your network. For this example, your companys customer support department wants to prioritize VoIP, e-mail and MSN Messenger services. 6.6.1 Bandwidth Management by Application 74 Users Guide Chapter 6Tutorials In the following screen, you set the priorities for VoIP and e-mail. Figure 37 Tutorial: Priority Queue Note: You can also leave the Enable field blank for the rest of the applications. In Click Enable for the VoIP (SIP) service and set priority to High. Do the same for E-mail. For the rest of the applications, click Enable if you need these services and set the priority to Low. Company Confidential Aside from the VOIP and e-mail services, you need to set the priority for MSN Messenger. To do this, add the service in the Priority Queue table of the Management > Bandwidth MGMT > Advanced screen. doing so, the NBG4115 does not apply bandwidth management to these services. 6.6.2 Custom Bandwidth Management Figure 38 Tutorial: Adding TFTP to Priority Queue To add the MSN Messenger service in the Priority Queue:
Users Guide 75 Chapter 6Tutorials 1 Click Enable in one of the fields for additional services. 4 You know the following:
2 Add MSN as the service name. 3 Set the priority for this to High. 6.6.3 Bandwidth Management by IP or IP Range For the port, choose TCP from the drop-down menu and enter 1863 in the Specific Port field. Your priority table should now have the VoIP, e-mail and MSN Messenger services priorities set to High. For this example, your companys 20th anniversary is coming up. You want to use the multimedia rooms Internet connection to upload some videos to the website. You also use this room for video conferences, radio broadcasts, live video streaming, and so on throughout the day. While these media-heavy activities are going on, you still want to keep uploading the videos in the background. As such, you want to dedicate the minimum amount of bandwidth for this traffic. Company Confidential Click the Edit icon in Management > Bandwidth MGMT > Advanced to open the following screen. The following screen appears. Multimedia rooms LAN IP range: 192.168.1.1 to 192.168.1.34 IP Address of the computer uploading through FTP: 192.168.1.34 REAL AUDIO RTSPTCP or UDP 554 VDO LIVETCP 7000 FTPTCP 20 ~ 21 Figure 39 Tutorial: Bandwidth Allocation Example Services you want to configure:
TCP 7070 76 Users Guide Chapter 6Tutorials 64K FTP FIELDS or UDPTCP Select To WAN REAL AUDIO RTSP Bandwidth Allocation table. 192.168.1.34 TCP SERVICES VDO LIVE Both applies bandwidth management to traffic 30M as the minimum bandwidth allowed. Select TCPTCP 7070554700020 ~ 21 MinMax ActiveCheck this to turn on this bandwidth management rule. DirectionSelect that the NBG4115 forwards to both the LAN and the WAN. Enter 192.168.1.1 ~ 192.168.1.33.Enter After adding these services, go to Management > Bandwidth MGMT >
Advanced and check if you have the correct values. Enter the following values for each service you want to add. For this tutorial, you need to add each of the following service (see table below) and click Apply. Table 24 LAN IP Range Protocol Port Range Policy RateSelect ApplyClick this to add the rule to the Company Confidential directly directed to the value in the Rate column. For example, you selected Min and entered 30M as the rate for the VoIP service. The NBG4115 allocates at least 30 megabytes for the VoIP service. Refer to Appedix F on page 263 for a list of common services that you can add in the Bandwidth Mgnt screen. Note: The Policy column displays either Max (maximum) or Min (minimum). This is Figure 40 Tutorial: Bandwidth Allocation Example Users Guide 77 Chapter 6Tutorials Company Confidential 78 Users Guide LAN (115) NAT (125) WAN (101) Wireless LAN (81) DHCP Server (119) PART II Network Company Confidential DDNS (135) 79 Company Confidential 80 CHAPTER 7 Figure 41 Example of a Wireless Network 7.1 Overview The following figure provides an example of a wireless network. Wireless LAN This chapter discusses how to configure the wireless network settings in your NBG4115. See the appendices for more detailed information about wireless networks. Company Confidential The wireless network is the part in the blue circle. In this wireless network, devices A and B are called wireless clients. The wireless clients use the access point (AP) to interact with other devices (such as the printer) or with the Internet. Your NBG4115 is the AP. AP Users Guide 81 Chapter 7Wireless LAN 7.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter using WPS. in your wireless network. wireless LAN is turned on and off. networking and set the RTS/CTS Threshold. enter the SSID and select the wireless security mode. Every wireless network must follow these basic guidelines. stations based on their MAC addresses from connecting to the NBG4115. Use the Advanced screen (Section 7.4 on page 92) to allow intra-BSS Use the Scheduling screen (Section 7.8 on page 99) to set the times your Use the General screen (Section 7.2 on page 85) to enable the Wireless LAN, Use the MAC Filter screen (Section 7.3 on page 90) to allow or deny wireless 7.1.2 What You Should Know Use the WPS Station screen (Section 7.7 on page 98) to add a wireless station Use the QoS screen (Section 7.5 on page 94) to ensure Quality of Service (QoS) Use the WPS screen (Section 7.6 on page 97) to quickly set up a wireless network with strong security, without having to configure security settings manually. Company Confidential Normally, the AP acts like a beacon and regularly broadcasts the SSID in the area. You can hide the SSID instead, in which case the AP does not broadcast the SSID. In addition, you should change the default SSID to something that is difficult to guess. with the AP. Security stops unauthorized devices from using the wireless network. It can also protect the information that is sent in the wireless network. The following sections introduce different types of wireless security you can set up in the wireless network. Like radio stations or television channels, each wireless network uses a specific channel, or frequency, to send and receive information. Every wireless client in the same wireless network must use security compatible The SSID is the name of the wireless network. It stands for Service Set IDentity. Every wireless client in the same wireless network must use the same SSID. If two wireless networks overlap, they should use different channels. Wireless Security Overview SSID 82 Users Guide Chapter 7Wireless LAN MAC Address Filter This type of security is fairly weak, however, because there are ways for unauthorized devices to get the SSID. In addition, unauthorized devices can still see the information that is sent in the wireless network. This type of security does not protect the information that is sent in the wireless network. Furthermore, there are ways for unauthorized devices to get the MAC address of an authorized wireless client. Then, they can use that MAC address to use the wireless network. Every wireless client has a unique identification number, called a MAC address.1 A MAC address is usually written using twelve hexadecimal characters2; for example, 00A0C5000002 or 00:A0:C5:00:00:02. To get the MAC address for each wireless client, see the appropriate Users Guide or other documentation. You can use the MAC address filter to tell the AP which wireless clients are allowed or not allowed to use the wireless network. If a wireless client is allowed to use the wireless network, it still has to have the correct settings (SSID, channel, and security). If a wireless client is not allowed to use the wireless network, it does not matter if it has the correct settings. Company Confidential Unauthorized devices can still see the information that is sent in the wireless network, even if they cannot use the wireless network. Furthermore, there are ways for unauthorized wireless users to get a valid user name and password. Then, they can use that user name and password to use the wireless network. You can make every user log in to the wireless network before they can use it. This is called user authentication. However, every wireless client in the wireless network has to support IEEE 802.1x to do this. In the AP: this feature is called a local user database or a local database. In a RADIUS server: this is a server used in businesses more than in homes. If your AP does not provide a local user database and if you do not have a RADIUS server, you cannot set up user names and passwords for your users. For wireless networks, there are two typical places to store the user names and passwords for each user. 1.Some wireless devices, such as scanners, can detect wireless networks but cannot use wireless networks. These kinds of wireless devices might not have MAC addresses. User Authentication 2.Hexadecimal characters are 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, A, B, C, D, E, and F. Users Guide 83 Chapter 7Wireless LAN Weakest Stronges t Encryption Local user databases also have an additional limitation that is explained in the next section. Table 25 Types of Encryption for Each Type of Authentication The types of encryption you can choose depend on the type of user authentication. (See Section on page 83 for information about this.) NO AUTHENTICATION RADIUS SERVER No SecurityWPA Static WEP WPA-PSK WPA2-PSKWPA2 For example, if the wireless network has a RADIUS server, you can choose WPA or WPA2. If users do not log in to the wireless network, you can choose no encryption, Static WEP, WPA-PSK, or WPA2-PSK. Wireless networks can use encryption to protect the information that is sent in the wireless network. Encryption is like a secret code. If you do not know the secret code, you cannot understand the message. Company Confidential Usually, you should set up the strongest encryption that every wireless client in the wireless network supports. For example, suppose the AP does not have a local user database, and you do not have a RADIUS server. Therefore, there is no user authentication. Suppose the wireless network has two wireless clients. Device A only supports WEP, and device B supports WEP and WPA. Therefore, you should set up Static WEP in the wireless network. When you select WPA2 or WPA2-PSK in your NBG4115, you can also select an option (WPA Compatible) to support WPA as well. In this case, if some wireless clients support WPA and some support WPA2, you should set up WPA2-PSK or WPA2 (depending on the type of wireless network login) and select the WPA Compatible option in the NBG4115. encryption. IEEE 802.1x and WEP encryption are better than none at all, but it is still possible for unauthorized devices to figure out the original information pretty quickly. database. In this case, it is better to set up stronger encryption with no authentication than to set up weaker encryption with the local user database. Note: It is not possible to use WPA-PSK, WPA or stronger encryption with a local user Note: It is recommended that wireless networks use WPA-PSK, WPA, or stronger 84 Users Guide Chapter 7Wireless LAN WPS 7.2 General Use this screen to enable the Wireless LAN, enter the SSID and select the wireless security mode. Many types of encryption use a key to protect the information in the wireless network. The longer the key, the stronger the encryption. Every wireless client in the wireless network must have the same key. WiFi Protected Setup (WPS) is an industry standard specification, defined by the WiFi Alliance. WPS allows you to quickly set up a wireless network with strong security, without having to configure security settings manually. Depending on the devices in your network, you can either press a button (on the device itself, or in its configuration utility) or enter a PIN (Personal Identification Number) in the devices. Then, they connect and set up a secure network by themselves. See how to set up a secure wireless network using WPS in the Section 6.4 on page 68. Company Confidential LAN and you change the NBG4115s SSID, channel or security settings, you will lose your wireless connection when you press Apply to confirm. You must then change the wireless settings of your computer to match the NBG4115s new settings. Note: If you are configuring the NBG4115 from a computer connected to the wireless Click Network > Wireless LAN to open the General screen. Figure 42 Network > Wireless LAN > General Users Guide 85 Chapter 7Wireless LAN Hide SSID Channel Selection Auto Channel Selection Operating Channel Channel Width DESCRIPTION Click the check box to activate wireless LAN. Select a channel from the drop-down list box. The options vary depending on the frequency band and the country you are in. Refer to the Connection Wizard chapter for more information on channels. This option is only available if Auto Channel Selection is disabled. Select this check box for the NBG4115 to automatically choose the channel with the least interference. Deselect this check box if you wish to manually select the channel using the Channel Section field. This displays the channel the NBG4115 is currently using.
(Service Set IDentity) The SSID identifies the Service Set with which a wireless station is associated. Wireless stations associating to the access point (AP) must have the same SSID. Enter a descriptive name (up to 32 printable 7-bit ASCII characters) for the wireless LAN. Select this check box to hide the SSID in the outgoing beacon frame so a station cannot obtain the SSID through scanning using a site survey tool. Set the operating frequency/channel depending on your particular region. The following table describes the general wireless LAN labels in this screen. Table 26 Network > Wireless LAN > General LABEL Enable Wireless LAN Name(SSID) Company Confidential Select whether the NBG4115 uses a wireless channel width of 20 or 40 MHz. A standard 20 MHz channel offers transfer speeds of up to 150Mbps whereas a 40MHz channel uses two standard channels and offers speeds of up to 300 Mbps. Because not all devices support 40 MHz channels, select Auto 20/40MHz to allow the NBG4115 to adjust the channel bandwidth automatically. Select WPA-PSK or WPA2-PSK to add security on this wireless network. The wireless clients which want to associate to this network must have same wireless security settings as this device. After you select to use a security, additional options appears in this screen. See 7.2.2 and 7.2.3 sections. Or you can select No Security to allow any client to associate this network without authentication. Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG4115. Click Reset to reload the previous configuration for this screen. Note: If you enable the WPS function, only No Security, WPA-PSK See the rest of this chapter for information on the other labels in this screen. and WPA2-PSK are available in this field. Security Mode Apply Reset 86 Users Guide Chapter 7Wireless LAN 7.2.1 No Security Figure 43 Network > Wireless LAN > General: No Security accessible to any wireless networking device that is within range. Note: If you do not enable any wireless security on your NBG4115, your network is Select No Security to allow wireless stations to communicate with the access points without any data encryption. Company Confidential WEP encryption scrambles the data transmitted between the wireless stations and the access points to keep network communications private. It encrypts unicast and multicast communications in a network. Both the wireless stations and the access points must use the same WEP key. Table 27 Wireless No Security LABEL Security Mode Apply Reset Your NBG4115 allows you to configure up to four 64-bit or 128-bit WEP keys but only one key can be enabled at any one time. Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG4115. Click Reset to reload the previous configuration for this screen. DESCRIPTION Choose No Security from the drop-down list box. 7.2.2 WEP Encryption The following table describes the labels in this screen. Users Guide 87 Chapter 7Wireless LAN Figure 44 Network > Wireless LAN > General: Static WEP In order to configure and enable WEP encryption; click Network > Wireless LAN to display the General screen. Select Static WEP from the Security Mode list. Company Confidential Table 28 Network > Wireless LAN > General: Static WEP LABEL WEP Encryption Authenticatio n Method This field specifies whether the wireless clients have to provide the WEP key to login to the wireless client. Keep this setting at Auto or Open System unless you want to force a key verification before communication between the wireless client and the ZyXEL Device occurs. Select Shared Key to force the clients to provide the WEP key prior to communication. Select this option in order to enter ASCII characters as WEP key. DESCRIPTION Select 64-bit WEP or 128-bit WEP to enable data encryption. This field is activated when you select 64-bit WEP or 128-bit WEP in the WEP Encryption field. The following table describes the wireless LAN security labels in this screen. Select Auto, Open System or Shared Key from the drop-down list box. ASCII 88 Users Guide Chapter 7Wireless LAN Apply Reset Key 1 to Key 4 7.2.3 WPA-PSK/WPA2-PSK If you chose 128-bit WEP, then enter 13 ASCII characters or 26 hexadecimal characters ("0-9", "A-F"). Table 28 Network > Wireless LAN > General: Static WEP LABEL Hex If you chose 64-bit WEP, then enter any 5 ASCII characters or 10 hexadecimal characters ("0-9", "A-F"). DESCRIPTION Select this option in order to enter hexadecimal characters as a WEP key. Click Network > Wireless LAN to display the General screen. Select WPA-PSK or WPA2-PSK from the Security Mode list. The preceding "0x", that identifies a hexadecimal key, is entered automatically. The WEP keys are used to encrypt data. Both the NBG4115 and the wireless stations must use the same WEP key for data transmission. You must configure at least one key, only one key can be activated at any one time. The default key is key 1. Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG4115. Click Reset to reload the previous configuration for this screen. Company Confidential Figure 45 Network > Wireless LAN > General: WPA-PSK/WPA2-PSK Users Guide 89 Chapter 7Wireless LAN authentication. Group Key Update Timer Pre-Shared Key WPA-PSK/WPA2-PSK uses a simple common password for Type a pre-shared key from 8 to 63 case-sensitive ASCII characters
(including spaces and symbols). Select the check box to have both WPA2 and WPA wireless clients be able to communicate with the NBG4115 even when the NBG4115 is using WPA2-PSK. DESCRIPTION This check box is available only when you select WPA2-PSK in the Security Mode field. The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 29 Network > Wireless LAN > General: WPA-PSK/WPA2-PSK LABEL WPA Compatible Type a pre-shared key less than 64 case-sensitive HEX characters ("0-
9", "A-F"). The Group Key Update Timer is the rate at which the AP (if using WPA-PSK/WPA2-PSK key management) or RADIUSserver (if using WPA/WPA2 key management) sends a new group key out to all clients. The re-keying process is the WPA/WPA2 equivalent of automatically changing the WEP key for an AP and all stations in a WLAN on a periodic basis. Setting of the Group Key Update Timer is also supported in WPA-PSK/WPA2-PSK mode. The default is 1800 seconds (30 minutes). Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG4115. Click Reset to reload the previous configuration for this screen. Company Confidential The MAC filter screen allows you to configure the NBG4115 to give exclusive access to up to 16 devices (Allow) or exclude up to 16 devices from accessing the NBG4115 (Deny). Every Ethernet device has a unique MAC (Media Access Control) address. The MAC address is assigned at the factory and consists of six pairs of hexadecimal characters, for example, 00:A0:C5:00:00:02. You need to know the MAC address of the devices to configure this screen. 7.3 MAC Filter Apply Reset 90 Users Guide Chapter 7Wireless LAN Figure 46 Network > Wireless LAN > MAC Filter To change your NBG4115s MAC filter settings, click Network > Wireless LAN >
MAC Filter. The screen appears as shown. Company Confidential Select Allow to permit access to the NBG4115, MAC addresses not listed will be denied access to the NBG4115. This is the index number of the MAC address. Enter the MAC addresses of the wireless station that are allowed or denied access to the NBG4115 in these address fields. Enter the MAC addresses in a valid MAC address format, that is, six hexadecimal character pairs, for example, 12:34:56:78:9a:bc. Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG4115. Click Reset to reload the previous configuration for this screen. The following table describes the labels in this menu. Table 30 Network > Wireless LAN > MAC Filter LABEL Active Filter Action Define the filter action for the list of MAC addresses in the MAC Address DESCRIPTION Select Yes from the drop down list box to enable MAC address filtering. Select Deny to block access to the NBG4115, MAC addresses not listed will be allowed to access the NBG4115 Set MAC Address Apply Reset table. Users Guide 91 Chapter 7Wireless LAN 7.4 Advanced The following table describes the labels in this screen. Figure 47 Network > Wireless LAN > Advanced Click Network > Wireless LAN > Advanced. The screen appears as shown. Company Confidential This field is not available when Super Mode is selected. When a wirelessly networked device sends a beacon, it includes with it a beacon interval. This specifies the time period before the device sends the beacon again. The interval tells receiving devices on the network how long they can wait in low-power mode before waking up to handle the beacon. This value can be set from 20ms to 1000ms. A high value helps save current consumption of the access point. Delivery Traffic Indication Message (DTIM) is the time period after which broadcast and multicast packets are transmitted to mobile clients in the Active Power Management mode. A high DTIM value can cause clients to lose connectivity with the network. This value can be set from 1 to 100. Table 31 Network > Wireless LAN > Advanced LABEL Wireless Advanced Setup RTS/CTS Threshold Enter a value between 0 and 2432. The threshold (number of bytes) for the fragmentation boundary for directed messages. It is the maximum data fragment size that can be sent. Enter an even number between 256 and 2346. preamble modes: long and short.If a device uses a different preamble mode than the NBG4115 does, it cannot communicate with the NBG4115. Data with its frame size larger than this value will perform the RTS
(Request To Send)/CTS (Clear To Send) handshake. PreambleA preamble affects the timing in your wireless network. There are two Fragmentatio n Threshold DESCRIPTION Beacon Interval DTIM 92 Users Guide Chapter 7Wireless LAN Apply Reset Enable Intra-
BSS Traffic Tx PowerThis field controls the transmission power of the NBG4115. When using Table 31 Network > Wireless LAN > Advanced LABEL CTS Protection When set to Always, the NBG4115 improves performance within mixed wireless modes. Select Auto to let the NBG4115 determine whether to turn this feature on or off in the current environment. DESCRIPTION When set to None, the NBG4115 protects wireless communication against interference. the NBG4115 with a notebook computer, select a lower transmission power level when you are close to the AP in order to conserve battery power. A Basic Service Set (BSS) exists when all communications between wireless clients or between a wireless client and a wired network client go through one access point (AP). Intra-BSS traffic is traffic between wireless clients in the BSS. When Intra-
BSS is enabled, wireless client A and B can access the wired network and communicate with each other. When Intra-BSS is disabled, wireless client A and B can still access the wired network but cannot communicate with each other. Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG4115. Click Reset to reload the previous configuration for this screen. Company Confidential Users Guide 93 Chapter 7Wireless LAN 7.5 QoS Figure 48 Network > Wireless LAN > QoS Click Network > Wireless LAN > QoS. The following screen appears. The QoS screen allows you to automatically give a service (such as e-mail, VoIP or FTP) a priority level. Company Confidential The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 32 Network > Wireless LAN > QoS LABEL WMM QoS PolicySelect Default to have the NBG4115 automatically give a service a priority level according to the ToS value in the IP header of packets it sends. WMM QoS (Wifi MultiMedia Quality of Service) gives high priority to voice and video, which makes them run more smoothly.
#This is the number of an individual application entry. NameThis field displays a description given to an application entry. ServiceThis field displays either Select Application Priority from the drop-down list box to display a table of application names, services, ports and priorities to which you want to apply WMM QoS. The table appears only if you select Application Priority in WMM QoS Policy. service to which you want to apply WMM QoS. FTP, WWW, E-mail or a User Defined DESCRIPTION 94 Users Guide Chapter 7Wireless LAN Apply Modify DESCRIPTION application sends traffic. PriorityThis field displays the priority of the application. High - Typically used for voice or video that can be medium-quality. Highest - Typically used for voice or video that should be high-
quality. Mid - Typically used for applications that do not fit into another priority. For example, Internet surfing. Click the Remove icon to delete an application entry. Click Apply to save your changes to the NBG4115. 7.5.1 Application Priority Configuration Table 32 Network > Wireless LAN > QoS (continued) LABEL Dest PortThis field displays the destination port number to which the Low - Typically used for non-critical background applications, such as large file transfers and print jobs that should not affect other applications. Click the Edit icon to open the Application Priority Configuration screen. Modify an existing application entry or create a application entry in the Application Priority Configuration screen. Company Confidential Network > Wireless LAN > QoS: Application Priority Configuration LABEL NameType a description of the application priority. See Appendix F on page 263 for a list of commonly-used services and destination ports. The following table describes the fields in this screen. Use this screen to edit a WMM QoS application entry. Click the edit icon under Modify. The following screen displays. Figure 49 Network > Wireless LAN > QoS: Application Priority Configuration DESCRIPTION Users Guide 95 Chapter 7Wireless LAN FTP WWW E-Mail HTTP - port 80 SMTP - port 25 IMAP - port 143 POP3 - port 110 DESCRIPTION with WMM QoS. Select a service from the drop-down list box. Network > Wireless LAN > QoS: Application Priority Configuration (continued) LABEL ServiceThe following is a description of the applications you can prioritize Electronic mail consists of messages sent through a computer network to specific groups or individuals. Here are some default ports for e-mail:
File Transfer Protocol enables fast transfer of files, including large files that it may not be possible to send via e-mail. FTP uses port number 21. Company Confidential The World Wide Web is an Internet system to distribute graphical, hyper-linked information, based on Hyper Text Transfer Protocol
(HTTP) - a client/server protocol for the World Wide Web. The Web is not synonymous with the Internet; rather, it is just one service on the Internet. Other services on the Internet include Internet Relay Chat and Newsgroups. The Web is accessed through use of a browser. PrioritySelect a priority from the drop-down list box. Apply Cancel in the field provided if you want to use a different port to the default port. Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG4115. Click Cancel to return to the previous screen. User-defined services are user specific services configured using known ports and applications. Dest PortThis displays the port the selected service uses. Type a port number User-Defined 96 Users Guide Chapter 7Wireless LAN 7.6 WPS Figure 50 WPS To open this screen, click Network > Wireless LAN > WPS tab. Use this screen to enable/disable WPS, view or generate a new PIN number and check current WPS status. Company Confidential The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 33 WPS LABEL WPS Setup Enable WPS PIN Number This displays Unconfigured if WPS is disabled and there are no wireless or wireless security changes on the NBG4115 or you click Release_Configuration to remove the configured wireless and wireless security settings. This button is only available when the WPS status displays Configured. This displays Configured when the NBG4115 has connected to a wireless network using WPS or when Enable WPS is selected and wireless or wireless security settings have been changed. The current wireless and wireless security settings also appear in the screen. Select this to enable the WPS feature. This displays a PIN number last time system generated. Click Generate to generate a new PIN number. Click this button to remove all configured wireless and wireless security settings for WPS connections on the NBG4115. WPS Status Status Release Configuration DESCRIPTION Users Guide 97 Chapter 7Wireless LAN Table 33 WPS LABEL Apply Refresh Figure 51 WPS Station 7.7 WPS Station Note: Note: After you click Push Button on this screen, you have to press a similar Use this screen when you want to add a wireless station using WPS. To open this screen, click Network > Wireless LAN > WPS Station tab. DESCRIPTION Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG4115. Click Refresh to get this screen information afresh. button in the wireless station utility within 2 minutes. To add the second wireless station, you have to press these buttons on both device and the wireless station again after the first 2 minutes. Company Confidential Click this to start WPS-aware wireless station scanning and the wireless security information synchronization. Use this button when you use the PIN Configuration method to configure wireless stations wireless settings. See Section 6.4.2 on page 70. DESCRIPTION Use this button when you use the PBC (Push Button Configuration) method to configure wireless stationss wireless settings. See Section 6.4.1 on page 68. Type the same PIN number generated in the wireless stations utility. Then click Start to associate to each other and perform the wireless security information synchronization. Table 34 WPS Station LABEL Push Button The following table describes the labels in this screen. Or input stations PIN number 98 Users Guide Chapter 7Wireless LAN 7.8 Scheduling Figure 52 Scheduling Use this screen to set the times your wireless LAN is turned on and off. Wireless LAN scheduling is disabled by default. The wireless LAN can be scheduled to turn on or off on certain days and at certain times. To open this screen, click Network
> Wireless LAN > Scheduling tab. Company Confidential The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 35 Scheduling LABEL Enable Wireless LAN Scheduling Action Select On or Off to specify whether the Wireless LAN is turned on or off. This field works in conjunction with the Day and Except for the following times fields. Select Everyday or the specific days to turn the Wireless LAN on or off. If you select Everyday you can not select any specific days. This field works in conjunction with the Except for the following times field. DESCRIPTION Select this to enable Wireless LAN scheduling. Day Users Guide 99 Chapter 7Wireless LAN Apply Reset whole day. Table 35 Scheduling LABEL Except for the following times
(24-Hour Format) Note: Entering the same begin time and end time will mean the Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG4115. Click Reset to reload the previous configuration for this screen. DESCRIPTION Select a begin time using the first set of hour and minute (min) drop down boxes and select an end time using the second set of hour and minute (min) drop down boxes. If you have chosen On earlierfor the WLAN Status the Wireless LAN will turn off between the two times you enter in these fields. If you have chosen Off earlierfor the WLAN Status the Wireless LAN will turn on between the two times you enter in these fields. Company Confidential 100 Users Guide CHAPTER 8 WAN 8.1 Overview Figure 53 LAN and WAN LAN This chapter discusses the NBG4115s WAN screens. Use these screens to configure your NBG4115 for Internet access. A WAN (Wide Area Network) connection is an outside connection to another network or the Internet. It connects your private networks (such as a LAN (Local Area Network) and other networks, so that a computer in one location can communicate with computers in other locations. Company Confidential Use the Internet Connection (Section 8.3 on page 105) screen to enter your ISP information and set how the computer acquires its IP, DNS and WAN MAC addresses. See the chapter about the connection wizard for more information on the fields in the WAN screens. 8.2 What You Can Do in this Chapter Use the Advanced (Section 8.4 on page 113) screen to enable multicasting, configure Windows networking and bridge. WAN Users Guide 101 Chapter 8WAN 8.2.1 What You Need To Know WAN IP Address Encapsulation Method The following terms and concepts may help as you read through this chapter. If your ISP assigns you a static WAN IP address, they should also assign you the subnet mask and DNS server IP address(es) (and a gateway IP address if you use the Ethernet or ENET ENCAP encapsulation method). The WAN IP address is an IP address for the NBG4115, which makes it accessible from an outside network. It is used by the NBG4115 to communicate with other devices in other networks. It can be static (fixed) or dynamically assigned by the ISP each time the NBG4115 tries to access the Internet. Encapsulation is used to include data from an upper layer protocol into a lower layer protocol. To set up a WAN connection to the Internet, you need to use the same encapsulation method used by your ISP (Internet Service Provider). If your ISP offers a dial-up Internet connection using PPPoE (PPP over Ethernet) or PPTP
(Point-to-Point Tunneling Protocol), they should also provide a username and password (and service name) for user authentication. Company Confidential Use Domain Name System (DNS) to map a domain name to its corresponding IP address and vice versa, for instance, the IP address of www.zyxel.com is 204.217.0.2. The DNS server is extremely important because without it, you must know the IP address of a computer before you can access it. The ISP tells you the DNS server addresses, usually in the form of an information sheet, when you sign up. If your ISP gives you DNS server addresses, manually enter them in the DNS server fields. If your ISP dynamically assigns the DNS server IP addresses (along with the NBG4115s WAN IP address), set the DNS server fields to get the DNS server address from the ISP. The NBG4115 can get the DNS server addresses in the following ways. DNS Server Address Assignment 1 2 102 Users Guide Chapter 8WAN WAN MAC Address A Multicast Figure 54 Multicast Example Traditionally, IP packets are transmitted in one of either two ways - Unicast (1 sender - 1 recipient) or Broadcast (1 sender - everybody on the network). Multicast delivers IP packets to a group of hosts on the network - not everybody and not just 1. Otherwise,click Clone the computer's MAC address - IP Address and enter the IP address of the computer on the LAN whose MAC you are cloning. Once it is successfully configured, the address will be copied to configuration file. It is recommended that you clone the MAC address prior to hooking up the WAN Port. The MAC address screen allows users to configure the WAN port's MAC address by either using the factory default or cloning the MAC address from a computer on your LAN. Choose Factory Default to select the factory assigned default MAC Address. Company Confidential At start up, the NBG4115 queries all directly connected networks to gather group membership. After that, the NBG4115 periodically updates this information. IP multicasting can be enabled/disabled on the NBG4115 LAN and/or WAN interfaces in the Web Configurator (LAN; WAN). Select None to disable IP multicasting on these interfaces. IGMP (Internet Group Multicast Protocol) is a network-layer protocol used to establish membership in a multicast group - it is not used to carry user data. The NBG4115 supports both IGMP version 1 (IGMP-v1) and IGMP version 2 (IGMP-
v2). In the multicast example above, systems A and B comprise one multicast group. In multicasting, the server only needs to send one data stream and this is delivered to systems A and B. NetBIOS (Network Basic Input/Output System) are TCP or UDP broadcast packets that enable a computer to connect to and communicate with a LAN. For some dial-
NetBIOS over TCP/IP Server B Users Guide 103 Chapter 8WAN Auto-Bridge Auto-bridging only works under the following conditions:
up services such as PPPoE or PPTP, NetBIOS packets cause unwanted calls. However it may sometimes be necessary to allow NetBIOS packets to pass through to the WAN in order to find a computer on the WAN. In the rear panel of your NBG4115, you can see four LAN ports (1 to 2) and one WAN port. The WAN port is for your Internet access connection, and the LAN ports are for your network devices. The WAN port has a different IP address from the LAN ports. When you enable auto-bridging in your NBG4115, all three ports (2 LAN ports and the WAN port) share the same IP address. This might happen if you put the NBG4115 behind a NAT router that assigns it this IP address. When the NBG4115 is in auto-bridge mode, the NBG4115 acts as an AP and all the interfaces (LAN, WAN and WLAN) are bridged. In this mode, your NAT, DHCP server and firewall on the NBG4115 are not available. You do not have to reconfigure them if you return to router mode. Company Confidential The WAN IP must be 192.168.x.y (where x and y must be from zero to nine). If the LAN IP address and the WAN IP address are in the same subnet but x or y is greater than nine, the device operates in router mode (with firewall available). The device must be in Router Mode (see Chapter 22 on page 195 for more information) for auto-bridging to become active. 104 Users Guide Chapter 8WAN 8.3 Internet Connection 8.3.1 Ethernet This screen displays when you select the Ethernet connection type. Figure 55 Network > WAN > Internet Connection: Ethernet Encapsulation Use this screen to change your NBG4115s Internet access settings. Click Network > WAN. The screen differs according to the connection you choose. Company Confidential The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 36 Network > WAN > Internet Connection: Ethernet LABEL Connection Type You must choose the Ethernet option when the WAN port is used as a WAN IP Address Assignment Get automatically from ISP Use Fixed IP Address Select this option If your ISP did not assign you a fixed IP address. This is the default selection. Select this option If the ISP assigned a fixed IP address. DESCRIPTION regular Ethernet. Users Guide 105 Chapter 8WAN IP Address WAN MAC Address Second DNS Server Table 36 Network > WAN > Internet Connection: Ethernet LABEL DNS Servers First DNS Server IP Subnet Mask Gateway IP Address Enter a Gateway IP Address (if your ISP gave you one) in this field. Select From ISP if your ISP dynamically assigns DNS server information (and the NBG4115's WAN IP address). The field to the right displays the (read-only) DNS server IP address that the ISP assigns. DESCRIPTION Enter your WAN IP address in this field if you selected Use Fixed IP Address. Enter the IP Subnet Mask in this field. Select User-Defined if you have the IP address of a DNS server. Enter the DNS server's IP address in the field to the right. If you chose User-
Defined, but leave the IP address set to 0.0.0.0, User-Defined changes to None after you click Apply. If you set a second choice to User-Defined, and enter the same IP address, the second User-
Defined changes to None after you click Apply. Company Confidential Select None if you do not want to configure DNS servers. If you do not configure a DNS server, you must know the IP address of a computer in order to access it. The MAC address section allows users to configure the WAN port's MAC address by either using the NBG41 15s MAC address, copying the MAC address from a computer on your LAN or manually entering a MAC address. Select Factory default to use the factory assigned default MAC Address. Select Clone the computer's MAC address - IP Address and enter the IP address of the computer on the LAN whose MAC you are cloning. Once it is successfully configured, the address will be copied to the rom file. It will not change unless you change the setting or upload a different ROM file. Select this option and enter the MAC address you want to use. The NBG4115 supports PPPoE (Point-to-Point Protocol over Ethernet). PPPoE is an IETF standard (RFC 2516) specifying how a personal computer (PC) interacts with a broadband modem (DSL, cable, wireless, etc.) connection. The PPP over Ethernet option is for a dial-up connection using PPPoE. For the service provider, PPPoE offers an access and authentication method that works with existing access control systems (for example Radius). Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG4115. Click Reset to begin configuring this screen afresh. Set WAN MAC Address Apply Reset Clone the computers MAC address - IP Address 8.3.2 PPPoE Factory default 106 Users Guide Chapter 8WAN This screen displays when you select the PPPoE connection type. Figure 56 Network > WAN > Internet Connection: PPPoE Operationally, PPPoE saves significant effort for both you and the ISP or carrier, as it requires no specific configuration of the broadband modem at the customer site. One of the benefits of PPPoE is the ability to let you access one of multiple network services, a function known as dynamic service selection. This enables the service provider to easily create and offer new IP services for individuals. By implementing PPPoE directly on the NBG4115 (rather than individual computers), the computers on the LAN do not need PPPoE software installed, since the NBG4115 does that part of the task. Furthermore, with NAT, all of the LANs computers will have access. Company Confidential The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 37 Network > WAN > Internet Connection: PPPoE LABEL ISP Parameters for Internet Access Connection Type Service Name Type the PPPoE service name provided to you. PPPoE uses a service name to identify and reach the PPPoE server. Type the user name given to you by your ISP. Select PPP over Ethernet if you connect to your Internet via dial-up. DESCRIPTION User Name Users Guide 107 Chapter 8WAN Second DNS Server DNS Servers First DNS Server Select From ISP if your ISP dynamically assigns DNS server information
(and the NBG4115's WAN IP address). The field to the right displays the
(read-only) DNS server IP address that the ISP assigns. Select User-Defined if you have the IP address of a DNS server. Enter the DNS server's IP address in the field to the right. If you chose User-
Defined, but leave the IP address set to 0.0.0.0, User-Defined changes to None after you click Apply. If you set a second choice to User-Defined, and enter the same IP address, the second User-
Defined changes to None after you click Apply. Table 37 Network > WAN > Internet Connection: PPPoE LABEL Password Retype to Confirm Nailed-Up Connection Idle Timeout DESCRIPTION Type the password associated with the user name above. Type your password again to make sure that you have entered is correctly. Select Nailed-Up Connection if you do not want the connection to time out. This value specifies the time in minutes that elapses before the router automatically disconnects from the PPPoE server. Company Confidential Address. Select Clone the computer's MAC address - IP Address and enter the IP address of the computer on the LAN whose MAC you are cloning. Once it is successfully configured, the address will be copied to the rom file. It will not change unless you change the setting or upload a different ROM file. Select this option and enter the MAC address you want to use. Select None if you do not want to configure DNS servers. If you do not configure a DNS server, you must know the IP address of a computer in order to access it. The MAC address section allows users to configure the WAN port's MAC address by using the NBG4115s MAC address, copying the MAC address from a computer on your LAN or manually entering a MAC address. Point-to-Point Tunneling Protocol (PPTP) is a network protocol that enables secure transfer of data from a remote client to a private server, creating a Virtual Private Network (VPN) using TCP/IP-based networks. PPTP supports on-demand, multi-protocol and virtual private networking over public networks, such as the Internet. Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG4115. Click Reset to begin configuring this screen afresh. Factory default Select Factory default to use the factory assigned default MAC Set WAN MAC Address Apply Reset Clone the computers MAC address -
IP Address 8.3.3 PPTP WAN MAC Address 108 Users Guide Chapter 8WAN This screen displays when you select the PPTP connection type. Figure 57 Network > WAN > Internet Connection: PPTP Company Confidential Point-to-Point Tunneling Protocol (PPTP) is a network protocol that enables secure transfer of data from a remote client to a private server, creating a Virtual Private Network (VPN) using TCP/IP-based networks. PPTP supports on-demand, multi-protocol, and virtual private networking over public networks, such as the Internet. The NBG4115 supports only one PPTP server connection at any given time. The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 38 Network > WAN > Internet Connection: PPTP LABEL ISP Parameters for Internet Access Connection Type To configure a PPTP client, you must configure the User Name and Password fields for a PPP connection and the PPTP parameters for a PPTP connection. Type the user name given to you by your ISP. DESCRIPTION User Name Users Guide 109 Chapter 8WAN My WAN IP Address My IP Subnet Mask Type the IP address of the PPTP server. Nailed-up Connection Idle Timeout Type your identification name for the PPTP server. DESCRIPTION Type the password associated with the User Name above. PPTP Configuration Server IP Address/
Domain Connection ID/
Name Get automatically from ISP Use Fixed IP Address Select this option If your ISP did not assign you a fixed IP address. This is the default selection. Select this option If the ISP assigned a fixed IP address. Table 38 Network > WAN > Internet Connection: PPTP LABEL Password Retype to Confirm Type your password again to make sure that you have entered is Enter your WAN IP address in this field if you selected Use Fixed IP Address. Your NBG4115 will automatically calculate the subnet mask based on the IP address that you assign. Unless you are implementing subnetting, use the subnet mask computed by the NBG4115. correctly. Select Nailed-Up Connection if you do not want the connection to time out. This value specifies the time in minutes that elapses before the NBG4115 automatically disconnects from the PPTP server. Company Confidential Select None if you do not want to configure DNS servers. If you do not configure a DNS server, you must know the IP address of a computer in order to access it. The MAC address section allows users to configure the WAN port's MAC address by either using the NBG4115 s MAC address, copying the MAC address from a computer on your LAN or manually entering a MAC address. Select Factory default to use the factory assigned default MAC Address. Select User-Defined if you have the IP address of a DNS server. Enter the DNS server's IP address in the field to the right. If you chose User-Defined, but leave the IP address set to 0.0.0.0, User-
Defined changes to None after you click Apply. If you set a second choice to User-Defined, and enter the same IP address, the second User-Defined changes to None after you click Apply. Select From ISP if your ISP dynamically assigns DNS server information (and the NBG4115's WAN IP address). The field to the right displays the (read-only) DNS server IP address that the ISP assigns. WAN IP Address Assignment Get automatically from ISP DNS Servers First DNS Server Select this to get your WAN IP address from your ISP. Second DNS Server WAN MAC Address Factory default 110 Users Guide Chapter 8WAN 8.3.4 Mobile 3G Set WAN MAC Address Apply Reset This screen displays when you select the Mobile 3G connection type. Note: The Mobile 3G option and its sub-options only appear when you have a 3G Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG4115. Click Reset to begin configuring this screen afresh. Table 38 Network > WAN > Internet Connection: PPTP LABEL Clone the computers MAC address - IP Address 3G is an International Telecommunication Union (ITU) mobile networking standard that provides high-speed connectivity, greater network capacity, and a significantly improved broadcast range to compatible devices. DESCRIPTION Select Clone the computer's MAC address - IP Address and enter the IP address of the computer on the LAN whose MAC you are cloning. Once it is successfully configured, the address will be copied to the rom file. It will not change unless you change the setting or upload a different ROM file. Select this option and enter the MAC address you want to use. Company Confidential Figure 58 Network > WAN > Internet Connection: Mobile 3G USB device connected to the NBG4115. Users Guide 111 Chapter 8WAN 3G is . DESCRIPTION User Name Password Nailed-up Connection Idle Timeout Internet Service Provider PIN Code APN Code Dial Number To configure a Mobile 3G client, you must configure the User Name and Password fields as well as PIN Code, APN Code, and Dial Number. Select your ISP from this list, if it is pre-configured. The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 39 Network > WAN > Internet Connection: Mobile 3G LABEL ISP Parameters for Internet Access Connection Type Enter the 4-digit 3G account PIN code given to you by your ISP. Enter the Access Point Name (APN) given to you by your ISP. Enter the phone number that must be dialed in order to login to your 3G account from the NBG4115. Type the user name given to you by your ISP. Type the password associated with the User Name above. Select Nailed-Up Connection if you do not want the connection to time out. This value specifies the time in minutes that elapses before the NBG4115 automatically disconnects from the PPTP server. Company Confidential Select None if you do not want to configure DNS servers. If you do not configure a DNS server, you must know the IP address of a computer in order to access it. The MAC address section allows users to configure the WAN port's MAC address by either using the NBG4115 s MAC address, copying the MAC address from a computer on your LAN or manually entering a MAC address. Select Factory default to use the factory assigned default MAC Address. Select Clone the computer's MAC address - IP Address and enter the IP address of the computer on the LAN whose MAC you are cloning. Once it is successfully configured, the address will be copied to the rom file. It will not change unless you change the setting or upload a different ROM file. Select this option and enter the MAC address you want to use. Select User-Defined if you have the IP address of a DNS server. Enter the DNS server's IP address in the field to the right. If you chose User-Defined, but leave the IP address set to 0.0.0.0, User-
Defined changes to None after you click Apply. If you set a second choice to User-Defined, and enter the same IP address, the second User-Defined changes to None after you click Apply. Select From ISP if your ISP dynamically assigns DNS server information (and the NBG4115's WAN IP address). The field to the right displays the (read-only) DNS server IP address that the ISP assigns. Clone the computers MAC address - IP Address DNS Servers First DNS Server Second DNS Server WAN MAC Address Factory default Set WAN MAC Address 112 Users Guide Chapter 8WAN Figure 59 Network > WAN > Advanced 8.4 Advanced Note: The three categories shown in this screen are independent of each other. To change your NBG4115s advanced WAN settings, click Network > WAN >
Advanced. The screen appears as shown. Use this screen to enable Multicast, allow Windows Networking and enable Auto-bridge. Table 39 Network > WAN > Internet Connection: Mobile 3G LABEL Apply Reset DESCRIPTION Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG4115. Click Reset to begin configuring this screen afresh. Company Confidential The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 40 WAN > Advanced LABEL Multicast Setup Multicast Check this to enable multicasting. This applies to traffic routed from the WAN to the LAN. Leaving this blank may cause incoming traffic to be dropped or sent to all connected network devices. Windows Networking (NetBIOS over TCP/IP) DESCRIPTION Users Guide 113 Chapter 8WAN Table 40 WAN > Advanced LABEL Allow between LAN and WAN ApplyClick Reset Apply to save your changes back to the NBG4115. Click Reset to begin configuring this screen afresh. Allow Trigger Dial Auto-bridge Enable Auto-bridge mode Clear this check box to block all NetBIOS packets going from the LAN to the WAN and from the WAN to the LAN. Select this option to allow NetBIOS packets to initiate calls. Select this option to have the NBG4115 switch to bridge mode automatically when the NBG4115 gets a WAN IP address in the range of 192.168.x.y (where x and y are from zero to nine) no matter what the LAN IP address is. DESCRIPTION Select this check box to forward NetBIOS packets from the LAN to the WAN and from the WAN to the LAN. If your firewall is enabled with the default policy set to block WAN to LAN traffic, you also need to enable the default WAN to LAN firewall rule that forwards NetBIOS traffic. Company Confidential 114 Users Guide CHAPTER 9 LAN LAN This chapter describes how to configure LAN settings. 9.1 Overview A Local Area Network (LAN) is a shared communication system to which many computers are attached. A LAN is a computer network limited to the immediate area, usually the same building or floor of a building. The LAN screens can help you configure a LAN DHCP server, manage IP addresses, and partition your physical network into logical networks. Company Confidential The LAN screens can help you configure a LAN DHCP server and manage IP addresses. 9.2 What You Need To Know 9.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter Use the IP (Section 9.3 on page 117) screen to change your basic LAN settings. The following terms and concepts may help as you read through this chapter. DSL Users Guide 115 Chapter 9LAN LAN and WAN IP Addresses LAN WAN Figure 60 LAN and WAN IP Addresses The LAN parameters of the NBG4115 are preset in the factory with the following values:
IP address of 192.168.1.1 with subnet mask of 255.255.255.0 (24 bits) DHCP server enabled with 32 client IP addresses starting from 192.168.1.33. The actual physical connection determines whether the NBG4115 ports are LAN or WAN ports. There are two separate IP networks, one inside the LAN network and the other outside the WAN network as shown next. Company Confidential The NBG4115 is pre-configured with a pool of 32 IP addresses starting from 192.168.1.33 to 192.168.1.64. This configuration leaves 31 IP addresses
(excluding the NBG4115 itself) in the lower range (192.168.1.2 to 192.168.1.32) for other server computers, for instance, servers for mail, FTP, TFTP, web, etc., that you may have. These parameters should work for the majority of installations. If your ISP gives you explicit DNS server address(es), read the embedded Web Configurator help regarding what fields need to be configured. The NBG4115 has built-in DHCP server capability that assigns IP addresses and DNS servers to systems that support DHCP client capability. Refer to the Section 4.5.8 on page 50 section for information on System DNS Servers. Refer to Section 4.5.7 on page 50 for information on IP Address and Subnet Mask. IP Pool Setup LAN TCP/IP 116 Users Guide Chapter 9LAN 9.3 IP IP Subnet Mask Figure 61 Network > LAN > IP The following table describes the labels in this screen. Use this screen to change your basic LAN settings. Click Network > LAN. Table 41 Network > LAN > IP LABEL IP Address Company Confidential DESCRIPTION Type the IP address of your NBG4115 in dotted decimal notation 192.168.1.1 (factory default). The subnet mask specifies the network number portion of an IP address. Your NBG4115 will automatically calculate the subnet mask based on the IP address that you assign. Unless you are implementing subnetting, use the subnet mask computed by the NBG4115. Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG4115. Click Reset to begin configuring this screen afresh. Apply Reset Users Guide 117 Chapter 9LAN Company Confidential 118 Users Guide CHAPTER 10 DHCP Server 10.1 Overview 10.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol, RFC 2131 and RFC 2132) allows individual clients to obtain TCP/IP configuration at start-up from a server. You can configure the NBG4115s LAN as a DHCP server or disable it. When configured as a server, the NBG4115 provides the TCP/IP configuration for the clients. If DHCP service is disabled, you must have another DHCP server on your LAN, or else the computer must be manually configured. Company Confidential Every Ethernet device has a unique MAC (Media Access Control) address. The MAC address is assigned at the factory and consists of six pairs of hexadecimal characters, for example, 00:A0:C5:00:00:02. Find out the MAC addresses of your network devices if you intend to add them to the DHCP Client List screen. Use the General (Section 10.2 on page 120) screen to enable the DHCP server. Use the Advanced (Section 10.3 on page 121) screen to assign IP addresses on Refer to the Section 4.5.8 on page 50 section for information on System DNS Servers. 10.1.2 What You Need To Know Use the Client List (Section 10.4 on page 122) screen to view the current DHCP Refer to Section 4.5.7 on page 50 for information on IP Address and Subnet Mask. The following terms and concepts may help as you read through this chapter. the LAN to specific individual computers based on their MAC Addresses. MAC Addresses client information. Users Guide 119 Chapter 10DHCP Server 10.2 General Figure 62 Network > DHCP Server > General DESCRIPTION Enable or Disable DHCP for LAN. Use this screen to enable the DHCP server. Click Network > DHCP Server.The following screen displays. The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 42 Network > DHCP Server > General LABEL Enable DHCP Server Company Confidential DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol, RFC 2131 and RFC 2132) allows individual clients (computers) to obtain TCP/IP configuration at startup from a server. Leave the Enable DHCP Server check box selected unless your ISP instructs you to do otherwise. Clear it to disable the NBG4115 acting as a DHCP server. When configured as a server, the NBG4115 provides TCP/IP configuration for the clients. If not, DHCP service is disabled and you must have another DHCP server on your LAN, or else the computers must be manually configured. When set as a server, fill in the following four fields. This field specifies the first of the contiguous addresses in the IP address pool for LAN. This field specifies the size, or count of the IP address pool for LAN. Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG4115. Click Reset to begin configuring this screen afresh. IP Pool Starting Address Pool Size Apply Reset 120 Users Guide Chapter 10DHCP Server 10.3 Advanced Figure 63 Network > DHCP Server > Advanced To change your NBG4115s static DHCP settings, click Network > DHCP Server
> Advanced. The following screen displays. This screen allows you to assign IP addresses on the LAN to specific individual computers based on their MAC addresses. You can also use this screen to configure the DNS server information that the NBG4115 sends to the DHCP clients. Company Confidential The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 43 Network > DHCP Server > Advanced LABEL Static DHCP Table
#This is the index number of the static IP table entry (row). MAC Address IP Address DNS Server DNS Servers Assigned by DHCP Server The NBG4115 passes a DNS (Domain Name System) server IP address (in the order you specify here) to the DHCP clients. The NBG4115 only passes this information to the LAN DHCP clients when you select the Enable DHCP Server check box. When you clear the Enable DHCP Server check box, DHCP service is disabled and you must have another DHCP sever on your LAN, or else the computers must have their DNS server addresses manually configured. Type the MAC address (with colons) of a computer on your LAN. Type the LAN IP address of a computer on your LAN. DESCRIPTION Users Guide 121 Chapter 10DHCP Server Second DNS Server Table 43 Network > DHCP Server > Advanced LABEL First DNS Server DESCRIPTION Select From ISP if your ISP dynamically assigns DNS server information (and the NBG4115's WAN IP address). The field to the right displays the (read-only) DNS server IP address that the ISP assigns. Select User-Defined if you have the IP address of a DNS server. Enter the DNS server's IP address in the field to the right. If you chose User-Defined, but leave the IP address set to 0.0.0.0, User-Defined changes to None after you click Apply. If you set a second choice to User-Defined, and enter the same IP address, the second User-
Defined changes to None after you click Apply. Select DNS Relay to have the NBG4115 act as a DNS proxy. The NBG4115's LAN IP address displays in the field to the right (read-
only). The NBG4115 tells the DHCP clients on the LAN that the NBG4115 itself is the DNS server. When a computer on the LAN sends a DNS query to the NBG4115, the NBG4115 forwards the query to the NBG4115's system DNS server (configured in the WAN > Internet Connection screen) and relays the response back to the computer. You can only select DNS Relay for one of the three servers; if you select DNS Relay for a second or third DNS server, that choice changes to None after you click Apply. Company Confidential Select None if you do not want to configure DNS servers. If you do not configure a DNS server, you must know the IP address of a computer in order to access it. Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG4115. Click Reset to begin configuring this screen afresh. The DHCP table shows current DHCP client information (including IP Address, HostName and MAC Address) of network clients using the NBG4115s DHCP servers. Configure this screen to always assign an IP address to a MAC address (and host name). Click Network > DHCP Server > Client List. Note: You can also view a read-only client list by clicking the DHCP Table (Details...) 10.4 Client List hyperlink in the Status screen. Apply Reset 122 Users Guide Chapter 10DHCP Server The following screen displays. DESCRIPTION Figure 64 Network > DHCP Server > Client List
(Local Area Network) is unique to your computer (six pairs of hexadecimal notation). The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 44 Network > DHCP Server > Client List LABEL
# This is the index number of the host computer. IP AddressThis field displays the IP address relative to the # field listed above. Host Name This field displays the computer host name. MAC AddressThe MAC (Media Access Control) or Ethernet address on a LAN Company Confidential NBG4115 always assign the IP address(es) to the MAC address(es)
(and host name(s)). After you click Apply, the MAC address and IP address also display in the Advanced screen (where you can edit them). A network interface card such as an Ethernet adapter has a hardwired address that is assigned at the factory. This address follows an industry standard that ensures no other adapter has a similar address. Apply to save your settings. Refresh to reload the DHCP table. ReserveSelect this check box in the DHCP Setup section to have the ApplyClick RefreshClick Users Guide 123 Chapter 10DHCP Server Company Confidential 124 Users Guide 11 NAT CHAPTER 11.1 Overview NAT (Network Address Translation - NAT, RFC 1631) is the translation of the IP address of a host in a packet. For example, the source address of an outgoing packet, used within one network is changed to a different IP address known within another network. The figure below is a simple illustration of a NAT network. You want to assign ports 21-25 to one FTP, Telnet and SMTP server (A in the example), port 80 to another
(B in the example) and assign a default server IP address of 192.168.1.35 to a third (C in the example). Company Confidential You assign the LAN IP addresses to the devices (A to D) connected to your NBG4115. The ISP assigns the WAN IP address. The NAT network appears as a single host on the Internet. All traffic coming from A to D going out to the Internet use the IP address of the NBG4115, which is 192.168.1.1. Note: You must create a firewall rule in addition to setting up NAT, to allow traffic from This chapter discusses how to configure NAT on the NBG4115. A: 192.168.1.33 FTP, Telnet, SNMP Ports 21 to 25 IP address assigned by ISP B: 192.168.1.34 Port 80 Figure 65 NAT Example C: 192.168.1.35 192.168.1.1 WAN LAN the WAN to be forwarded through the NBG4115. Users Guide 125 Chapter 11NAT 11.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter default server. Global/Local Inside/Outside NBG4115s trigger port settings. NBG4115s port forwarding settings. Use the Application (Section 11.3 on page 129) screen to change your Use the Advanced (Section 11.5.3 on page 133) screen to change your The following terms and concepts may help as you read through this chapter. Use the General (Section 11.2 on page 128) screen to enable NAT and set a 11.1.2 What You Need To Know This denotes where a host is located relative to the NBG4115, for example, the computers of your subscribers are the inside hosts, while the web servers on the Internet are the outside hosts. Company Confidential This refers to the host on the LAN. This refers to the host on the WAN. This refers to the packet address (source or destination) as the packet travels on the LAN. This refers to the packet address (source or destination) as the packet travels on the WAN. This denotes the IP address of a host in a packet as the packet traverses a router, for example, the local address refers to the IP address of a host when the packet is in the local network, while the global address refers to the IP address of the host when the same packet is traveling in the WAN side. An inside local address (ILA) is the IP address of an inside host in a packet when the packet is still in the local network, while an inside global address (IGA) is the IP address of the same inside host when the packet is on the WAN side. The following table summarizes this information. Note: Inside/outside refers to the location of a host, while global/local refers to the IP address of a host used in a packet. Note: NAT never changes the IP address (either local or global) of an outside host. Table 45 NAT Definitions Inside Outside Local DESCRIPTION ITEM Global 126 Users Guide Chapter 11NAT What NAT Does How NAT Works In the simplest form, NAT changes the source IP address in a packet received from a subscriber (the inside local address) to another (the inside global address) before forwarding the packet to the WAN side. When the response comes back, NAT translates the destination address (the inside global address) back to the inside local address before forwarding it to the original inside host. Note that the IP address (either local or global) of an outside host is never changed. The global IP addresses for the inside hosts can be either static or dynamically assigned by the ISP. In addition, you can designate servers, for example, a web server and a telnet server, on your local network and make them accessible to the outside world. If you do not define any servers , NAT offers the additional benefit of firewall protection. With no servers defined, your NBG4115 filters out all incoming inquiries, thus preventing intruders from probing your network. For more information on IP address translation, refer to RFC 1631, The IP Network Address Translator (NAT). Company Confidential Each packet has two addresses a source address and a destination address. For outgoing packets, the ILA (Inside Local Address) is the source address on the LAN, and the IGA (Inside Global Address) is the source address on the WAN. For incoming packets, the ILA is the destination address on the LAN, and the IGA is the destination address on the WAN. NAT maps private (local) IP addresses to globally unique ones required for communication with hosts on other networks. It replaces the original IP source address in each packet and then forwards it to the Internet. The NBG4115 keeps track of the original addresses and port numbers so incoming reply packets can have their original values restored. The following figure illustrates this. Figure 66 How NAT Works Users Guide 127 Chapter 11NAT 11.2 General DESCRIPTION Figure 67 Network > NAT > General The following table describes the labels in this screen. Use this screen to enable NAT and set a default server. Click Network > NAT to open the General screen. Table 46 Network > NAT > General LABEL NAT Setup Enable Network Address Translation Company Confidential If you do not assign a DefaultServerIP address , the NBG4115 discards all packets received for ports that are not specified in the Application screen or remote management. Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG4115. Click Reset to begin configuring this screen afresh. Network Address Translation (NAT) allows the translation of an Internet protocol address used within one network (for example a private IP address used in a local network) to a different IP address known within another network (for example a public IP address used on the Internet). In addition to the servers for specified services, NAT supports a default server. A default server receives packets from ports that are not specified in the Application screen. Select the check box to enable NAT. Default Server Setup Server IP Address Apply Reset 128 Users Guide Chapter 11NAT 11.3 Application Figure 68 Network > NAT > Application Note: If you do not assign a Default ServerIP address in the NAT >General screen, the NBG4115 discards all packets received for ports that are not specified in this screen or remote management. Refer to Appendix F on page 263 for port numbers commonly used for particular services. Port forwarding allows you to define the local servers to which the incoming services will be forwarded. To change your NBG4115s port forwarding settings, click Network > NAT > Application. The screen appears as shown. Company Confidential The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 47 NAT Application LABEL Add Application Rule Active Clear the checkbox to disallow forwarding of these ports to an inside server without having to delete the entry. Type a name (of up to 31 printable characters) to identify this rule in the first field next to Service Name. Otherwise, select a predefined service in the second field next to Service Name. The predefined service name and port number(s) will display in the Service Name and Port fields. Select the check box to enable this rule and the requested service can be forwarded to the host with a specified internal IP address. DESCRIPTION Service Name Users Guide 129 Chapter 11NAT Reset Public Port Range Server IP Address Apply Table 47 NAT Application (continued) LABEL Local Port Range Public Start/End Port Server IP Address Modify DESCRIPTION Enter the start and end port(s) to be forwarded. Application Rules Summary
Active Name Local Start/End Port This is the number of an individual port forwarding server entry. This icon is turned on when the rule is enabled. This field displays a name to identify this rule. This field displays the port number(s). Type the inside IP address of the server that receives packets from the port(s) specified in the Port field. Click Apply to save your changes to the Application Rules Summary table. Click Reset to not save and return your new changes in the Service Name and Port fields to the previous one. Company Confidential Click the Edit icon to display and modify an existing rule setting in the fields under Add Application Rule. This field displays the inside IP address of the server. Click the Remove icon to delete a rule. 130 Users Guide Chapter 11NAT 11.4 Advanced Figure 69 Network > NAT > Advanced Note: Only one LAN computer can use a trigger port (range) at a time. To change your NBG4115s trigger port settings, click Network > NAT >
Advanced. The screen appears as shown. Company Confidential DESCRIPTION This is the rule index number (read-only). Type a unique name (up to 15 characters) for identification purposes. All characters are permitted - including spaces. Incoming is a port (or a range of ports) that a server on the WAN uses when it sends out a particular service. The NBG4115 forwards the traffic with this port (or range of ports) to the client computer on the LAN that requested the service. Type a port number or the starting port number in a range of port numbers. Type a port number or the ending port number in a range of port numbers. The trigger port is a port (or a range of ports) that causes (or triggers) the NBG4115 to record the IP address of the LAN computer that sent the traffic to a server on the WAN. Type a port number or the starting port number in a range of port numbers. Type a port number or the ending port number in a range of port numbers. Table 48 Network > NAT > Advanced LABEL
Name The following table describes the labels in this screen. Start Port Start Port Incoming End Port End Port Trigger Users Guide 131 Chapter 11NAT Table 48 Network > NAT > Advanced LABEL Apply Reset 11.5 Technical Reference 11.5.1 NATPort Forwarding: Services and Port Numbers The following section contains additional technical information about the NBG4115 features described in this chapter. DESCRIPTION Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG4115. Click Reset to begin configuring this screen afresh. A port forwarding set is a list of inside (behind NAT on the LAN) servers, for example, web or FTP, that you can make accessible to the outside world even though NAT makes your whole inside network appear as a single machine to the outside world. Company Confidential Use the Application screen to forward incoming service requests to the server(s) on your local network. You may enter a single port number or a range of port numbers to be forwarded, and the local IP address of the desired server. The port number identifies a service; for example, web service is on port 80 and FTP on port 21. In some cases, such as for unknown services or where one server can support more than one service (for example both FTP and web service), it might be better to specify a range of port numbers. In addition to the servers for specified services, NAT supports a default server. A service request that does not have a server explicitly designated for it is forwarded to the default server. If the default is not defined, the service request is simply discarded. Note: Many residential broadband ISP accounts do not allow you to run any server processes (such as a Web or FTP server) from your location. Your ISP may periodically check for servers and may suspend your account if it discovers any active services at your location. If you are unsure, refer to your ISP. Let's say you want to assign ports 21-25 to one FTP, Telnet and SMTP server (A in the example), port 80 to another (B in the example) and assign a default server IP address of 192.168.1.35 to a third (C in the example). You assign the LAN IP 11.5.2 NAT Port Forwarding Example 132 Users Guide Chapter 11NAT Figure 70 Multiple Servers Behind NAT Example addresses and the ISP assigns the WAN IP address. The NAT network appears as a single host on the Internet. 11.5.3 Trigger Port Forwarding Some services use a dedicated range of ports on the client side and a dedicated range of ports on the server side. With regular port forwarding you set a forwarding port in NAT to forward a service (coming in from the server on the WAN) to the IP address of a computer on the client side (LAN). The problem is that port forwarding only forwards a service to a single LAN IP address. In order to use the same service on a different LAN computer, you have to manually replace the LAN computer's IP address in the forwarding port with another LAN computer's IP address. Company Confidential Trigger port forwarding solves this problem by allowing computers on the LAN to dynamically take turns using the service. The NBG4115 records the IP address of a LAN computer that sends traffic to the WAN to request a service with a specific port number and protocol (a "trigger" port). When the NBG4115's WAN port receives a response with a specific port number and protocol ("incoming" port), the NBG4115 forwards the traffic to the LAN IP address of the computer that sent the request. After that computers connection for that service closes, another computer on the LAN can use the service in the same manner. This way you do not need to configure a new IP address each time you want a different LAN computer to use the application. Users Guide 133 Chapter 11NAT 11.5.4 Trigger Port Forwarding Example 1 3 2 The following is an example of trigger port forwarding. Jane requests a file from the Real Audio server (port 7070). Figure 71 Trigger Port Forwarding Process: Example The Real Audio server responds using a port number ranging between 6970-7170. Port 7070 is a trigger port and causes the NBG4115 to record Janes computer IP address. The NBG4115 associates Jane's computer IP address with the "incoming"
port range of 6970-7170. Company Confidential 5 Only Jane can connect to the Real Audio server until the connection is closed or times out. The NBG4115 times out in three minutes with UDP (User Datagram Protocol), or two hours with TCP/IP (Transfer Control Protocol/Internet Protocol). If an application needs a continuous data stream, that port (range) will be tied up so that another computer on the LAN cant trigger it. Trigger events only happen on data that is going coming from inside the NBG4115 and going to the outside. 11.5.5 Two Points To Remember About Trigger Ports The NBG4115 forwards the traffic to Janes computer IP address. 4 1 2 134 Users Guide 12 DDNS CHAPTER 12.1 Overview DDNS services let you use a domain name with a dynamic IP address. 12.1.2 What You Need To Know 12.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter Use the DDNS screen (Section 12.2 on page 136) to enable DDNS and configure the DDNS settings on the NBG4115. Company Confidential DDNS, or Dynamic DNS, allows you to update your current dynamic IP address with one or many dynamic DNS services so that anyone can contact you (in NetMeeting, CU-SeeMe, etc.). You can also access your FTP server or Web site on your own computer using a domain name (for instance myhost.dhs.org, where myhost is a name of your choice) that will never change instead of using an IP address that changes each time you reconnect. Your friends or relatives will always be able to call you even if they don't know your IP address. Enabling the wildcard feature for your host causes *.yourhost.dyndns.org to be aliased to the same IP address as yourhost.dyndns.org. This feature is useful if you want to be able to use, for example, www.yourhost.dyndns.org and still reach your hostname. Note: If you have a private WAN IP address, then you cannot use Dynamic DNS. You The following terms and concepts may help as you read through this chapter. must have a public WAN IP address. DynDNS Wildcard What is DDNS?
Users Guide 135 Chapter 12DDNS 12.2 General Figure 72 Dynamic DNS To change your NBG4115s DDNS, click Network > DDNS. The screen appears as shown. Company Confidential Select the name of your Dynamic DNS service provider. Select the type of service that you are registered for from your Dynamic DNS service provider. Enter a host names in the field provided. You can specify up to two host names in the field separated by a comma (","). Enter your user name. Enter the password assigned to you. Enter your client authorization key provided by the server to update DynDNS records. Table 49 Dynamic DNS LABEL Dynamic DNS Setup Enable Dynamic DNS Service Provider Dynamic DNS Type This field is configurable only when you select WWW.REGFISH.COM in the Service Provider field. Select the check box to enable DynDNS Wildcard. The following table describes the labels in this screen. User Name Password Token Select this check box to use dynamic DNS. DESCRIPTION Host Name Enable Wildcard Option 136 Users Guide Chapter 12DDNS Table 49 Dynamic DNS LABEL Enable off line option Dynamic DNS server auto detect IP Address Use specified IP Address Apply Reset the WAN IP address. Select this option to update the IP address of the host name(s) automatically by the DDNS server. It is recommended that you select this option. Type the IP address of the host name(s). Use this if you have a static IP address. Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG4115. Click Reset to begin configuring this screen afresh. DESCRIPTION This option is available when CustomDNS is selected in the DDNS Type field. Check with your Dynamic DNS service provider to have traffic redirected to a URL (that you can specify) while you are off line. IP Address Update Policy:
Use WAN IP Address Select this option to update the IP address of the host name(s) to Company Confidential Users Guide 137 Chapter 12DDNS Company Confidential 138 Users Guide Firewall (141) Content Filtering (147) PART III Security Company Confidential 139 Company Confidential 140 13 Firewall CHAPTER networks. 13.1 Overview allows traffic that originates from your LAN computers to go to all of the blocks traffic that originates on the other networks from going to the LAN. Enable the firewall to protect your LAN computers from attacks by hackers on the Internet and control access between the LAN and WAN. By default the firewall:
Use these screens to enable and configure the firewall that protects your NBG4115 and your LAN from unwanted or malicious traffic. Company Confidential The following figure illustrates the default firewall action. User A can initiate an IM
(Instant Messaging) session from the LAN to the WAN (1). Return traffic for this session is also allowed (2). However other traffic initiated from the WAN is blocked
(3 and 4). 13.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter Use the General screen (Section 13.2 on page 144) to enable or disable the Use the Services screen (Section 13.3 on page 144) screen enable service blocking, enter/delete/modify the services you want to block and the date/time you want to block them. Figure 73 Default Firewall Action NBG4115s firewall. WAN LAN 3 4 1 2 A Users Guide 141 Chapter 13Firewall 13.1.2 What You Need To Know What is a Firewall?
Stateful Inspection Firewall The following terms and concepts may help as you read through this chapter. Originally, the term firewall referred to a construction technique designed to prevent the spread of fire from one room to another. The networking term
"firewall" is a system or group of systems that enforces an access-control policy between two networks. It may also be defined as a mechanism used to protect a trusted network from a network that is not trusted. Of course, firewalls cannot solve every security problem. A firewall is one of the mechanisms used to establish a network security perimeter in support of a network security policy. It should never be the only mechanism or method employed. For a firewall to guard effectively, you must design and deploy it appropriately. This requires integrating the firewall into a broad information-security policy. In addition, specific policies must be implemented within the firewall itself. Company Confidential Stateful inspection firewalls restrict access by screening data packets against defined access rules. They make access control decisions based on IP address and protocol. They also "inspect" the session data to assure the integrity of the connection and to adapt to dynamic protocols. These firewalls generally provide the best speed and transparency; however, they may lack the granular application level access control or caching that some proxies support. Firewalls, of one type or another, have become an integral part of standard security solutions for enterprises. It is a stateful inspection firewall and is designed to protect against Denial of Service attacks when activated (clickthe General tab under Firewall and then click the EnableFirewall check box). The NBG4115's purpose is to allow a private Local Area Network (LAN) to be securely connected to the Internet. The NBG4115 can be used to prevent theft, destruction and modification of data, as well as log events, which may be important to the security of your network. The NBG4115 is installed between the LAN and a broadband modem connecting to the Internet. This allows it to act as a secure gateway for all data passing between the Internet and the LAN. The NBG4115s firewall feature physically separates the LAN and the WAN and acts as a secure gateway for all data passing between the networks. About the NBG4115 Firewall 142 Users Guide Chapter 13Firewall 2 3 Limit who can access your router. 1 Change the default password via Web Configurator. Guidelines For Enhancing Security With Your Firewall 4 Don't enable any local service (such as NTP) that you don't use. Any enabled Think about access control before you connect to the network in any way, including attaching a modem to the port. The NBG4115 has one Ethernet WAN port and four Ethernet LAN ports, which are used to physically separate the network into two areas.The WAN (Wide Area Network) port attaches to the broadband (cable or DSL) modem to the Internet. service could present a potential security risk. A determined hacker might be able to find creative ways to misuse the enabled services to access the firewall or the network. The LAN (Local Area Network) port attaches to a network of computers, which needs security from the outside world. These computers will have access to Internet services such as e-mail, FTP and the World Wide Web. However, "inbound access" is not allowed (by default) unless the remote host is authorized to use a specific service. Company Confidential For local services that are enabled, protect against misuse. Protect by configuring the services to communicate only with specific peers, and protect by configuring rules to block packets for the services at specific interfaces. Protect against IP spoofing by making sure the firewall is active. 7 Keep the firewall in a secured (locked) room. 5 6 Users Guide 143 Chapter 13Firewall 13.2 General DESCRIPTION Figure 74 Security > Firewall > General l The following table describes the labels in this screen. Use this screen to enable or disable the NBG4115s firewall, and set up firewall logs. Click Security > Firewall to open the General screen. Table 50 Security > Firewall > General LABEL Enable FirewallSelect this check box to activate the firewall. The NBG4115 performs Company Confidential If an outside user attempts to probe an unsupported port on your NBG4115, an ICMP response packet is automatically returned. This allows the outside user to know the NBG4115 exists. Use this screen to prevent the ICMP response packet from being sent. This keeps outsiders from discovering your NBG4115 when unsupported ports are probed. access control and protects against Denial of Service (DoS) attacks when the firewall is activated. Click Apply to save the settings. Click Reset to start configuring this screen again. You can also use this screen to enable service blocking, enter/delete/modify the services you want to block and the date/time you want to block them. 13.3 Services Apply Reset 144 Users Guide Chapter 13Firewall Click Security > Firewall > Services. The screen appears as shown next. Respond to Ping on Figure 75 Security > Firewall > Services l The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 51 Security > Firewall > Services LABEL ICMP Company Confidential DESCRIPTION Internet Control Message Protocol is a message control and error-
reporting protocol between a host server and a gateway to the Internet. ICMP uses Internet Protocol (IP) datagrams, but the messages are processed by the TCP/IP software and directly apparent to the application user. The NBG4115 will not respond to any incoming Ping requests when Disable is selected. Select LAN to reply to incoming LAN Ping requests. Select WAN to reply to incoming WAN Ping requests. Otherwise select LAN & WAN to reply to all incoming LAN and WAN Ping requests. Select this option to prevent hackers from finding the NBG4115 by probing for unused ports. If you select this option, the NBG4115 will not respond to port request(s) for unused ports, thus leaving the unused ports and the NBG4115 unseen. By default this option is not selected and the NBG4115 will reply with an ICMP Port Unreachable packet for a port probe on its unused UDP ports, and a TCP Reset packet for a port probe on its unused TCP ports. Note that the probing packets must first traverse the NBG4115's firewall mechanism before reaching this anti-probing mechanism. Therefore if the firewall mechanism blocks a probing packet, the NBG4115 reacts based on the firewall policy, which by default, is to send a TCP reset packet for a blocked TCP packet. You can use the command "sys firewall tcprst rst [on|off]" to change this policy. When the firewall mechanism blocks a UDP packet, it drops the packet without sending a response packet. Click Apply to save the settings. Click Reset to start configuring this screen again. Do not respond to requests for unauthorized services Apply Reset Users Guide 145 Chapter 13Firewall Company Confidential 146 Users Guide CHAPTER 14 Content Filtering 14.1 Overview 14.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter This chapter provides a brief overview of content filtering using the embedded web GUI. Internet content filtering allows you to create and enforce Internet access policies tailored to your needs. Content filtering is the ability to block certain web features or specific URL keywords. Company Confidential Content filtering allows you to block certain web features, such as cookies, and/or block access to specific web sites. For example, you can configure one policy that blocks John Does access to arts and entertainment web pages. The URLs domain name or IP address is the characters that come before the first slash in the URL. For example, with the URL www.zyxel.com.tw/news/
pressroom.php, the domain name is www.zyxel.com.tw. Use the Filter (Section 14.2 on page 148) screen to restrict web features, add keywords for blocking and designate a trusted computer. The NBG4115 checks the URLs domain name (or IP address) and file path separately when performing keyword blocking. A content filtering profile conveniently stores your custom settings for the following features. 14.1.2 What You Need To Know The following terms and concepts may help as you read through this chapter. Keyword Blocking URL Checking Content Filtering Profiles Users Guide 147 Chapter 14Content Filtering 14.2 Filter Figure 76 Security > Content Filter > Filter The file path is the characters that come after the first slash in the URL. For example, with the URL www.zyxel.com.tw/news/pressroom.php, the file path is news/pressroom.php. Use this screen to restrict web features, add keywords for blocking and designate a trusted computer. Click Security > Content Filter to open the Filter screen. Since the NBG4115 checks the URLs domain name (or IP address) and file path separately, it will not find items that go across the two. For example, with the URL www.zyxel.com.tw/news/pressroom.php, the NBG4115 would find tw in the domain name (www.zyxel.com.tw). It would also find news in the file path
(news/pressroom.php) but it would not find tw/news. Company Confidential 148 Users Guide Chapter 14Content Filtering Delete Keyword Keyword List Add Repeat this procedure to add other keywords. Up to 64 keywords are allowed. The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 52 Security > Content Filter > Filter LABEL Enable URL Keyword Blocking When you try to access a web page containing a keyword, you will get a message telling you that the content filter is blocking this request. Highlight a keyword in the lower box and click Delete to remove it. The keyword disappears from the text box after you click Apply. Click this button to remove all of the listed keywords. Click Apply to save your changes. Click Reset to begin configuring this screen afresh DESCRIPTION The NBG4115 can block Web sites with URLs that contain certain keywords in the domain name or IP address. For example, if the keyword "bad" was enabled, all sites containing this keyword in the domain name or IP address will be blocked, e.g., URL http://
www.website.com/bad.html would be blocked. Select this check box to enable this feature. Type a keyword in this field. You may use any character (up to 64 characters). Wildcards are not allowed. You can also enter a numerical IP address. This list displays the keywords already added. Click Add after you have typed a keyword. Company Confidential You can use commands to set how much of a websites URL the content filter is to check for keyword blocking. See the appendices for information on how to access and use the command interpreter. The following section contains additional technical information about the NBG4115 features described in this chapter. This means that the NBG4115 checks the characters that come before the first slash in the URL. By default, the NBG4115 checks the URLs domain name or IP address when performing keyword blocking. 14.3.1 Customizing Keyword Blocking URL Checking 14.3 Technical Reference Domain Name or IP Address URL Checking Clear All Apply Reset Users Guide 149 Chapter 14Content Filtering Full Path URL Checking File Name URL Checking For example, with the URL www.zyxel.com.tw/news/pressroom.php, content filtering only searches for keywords within www.zyxel.com.tw. Filename URL checking has the NBG4115 check all of the characters in the URL. For example, filename URL checking searches for keywords within the URL www.zyxel.com.tw/news/pressroom.php. Full path URL checking has the NBG4115 check the characters that come before the last slash in the URL. For example, with the URL www.zyxel.com.tw/news/pressroom.php, full path URL checking searches for keywords within www.zyxel.com.tw/news/. Use the ip urlfilter customize actionFlags 6 [disable | enable]
command to extend (or not extend) the keyword blocking search to include the URL's full path. Company Confidential Use the ip urlfilter customize actionFlags 8 [disable | enable]
command to extend (or not extend) the keyword blocking search to include the URL's complete filename. 150 Users Guide UPnP (169) Static Route (153) Remote Management (165) Bandwidth Management (157) PART IV Management Company Confidential 151 Company Confidential 152 CHAPTER 15 Static Route 15.1 Overview This chapter shows you how to configure static routes for your NBG4115. The NBG4115 usually uses the default gateway to route outbound traffic from computers on the LAN to the Internet. To have the NBG4115 send data to devices not reachable through the default gateway, use static routes. For example, the next figure shows a computer (A) connected to the NBG4115s LAN interface. The NBG4115 routes most traffic from A to the Internet through the NBG4115s default gateway (R1). You create one static route to connect to services offered by your ISP behind router R2. You create another static route to communicate with a separate network behind a router R3 connected to the LAN. Company Confidential 15.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter Use the Static Route Setup screen (Section 15.2.1 on page 155) to add or edit Use the IP Static Route screen (Section 15.2 on page 154) to view existing Figure 77 Example of Static Routing Topology static route rules. a static route rule. WAN LAN R1 R2 R3 A Users Guide 153 Chapter 15Static Route 15.2 IP Static Route Figure 78 Management > Static Route > IP Static Route Use this screen to view existing static route rules. Click Management > Static Route to open the IP Static Route screen. The following screen displays. The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 53 Management > Static Route > IP Static Route LABEL
Company Confidential Click the Edit icon under Modify and select the Active checkbox in the Static Route Setup screen to enable the static route. Clear the checkbox to disable this static route without having to delete the entry. This parameter specifies the IP network address of the final destination. Routing is always based on network number. This is the IP address of the gateway. The gateway is an immediate neighbor of your NBG4115 that will forward the packet to the destination. On the LAN, the gateway must be a router on the same segment as your NBG4115; over the WAN, the gateway must be the IP address of one of the remote nodes. Click the Edit icon to open the static route setup screen. Modify a static route or create a new static route in the Static Route Setup screen. DESCRIPTION This is the index number of an individual static route. The first entry is for the default route and not editable. This is the name that describes or identifies this route. This icon is turned on when this static route is active. Click the Remove icon to delete a static route. Name Active Destination Gateway Modify 154 Users Guide Chapter 15Static Route 15.2.1 Static Route Setup Screen The following table describes the labels in this screen. Figure 79 Management > Static Route > IP Static Route: Static Route Setup To edit a static route, click the edit icon under Modify. The following screen displays. Fill in the required information for each static route. Table 54 Management > Static Route > IP Static Route: Static Route Setup LABEL Route Name Company Confidential Enter the IP address of the gateway. The gateway is an immediate neighbor of your NBG4115 that will forward the packet to the destination. On the LAN, the gateway must be a router on the same segment as your NBG4115; over the WAN, the gateway must be the IP address of one of the Remote Nodes. Metric represents the cost of transmission for routing purposes. IP routing uses hop count as the measurement of cost, with a minimum of 1 for directly connected networks. Enter a number that approximates the cost for this link. The number need not be precise, but it must be between 1 and 15. In practice, 2 or 3 is usually a good number. Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG4115. Click Cancel to return to the previous screen and not save your changes. DESCRIPTION Enter the name of the IP static route. Leave this field blank to delete this static route. This field allows you to activate/deactivate this static route. This parameter specifies the IP network address of the final destination. Routing is always based on network number. If you need to specify a route to a single host, use a subnet mask of 255.255.255.255 in the subnet mask field to force the network number to be identical to the host ID. IP Subnet Mask Enter the IP subnet mask here. Gateway IP Address Active Destination IP Address Apply Cancel Metric Users Guide 155 Chapter 15Static Route Company Confidential 156 Users Guide 16.1 Overview ZyXELs Bandwidth Management allows you to specify bandwidth management rules based on an application. This chapter contains information about configuring bandwidth management and editing rules. CHAPTER 16 Bandwidth Management In the figure below, uplink traffic goes from the LAN device (A) to the WAN device
(B). Bandwidth management is applied before sending the packets out to the WAN. Downlink traffic comes back from the WAN device (B) to the LAN device
(A). Bandwidth management is applied before sending the traffic out to LAN. Company Confidential You can allocate specific amounts of bandwidth capacity (bandwidth budgets) to individual applications (like VoIP, Web, FTP, and E-mail for example). 16.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter 16.1.2 What You Need To Know Use the Advanced screen (Section 16.3 on page 159) to configure bandwidth Use the General screen (Section 16.2 on page 158) to enable bandwidth management rules for the pre-defined services and applications. management and assign uplink/downlink limits. Figure 80 Bandwidth Management B A The following terms and concepts may help as you read through this chapter. Users Guide 157 Chapter 16Bandwidth Management Bandwidth Limiting 16.2 General Priority Queue. Enable bandwidth management to give uplink traffic that The sum of the bandwidth allotments that apply to the LAN port (WAN to LAN, WAN to WLAN) must be less than or equal to the Downlink value that you configure in the Bandwidth ManagementGeneral screen. Use this screen to enable bandwidth management and assign uplink/downlink limits. You can use either one of the following types:
The sum of the bandwidth allotments that apply to the WAN interface (LAN to WAN, WLAN to WAN) must be less than or equal to the Uplink value that you configure in the Bandwidth ManagementGeneral screen. You can limit an applications uplink or downlink bandwidth. This limit keeps the traffic from using up too much of the out-going interfaces bandwidth. This way you can make sure there is bandwidth for other applications. Use the following guidelines:
Company Confidential Bandwidth Allocation. Enabling bandwidth management also allows you to control the maximum or minimum amounts of bandwidth that can be used by traffic that matches a bandwidth rule. Click Management> Bandwidth MGMT to open the bandwidth management General screen. matches a bandwidth rule priority over traffic that does not match a bandwidth rule. (This type does not apply to downlink traffic.) Note: You cannot apply both bandwidth management types at the same time. Figure 81 Management > Bandwidth MGMT > General 158 Users Guide Chapter 16Bandwidth Management Downlink DESCRIPTION Select Disable if you do not want to use this feature. This field allows you to have NBG4115 apply bandwidth management. Select Priority Queue or Bandwidth Allocation to enable bandwidth management. Select Priority Queue to allocate bandwidth based on the pre-defined priority assigned to an application. Refer to Section 16.3 on page 159. Select the total amount of bandwidth (from 64 Kilobits to 30 Megabits) that you want to dedicate to uplink traffic. Select Bandwidth Allocation allocate specific amounts of bandwidth to specific protocols on an IP or IP range. Refer to Section 16.3 on page 159. This is traffic from LAN/WLAN to WAN. Select the total amount of bandwidth (from 64 Kilobits to 30 Megabits) that you want to dedicate to uplink traffic. Total Bandwidth Setting. The fields below appear when you enable Bandwidth Management. Uplink The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 55 Management > Bandwidth MGMT > General LABEL Service Management Bandwidth Management Type Company Confidential Though both tables are described in this section, you can only apply the rules in one table. Fill out the table of the Bandwidth Management Type you selected in Section 16.2 on page 158 Use this screen to configure bandwidth managements rule for specific protocols on an IP or IP range. Use this screen to configure bandwidth managements rule for the pre-defined services or applications. This is traffic from WAN to LAN/WLAN. Click Apply to save your customized settings. Click Reset to begin configuring this screen afresh. Note: This screen contains the Priority Queue and Bandwidth Allocation tables. 16.3 Advanced Apply Reset Users Guide 159 Chapter 16Bandwidth Management Figure 82 Management > Bandwidth MGMT > Advanced Click Management > Bandwidth MGMT > Advanced to open the bandwidth management Advanced screen. Company Confidential The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 56 Management > Bandwidth MGMT > Advanced LABEL Priority Queue Local IP Address Priority Queue Enter the IP address of the computer to which bandwidth management does not apply. Use this table to allocate specific amounts of bandwidth based on the pre-defined service. This is the number of an individual bandwidth management rule. Select this check box to have the NBG4115 apply this bandwidth management rule. DESCRIPTION
Enable 160 Users Guide Chapter 16Bandwidth Management LAN IP Range Priority Specific Port Bandwidth Allocation
Enable DESCRIPTION This is the name of the service. Table 56 Management > Bandwidth MGMT > Advanced (continued) LABEL Service You can also specify the port/s to services to which you want to allocate bandwidth. Choose either Both, TCP or UDP in the drop-down menu and enter the port or range of ports in the provided boxes. Note: If you are entering a specific port and not a range of ports, you can either leave the second port field blank or enter the same port number again. You can also enter the name (up to 10 keyboard characters) of a service you want to add in the priority queue (for example, Messenger). Select a priority from the drop down list box. Choose High or Low. This displays the port/s assigned to the service. Use this table to allocate specific amounts of bandwidth to specific protocols on an IP or IP range. This is the number of an individual bandwidth management rule. Select this check box to have the NBG4115 apply this bandwidth management rule. This displays the range of IP addresses for which the bandwidth management rule applies. These read-only labels represent uplink or downlink traffic. Company Confidential Both applies bandwidth management to traffic that the NBG4115 forwards to both the LAN and the WAN. This displays the range of ports for which the bandwidth management rule applies. This displays either Max (maximum) or Min (minimum) and refers to the maximum or minimum bandwidth allowed for the rule in kilobits per second in the field below. This is the maximum or minimum bandwidth allowed (refer to the field above) for the rule in bits per second. Click the Edit icon to open the Rule Configuration screen. Modify an existing rule or create a new rule in the Rule Configuration screen. See Section 16.3.3 on page 162 for more information. Click the Remove icon to delete a rule. Click Apply to save your customized settings. Click Reset to begin configuring this screen afresh. To WAN applies bandwidth management to traffic from LAN/WLAN to WAN (i.e., uplink). To LAN applies bandwidth management to traffic from WAN to LAN/
WLAN (i.e., downlink). Apply Reset Port Range Direction Modify Policy Rate Users Guide 161 Chapter 16Bandwidth Management 16.3.1 Pre-Configured Gaming Ports 3074 6119, 112 UDP PORTS MSN Game Zone6667, 28800-290006667, 28800-29000 16.3.2 Priority Levels Playstation80, 443, 5223, 52233478, 3479, 3658, 4658 Battlenet40, 6112, 4000, 6113-
The following describes the priorities that you can apply to traffic that the NBG4115 forwards out through an interface. Traffic with a higher priority gets through faster while traffic with a lower priority is dropped if the network is congested. The following gaming ports are preconfigured on your NBG4115 and are enabled when you select the gaming Service in this screen:
Table 57 Preconfigured Gaming Ports APPLICATION TCP PORTS XBox 3603074, 3390, 3932, 55551900, 3776, 7777, 88, Company Confidential If you want to edit a bandwidth management rule for specific protocols on an IP or IP range, click the Edit icon in the Bandwidth Allocation table of the Advanced screen. The following screen displays. 16.3.3 User Defined Service Rule Configuration Figure 83 Management > Bandwidth MGMT > Advanced: Allocation Setup High - Typically used for voice traffic or video that is especially sensitive to jitter Low - This is typically used for all other traffic that are not time-sensitive. The following table describes the labels in this screen.
(jitter is the variations in delay). 162 Users Guide Chapter 16Bandwidth Management Policy Protocol Rate (bps) Port Range LAN IP Range To LAN applies bandwidth management to traffic from WAN to LAN/
WLAN (i.e., downlink). To WAN applies bandwidth management to traffic from LAN/WLAN to WAN (i.e., uplink). DESCRIPTION Select this check box to turn on this bandwidth management rule. Enter whether you want to apply the rule to uplink or downlink traffic. Table 58 Management > Bandwidth MGMT > Advanced: Allocation Setup LABEL Active Direction Select Both applies bandwidth management to traffic that the NBG4115 forwards to both the LAN and the WAN. Specify the range of IP addresses for which the bandwidth management rule applies. Select the protocol (TCP, UDP, SMTP, HTTP, POP3, FTP or ALL) for which the bandwidth management rule applies. Enter the range of ports for which the bandwidth management rule applies. Select Max or Min and specify the maximum or minimum bandwidth allowed for the rule in bits per second in the field below. Select the maximum or minimum bandwidth allowed (refer to the field above) for the rule in bits per second. Click Apply to save your customized settings. Click Reset to begin configuring this screen afresh. Company Confidential The following is a description of the services that you can select and to which you can apply media bandwidth management in the Management > Bandwidth MGMT > Advanced screen. Table 59 Media Bandwidth Management Setup: Services SERVICE FTPFile Transfer Program enables fast transfer of files, including large files graphical, hyper-linked information, based on Hyper Text Transfer Protocol (HTTP) - a client/server protocol for the World Wide Web. The Web is not synonymous with the Internet; rather, it is just one service on the Internet. Other services on the Internet include Internet Relay Chat and Newsgroups. The Web is accessed through use of a browser. WWW uses port 80. Internet and in UNIX environments. It operates over TCP/IP networks. Its primary function is to allow users to log into remote host systems. Telnet uses port 23. 16.3.4 Predefined Bandwidth Management Services TelnetTelnet is the login and terminal emulation protocol common on the WWWThe World Wide Web (WWW) is an Internet system to distribute that may not be possible by e-mail. FTP uses port number 21. DESCRIPTION Apply Reset Users Guide 163 Chapter 16Bandwidth Management SMTP - port 25 POP3 - port 110 DESCRIPTION to specific groups or individuals. Here are some default ports for e-mail:
BitTorrentBitTorrent is a free P2P (peer-to-peer) sharing tool allowing you to GamingOnline gaming services lets you play multiplayer games on the Internet SIP is transported primarily over UDP but can also be transported over TCP, using the default port number 5060. Table 59 Media Bandwidth Management Setup: Services (continued) SERVICE E-MailElectronic mail consists of messages sent through a computer network via broadband technology. One example is Microsofts Xbox Live, which uses port 3074. As of this writing, your NBG4115 supports Xbox, Playstation, Battlenet and MSN Game Zone. distribute large software and media files using ports 6881 to 6889. BitTorrent requires you to search for a file with a searching engine yourself. It distributes files by corporation and trading, that is, the client downloads the file in small pieces and share the pieces with other peers to get other half of the file. VoIP (SIP)Sending voice signals over the Internet is called Voice over IP or VoIP. Session Initiated Protocol (SIP) is an internationally recognized standard for implementing VoIP. SIP is an application-layer control
(signaling) protocol that handles the setting up, altering and tearing down of voice and multimedia sessions over the Internet. Company Confidential 16.3.5 Services and Port Numbers See Appendix F on page 263 for commonly used services and port numbers. 164 Users Guide LAN only You may manage your NBG4115 from a remote location via:
17.1 Overview This chapter provides information on the Remote Management screens. CHAPTER 17 Remote Management 17.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter Remote management allows you to determine which services/protocols can access which NBG4115 interface (if any) from which computers. Company Confidential The IP address in the Secured Client IP Address field does not match the client IP address. If it does not match, the NBG4115 will disconnect the session immediately. There is already another remote management session with an equal or higher priority running. You may only have one remote management session running at one time. Use the WWW screen (Section 17.2 on page 166) to change your NBG4115s World Wide Web settings. 17.1.2 What You Need To Know The following terms and concepts may help as you read through this chapter. You have disabled that service in one of the remote management screens. Remote management over LAN or WAN will not work when:
Remote Management Limitations There is a firewall rule that blocks it. LAN and WAN 1 2 3 4 Users Guide 165 Chapter 17Remote Management Remote Management and NAT When NAT is enabled:
System Timeout 17.2 WWW To change your NBG4115s World Wide Web settings, click Management >
Remote MGMT to display the WWW screen. Use the NBG4115s WAN IP address when configuring from the WAN. Use the NBG4115s LAN IP address when configuring from the LAN. There is a default system management idle timeout of five minutes (three hundred seconds). The NBG4115 automatically logs you out if the management session remains idle for longer than this timeout period. The management session does not time out when a statistics screen is polling. You can change the timeout period in the System screen Company Confidential DESCRIPTION You may change the server port number for a service if needed, however you must use the same port number in order to use that service for remote management. Select the interface(s) through which a computer may access the NBG4115 using this service. Table 60 Management > Remote MGMT > WWW LABEL Server Port Figure 84 Management > Remote MGMT > WWW The following table describes the labels in this screen. Server Access 166 Users Guide Chapter 17Remote Management Apply Reset LABEL Secured Client IP Address Select All to allow any computer to access the NBG4115 using this service. Choose Selected to just allow the computer with the IP address that you specify to access the NBG4115 using this service. DESCRIPTION A secured client is a trusted computer that is allowed to communicate with the NBG4115 using this service. Note: This only applies on WAN IP. Click Apply to save your customized settings and exit this screen. Click Reset to begin configuring this screen afresh. Company Confidential Users Guide 167 Chapter 17Remote Management Company Confidential 168 Users Guide 18 UPnP CHAPTER 18.1 Overview This chapter introduces the UPnP feature in the Web Configurator. 18.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter Universal Plug and Play (UPnP) is a distributed, open networking standard that uses TCP/IP for simple peer-to-peer network connectivity between devices. A UPnP device can dynamically join a network, obtain an IP address, convey its capabilities and learn about other devices on the network. In turn, a device can leave a network smoothly and automatically when it is no longer in use. Company Confidential UPnP NAT traversal automates the process of allowing an application to operate through NAT. UPnP network devices can automatically configure network addressing, announce their presence in the network to other UPnP devices and enable exchange of simple product and service descriptions. NAT traversal allows the following:
UPnP hardware is identified as an icon in the Network Connections folder
(Windows XP). Each UPnP compatible device installed on your network will appear as a separate icon. Selecting the icon of a UPnP device will allow you to access the information and properties of that device. Use the UPnP screen (Section 18.2 on page 170) to enable UPnP on the NBG4115. 18.1.2 What You Need to Know The following terms and concepts may help as you read through this chapter. How do I know if I'm using UPnP?
NAT Traversal Dynamic port mapping Users Guide 169 Chapter 18UPnP Learning public IP addresses Assigning lease times to mappings Cautions with UPnP See the NAT chapter for more information on NAT. All UPnP-enabled devices may communicate freely with each other without additional configuration. Disable UPnP if this is not your intention. Windows Messenger is an example of an application that supports NAT traversal and UPnP. When a UPnP device joins a network, it announces its presence with a multicast message. For security reasons, the NBG4115 allows multicast messages on the LAN only. The automated nature of NAT traversal applications in establishing their own services and opening firewall ports may present network security issues. Network information and configuration may also be obtained and modified by users in some network environments. Company Confidential Use this screen to enable UPnP. Click the Management > UPnP to open the following screen. 18.2 General Figure 85 Management > UPnP > General 170 Users Guide Chapter 18UPnP Apply Reset Allow users to make port forwarding changes through UPnP 18.3 Technical Reference The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 61 Management > UPnP > General LABEL Enable the Universal Plug and Play (UPnP) Feature DESCRIPTION Select this check box to activate UPnP. Be aware that anyone could use a UPnP application to open the Web Configurator's login screen without entering the NBG4115's IP address
(although you must still enter the password to access the Web Configurator). Select this check box to allow UPnP-enabled applications to automatically configure the NBG4115 so that they can communicate through the NBG4115, for example by using NAT traversal, UPnP applications automatically reserve a NAT forwarding port in order to communicate with another UPnP enabled device; this eliminates the need to manually configure port forwarding for the UPnP enabled application. Click Apply to save the setting to the NBG4115. Click Reset to begin configuring this screen afresh. Company Confidential In the Network Connections window, click Advanced in the main menu and select Optional Networking Components . Figure 86 Network Connections The following section contains additional technical information about the NBG4115 features described in this chapter. 18.3.1 Installing UPnP in Windows XP Follow the steps below to install the UPnP in Windows XP. 2 Double-click Network Connections. 1 Click Start and Control Panel. 3 Users Guide 171 Chapter 18UPnP 4 5 The Windows Optional Networking Components Wizard window displays. Select Networking Service in the Components selection box and click Details. Figure 87 Windows Optional Networking Components Wizard In the Networking Services window, select the Universal Plug and Play check box. Figure 88 Networking Services Company Confidential Make sure the computer is connected to a LAN port of the NBG4115. Turn on your computer and the NBG4115. This section shows you how to use the UPnP feature in Windows XP. You must already have UPnP installed in Windows XP and UPnP activated on the NBG4115. 6 Click OK to go back to the Windows Optional Networking Component Wizard 18.3.1.1 Using UPnP in Windows XP Example window and click Next. 172 Users Guide Chapter 18UPnP Auto-discover Your UPnP-enabled Network Device 3 displays under Internet Gateway. Figure 89 Network Connections 2 Right-click the icon and select Properties. 1 Click Start and Control Panel. Double-click Network Connections. An icon In the Internet Connection Properties window, click Settings to see the port mappings there were automatically created. Figure 90 Internet Connection Properties Company Confidential Users Guide 173 Chapter 18UPnP 4 Figure 92 Internet Connection Properties: Advanced Settings: Add You may edit or delete the port mappings or click Add to manually add port mappings. Figure 91 Internet Connection Properties: Advanced Settings Company Confidential An icon displays in the system tray. Figure 93 System Tray Icon 6 Select Show icon in notification area when connected option and click OK. 5 When the UPnP-enabled device is disconnected from your computer, all port mappings will be deleted automatically. 174 Users Guide Chapter 18UPnP 7 Double-click on the icon to display your current Internet connection status. Web Configurator Easy Access Figure 94 Internet Connection Status Follow the steps below to access the Web Configurator. With UPnP, you can access the web-based configurator on the NBG4115 without finding out the IP address of the NBG4115 first. This comes helpful if you do not know the IP address of the NBG4115. Company Confidential 2 Double-click Network Connections. 1 Click Start and then Control Panel. Users Guide 175 Chapter 18UPnP 3 Select My Network Places under Other Places. Figure 95 Network Connections Company Confidential Configurator login screen displays. Figure 96 Network Connections: My Network Places 4 An icon with the description for each UPnP-enabled device displays under Local 5 Right-click on the icon for your NBG4115 and select Invoke. The Web Network. 176 Users Guide Chapter 18UPnP 6 Right-click on the icon for your NBG4115 and select Properties. A properties window displays with basic information about the NBG4115. Figure 97 Network Connections: My Network Places: Properties: Example Company Confidential Users Guide 177 Chapter 18UPnP Company Confidential 178 Users Guide Logs (187) System (181) PART V Maintenance and Troubleshooting Company Confidential Troubleshooting (201) Sys OP Mode (195) Language (199) Tools (189) 179 Company Confidential 180 19 System CHAPTER NBG4115s time and date. the NBG4115 in the network and set the password. This chapter provides information on the System screens. 19.1 Overview Use the Time Setting screen (Section 19.3 on page 183) to change your See the chapter about wizard setup for more information on the next few screens. Use the General screen (Section 19.2 on page 181) to enter a name to identify 19.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter Company Confidential Use this screen to enter a name to identify the NBG4115 in the network and set the password. Click Maintenance > System. The following screen displays. 19.2 General Figure 98 Maintenance > System > General Users Guide 181 Chapter 19System Domain Name Password Setup DESCRIPTION Administrator Inactivity Timer System Name is a unique name to identify the NBG4115 in an Ethernet network. It is recommended you enter your computers Computer name in this field (see thechapter about wizard setup for how to find your computers name). This name can be up to 30 alphanumeric characters long. Spaces are not allowed, but dashes - and underscores "_" are accepted. Enter the domain name (if you know it) here. If you leave this field blank, the ISP may assign a domain name via DHCP. The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 62 Maintenance > System > General LABEL System Setup System Name The domain name entered by you is given priority over the ISP assigned domain name. Type how many minutes a management session can be left idle before the session times out. The default is 5 minutes. After it times out you have to log in with your password again. Very long idle timeouts may have security risks. A value of "0" means a management session never times out, no matter how long it has been left idle (not recommended). Change your NBG4115s password (recommended) using the fields as shown. Type the default password or the existing password you use to access the system in this field. Type your new system password (up to 30 characters). Note that as you type a password, the screen displays an asterisk (*) for each character you type. Type the new password again in this field. Company Confidential Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG4115. Click Reset to begin configuring this screen afresh. Retype to Confirm Apply Reset New Password Old Password 182 Users Guide Chapter 19System 19.3 Time Setting Figure 99 Maintenance > System > Time Setting To change your NBG4115s time and date, click Maintenance > System > Time Setting. The screen appears as shown. Use this screen to configure the NBG4115s time based on your local time zone. Company Confidential Table 63 Maintenance > System > Time Setting LABEL Current Time and Date Current Time Each time you reload this page, the NBG4115 synchronizes the time with the time server. This field displays the date of your NBG4115. Select this radio button to enter the time and date manually. If you configure a new time and date, Time Zone and Daylight Saving at the same time, the new time and date you entered has priority and the Time Zone and Daylight Saving settings do not affect it. Each time you reload this page, the NBG4115 synchronizes the date with the time server. he following table describes the labels in this screen. Time and Date Setup Manual This field displays the time of your NBG4115. DESCRIPTION Current Date Users Guide 183 Chapter 19System New Date
(hh:mm:ss)
(yyyy/mm/dd) User Defined Time Server Address Time Zone Setup Time Zone Get from Time Server Auto Table 63 Maintenance > System > Time Setting LABEL New Time DESCRIPTION This field displays the last updated time from the time server or the last time configured manually. When you set Time and Date Setup to Manual, enter the new time in this field and then click Apply. This field displays the last updated date from the time server or the last date configured manually. When you set Time and Date Setup to Manual, enter the new date in this field and then click Apply. Select this radio button to have the NBG4115 get the time and date from the time server you specified below. Select Auto to have the NBG4115 automatically search for an available time server and synchronize the date and time with the time server after you click Apply. Select User Defined Time Server Address and enter the IP address or URL (up to 20 extended ASCII characters in length) of your time server. Check with your ISP/network administrator if you are unsure of this information. Company Confidential Daylight Saving Time starts in the European Union on the last Sunday of March. All of the time zones in the European Union start using Daylight Saving Time at the same moment (1 A.M. GMT or UTC). So in the European Union you would select Last, Sunday, March. The time you type in the o'clock field depends on your time zone. In Germany for instance, you would type 2 because Germany's time zone is one hour ahead of GMT or UTC (GMT+1). Choose the time zone of your location. This will set the time difference between your time zone and Greenwich Mean Time (GMT). Daylight saving is a period from late spring to early fall when many countries set their clocks ahead of normal local time by one hour to give more daytime light in the evening. Select this option if you use Daylight Saving Time. Configure the day and time when Daylight Saving Time starts if you selected Daylight Savings. The o'clock field uses the 24 hour format. Here are a couple of examples:
Daylight Saving Time starts in most parts of the United States on the first Sunday of April. Each time zone in the United States starts using Daylight Saving Time at 2 A.M. local time. So in the United States you would select First, Sunday, April and type 2 in the o'clock field. Daylight Savings Start Date 184 Users Guide Chapter 19System Apply Reset Table 63 Maintenance > System > Time Setting LABEL End Date Daylight Saving Time ends in the United States on the last Sunday of October. Each time zone in the United States stops using Daylight Saving Time at 2 A.M. local time. So in the United States you would select Last, Sunday, October and type 2 in the o'clock field. DESCRIPTION Configure the day and time when Daylight Saving Time ends if you selected Daylight Savings. The o'clock field uses the 24 hour format. Here are a couple of examples:
Daylight Saving Time ends in the European Union on the last Sunday of October. All of the time zones in the European Union stop using Daylight Saving Time at the same moment (1 A.M. GMT or UTC). So in the European Union you would select Last, Sunday, October. The time you type in the o'clock field depends on your time zone. In Germany for instance, you would type 2 because Germany's time zone is one hour ahead of GMT or UTC (GMT+1). Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG4115. Click Reset to begin configuring this screen afresh. Company Confidential Users Guide 185 Chapter 19System Company Confidential 186 Users Guide 20 Logs CHAPTER 20.1 Overview 20.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter The Web Configurator allows you to look at all of the NBG4115s logs in one location. This chapter contains information about configuring general log settings and viewing the NBG4115s logs. Refer to the appendices for example log message explanations. Company Confidential Use the View Log screen (Section 20.2 on page 187) to see the logs for the activity on your NBG4115. The log wraps around and deletes the old entries after it fills. Click a column heading to sort it. A triangle indicates ascending or descending sort order. Use the View Log screen to see the logged messages for the NBG4115. 20.2 View Log Users Guide 187 Chapter 20Logs Click Maintenance > Logs to open the View Log screen. Figure 100 Maintenance > Logs > View Log The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 64 Maintenance > Logs > View Log LABEL Refresh Clear Log
Time Company Confidential DESCRIPTION Click Refresh to renew the log screen. Click Clear Log to delete all the logs. This is the index number of the log entry. This field displays the time the log was recorded. See the chapter on system maintenance and information to configure the NBG4115 s time and date. This field states the reason for the log. Message 188 Users Guide 21 Tools CHAPTER your NBG4115. 21.1 Overview related to factory defaults, backup configuration, and restoring configuration. Use the Firmware screen (Section 21.2 on page 190) to upload firmware to Use the Configuration screen (Section 21.3 on page 192) to view information 21.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter This chapter shows you how to upload a new firmware, upload or save backup configuration files and restart the NBG4115. Company Confidential Use the Restart screen (Section 21.4 on page 194) to have the NBG4115 reboot. Users Guide 189 Chapter 21Tools 21.2 Firmware Figure 101 Maintenance > Tools > Firmware Click Maintenance > Tools. Follow the instructions in this screen to upload firmware to your NBG4115. Find firmware at www.zyxel.com in a file that (usually) uses the system model name with a *.bin extension, e.g., NBG4115.bin. The upload process uses HTTP (Hypertext Transfer Protocol) and may take up to two minutes. After a successful upload, the system will reboot. Company Confidential DESCRIPTION Type in the location of the file you want to upload in this field or click Browse... to find it. Click Choose File to find the .bin file you want to upload. Remember that you must decompress compressed (.zip) files before you can upload them. Click Upload to begin the upload process. This process may take up to two minutes. The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 65 Maintenance > Tools > Firmware LABEL File Path Note: Do not turn off the NBG4115 while firmware upload is in progress!
Choose File Upload 190 Users Guide Chapter 21Tools Figure 102 Upload Warning Figure 103 Network Temporarily Disconnected After you see the Firmware Upload In Process screen, wait two minutes before logging into the NBG4115 again. The NBG4115 automatically restarts in this time causing a temporary network disconnect. In some operating systems, you may see the following icon on your desktop. Company Confidential If the upload was not successful, the following screen will appear. Click Return to go back to the Firmware screen. After two minutes, log in again and check your new firmware version in the Status screen. Figure 104 Upload Error Message Users Guide 191 Chapter 21Tools 21.3 Configuration Figure 105 Maintenance > Tools > Configuration Click Maintenance > Tools > Configuration. Information related to factory defaults, backup configuration, and restoring configuration appears as shown next. Company Confidential Backup configuration allows you to back up (save) the NBG4115s current configuration to a file on your computer. Once your NBG4115 is configured and functioning properly, it is highly recommended that you back up your configuration file before making configuration changes. The backup configuration file will be useful in case you need to return to your previous settings. 21.3.1 Backup Configuration Click Backup to save the NBG4115s current configuration to your computer. 192 Users Guide Chapter 21Tools 21.3.2 Restore Configuration Upload Choose File Figure 106 Configuration Restore Successful Note: Do not turn off the NBG4115 while configuration file upload is in progress After you see a configuration upload successful screen, you must then wait one minute before logging into the NBG4115 again. DESCRIPTION Type in the location of the file you want to upload in this field or click Browse... to find it. Click Choose File to find the .bin file you want to upload. Remember that you must decompress compressed (.zip) files before you can upload them. Click Upload to begin the upload process. Restore configuration allows you to upload a new or previously saved configuration file from your computer to your NBG4115. Table 66 Maintenance Restore Configuration LABEL File Path Company Confidential If you uploaded the default configuration file you may need to change the IP address of your computer to be in the same subnet as that of the default NBG4115 IP address (192.168.1.1). See Appendix D on page 233 for details on how to set up your computers IP address. The NBG4115 automatically restarts in this time causing a temporary network disconnect. In some operating systems, you may see the following icon on your desktop. Figure 107 Temporarily Disconnected Users Guide 193 Chapter 21Tools Figure 108 Configuration Restore Error If the upload was not successful, the following screen will appear. Click Return to go back to the Configuration screen. 21.3.3 Back to Factory Defaults Pressing the Reset button in this section clears all user-entered configuration information and returns the NBG4115 to its factory defaults. You can also press the RESET button on the rear panel to reset the factory defaults of your NBG4115. Refer to the chapter about introducing the Web Configurator for more information on the RESET button. Company Confidential Click Maintenance > Tools > Restart. Click Restart to have the NBG4115 reboot. This does not affect the NBG4115's configuration. System restart allows you to reboot the NBG4115 without turning the power off. Figure 109 Maintenance > Tools > Restart 21.4 Restart 194 Users Guide CHAPTER 22 Sys OP Mode 22.1 Overview 22.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter Use the General screen (Section 22.2 on page 196) to select how you connect to the Internet. The Sys OP Mode (System Operation Mode) function lets you configure whether your NBG4115 is a router or AP. You can choose between Router Mode and AP Mode depending on your network topology and the features you require from your device. See Section 1.1 on page 21 for more information on which mode to choose. Company Confidential A router connects your local network with another network, such as the Internet. The router has two IP addresses, the LAN IP address and the WAN IP address. 22.1.2 What You Need to Know The following terms and concepts may help as you read through this chapter. Figure 110 LAN and WAN IP Addresses in Router Mode Internet WAN IP LAN IP Router WAN LAN Users Guide 195 Chapter 22Sys OP Mode AP 1 IP LAN Internet Figure 111 IP Address in AP Mode 22.2 General An AP extends one network and so has just one IP address. All Ethernet ports on the AP have the same IP address. To connect to the Internet, another device, such as a router, is required. Company Confidential Figure 113 Maintenance > Sys Op Mode > General: Router If you select Router Mode, the following pop-up message window appears. Figure 112 Maintenance > Sys OP Mode > General Use this screen to select how you connect to the Internet. 196 Users Guide Chapter 22Sys OP Mode In this mode there are both LAN and WAN ports. The LAN Ethernet and WAN WAN. There is no WAN port. devices on your local network. Ethernet ports have different IP addresses. system administrator for more information on appropriate settings. Figure 114 Maintenance > Sys Op Mode > General: AP If you select Access Point the following pop-up message window appears. The LAN IP address of the device on the local network is set to 192.168.1.1. The DHCP server on your device is enabled and allocates IP addresses to other The DHCP server on your device is disabled. In AP mode there must be a device You can configure the IP address settings on your WAN port. Contact your ISP or with a DHCP server on your network such as a router or gateway which can allocate IP addresses. In AP Mode all Ethernet ports have the same IP address. All ports on the rear panel of the device are LAN ports, including the port labeled Company Confidential Select Router if your device routes traffic between a local network and another network such as the Internet. This mode offers services such as a firewall or content filter. Select Access Point if your device bridges traffic between clients on the same network. Click Apply to save your settings. Click Reset to return your settings to the default ( Router) Table 67 Maintenance > Sys OP Mode > General LABEL System Operation Mode Router Note: If you select the incorrect System Operation Mode you cannot connect to the The IP address of the device on the local network is set to 192.168.1.2. The following table describes the labels in the General screen. DESCRIPTION Apply Reset Access Point Internet. Users Guide 197 Chapter 22Sys OP Mode Company Confidential 198 Users Guide 23 Language CHAPTER 23.1 Overview 23.2 Language Use this screen to change the language for the Web Configurator display. This chapter shows you how to change the Web Configurators display language. Click the language you prefer. The Web Configurator language changes after a while without restarting the NBG4115. Company Confidential Figure 115 Language Users Guide 199 Chapter 23Language Company Confidential 200 Users Guide CHAPTER 24 Troubleshooting Wireless Router/AP Troubleshooting 24.1 Overview Power, Hardware Connections, and LEDs NBG4115 Access and Login Internet Access Resetting the NBG4115 to Its Factory Defaults This chapter offers some suggestions to solve problems you might encounter. The potential problems are divided into the following categories. Company Confidential 24.2 Power, Hardware Connections, and LEDs 2 Make sure the power adaptor or cord is connected to the NBG4115 and plugged in 1 Make sure you are using the power adaptor or cord included with the NBG4115. 1 Make sure you understand the normal behavior of the LED. See Section 1.5 on 3 Disconnect and re-connect the power adaptor or cord to the NBG4115. The NBG4115 does not turn on. None of the LEDs turn on. to an appropriate power source. Make sure the power source is turned on. One of the LEDs does not behave as expected. If the problem continues, contact the vendor. 4 page 22. Users Guide 201 Chapter 24Troubleshooting 2 Check the hardware connections. See the Quick Start Guide. 5 3 2 1 The default IP address is 192.168.1.1. If the problem continues, contact the vendor. I dont know the IP address of my NBG4115. 4 Disconnect and re-connect the power adaptor to the NBG4115. 24.3 NBG4115 Access and Login Inspect your cables for damage. Contact the vendor to replace any damaged cables. Company Confidential If you changed the IP address and have forgotten it, you might get the IP address of the NBG4115 by looking up the IP address of the default gateway for your computer. To do this in most Windows computers, click Start > Run, enter cmd, and then enter ipconfig. The IP address of the Default Gateway might be the IP address of the NBG4115 (it depends on the network), so enter this IP address in your Internet browser.Set your device to Router Mode, login (see the Quick Start Guide for instructions) and go to the Device Information table in the Status screen. Your NBG4115s IP address is available in the Device Information table. If your NBG4115 is a DHCP client, you can find your IP address from the DHCP server. This information is only available from the DHCP server which allocates IP addresses on your network. Find this information directly from the DHCP server or contact your system administrator for more information. current settings are lost. See Section 24.5 on page 206 in the Troubleshooting for information on resetting your NBG4115. 4 Reset your NBG4115 to change all settings back to their default. This means your If the DHCP setting under LAN information is None, your device has a fixed If the DHCP setting under LAN information is Client, then your device receives an IP address from a DHCP server on the network. IP address. 3 202 Users Guide Chapter 24Troubleshooting 2 1 address. The default password is 1234. I forgot the password. The default IP address is 192.168.1.1. 1 Make sure you are using the correct IP address. suggestions for I dont know the IP address of my NBG4115. If you changed the IP address (Section 7.3 on page 102), use the new IP If you changed the IP address and have forgotten it, see the troubleshooting I cannot see or access the Login screen in the Web Configurator. If this does not work, you have to reset the device to its factory defaults. See Section 24.5 on page 206. Company Confidential If the problem continues, contact the network administrator or vendor, or try one of the advanced suggestions. access the NBG4115, check the remote management settings and firewall rules to find out why the NBG4115 does not respond to HTTP. 5 Reset the device to its factory defaults, and try to access the NBG4115 with the 4 Make sure your computer is in the same subnet as the NBG4115. (If you know 2 Check the hardware connections, and make sure the LEDs are behaving as 3 Make sure your Internet browser does not block pop-up windows and has that there are routers between your computer and the NBG4115, skip this step.) If there is a DHCP server on your network, make sure your computer is using Try to access the NBG4115 using another service, such as Telnet. If you can address is in the same subnet as the NBG4115. See Section 7.3 on page 102. If there is no DHCP server on your network, make sure your computers IP JavaScripts and Java enabled. See Appendix B on page 215. a dynamic IP address. See Section 7.3 on page 102. default IP address. See Section 7.3 on page 102. expected. See the Quick Start Guide. Advanced Suggestions 6 Users Guide 203 Chapter 24Troubleshooting If your computer is connected to the WAN port or is connected wirelessly, use a 3 2 5 computer that is connected to a LAN/ETHERNET port. 1234. This field is case-sensitive, so make sure [Caps Lock] is not on. 4 Disconnect and re-connect the power adaptor or cord to the NBG4115. 1 Make sure you have entered the password correctly. The default password is I can see the Login screen, but I cannot log in to the NBG4115. This can happen when you fail to log out properly from your last session. Try logging in again after 5 minutes. If this does not work, you have to reset the device to its factory defaults. See Section 24.5 on page 206. You cannot log in to the Web Configurator while someone is using Telnet to access the NBG4115. Log out of the NBG4115 in the other session, or ask the person who is logged in to log out. Company Confidential If you are trying to access the Internet wirelessly, make sure the wireless settings in the wireless client are the same as the settings in the AP. 2 Make sure you entered your ISP account information correctly in the wizard. These 4 Disconnect all the cables from your device, and follow the directions in the Quick 5 Go to Maintenance > Sys OP Mode > General. Check your System Operation Mode 1 Check the hardware connections, and make sure the LEDs are behaving as 24.4 Internet Access Go to Network > Wireless LAN > General > WDS and check if the NBG4115 is set to bridge mode. Select Disable and try to connect to the Internet again. fields are case-sensitive, so make sure [Caps Lock] is not on. I cannot access the Internet. expected. See the Quick Start Guide. Start Guide again. 3 setting. 204 Users Guide Chapter 24Troubleshooting Select Router if your device routes traffic between a local network and 6 3 same network. 2 Reboot the NBG4115. another network such as the Internet. If the problem continues, contact your ISP. If the problem continues, contact your ISP. The Internet connection is slow or intermittent. expected. See the Quick Start Guide and Section 1.5 on page 22. Select Access Point if your device bridges traffic between clients on the 1 Check the hardware connections, and make sure the LEDs are behaving as I cannot access the Internet anymore. I had access to the Internet (with the NBG4115), but my Internet connection is not available anymore. Company Confidential 2 Check the signal strength. If the signal strength is low, try moving the NBG4115 closer to the AP if possible, and look around to see if there are any devices that might be interfering with the wireless network (for example, microwaves, other wireless networks, and so on). There might be a lot of traffic on the network. Look at the LEDs, and check Section 1.5 on page 22. If the NBG4115 is sending or receiving a lot of information, try closing some programs that use the Internet, especially peer-to-peer applications. If the problem continues, contact the network administrator or vendor, or try one of the advanced suggestions. Check the settings for QoS. If it is disabled, you might consider activating it. 3 Reboot the NBG4115. Advanced Suggestion 1 4 Users Guide 205 Chapter 24Troubleshooting 3 2 To reset the NBG4115, 1 Make sure the power LED is on. Press the RESET button for longer than 1 second to restart/reboot the NBG4115. You will lose all of your changes when you push the RESET button. Press the RESET button for longer than five seconds to set the NBG4115 back to its factory-default configurations. 24.5 Resetting the NBG4115 to Its Factory Defaults If you reset the NBG4115, you lose all of the changes you have made. The NBG4115 re-loads its default settings, and the password resets to 1234. You have to make all of your changes again. Company Confidential I cannot access the NBG4115 or ping any computer from the WLAN (wireless AP or router). 24.6 Wireless Router/AP Troubleshooting If the NBG4115 does not restart automatically, disconnect and reconnect the NBG4115s power. Then, follow the directions above again. If the NBG4115 restarts automatically, wait for the NBG4115 to finish restarting, and log in to the Web Configurator. The password is 1234. 2 Make sure the wireless adapter on the wireless station is working properly. 3 Make sure the wireless adapter installed on your computer is IEEE 802.11 4 Make sure your computer (with a wireless adapter installed) is within the compatible and supports the same wireless standard as the NBG4115. 1 Make sure the wireless LAN is enabled on the NBG4115 transmission range of the NBG4115. 206 Users Guide Chapter 24Troubleshooting 5 Check that both the NBG4115 and your wireless station are using the same the NBG4115. to select Router Mode. wireless and wireless security settings. interface. Check your remote management settings. See the chapter on Wireless LAN in the Users Guide for more information. 7 Make sure you allow the NBG4115 to be remotely accessed through the WLAN 6 Make sure traffic between the WLAN and the LAN is not blocked by the firewall on I set up URL keyword blocking, but I can still access a website that should be blocked. Make sure that you select the Enable URL Keyword Blocking check box in the Content Filtering screen. Make sure that the keywords that you type are listed in the Keyword List. Company Confidential If a keyword that is listed in the Keyword List is not blocked when it is found in a URL, customize the keyword blocking using commands. See the Customizing Keyword Blocking URL Checking section in the Content Filter chapter. When you change from router mode to AP mode, your computer must have an IP address in the range between 192.168.1.3 and 192.168.1.254. In the Network > LAN > Advancedscreen, make sure Allow between LAN and WAN is checked. This is not checked by default to keep the LAN secure. If you still cannot access a network folder, make sure your account has access rights to the folder you are trying to open. Refer to Appendix D on page 233 for instructions on how to change your computers IP address. I can access the Internet, but I cannot open my network folders. I can access the Web Configurator after I switched to AP mode. Users Guide 207 Chapter 24Troubleshooting Company Confidential 208 Users Guide Product Specifications (211) Pop-up Windows, JavaScripts and Java Permissions (215) Index PART VI Appendices and Company Confidential Setting up Your Computers IP Address
(233) IP Addresses and Subnetting (223) Legal Information (267) Wireless LANs (251) Services (263) Index (275) 209 Company Confidential 210 APPENDIX A duplex mode. Output: 12 V DC 1.25A Ethernet portsAuto-negotiating: 10 Mbps, 100 Mbps in either half-duplex or full-
The following tables summarize the NBG4115s hardware and firmware features. Product Specifications Table 68 Hardware Features Dimensions Weight SDRAM Flash Memory Power Specification 140 mm (W) x 110 mm (D) x 30 mm (H) 190 g (without a 3G card installed) 32 MB 4 MB Input: 120~240 AC, 50~60 Hz Company Confidential The reset button is built into the rear panel. Use this button to restore the NBG4115 to its factory default settings. Press for 1 second to restart the device. Press for 5 seconds to restore to factory default settings. Press the WPS on two WPS enabled devices within 120 seconds for a security-enabled wireless connection. The NBG4115 is equipped witha 2dBi (2.4GHz) detachable antenna to provide clear radio transmission and reception on the wireless network. The NBG4115 has one built-in USB 2.0 type A for 3G connectivity. When a 3G card is plugged in and operational this port functions as a WAN port. Temperature: 0 C ~ 40 C / 32F ~ 104F Auto-crossover: Use either crossover or straight-through Ethernet cables. A combination of switch and router makes your NBG4115 a cost-
effective and viable network solution. You can add up to four computers to the NBG4115 without the cost of a hub when connecting to the Internet through the WAN port. You can add up to five computers to the NBG4115 when you connect to the Internet in AP mode. Add more than four computers to your LAN by using a hub. LEDsPWR, LAN1-2, 3G, Internet, WAN, WLAN/WPS Reset Button Humidity: 20% ~ 90%
Temperature: -30 C ~ 70 C / -22F ~ 158F Operation Environment Storage Environment 4-5 Port Switch WPS button USB Port Antenna Humidity: 20% ~ 95%
Users Guide 211 Appendix AProduct Specifications features on the NBG4115. DESCRIPTION 192.168.1.1 (router) 192.168.1.2. (AP) 255.255.255.0 (24 bits) Note: The NBG4115 may be prone to RF (Radio 1234 192.168.1.33 to 192.168.1.64 Wireless FunctionalityAllows IEEE 802.11b and/or IEEE 802.11g wireless clients to Table 69 Firmware Features FEATURE Default LAN IP Address connect to the NBG4115 wirelessly. Enable wireless security (
WPA(2)-PSK) and/or MAC filtering to protect your wireless network. Default LAN Subnet Mask Default Password DHCP Pool Wireless InterfaceWireless LAN Default Wireless SSIDZyXEL Device ManagementUse the Web Configurator to easily configure the rich range of Company Confidential Note: Only upload firmware for your specific model!
Make a copy of the NBG4115s configuration and put it back on the NBG4115 later if you decide you want to revert back to an earlier configuration. Each computer on your network must have its own unique IP address. Use NAT to convert a single public IP address to multiple private IP addresses forthe computers on your network. specify and blocks access to web sites with URLs that contain keywords that you specify. You can define time periods and days during which content filtering is enabled. You can also include or exclude particular computers on your network from content filtering. access. When the firewall is on, by default, all incoming traffic from the Internet to your network is blocked unless it is initiated from your network. This means that probes from the outside to your network are not allowed, but you can safely browse the Internet and download files for example. Frequency) interference from other 2.4 GHz devices such as microwave ovens, wireless phones, Bluetooth enabled devices, and other wireless LANs. You can also subscribe to category-based content filtering that allows your NBG4115 to check web sites against an external database. Firmware UpgradeDownload new firmware (when available) from the ZyXEL web Content FilterThe NBG4115 blocks or allows access to web sites that you FirewallYou can configure firewall on the NBG4115 for secure Internet site and use the Web Configurator to put it on the NBG4115. Configuration Backup &
Restoration Network Address Translation (NAT) 212 Users Guide Appendix AProduct Specifications disabled. DESCRIPTION DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) Time and DateGet the current time and date from an external server when Port ForwardingIf you have a server (mail or web server for example) on your Wireless LAN SchedulerYou can schedule the times the Wireless LAN is enabled/
Dynamic DNS SupportWith Dynamic DNS (Domain Name System) support, you can Remote ManagementThis allows you to decide whether a service (HTTP or FTP traffic for example) from a computer on a network (LAN or WAN for example) can access the NBG4115. you turn on your NBG4115. You can also set the time manually. These dates and times are then used in logs. network, then use this feature to let people access it from the Internet. Use this feature to have the NBG4115 assign IP addresses, an IP default gateway and DNS servers to computers on your network. Table 69 Firmware Features FEATURE Bandwidth Management You can efficiently manage traffic on your network by reserving bandwidth and giving priority to certain types of traffic and/or to particular computers. Company Confidential transfer of data through a Virtual Private Network (VPN). The NBG4115 supports one PPTP connection at a time. The NBG4115 can communicate with other UPnP enabled devices in a network. computers. The NBG4115 supports versions 1 and 2 of IGMP
(Internet Group Management Protocol) used to join multicast groups (see RFC 2236). use a fixed URL, www.zyxel.com for example, with a dynamic IP address. You must register for this service with a Dynamic DNS service provider. PPPoEPPPoE mimics a dial-up Internet access connection. PPTP EncapsulationPoint-to-Point Tunneling Protocol (PPTP) enables secure IP MulticastIP Multicast is used to send traffic to a specific group of LoggingUse logs for troubleshooting. You can view logs in the Web Universal Plug and Play
(UPnP) Configurator. Users Guide 213 Appendix AProduct Specifications Company Confidential 214 Users Guide Java permissions (enabled by default). In order to use the Web Configurator you need to allow:
Note: Internet Explorer 6 screens are used here. Screens for other Internet Explorer Web browser pop-up windows from your device. JavaScripts (enabled by default). APPENDIX B Pop-up Windows, JavaScripts and Java Permissions Company Confidential In Internet Explorer, select Tools, Pop-up Blocker and then select Turn Off Pop-up Blocker. Figure 116 Pop-up Blocker Either disable pop-up blocking (enabled by default in Windows XP SP (Service Pack) 2) or allow pop-up blocking and create an exception for your devices IP address. You can also check if pop-up blocking is disabled in the Pop-up Blocker section in the Privacy tab. Internet Explorer Pop-up Blockers You may have to disable pop-up blocking to log into your device. Disable pop-up Blockers versions may vary. 1 Users Guide 215 Appendix BPop-up Windows, JavaScripts and Java Permissions 1 In Internet Explorer, select Tools, Internet Options, Privacy. 2 Clear the Block pop-ups check box in the Pop-up Blocker section of the screen. This disables any web pop-up blockers you may have enabled. Figure 117 Internet Options: Privacy Company Confidential Alternatively, if you only want to allow pop-up windows from your device, see the following steps. In Internet Explorer, select Tools, Internet Options and then the Privacy tab. Enable pop-up Blockers with Exceptions 3 Click Apply to save this setting. 1 216 Users Guide Appendix BPop-up Windows, JavaScripts and Java Permissions 2 Select Settingsto open the Pop-up Blocker Settings screen. Figure 118 Internet Options: Privacy Company Confidential Type the IP address of your device (the web page that you do not want to have blocked) with the prefix http://. For example, http://192.168.167.1. 3 Users Guide 217 Appendix BPop-up Windows, JavaScripts and Java Permissions 4 Click Add to move the IP address to the list of Allowed sites. Figure 119 Pop-up Blocker Settings Company Confidential If pages of the Web Configurator do not display properly in Internet Explorer, check that JavaScripts are allowed. 5 Click Close to return to the Privacy screen. 6 Click Apply to save this setting. JavaScripts 218 Users Guide Appendix BPop-up Windows, JavaScripts and Java Permissions 1 In Internet Explorer, click Tools, Internet Options and then the Security tab. Figure 120 Internet Options: Security Company Confidential 5 Under Scripting of Java applets make sure that Enable is selected (the 4 Under Active scripting make sure that Enable is selected (the default). 2 Click the Custom Level... button. 3 Scroll down to Scripting. default). Users Guide 219 Appendix BPop-up Windows, JavaScripts and Java Permissions 6 Click OK to close the window. Java Permissions Figure 121 Security Settings - Java Scripting Company Confidential From Internet Explorer, click Tools, Internet Options and then the Security tab. 4 Under Java permissions make sure that a safety level is selected. 2 Click the Custom Level... button. 3 Scroll down to Microsoft VM. 1 220 Users Guide Appendix BPop-up Windows, JavaScripts and Java Permissions 5 Click OK to close the window. JAVA (Sun) Figure 122 Security Settings - Java Company Confidential From Internet Explorer, click Tools, Internet Options and then the Advanced tab. 2 Make sure that Use Java 2 for <applet> under Java (Sun) is selected. 1 Users Guide 221 Appendix BPop-up Windows, JavaScripts and Java Permissions 3 Click OK to close the window. Figure 123 Java (Sun) Company Confidential 222 Users Guide APPENDIX C This appendix introduces IP addresses and subnet masks. Introduction to IP Addresses Subnet masks determine the maximum number of possible hosts on a network. You can also use subnet masks to divide one network into multiple sub-networks. IP Addresses and Subnetting IP addresses identify individual devices on a network. Every networking device
(including computers, servers, routers, printers, etc.) needs an IP address to communicate across the network. These networking devices are also known as hosts. Company Confidential One part of the IP address is the network number, and the other part is the host ID. In the same way that houses on a street share a common street name, the hosts on a network share a common network number. Similarly, as each house has its own house number, each host on the network has its own unique identifying number - the host ID. Routers use the network number to send packets to the correct network, while the host ID determines to which host on the network the packets are delivered. An IP address is made up of four parts, written in dotted decimal notation (for example, 192.168.1.1). Each of these four parts is known as an octet. An octet is an eight-digit binary number (for example 11000000, which is 192 in decimal notation). Therefore, each octet has a possible range of 00000000 to 11111111 in binary, or 0 to 255 in decimal. Structure Users Guide 223 Appendix CIP Addresses and Subnetting Figure 124 Network Number and Host ID The following figure shows an example IP address in which the first three octets
(192.168.1) are the network number, and the fourth octet (16) is the host ID. How much of the IP address is the network number and how much is the host ID varies according to the subnet mask. Company Confidential A subnet mask has 32 bits. If a bit in the subnet mask is a 1 then the corresponding bit in the IP address is part of the network number. If a bit in the subnet mask is 0 then the corresponding bit in the IP address is part of the host ID. The following example shows a subnet mask identifying the network number (in bold text) and host ID of an IP address (192.168.1.2 in decimal). Table 70 Subnet Mask - Identifying Network Number A subnet mask is used to determine which bits are part of the network number, and which bits are part of the host ID (using a logical AND operation). The term subnet is short for sub-network. IP Address (Binary)11000000101010000000000100000010 Subnet Mask (Binary) Subnet Masks 111111111111111111111111 1ST OCTET:
(192) 2ND OCTET:
(168) 3RD OCTET:
(1) 4TH OCTET
(2) 00000000 224 Users Guide Appendix CIP Addresses and Subnetting Table 70 Subnet Mask - Identifying Network Number 4TH OCTET
(2) 3RD OCTET:
(1) 2ND OCTET:
(168) Network Number Host ID00000010 1ST OCTET:
(192) 110000001010100000000001 Subnet masks can be referred to by the size of the network number part (the bits with a 1 value). For example, an 8-bit mask means that the first 8 bits of the mask are ones and the remaining 24 bits are zeroes. By convention, subnet masks always consist of a continuous sequence of ones beginning from the leftmost bit of the mask, followed by a continuous sequence of zeros, for a total number of 32 bits. Subnet masks are expressed in dotted decimal notation just like IP addresses. The following examples show the binary and decimal notation for 8-bit, 16-bit, 24-bit and 29-bit subnet masks. Table 71 Subnet Masks Company Confidential An IP address with host IDs of all zeros is the IP address of the network
(192.168.1.0 with a 24-bit subnet mask, for example). An IP address with host IDs of all ones is the broadcast address for that network (192.168.1.255 with a 24-bit subnet mask, for example). The size of the network number determines the maximum number of possible hosts you can have on your network. The larger the number of network number bits, the smaller the number of remaining host ID bits. 8-bit mask 11111111 11111111 16-bit mask 24-bit mask 29-bit mask 2ND OCTET 00000000 11111111 3RD OCTET 00000000 00000000 4TH OCTET 00000000 00000000 BINARY 1ST OCTET 255.255.255.24 8 255.0.0.0 255.255.0.0 Network Size 255.255.255.0 DECIMAL 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 00000000 11111111 11111111 11111000 Users Guide 225 Appendix CIP Addresses and Subnetting 6 2 2 2 48 3 bits HOST ID SIZE Notation MAXIMUM NUMBER OF HOSTS 24 216777214 16 265534 8 2254 23 2 8 bits255.0.0.024 bits 16 bits255.255.0.016 bits 24 bits255.255.255.08 bits 29 bits255.255.255.2 As these two IP addresses cannot be used for individual hosts, calculate the maximum number of possible hosts in a network as follows:
Table 72 Maximum Host Numbers SUBNET MASK Since the mask is always a continuous number of ones beginning from the left, followed by a continuous number of zeros for the remainder of the 32 bit mask, you can simply specify the number of ones instead of writing the value of each octet. This is usually specified by writing a / followed by the number of bits in the mask after the address. Company Confidential Table 73 Alternative Subnet Mask Notation SUBNET MASK 255.255.255.0 255.255.255.12 8 255.255.255.19 2 255.255.255.22 4 255.255.255.24 0 255.255.255.24 8 255.255.255.25 2 For example, 192.1.1.0 /25 is equivalent to saying 192.1.1.0 with subnet mask 255.255.255.128. The following table shows some possible subnet masks using both notations. ALTERNATIVE NOTATION
/24
/25 LAST OCTET
(BINARY) 0000 0000 1000 0000 LAST OCTET
(DECIMAL) 0 128 1111 1000 1111 1100 1111 0000 1100 0000 1110 0000 248 252 240 192 224
/29
/30
/28
/26
/27 226 Users Guide Appendix CIP Addresses and Subnetting Subnetting Figure 125 Subnetting Example: Before Subnetting The following figure shows the company network before subnetting. In this example, the company network address is 192.168.1.0. The first three octets of the address (192.168.1) are the network number, and the remaining octet is the host ID, allowing a maximum of 28 2 or 254 possible hosts. You can use subnetting to divide one network into multiple sub-networks. In the following example a network administrator creates two sub-networks to isolate a group of servers from the rest of the company network for security reasons. Company Confidential You can borrow one of the host ID bits to divide the network 192.168.1.0 into two separate sub-networks. The subnet mask is now 25 bits (255.255.255.128 or
/25). The borrowed host ID bit can have a value of either 0 or 1, allowing two subnets; 192.168.1.0 /25 and 192.168.1.128 /25. Users Guide 227 Appendix CIP Addresses and Subnetting Figure 126 Subnetting Example: After Subnetting The following figure shows the company network after subnetting. There are now two sub-networks, A and B. Company Confidential The previous example illustrated using a 25-bit subnet mask to divide a 24-bit address into two subnets. Similarly, to divide a 24-bit address into four subnets, you need to borrow two host ID bits to give four possible combinations (00, 01, 10 and 11). The subnet mask is 26 bits
(11111111.11111111.11111111.11000000) or 255.255.255.192. 192.168.1.0 with mask 255.255.255.128 is subnet A itself, and 192.168.1.127 with mask 255.255.255.128 is its broadcast address. Therefore, the lowest IP address that can be assigned to an actual host for subnet A is 192.168.1.1 and the highest is 192.168.1.126. In a 25-bit subnet the host ID has 7 bits, so each sub-network has a maximum of 27 2 or 126 possible hosts (a host ID of all zeroes is the subnets address itself, all ones is the subnets broadcast address). Similarly, the host ID range for subnet B is 192.168.1.129 to 192.168.1.254. Example: Four Subnets 228 Users Guide Appendix CIP Addresses and Subnetting NETWORK NUMBER NETWORK NUMBER Highest Host ID: 192.168.1.62 LAST OCTET BIT VALUE 64 LAST OCTET BIT VALUE 0 Table 75 Subnet 2 IP/SUBNET MASK IP Address IP Address (Binary) Subnet Mask (Binary) Subnet Address:
192.168.1.64 Broadcast Address:
192.168.1.127 IP Address (Decimal) IP Address (Binary) Subnet Mask (Binary) Subnet Address:
192.168.1.0 Broadcast Address:
192.168.1.63 192.168.1. 11000000.10101000.00000001. 01000000 11111111.11111111.11111111. 11000000 Lowest Host ID: 192.168.1.65 192.168.1. 11000000.10101000.00000001. 00000000 11111111.11111111.11111111. 11000000 Lowest Host ID: 192.168.1.1 Each subnet contains 6 host ID bits, giving 26 - 2 or 62 hosts for each subnet (a host ID of all zeroes is the subnet itself, all ones is the subnets broadcast address). Table 74 Subnet 1 IP/SUBNET MASK Company Confidential 192.168.1. 11000000.10101000.00000001. 10000000 11111111.11111111.11111111. 11000000 Lowest Host ID: 192.168.1.129 IP Address IP Address (Binary) Subnet Mask (Binary) Subnet Address:
192.168.1.128 Broadcast Address:
192.168.1.191 192.168.1. 11000000.10101000.00000001
. 11111111.11111111.11111111
. LAST OCTET BIT VALUE 192 11000000 Table 76 Subnet 3 IP/SUBNET MASK Table 77 Subnet 4 IP/SUBNET MASK LAST OCTET BIT VALUE 128 IP Address IP Address (Binary) Highest Host ID: 192.168.1.126 Highest Host ID: 192.168.1.190 NETWORK NUMBER NETWORK NUMBER Subnet Mask (Binary) 11000000 Users Guide 229 Appendix CIP Addresses and Subnetting Table 77 Subnet 4 (continued) IP/SUBNET MASK NETWORK NUMBER Lowest Host ID: 192.168.1.193 Highest Host ID: 192.168.1.254 LAST OCTET BIT VALUE FIRST ADDRESS LAST Example: Eight Subnets Subnet Address:
192.168.1.192 Broadcast Address:
192.168.1.255 Similarly, use a 27-bit mask to create eight subnets (000, 001, 010, 011, 100, 101, 110 and 111). The following table shows IP address last octet values for each subnet. Table 78 Eight Subnets SUBNET Company Confidential The following table is a summary for subnet planning on a network with a 24-bit network number. Table 79 24-bit Network Number Subnet Planning NO. BORROWED HOST BITS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 255.255.255.128 (/25) 255.255.255.192 (/26) 255.255.255.224 (/27) 255.255.255.240 (/28) 255.255.255.248 (/29) 255.255.255.252 (/30) 255.255.255.254 (/31) BROADCAST ADDRESS 31 63 95 127 159 191 223 255 SUBNET ADDRESS 0 32 64 96 128 160 192 224 ADDRESS 30 62 94 126 158 190 222 254 SUBNET 126 62 30 14 6 2 1 NO. SUBNETS NO. HOSTS PER Subnet Planning 1 33 65 97 129 161 193 225 2 4 8 16 32 64 128 SUBNET MASK 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 230 Users Guide Appendix CIP Addresses and Subnetting SUBNET MASK NO. SUBNETS NO. HOSTS PER 2 4 8 16 32 64 128 256 512 1024 2048 4096 8192 16384 32768 SUBNET 32766 16382 8190 4094 2046 1022 510 254 126 62 30 14 6 2 1 255.255.128.0 (/17) 255.255.192.0 (/18) 255.255.224.0 (/19) 255.255.240.0 (/20) 255.255.248.0 (/21) 255.255.252.0 (/22) 255.255.254.0 (/23) 255.255.255.0 (/24) 255.255.255.128 (/25) 255.255.255.192 (/26) 255.255.255.224 (/27) 255.255.255.240 (/28) 255.255.255.248 (/29) 255.255.255.252 (/30) 255.255.255.254 (/31) The following table is a summary for subnet planning on a network with a 16-bit network number. Table 80 16-bit Network Number Subnet Planning NO. BORROWED HOST BITS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 Company Confidential If the ISP did not explicitly give you an IP network number, then most likely you have a single user account and the ISP will assign you a dynamic IP address when the connection is established. If this is the case, it is recommended that you select a network number from 192.168.0.0 to 192.168.255.0. The Internet Assigned Number Authority (IANA) reserved this block of addresses specifically for private use; please do not use any other number unless you are told otherwise. You must also enable Network Address Translation (NAT) on the NBG4115. Where you obtain your network number depends on your particular situation. If the ISP or your network administrator assigns you a block of registered IP addresses, follow their instructions in selecting the IP addresses and the subnet mask. Once you have decided on the network number, pick an IP address for your NBG4115 that is easy to remember (for instance, 192.168.1.1) but make sure that no other device on your network is using that IP address. The subnet mask specifies the network number portion of an IP address. Your NBG4115 will compute the subnet mask automatically based on the IP address Configuring IP Addresses Users Guide 231 Appendix CIP Addresses and Subnetting Private IP Addresses 192.168.0.0 192.168.255.255 that you entered. You don't need to change the subnet mask computed by the NBG4115 unless you are instructed to do otherwise. 10.0.0.0 10.255.255.255 172.16.0.0 172.31.255.255 Every machine on the Internet must have a unique address. If your networks are isolated from the Internet (running only between two branch offices, for example) you can assign any IP addresses to the hosts without problems. However, the Internet Assigned Numbers Authority (IANA) has reserved the following three blocks of IP addresses specifically for private networks:
You can obtain your IP address from the IANA, from an ISP, or it can be assigned from a private network. If you belong to a small organization and your Internet access is through an ISP, the ISP can provide you with the Internet addresses for your local networks. On the other hand, if you are part of a much larger organization, you should consult your network administrator for the appropriate IP addresses. Company Confidential Regardless of your particular situation, do not create an arbitrary IP address;
always follow the guidelines above. For more information on address assignment, please refer to RFC 1597, Address Allocation for Private Internets and RFC 1466, Guidelines for Management of IP Address Space. 232 Users Guide All computers must have a 10M or 100M Ethernet adapter card and TCP/IP installed. Windows 95/98/Me/NT/2000/XP, Macintosh OS 7 and later operating systems and all versions of UNIX/LINUX include the software components you need to install and use TCP/IP on your computer. Windows 3.1 requires the purchase of a third-
party TCP/IP application package. APPENDIX D Setting up Your Computers IP Address Company Confidential If you manually assign IP information instead of using dynamic assignment, make sure that your computers have IP addresses that place them in the same subnet as the Prestiges LAN port. TCP/IP should already be installed on computers using Windows NT/2000/XP, Macintosh OS 7 and later operating systems. After the appropriate TCP/IP components are installed, configure the TCP/IP settings in order to "communicate" with your network. Users Guide 233 Appendix DSetting up Your Computer s IP Address Windows 95/98/Me Figure 127 WIndows 95/98/Me: Network: Configuration Click Start, Settings, Control Panel and double-click the Network icon to open the Network window. Company Confidential The Network window Configuration tab displays a list of installed components. You need a network adapter, the TCP/IP protocol and Client for Microsoft Networks. 3 Select the manufacturer and model of your network adapter and then click OK. 2 Select Adapter and then click Add. In the Network window, click Add. In the Network window, click Add. Installing Components If you need the adapter:
If you need TCP/IP:
1 1 2 Select Protocol and then click Add. 234 Users Guide Appendix DSetting up Your Computer s IP Address 3 Select Microsoft from the list of manufacturers. 1 click OK. 1 Click Add. Configuring 2 Click the IP Address tab. If you need Client for Microsoft Networks:
2 Select Client and then click Add. 3 Select Microsoft from the list of manufacturers. 5 Restart your computer so the changes you made take effect. 4 Select TCP/IP from the list of network protocols and then click OK. 4 Select Client for Microsoft Networks from the list of network clients and then In the Network window Configuration tab, select your network adapter's TCP/IP entry and click Properties Company Confidential If your IP address is dynamic, select Obtain an IP address automatically. If you have a static IP address, select Specify an IP address and type your information into the IP Address and Subnet Mask fields. Figure 128 Windows 95/98/Me: TCP/IP Properties: IP Address Users Guide 235 Appendix DSetting up Your Computer s IP Address 3 Click the DNS Configuration tab. Figure 129 Windows 95/98/Me: TCP/IP Properties: DNS Configuration If you do not know your DNS information, select Disable DNS. If you know your DNS information, select Enable DNS and type the information in the fields below (you may not need to fill them all in). Company Confidential In the Run window, type "winipcfg" and then click OK to open the IP Configuration window. 6 Click OK to close the Network window. Insert the Windows CD if prompted. If you have a gateway IP address, type it in the New gateway field and click If you do not know your gateways IP address, remove previously installed 5 Click OK to save and close the TCP/IP Properties window. Turn on your Prestige and restart your computer when prompted. 1 Click Start and then Run. 4 Click the Gateway tab. Verifying Settings gateways. Add. 7 2 236 Users Guide Appendix DSetting up Your Computer s IP Address 3 Select your network adapter. You should see your computer's IP address, subnet mask and default gateway. Figure 130 Windows XP: Start Menu Windows 2000/NT/XP The following example figures use the default Windows XP GUI theme. 1 Click start (Start in Windows 2000/NT), Settings, Control Panel. Company Confidential Users Guide 237 Appendix DSetting up Your Computer s IP Address 2 3 Right-click Local Area Connection and then click Properties. Figure 132 Windows XP: Control Panel: Network Connections: Properties In the Control Panel, double-click Network Connections (Network and Dial-
up Connections in Windows 2000/NT). Figure 131 Windows XP: Control Panel Company Confidential 238 Users Guide Appendix DSetting up Your Computer s IP Address 4 Select Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) (under the General tab in Win XP) and then click Properties. Figure 133 Windows XP: Local Area Connection Properties Company Confidential The Internet Protocol TCP/IP Properties window opens (the General tab in Windows XP). If you have a static IP address click Use the following IP Address and fill in If you have a dynamic IP address click Obtain an IP address the IP address, Subnet mask, and Default gateway fields. automatically. 5 Users Guide 239 Appendix DSetting up Your Computer s IP Address Click Advanced. Figure 134 Windows XP: Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties Company Confidential In the IP Settings tab, in IP addresses, click Add. In TCP/IP Address, type an IP address in IP address and a subnet mask in If you do not know your gateway's IP address, remove any previously installed gateways in the IP Settings tab and click OK. Gateway. To manually configure a default metric (the number of transmission hops), clear the Automatic metric check box and type a metric in Metric. Do one or more of the following if you want to configure additional IP addresses:
In TCP/IP Gateway Address, type the IP address of the default gateway in Configure additional default gateways in the IP Settings tab by clicking Add Repeat the previous three steps for each default gateway you want to add. Repeat the above two steps for each IP address you want to add. Subnet mask, and then click Add. in Default gateways. Click Add. 6 240 Users Guide Appendix DSetting up Your Computer s IP Address Click OK when finished. Figure 135 Windows XP: Advanced TCP/IP Properties Company Confidential In the Internet Protocol TCP/IP Properties window (the General tab in Windows XP):
server addresses, and type them in the Preferred DNSserver and Alternate DNS server fields. Click Obtain DNS server address automatically if you do not know your If you know your DNS server IP address(es), click Use the following DNS DNS server IP address(es). 7 Users Guide 241 Appendix DSetting up Your Computer s IP Address If you have previously configured DNS servers, click Advanced and then the DNS tab to order them. Figure 136 Windows XP: Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties Company Confidential In the Command Prompt window, type "ipconfig" and then press [ENTER]. You can also open Network Connections, right-click a network connection, click Status and then click the Support tab. 10 Close the Network Connections window (Network and Dial-up Connections 9 Click Close (OK in Windows 2000/NT) to close the Local Area Connection 8 Click OK to close the Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties window. 1 Click Start, All Programs, Accessories and then Command Prompt. 11 Turn on your Prestige and restart your computer (if prompted). Verifying Settings in Windows 2000/NT). Properties window. 2 242 Users Guide Appendix DSetting up Your Computer s IP Address Macintosh OS 8/9 1 Click the Apple menu, Control Panel and double-click TCP/IP to open the TCP/
IP Control Panel. Figure 137 Macintosh OS 8/9: Apple Menu Company Confidential Users Guide 243 Appendix DSetting up Your Computer s IP Address 2 Select Ethernet built-in from the Connect via list. 4 3 From the Configure box, select Manually. Figure 138 Macintosh OS 8/9: TCP/IP For statically assigned settings, do the following:
For dynamically assigned settings, select Using DHCP Server from the Configure: list. Company Confidential Type your IP address in the IP Address box. Type your subnet mask in the Subnet mask box. 6 Click Save if prompted, to save changes to your configuration. Check your TCP/IP properties in the TCP/IP Control Panel window. Type the IP address of your Prestige in the Router address box. Turn on your Prestige and restart your computer (if prompted). 5 Close the TCP/IP Control Panel. Verifying Settings 7 244 Users Guide Appendix DSetting up Your Computer s IP Address Macintosh OS X 3 Click the TCP/IP tab. 2 Click Network in the icon bar. 1 Click the Apple menu, and click System Preferences to open the System Preferences window. Figure 139 Macintosh OS X: Apple Menu Select Automatic from the Location list. Select Built-in Ethernet from the Show list. For dynamically assigned settings, select Using DHCP from the Configure list. Figure 140 Macintosh OS X: Network Company Confidential Users Guide 245 Appendix DSetting up Your Computer s IP Address 4 For statically assigned settings, do the following:
6 Linux Verifying Settings 5 Click Apply Now and close the window. Check your TCP/IP properties in the Network window. Turn on your Prestige and restart your computer (if prompted). From the Configure box, select Manually. Type your IP address in the IP Address box. Type your subnet mask in the Subnet mask box. Type the IP address of your Prestige in the Router address box. This section shows you how to configure your computers TCP/IP settings in Red Hat Linux 9.0. Procedure, screens and file location may vary depending on your Linux distribution and release version. Company Confidential Setting and click Network. Figure 141 Red Hat 9.0: KDE: Network Configuration: Devices 1 Click the Red Hat button (located on the bottom left corner), select System Follow the steps below to configure your computer IP address using the KDE. Note: Make sure you are logged in as the root administrator. Using the K Desktop Environment (KDE) 246 Users Guide Appendix DSetting up Your Computer s IP Address 2 Double-click on the profile of the network card you wish to configure. The If you have a dynamic IP address click Automatically obtain IP address Ethernet Device General screen displays as shown. Figure 142 Red Hat 9.0: KDE: Ethernet Device: General Company Confidential If you know your DNS server IP address(es), click the DNS tab in the Network Configuration screen. Enter the DNS server information in the fields provided. Figure 143 Red Hat 9.0: KDE: Network Configuration: DNS 3 Click OK to save the changes and close the Ethernet Device General screen. If you have a static IP address click Statically set IP Addresses and fill in the Address, Subnet mask, and Default Gateway Address fields. settings with and select dhcp from the drop down list. 4 Users Guide 247 Appendix DSetting up Your Computer s IP Address 5 Click the Devices tab. Using Configuration Files Active in the Network Configuration screen. 7 After the network card restart process is complete, make sure the Status is 6 Click the Activate button to apply the changes. The following screen displays. Follow the steps below to edit the network configuration files and set your computer IP address. Click Yes to save the changes in all screens. Figure 144 Red Hat 9.0: KDE: Network Configuration: Activate Company Confidential ifconfig-eth0 configuration file (where eth0 is the name of the Ethernet card). Open the configuration file with any plain text editor. If you have a dynamic IP address, enter dhcp in the BOOTPROTO= field. The 1 Assuming that you have only one network card on the computer, locate the DEVICE=eth0 ONBOOT=yes BOOTPROTO=dhcp USERCTL=no PEERDNS=yes TYPE=Ethernet Figure 145 Red Hat 9.0: Dynamic IP Address Setting in ifconfig-eth0 following figure shows an example. 248 Users Guide Appendix DSetting up Your Computer s IP Address 2 nameserver 172.23.5.1 nameserver 172.23.5.2 Figure 146 Red Hat 9.0: Static IP Address Setting in ifconfig-eth0 DEVICE=eth0 ONBOOT=yes BOOTPROTO=static IPADDR=192.168.1.10 NETMASK=255.255.255.0 USERCTL=no PEERDNS=yes TYPE=Ethernet If you have a static IP address, enter static in the BOOTPROTO= field. Type IPADDR= followed by the IP address (in dotted decimal notation) and type NETMASK= followed by the subnet mask. The following example shows an example where the static IP address is 192.168.1.10 and the subnet mask is 255.255.255.0. If you know your DNS server IP address(es), enter the DNS server information in the resolv.conf file in the /etc directory. The following figure shows an example where two DNS server IP addresses are specified. Figure 147 Red Hat 9.0: DNS Settings in resolv.conf Company Confidential 3 After you edit and save the configuration files, you must restart the network card. Enter./network restart in the /etc/rc.d/init.d directory. The following figure shows an example. Figure 148 Red Hat 9.0: Restart Ethernet Card
[root@localhost init.d]# network restart Shutting down interface eth0: [OK]
Shutting down loopback interface: [OK]
Setting network parameters: [OK]
Bringing up loopback interface: [OK]
Bringing up interface eth0: [OK]
Users Guide 249 Appendix DSetting up Your Computer s IP Address 24.6.1 Verifying Settings Figure 149 Red Hat 9.0: Checking TCP/IP Properties Enter ifconfig in a terminal screen to check your TCP/IP properties.
[root@localhost]# ifconfig eth0 Link encap:Ethernet HWaddr 00:50:BA:72:5B:44 inet addr:172.23.19.129 Bcast:172.23.19.255 Mask:255.255.255.0 UP BROADCAST RUNNING MULTICAST MTU:1500 Metric:1 RX packets:717 errors:0 dropped:0 overruns:0 frame:0 TX packets:13 errors:0 dropped:0 overruns:0 carrier:0 collisions:0 txqueuelen:100 RX bytes:730412 (713.2 Kb) TX bytes:1570 (1.5 Kb) Interrupt:10 Base address:0x1000
[root@localhost]#
Company Confidential 250 Users Guide APPENDIX E Ad-hoc Wireless LAN Configuration Wireless LAN Topologies This section discusses ad-hoc and infrastructure wireless LAN topologies. Wireless LANs The simplest WLAN configuration is an independent (Ad-hoc) WLAN that connects a set of computers with wireless stations (A, B, C). Any time two or more wireless adapters are within range of each other, they can set up an independent network, which is commonly referred to as an Ad-hoc network or Independent Basic Service Set (IBSS). The following diagram shows an example of notebook computers using wireless adapters to form an Ad-hoc wireless LAN. Company Confidential A Basic Service Set (BSS) exists when all communications between wireless stations or between a wireless station and a wired network client go through one access point (AP). Intra-BSS traffic is traffic between wireless stations in the BSS. When Intra-BSS is enabled, wireless station A and B can access the wired network and communicate Figure 150 Peer-to-Peer Communication in an Ad-hoc Network BSS Users Guide 251 Appendix EWireless LANs Figure 151 Basic Service Set with each other. When Intra-BSS is disabled, wireless station A and B can still access the wired network but cannot communicate with each other. Company Confidential An Extended Service Set (ESS) consists of a series of overlapping BSSs, each containing an access point, with each access point connected together by a wired network. This wired connection between APs is called a Distribution System (DS). This type of wireless LAN topology is called an Infrastructure WLAN. The Access Points not only provide communication with the wired network but also mediate wireless network traffic in the immediate neighborhood. ESS 252 Users Guide Appendix EWireless LANs Figure 152 Infrastructure WLAN An ESSID (ESS IDentification) uniquely identifies each ESS. All access points and their associated wireless stations within the same ESS must have the same ESSID in order to communicate. Company Confidential A channel is the radio frequency(ies) used by IEEE 802.11a/b/g wireless devices. Channels available depend on your geographical area. You may have a choice of channels (for your region) so you should use a different channel than an adjacent AP (access point) to reduce interference. Interference occurs when radio signals from different access points overlap causing interference and degrading performance. Adjacent channels partially overlap however. To avoid interference due to overlap, your AP should be on a channel at least five channels away from a channel that an adjacent AP is using. For example, if your region has 11 channels and an adjacent AP is using channel 1, then you need to select a channel between 6 or 11. A hidden node occurs when two stations are within range of the same access point, but are not within range of each other. The following figure illustrates a hidden node. Both stations (STA) are within range of the access point (AP) or RTS/CTS Channel Users Guide 253 Appendix EWireless LANs Figure 153 RTS/CTS wireless gateway, but out-of-range of each other, so they cannot "hear" each other, that is they do not know if the channel is currently being used. Therefore, they are considered hidden from each other. RTS/CTS is designed to prevent collisions due to hidden nodes. An RTS/CTS defines the biggest size data frame you can send before an RTS (Request To Send)/CTS (Clear to Send) handshake is invoked. When station A sends data to the AP, it might not know that the station B is already using the channel. If these two stations send data at the same time, collisions may occur when both sets of data arrive at the AP at the same time, resulting in a loss of messages for both stations. Company Confidential When a data frame exceeds the RTS/CTS value you set (between 0 to 2432 bytes), the station that wants to transmit this frame must first send an RTS
(Request To Send) message to the AP for permission to send it. The AP then responds with a CTS (Clear to Send) message to all other stations within its range to notify them to defer their transmission. It also reserves and confirms with the requesting station the time frame for the requested transmission. You should only configure RTS/CTS if the possibility of hidden nodes exists on your network and the "cost" of resending large frames is more than the extra network overhead involved in the RTS (Request To Send)/CTS (Clear to Send) handshake. If the RTS/CTS value is greater than the Fragmentation Threshold value (see next), then the RTS (Request To Send)/CTS (Clear to Send) handshake will never occur as data frames will be fragmented before they reach RTS/CTS size. Note: Enabling the RTS Threshold causes redundant network overhead that could negatively affect the throughput performance instead of providing a remedy. Stations can send frames smaller than the specified RTS/CTS directly to the AP without the RTS (Request To Send)/CTS (Clear to Send) handshake. 254 Users Guide Appendix EWireless LANs Fragmentation Threshold Preamble Type A preamble is used to synchronize the transmission timing in your wireless network. There are two preamble modes: Long and Short. A large Fragmentation Threshold is recommended for networks not prone to interference while you should set a smaller threshold for busy networks or networks that are prone to interference. A Fragmentation Threshold is the maximum data fragment size (between 256 and 2432 bytes) that can be sent in the wireless network before the AP will fragment the packet into smaller data frames. If the Fragmentation Threshold value is smaller than the RTS/CTS value (see previously) you set then the RTS (Request To Send)/CTS (Clear to Send) handshake will never occur as data frames will be fragmented before they reach RTS/CTS size. Company Confidential Select Long if you have a noisy network or are unsure of what preamble mode your wireless stations support as all IEEE 802.11b compliant wireless adapters must support long preamble. However, not all wireless adapters support short preamble. Use long preamble if you are unsure what preamble mode the wireless adapters support, to ensure interpretability between the AP and the wireless stations and to provide more reliable communication in noisy networks. IEEE 802.11g is fully compatible with the IEEE 802.11b standard. This means an IEEE 802.11b adapter can interface directly with an IEEE 802.11g access point
(and vice versa) at 11 Mbps or lower depending on range. IEEE 802.11g has Short preamble takes less time to process and minimizes overhead, so it should be used in a good wireless network environment when all wireless stations support it. Select Dynamic to have the AP automatically use short preamble when all wireless stations support it, otherwise the AP uses long preamble. Note: The AP and the wireless stations MUSTuse the same preamble mode in order IEEE 802.11g Wireless LAN to communicate. Users Guide 255 Appendix EWireless LANs MODULATION IEEE 802.1x OFDM (Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing) In June 2001, the IEEE 802.1x standard was designed to extend the features of IEEE 802.11 to support extended authentication as well as providing additional accounting and control features. It is supported by Windows XP and a number of network devices. Some advantages of IEEE 802.1x are:
several intermediate rate steps between the maximum and minimum data rates. The IEEE 802.11g data rate and modulation are as follows:
Table 81 IEEE 802.11g DATA RATE
(MBPS) 1DBPSK (Differential Binary Phase Shift Keyed) 2DQPSK (Differential Quadrature Phase Shift Keying) 5.5 / 11CCK (Complementary Code Keying) 6/9/12/18/24/36/
48/54 Company Confidential User based identification that allows for roaming. Support for RADIUS (Remote Authentication Dial In User Service, RFC 2138, 2139) for centralized user profile and accounting management on a network RADIUS server. RADIUS is based on a client-server model that supports authentication, authorization and accounting. The access point is the client and the server is the RADIUS server. The RADIUS server handles the following tasks:
Determines the network services available to authenticated users once they are connected to the network. additional authentication methods to be deployed with no changes to the access point or the wireless stations. Support for EAP (Extensible Authentication Protocol, RFC 2486) that allows RADIUS is a simple package exchange in which your AP acts as a message relay between the wireless station and the network RADIUS server. Keeps track of the clients network activity. Determines the identity of the users. RADIUS Authentication Authorization Accounting 256 Users Guide Appendix EWireless LANs Types of RADIUS Messages Access-Reject Access-Accept Access-Request Access-Challenge Accounting-Request Sent by a RADIUS server rejecting access. Sent by a RADIUS server allowing access. Sent by the access point requesting accounting. Sent by an access point requesting authentication. The following types of RADIUS messages are exchanged between the access point and the RADIUS server for user authentication:
The following types of RADIUS messages are exchanged between the access point and the RADIUS server for user accounting:
Sent by a RADIUS server requesting more information in order to allow access. The access point sends a proper response from the user and then sends another Access-Request message. Company Confidential In order to ensure network security, the access point and the RADIUS server use a shared secret key, which is a password, they both know. The key is not sent over the network. In addition to the shared key, password information exchanged is also encrypted to protect the network from unauthorized access. MD5 authentication is the simplest one-way authentication method. The authentication server sends a challenge to the wireless station. The wireless station proves that it knows the password by encrypting the password with the challenge and sends back the information. Password is not sent in plain text. This appendix discusses some popular authentication types: EAP-MD5, EAP-TLS, EAP-TTLS, PEAP and LEAP. The type of authentication you use depends on the RADIUS server or the AP. Consult your network administrator for more information. Sent by the RADIUS server to indicate that it has started or stopped accounting. Types of Authentication EAP-MD5 (Message-Digest Algorithm 5) Accounting-Response Users Guide 257 Appendix EWireless LANs EAP-TLS (Transport Layer Security) EAP-TTLS (Tunneled Transport Layer Service) However, MD5 authentication has some weaknesses. Since the authentication server needs to get the plaintext passwords, the passwords must be stored. Thus someone other than the authentication server may access the password file. In addition, it is possible to impersonate an authentication server as MD5 authentication method does not perform mutual authentication. Finally, MD5 authentication method does not support data encryption with dynamic session key. You must configure WEP encryption keys for data encryption. With EAP-TLS, digital certifications are needed by both the server and the wireless stations for mutual authentication. The server presents a certificate to the client. After validating the identity of the server, the client sends a different certificate to the server. The exchange of certificates is done in the open before a secured tunnel is created. This makes user identity vulnerable to passive attacks. A digital certificate is an electronic ID card that authenticates the senders identity. However, to implement EAP-TLS, you need a Certificate Authority (CA) to handle certificates, which imposes a management overhead. Company Confidential Like EAP-TTLS, server-side certificate authentication is used to establish a secure connection, then use simple username and password methods through the secured connection to authenticate the clients, thus hiding client identity. However, PEAP only supports EAP methods, such as EAP-MD5, EAP-MSCHAPv2 and EAP-GTC (EAP-Generic Token Card), for client authentication. EAP-GTC is implemented only by Cisco. EAP-TTLS is an extension of the EAP-TLS authentication that uses certificates for only the server-side authentications to establish a secure connection. Client authentication is then done by sending username and password through the secure connection, thus client identity is protected. For client authentication, EAP-
TTLS supports EAP methods and legacy authentication methods such as PAP, CHAP, MS-CHAP and MS-CHAP v2. LEAP (Lightweight Extensible Authentication Protocol) is a Cisco implementation of IEEE 802.1x. The AP maps a unique key that is generated with the RADIUS server. This key expires when the wireless connection times out, disconnects or reauthentication times out. A new WEP key is generated each time reauthentication is performed. Dynamic WEP Key Exchange PEAP (Protected EAP) LEAP 258 Users Guide Appendix EWireless LANs Table 82 Comparison of EAP Authentication Types Yes Optional Yes Yes Strong Moderate Yes Note: EAP-MD5 cannot be used with dynamic WEP key exchange EAP-MD5 No No No No None Easy No If this feature is enabled, it is not necessary to configure a default encryption key in the Wireless screen. You may still configure and store keys here, but they will not be used while Dynamic WEP is enabled. LEAP PEAP Yes Yes No Optional No Yes Yes Yes Strong Moderate Moderate Moderate Yes Mutual Authentication Certificate Client Certificate Server Dynamic Key Exchange Credential Integrity Deployment Difficulty Client Identity Protection EAP-TLS EAP-TTLS Yes Yes Yes Yes Strong Hard No For added security, certificate-based authentications (EAP-TLS, EAP-TTLS and PEAP) use dynamic keys for data encryption. They are often deployed in corporate environments, but for public deployment, a simple user name and password pair is more practical. The following table is a comparison of the features of authentication types. Company Confidential Both WPA and WPA2 improve data encryption by using Temporal Key Integrity Protocol (TKIP), Message Integrity Check (MIC) and IEEE 802.1x. In addition to TKIP, WPA2 also uses Advanced Encryption Standard (AES) in the Counter mode with Cipher block chaining Message authentication code Protocol (CCMP) to offer stronger encryption. Temporal Key Integrity Protocol (TKIP) uses 128-bit keys that are dynamically generated and distributed by the authentication server. It includes a per-packet key mixing function, a Message Integrity Check (MIC) named Michael, an extended initialization vector (IV) with sequencing rules, and a re-keying mechanism. Wi-Fi Protected Access (WPA) is a subset of the IEEE 802.11i standard. WPA2
(IEEE 802.11i) is a wireless security standard that defines stronger encryption, authentication and key management than WPA. Key differences between WPA(2) and WEP are improved data encryption and user authentication. Encryption WPA(2) No Users Guide 259 Appendix EWireless LANs WPA2 AES (Advanced Encryption Standard) is a block cipher that uses a 256-bit mathematical algorithm called Rijndael. By generating unique data encryption keys for every data packet and by creating an integrity checking mechanism (MIC), TKIP makes it much more difficult to decode data on a Wi-Fi network than WEP, making it difficult for an intruder to break into the network. The Message Integrity Check (MIC) is designed to prevent an attacker from capturing data packets, altering them and resending them. The MIC provides a strong mathematical function in which the receiver and the transmitter each compute and then compare the MIC. If they do not match, it is assumed that the data has been tampered with and the packet is dropped. TKIP regularly changes and rotates the encryption keys so that the same encryption key is never used twice. The RADIUS server distributes a Pairwise Master Key (PMK) key to the AP that then sets up a key hierarchy and management system, using the pair-wise key to dynamically generate unique data encryption keys to encrypt every data packet that is wirelessly communicated between the AP and the wireless clients. This all happens in the background automatically. Company Confidential If both an AP and the wireless clients support WPA2 and you have an external RADIUS server, use WPA2 for stronger data encryption. If you don't have an external RADIUS server, you should use WPA2 -PSK (WPA2 -Pre-Shared Key) that only requires a single (identical) password entered into each access point, wireless gateway and wireless client. As long as the passwords match, a wireless client will be granted access to a WLAN. The encryption mechanisms used for WPA and WPA-PSK are the same. The only difference between the two is that WPA-PSK uses a simple common password, instead of user-specific credentials. The common-password approach makes WPA-
PSK susceptible to brute-force password-guessing attacks but it's still an improvement over WEP as it employs an easier-to-use, consistent, single, alphanumeric password. Select WEP only when the AP and/or wireless clients do not support WPA or WPA2. WEP is less secure than WPA or WPA2. WPA or WPA2 applies IEEE 802.1x and Extensible Authentication Protocol (EAP) to authenticate wireless clients using an external RADIUS database. If the AP or the wireless clients do not support WPA2, just use WPA or WPA-PSK depending on whether you have an external RADIUS server or not. User Authentication 260 Users Guide Appendix EWireless LANs 24.6.2 WPA(2)-PSK Application Example 4 3 2 1 A WPA(2)-PSK application looks as follows. The AP derives and distributes keys to the wireless clients. The AP checks each wireless client's password and (only) allows it to join the network if the password matches. First enter identical passwords into the AP and all wireless clients. The Pre-Shared Key (PSK) must consist of between 8 and 63 ASCII characters (including spaces and symbols). The AP and wireless clients use the TKIP or AES encryption process to encrypt data exchanged between them. Figure 154 WPA(2)-PSK Authentication Company Confidential You need the IP address of the RADIUS server, its port number (default is 1812), and the RADIUS shared secret. A WPA(2) application example with an external RADIUS server looks as follows. "A" is the RADIUS server. "DS" is the distribution system. The RADIUS server distributes a Pairwise Master Key (PMK) key to the AP that then sets up a key hierarchy and management system, using the pair-wise key to dynamically generate unique data encryption keys to encrypt every data packet that is wirelessly communicated between the AP and the wireless clients. The RADIUS server then checks the user's identification against its database and grants or denies network access accordingly. 24.6.3 WPA(2) with RADIUS Application Example The AP passes the wireless client's authentication request to the RADIUS server. 1 2 3 Users Guide 261 Appendix EWireless LANs Security Parameters Summary Yes WEP WEP Open Shared No Yes No ENCRYPTIO N METHOD ENTER MANUAL KEY IEEE 802.1X Refer to this table to see what other security parameters you should configure for each Authentication Method/ key management protocol type. MAC address filters are not dependent on how you configure these security features. Table 83 Wireless Security Relational Matrix AUTHENTICATION METHOD/ KEY MANAGEMENT PROTOCOL OpenNoneNoDisable Company Confidential Enable without Dynamic WEP Key Enable with Dynamic WEP Key Enable without Dynamic WEP Key Disable Enable with Dynamic WEP Key Enable without Dynamic WEP Key Disable Enable Enable Enable Enable WPA WPA-PSK WPA2 WPA2-PSK TKIP TKIP AES AES Yes No Yes No Yes Yes 262 Users Guide APPENDIX F create a different one, if you like. Port(s): This value depends on the Protocol. If the Protocol is USER, this is the IP protocol number. If the Protocol is TCP, UDP, or TCP/UDP, this is the IP port number. Protocol: This is the type of IP protocol used by the service. If this is TCP/
Description: This is a brief explanation of the applications that use this service Name: This is a short, descriptive name for the service. You can use this one or Services UDP, then the service uses the same port number with TCP and UDP. If this is User-Defined, the Port(s) is the IP protocol number, not the port number. The following table lists some commonly-used services and their associated protocols and port numbers. Company Confidential The IPSEC AH (Authentication Header) tunneling protocol uses this service. AOLs Internet Messenger service. Authentication protocol used by some servers. Border Gateway Protocol. DHCP Client. DHCP Server. A popular videoconferencing solution from White Pines Software. Domain Name Server, a service that matches web names (e.g. www.zyxel.com) to IP numbers. The IPSEC ESP (Encapsulation Security Protocol) tunneling protocol uses this service. Finger is a UNIX or Internet related command that can be used to find out if a user is logged on. NAME AH
(IPSEC_TUNNEL) AIM AUTH BGP BOOTP_CLIENT BOOTP_SERVER CU-SEEME PORT(S) DESCRIPTION 51 or the situations in which this service is used. Table 84 Examples of Services TCP UDP UDP TCP/UDP PROTOCOL User-Defined ESP
(IPSEC_TUNNEL) 179 68 67 7648 TCP/UDP TCP/UDP 24032 53 User-Defined 5190 113 TCP TCP FINGER DNS TCP 50 79 Users Guide 263 Appendix FServices Table 84 Examples of Services (continued) 2 1 21 IKE ICQ TCP TCP 500 443 UDP UDP 4000 ICMP IMAP4 HTTPS TCP TCP 1720 80 User-Defined User-Defined H.323 HTTP NAME FTP IGMP
(MULTICAST) PROTOCOL TCP PORT(S) DESCRIPTION 20 File Transfer Program, a program to enable fast transfer of files, including large files that may not be possible by e-mail. NetMeeting uses this protocol. Hyper Text Transfer Protocol - a client/
server protocol for the world wide web. HTTPS is a secured http session often used in e-commerce. Internet Control Message Protocol is often used for diagnostic purposes. This is a popular Internet chat program. Internet Group Multicast Protocol is used when sending packets to a specific group of hosts. The Internet Key Exchange algorithm is used for key distribution and management. The Internet Message Access Protocol is used for e-mail. This is a more secure version of IMAP4 that runs over SSL. This is another popular Internet chat program. Microsoft Networks messenger service uses this protocol. The Network Basic Input/Output System is used for communication between computers in a LAN. Company Confidential An Internet chat program. A protocol for news groups. Network File System - NFS is a client/
server distributed file service that provides transparent file sharing for network environments. Network News Transport Protocol is the delivery mechanism for the USENET newsgroup service. Packet INternet Groper is a protocol that sends out ICMP echo requests to test whether or not a remote host is reachable. TCP/UDP TCP TCP UDP NEW-ICQ NEWS NFS 445 5190 144 2049 MSN Messenger User-Defined TCP/UDP TCP/UDP TCP/UDP TCP/UDP NetBIOS IMAP4S NNTP PING 6667 1863 119 143 993 137 138 139 TCP TCP TCP TCP IRC 1 264 Users Guide Appendix FServices Table 84 Examples of Services (continued) 47 TCP TCP 995 PPTP 1723 POP3S TCP TCP 512 7070 User-Defined NAME POP3 PPTP_TUNNEL
(GRE) RCMD REAL_AUDIO PROTOCOL TCP TCP TCP TCP/UDP REXEC RLOGIN ROADRUNNER PORT(S) DESCRIPTION 110 Company Confidential Post Office Protocol version 3 lets a client computer get e-mail from a POP3 server through a temporary connection (TCP/IP or other). This is a more secure version of POP3 that runs over SSL. Point-to-Point Tunneling Protocol enables secure transfer of data over public networks. This is the control channel. PPTP (Point-to-Point Tunneling Protocol) enables secure transfer of data over public networks. This is the data channel. Remote Command Service. A streaming audio service that enables real time sound over the web. Remote Execution Daemon. Remote Login. This is an ISP that provides services mainly for cable modems. Remote Telnet. The Real Time Streaming (media control) Protocol (RTSP) is a remote control for multimedia on the Internet. The Simple File Transfer Protocol is an old way of transferring files between computers. Simple Mail Transfer Protocol is the message-exchange standard for the Internet. SMTP enables you to move messages from one e-mail server to another. This is a more secure version of SMTP that runs over SSL. Simple Network Management Program. Traps for use with the SNMP
(RFC:1215). Structured Query Language is an interface to access data on many different types of database systems, including mainframes, midrange systems, UNIX systems and network servers. RTELNET RTSP TCP TCP/UDP 514 513 1026 SNMP-TRAPS 107 554 SQL-NET TCP/UDP TCP/UDP SMTPS SNMP SMTP 1521 SFTP 161 162 115 465 TCP TCP TCP TCP 25 Users Guide 265 Appendix FServices Table 84 Examples of Services (continued) 69 23 49 TCP UDP UDP TFTP TELNET TACACS NAME SSDP 22 1558 514 PROTOCOL UDP TCP/UDP UDP UDP SSH STRM WORKS SYSLOG PORT(S) DESCRIPTION 1900 The Simple Service Discovery Protocol supports Universal Plug-and-Play
(UPnP). Secure Shell Remote Login Program. Stream Works Protocol. Syslog allows you to send system logs to a UNIX server. Login Host Protocol used for (Terminal Access Controller Access Control System). Telnet is the login and terminal emulation protocol common on the Internet and in UNIX environments. It operates over TCP/IP networks. Its primary function is to allow users to log into remote host systems. Trivial File Transfer Protocol is an Internet file transfer protocol similar to FTP, but uses the UDP (User Datagram Protocol) rather than TCP
(Transmission Control Protocol). A videoconferencing solution. The UDP port number is specified in the application. Company Confidential user-
defined VDOLIVE 7000 UDP TCP 266 Users Guide APPENDIX G Disclaimer Copyright Copyright 2009 by ZyXEL Communications Corporation. Published by ZyXEL Communications Corporation. All rights reserved. Legal Information The contents of this publication may not be reproduced in any part or as a whole, transcribed, stored in a retrieval system, translated into any language, or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, magnetic, optical, chemical, photocopying, manual, or otherwise, without the prior written permission of ZyXEL Communications Corporation. Company Confidential ZyXEL does not assume any liability arising out of the application or use of any products, or software described herein. Neither does it convey any license under its patent rights nor the patent rights of others. ZyXEL further reserves the right to make changes in any products described herein without notice. This publication is subject to change without notice. This device has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This device generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy, and if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause This device may not cause harmful interference. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that The device complies with Part 15 of FCC rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Interference Statement Certifications may cause undesired operations. Users Guide 267 Appendix G Legal Information harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this device does cause harmful interference to radio/television reception, which can be determined by turning the device off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:
1 Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. 2 Increase the separation between the equipment and the receiver. 3 Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. 4 Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. FCC Caution: Any changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate this equipment. tialry uipmeiiiccioveddenrom ththaatt toto wwhhich ian ffoor hheellp.p.dby the onteedd or opepernffappr Cccoo--lloocca
(except tested device) co FCC Radiation Exposure Statement
This transmitter must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. err..rrr opeperration off tht i limited to channels 1 through 11. hh 1111..
IEEE 802.11b or 802.11g operation of this product in the U.S.A. is firmware-
To comply with FCC RF exposure compliance requirements, a separation distance of at least 20 cm must be maintained between the antenna of this 202 cmm mu device and all persons. onns.s. Industry Canada Statement entnt naddaa SStatteemm yF eexxp panrso cctt toto thee folllloowing eevviiccee mmay n 1 2 22 Comththiiss This device complies with RSS-210 of the Industry Canada Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
cee ccommpplliieess wwith R this device may not cause interference and this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause ththiis deevv undesired operation of the device unndede mm This device has been designed to operate with an antenna having a maximum gain of 2dBi. Antenna having a higher gain is strictly prohibited per regulations of Industry Canada. The required antenna impedance is 50 ohms. 268 Users Guide Appendix GLegal Information IMPORTANT NOTE:
IC Radiation Exposure Statement:
To reduce potential radio interference to other users, the antenna type and its gain should be so chosen that the EIRP is not more than required for successful communication. This equipment complies with IC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment. This equipment should be installed and operated with minimum distance 20cm between the radiator & your body. Company Confidential This device has been designed for the WLAN 2.4 GHz network throughout the EC region and Switzerland, with restrictions in France. Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. Cet appareil numrique de la classe B est conforme la norme NMB-003 du Canada. 2 Select your product on the ZyXEL home page to go to that product's page. This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003. 3 Select the certification you wish to view from this page. 1 Go to http://www.zyxel.com. Viewing Certifications Notices Users Guide 269 Appendix GLegal Information ZyXEL Limited Warranty Note Repair or replacement, as provided under this warranty, is the exclusive remedy of the purchaser. This warranty is in lieu of all other warranties, express or implied, including any implied warranty of merchantability or fitness for a particular use or purpose. ZyXEL shall in no event be held liable for indirect or consequential damages of any kind to the purchaser. ZyXEL warrants to the original end user (purchaser) that this product is free from any defects in materials or workmanship for a period of up to two years from the date of purchase. During the warranty period, and upon proof of purchase, should the product have indications of failure due to faulty workmanship and/or materials, ZyXEL will, at its discretion, repair or replace the defective products or components without charge for either parts or labor, and to whatever extent it shall deem necessary to restore the product or components to proper operating condition. Any replacement will consist of a new or re-manufactured functionally equivalent product of equal or higher value, and will be solely at the discretion of ZyXEL. This warranty shall not apply if the product has been modified, misused, tampered with, damaged by an act of God, or subjected to abnormal working conditions. Company Confidential WARNING: ZyXEL Communications Corp. IS WILLING TO LICENSE THE ENCLOSED SOFTWARE TO YOU ONLY UPON THE CONDITION THAT YOU ACCEPT ALL OF THE TERMS CONTAINED IN THIS LICENSE AGREEMENT. PLEASE READ THE TERMS CAREFULLY BEFORE COMPLETING THE INSTALLATION PROCESS AS INSTALLING THE SOFTWARE WILL INDICATE YOUR ASSENT TO THEM. IF YOU DO NOT AGREE TO THESE TERMS, THEN ZyXEL, INC. IS UNWILLING TO LICENSE THE SOFTWARE TO YOU, IN WHICH EVENT YOU SHOULD RETURN THE UNINSTALLED SOFTWARE AND PACKAGING TO THE PLACE FROM WHICH IT WAS ACQUIRED, AND YOUR MONEY WILL BE REFUNDED. To obtain the services of this warranty, contact your vendor. You may also refer to the warranty policy for the region in which you bought the device at http://
www.zyxel.com/web/support_warranty_info.php. Register your product online to receive e-mail notices of firmware upgrades and information at www.zyxel.com for global products, or at www.us.zyxel.com for North American products. End-User License Agreement Registration 270 Users Guide Appendix GLegal Information 1 Grant of License for Personal Use 3 Copyright 2 Ownership You have no ownership rights in the Software. Rather, you have a license to use the Software as long as this License Agreement remains in full force and effect. Ownership of the Software, Documentation and all intellectual property rights therein shall remain at all times with ZyXEL. Any other use of the Software by any other entity is strictly forbidden and is a violation of this License Agreement. ZyXEL Communications Corp. ("ZyXEL") grants you a non-exclusive, non-
sublicense, non-transferable license to use the program with which this license is distributed (the "Software"), including any documentation files accompanying the Software ("Documentation"), for internal business use only, for up to the number of users specified in sales order and invoice. You have the right to make one backup copy of the Software and Documentation solely for archival, back-up or disaster recovery purposes. You shall not exceed the scope of the license granted hereunder. Any rights not expressly granted by ZyXEL to you are reserved by ZyXEL, and all implied licenses are disclaimed. Company Confidential You may not publish, display, disclose, sell, rent, lease, modify, store, loan, distribute, or create derivative works of the Software, or any part thereof. You may not assign, sublicense, convey or otherwise transfer, pledge as security or otherwise encumber the rights and licenses granted hereunder with respect to the Software. Certain components of the Software, and third party open source programs included with the Software, have been or may be made available by ZyXEL on its Open Source web site (ftp://opensource.zyxel.com) (collectively the
"Open-Sourced Components") You may modify or replace only these Open-
Sourced Components; provided that you comply with the terms of this License and any applicable licensing terms governing use of the Open-Sourced Components. ZyXEL is not obligated to provide any maintenance, technical or other support for the resultant modified Software. You may not copy, reverse engineer, decompile, reverse compile, translate, adapt, or disassemble the Software, or any part thereof, nor shall you attempt to create the source code from the object code for the Software. Except as and only to the extent expressly permitted in this License, by applicable licensing terms governing use of the Open-Sourced Components, or by applicable law, you may not market, co-brand, private label or otherwise The Software and Documentation contain material that is protected by United States Copyright Law and trade secret law, and by international treaty provisions. All rights not granted to you herein are expressly reserved by ZyXEL. You may not remove any proprietary notice of ZyXEL or any of its licensors from any copy of the Software or Documentation. 4 Restrictions Users Guide 271 Appendix GLegal Information 5 Confidentiality You acknowledge that the Software contains proprietary trade secrets of ZyXEL and you hereby agree to maintain the confidentiality of the Software using at least as great a degree of care as you use to maintain the confidentiality of your own most confidential information. You agree to reasonably communicate the terms and conditions of this License Agreement to those persons employed by you who come into contact with the Software, and to use reasonable best efforts to ensure their compliance with such terms and conditions, including, without limitation, not knowingly permitting such persons to use any portion of the Software for the purpose of deriving the source code of the Software. permit third parties to link to the Software, or any part thereof. You may not use the Software, or any part thereof, in the operation of a service bureau or for the benefit of any other person or entity. You may not cause, assist or permit any third party to do any of the foregoing. Portions of the Software utilize or include third party software and other copyright material. Acknowledgements, licensing terms and disclaimers for such material are contained in the online electronic documentation for the Software (ftp://opensource.zyxel.com), and your use of such material is governed by their respective terms. ZyXEL has provided, as part of the Software package, access to certain third party software as a convenience. To the extent that the Software contains third party software, ZyXEL has no express or implied obligation to provide any technical or other support for such software. Please contact the appropriate software vendor or manufacturer directly for technical support and customer service related to its software and products. Company Confidential THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS." TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY LAW, ZyXEL DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. ZyXEL DOES NOT WARRANT THAT THE FUNCTIONS CONTAINED IN THE SOFTWARE WILL MEET ANY REQUIREMENTS OR NEEDS YOU MAY HAVE, OR THAT THE SOFTWARE WILL OPERATE ERROR FREE, OR IN AN UNINTERUPTED FASHION, OR THAT ANY DEFECTS OR ERRORS IN THE SOFTWARE WILL BE CORRECTED, OR THAT THE SOFTWARE IS COMPATIBLE WITH ANY PARTICULAR PLATFORM. SOME JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE WAIVER OR EXCLUSION OF IMPLIED WARRANTIES SO THEY MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. IF THIS EXCLUSION IS HELD TO BE UNENFORCEABLE BY A COURT OF COMPETENT JURISDICTION, THEN ALL EXPRESS AND IMPLIED WARRANTIES SHALL BE LIMITED IN DURATION TO A PERIOD OF THIRTY (30) DAYS FROM THE DATE OF PURCHASE OF THE SOFTWARE, AND NO WARRANTIES SHALL APPLY AFTER THAT PERIOD. Limitation of Liability 6 No Warranty 7 272 Users Guide Appendix GLegal Information 8 Export Restrictions IN NO EVENT WILL ZyXEL BE LIABLE TO YOU OR ANY THIRD PARTY FOR ANY INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, INDIRECT, SPECIAL, PUNITIVE, OR EXEMPLARY DAMAGES FOR LOSS OF BUSINESS, LOSS OF PROFITS, BUSINESS INTERRUPTION, OR LOSS OF BUSINESS INFORMATION) ARISING OUT OF THE USE OF OR INABILITY TO USE THE PROGRAM, OR FOR ANY CLAIM BY ANY OTHER PARTY, EVEN IF ZyXEL HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. ZyXEL's AGGREGATE LIABILITY WITH RESPECT TO ITS OBLIGATIONS UNDER THIS AGREEMENT OR OTHERWISE WITH RESPECT TO THE SOFTWARE AND DOCUMENTATION OR OTHERWISE SHALL BE EQUAL TO THE PURCHASE PRICE, BUT SHALL IN NO EVENT EXCEED THE PRODUCTS PRICE. BECAUSE SOME STATES/COUNTRIES DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF LIABILITY FOR CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES, THE ABOVE LIMITATION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. Company Confidential THIS LICENSE AGREEMENT IS EXPRESSLY MADE SUBJECT TO ANY APPLICABLE LAWS, REGULATIONS, ORDERS, OR OTHER RESTRICTIONS ON THE EXPORT OF THE SOFTWARE OR INFORMATION ABOUT SUCH SOFTWARE WHICH MAY BE IMPOSED FROM TIME TO TIME. YOU SHALL NOT EXPORT THE SOFTWARE, DOCUMENTATION OR INFORMATION ABOUT THE SOFTWARE AND DOCUMENTATION WITHOUT COMPLYING WITH SUCH LAWS, REGULATIONS, ORDERS, OR OTHER RESTRICTIONS. YOU AGREE TO INDEMNIFY ZyXEL AGAINST ALL CLAIMS, LOSSES, DAMAGES, LIABILITIES, COSTS AND EXPENSES, INCLUDING REASONABLE ATTORNEYS' FEES, TO THE EXTENT SUCH CLAIMS ARISE OUT OF ANY BREACH OF THIS SECTION 8. This License Agreement is effective until it is terminated. You may terminate this License Agreement at any time by destroying or returning to ZyXEL all copies of the Software and Documentation in your possession or under your control. ZyXEL may terminate this License Agreement for any reason, including, but not limited to, if ZyXEL finds that you have violated any of the terms of this License Agreement. Upon notification of termination, you agree to destroy or return to ZyXEL all copies of the Software and Documentation and to certify in writing that all known copies, including backup copies, have been destroyed. All provisions relating to confidentiality, proprietary rights, and non-disclosure shall survive the termination of this Software License Agreement. ZyXEL SHALL HAVE THE RIGHT, AT ITS OWN EXPENSE, UPON REASONABLE PRIOR NOTICE, TO PERIODICALLY INSPECT AND AUDIT YOUR RECORDS TO ENSURE YOUR COMPLIANCE WITH THE TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF THIS LICENSE AGREEMENT. 9 Audit Rights 10 Termination Users Guide 273 Appendix GLegal Information 11 General Note: NOTE: Some components of the Vantage CNM 2.3 incorporate source code covered under the Apache License, GPL License, LGPL License, Sun License, and Castor License. To obtain the source code covered under those Licenses, please check ftp://opensource.zyxel.com to get it. This License Agreement shall be construed, interpreted and governed by the laws of Republic of China without regard to conflicts of laws provisions thereof. The exclusive forum for any disputes arising out of or relating to this License Agreement shall be an appropriate court or Commercial Arbitration Association sitting in ROC, Taiwan. This License Agreement shall constitute the entire Agreement between the parties hereto. This License Agreement, the rights granted hereunder, the Software and Documentation shall not be assigned by you without the prior written consent of ZyXEL. Any waiver or modification of this License Agreement shall only be effective if it is in writing and signed by both parties hereto. If any part of this License Agreement is found invalid or unenforceable by a court of competent jurisdiction, the remainder of this License Agreement shall be interpreted so as to reasonably effect the intention of the parties. Company Confidential 274 Users Guide Index Index D A B DHCP 34, 119 content filtering 147 by keyword (in URL) 147 AP+Bridge 21 Auto-bridge 114 Daylight saving 184 DDNS 135 see also Dynamic DNS service providers 136 menu 58 overview 55 status screen 56 copyright 267 CPU usage 31, 57 CTS (Clear to Send) 254 Address Assignment 102 alternative subnet mask notation 226 AP 21 AP (Access Point) 253 AP Mode Company Confidential Domain Name System 121 Domain Name System. See DNS. duplex setting 32, 58 Dynamic DNS 135 Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol 119 Dynamic WEP Key Exchange 258 DynDNS 136 DynDNS see also DDNS 136 DynDNS Wildcard 135 channel 82 Configuration backup 192 reset the factory defaults 194 restore 193 DHCP client information DHCP status Dimensions 211 disclaimer 267 DNS 50, 121 DHCP client information 122 DHCP client list 122 DHCP server 116, 119 DHCP table 34, 122 overview 157 priority 162 services 163 BitTorrent 164 Bridge/Repeater 21 BSS 251 DHCP server see also Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol CA 258 Certificate Authority 258 certifications 267 DNS server see also Domain name system DNS Server 102 DNS server 121 Domain name 41 Backup configuration 192 Bandwidth management Channel 31, 57, 253 Interference 253 vs host name. see also system name notices 269 viewing 269 C Users Guide 275 Index E H I F Windows XP 171 see also Internet Group Multicast Protocol version IANA 232 IBSS 251 IEEE 802.11g 255 IGMP 103 and local (user) database 84 key 85 WPA compatible 84 EAP Authentication 257 e-mail 96 Encryption 259 encryption 84 Hidden Node 253 HTTP 163 Hyper Text Transfer Protocol163 IGMP version 103 Independent Basic Service Set 251 Install UPnP ESS 252 ESSID 206 Extended Service Set 252 Extended wireless security 43 Factory LAN defaults 116, 119 FCC interference statement 267 File Transfer Program 163 Firewall 142 Company Confidential Internet connection wizard 43 Internet Group Multicast Protocol 103 IP Address 117, 128, 129 IP address 50 Firewall overview guidelines 143 ICMP packets 144 network security Stateful inspection 142 ZyXEL device firewall 142 Ethernet PPPoE. see also PPP over Ethernet PPTP WAN connection firmware version 31, 57 Fragmentation Threshold 255 FTP. see also File Transfer Program163 LAN overview 115 LAN setup 115 LAN TCP/IP 116 Language 199 Link type 32, 57 local (user) database 83 gateway 154 General wireless LAN screen 85 Internet Assigned Numbers Authority file extension using HTTP dynamic IP Pool 120 stateful inspection 141 Firmware upload 190 IP pool setup 116 Internet connection See IANA LAN 115 firewall G L 276 Users Guide Index and encryption 84 O P M configurator. cloning 52, 103 using the WPS. See WPS. Local Area Network 115 MAC 90 MAC address 83, 103 Operating Channel 31, 57 operating mode 21 good habits 22 using the web configurator. See web default server 132 example 132 local server 129 port numbers services MAC address filter 83 MAC address filtering 90 MAC filter 90 managing the device MBSSID 21 Media access control 90 Memory usage 32, 57 Metric 155 mode 21 Multicast 103 IGMP 103 P2P 164 peer-to-peer 164 Point-to-Point Protocol over Ethernet 45, 106 Point-to-Point Tunneling Protocol 46, 108 Pool Size 120 Port forwarding 129, 132 Company Confidential global 126 how it works 127 inside 126 local 126 outside 126 overview 125 port forwarding 132 see also Network Address Translation server 127 server sets 132 NAT traversal 169 Navigation Panel 32, 58 navigation panel 32, 58 NetBIOS 103 port speed 32, 58 Power Specification 211 PPPoE 45, 106 benefits 45 dial-up connection see also Point-to-Point Protocol over Ethernet RADIUS Message Types 257 RADIUS Messages 257 RADIUS server 83 Preamble Mode 255 product registration 270 see also Point-to-Point Tunneling Protocol 46 see also Network Basic Input/Output System Quality of Service (QoS) 94 Shared Secret Key 257 NAT 125, 128, 231 PPTP 46, 108 RADIUS 256 Q N R 103 45 Network Address Translation 125, 128 Users Guide 277 Index T S registration product 270 vs computer name System restart 194 example 134 process 134 syntax conventions 6 Sys Op Mode 195 System General Setup 181 System Name 182 System name 40 related documentation 3 Remote management 165 and NAT 166 limitations 165 system timeout 166 TCP/IP configuration 119 Temperature 211 Time setting 183 trigger port 133 Trigger port forwarding 133 Reset button 29, 194 Reset the device 29 Restore configuration 193 RF (Radio Frequency) 212 Roaming 92 RTS (Request To Send) 254 RTS Threshold 253, 254 RTS/CTS Threshold 82, 92 Company Confidential Session Initiated Protocol 164 SIP 164 SSID 31, 57, 82, 86 stateful inspection firewall 141 Static DHCP 121 Static Route 154 Status 30 subnet 223 Subnet Mask 117 subnet mask 50, 224 subnetting 227 Summary safety warnings 8 Scheduling 99 Security Parameters 262 Service and port numbers 164 Service Set 86 Service Set IDentification 86 Service Set IDentity. See SSID. services URL Keyword Blocking 149 Use Authentication 260 user authentication 83 local (user) database 83 RADIUS server 83 and port numbers 263 and protocols 263 Universal Plug and Play 169 VoIP 164 VPN 108 security issues 170 User Name 136 application 170 DHCP table 34 Packet statistics 35 Wireless station status 36 UPnP 169 W WAN U V IP address assignment 49 278 Users Guide Index X note 270 navigating 29 Xbox Live 164 Web configurator Web Configurator how to access 27 Overview 27 WPA, WPA2 259 WPS 22 WWW 96, 163 WAN (Wide Area Network) 101 WAN advanced 113 WAN IP address 49 WAN IP address assignment 51 WAN MAC address 103 warranty 270 web configurator 22 WEP Encryption 88 WEP encryption 87 WEP key 87 Wildcard 135 Wireless association list 36 wireless channel 206 wireless LAN 206 wireless LAN scheduling 99 Wireless LAN wizard 42 Wireless network Company Confidential basic guidelines 82 channel 82 encryption 84 example 81 MAC address filter 83 overview 81 security 82 SSID 82 complete 53 Internet connection 43 system information 40 wireless LAN 42 wireless security 206 Wireless tutorial 55, 68 Wizard setup 39 Interference 253 Security Parameters 262 overview 82 type 82 Wireless security 82 WLAN World Wide Web 163 WPA compatible 84 Users Guide 279 Index Company Confidential 280 Users Guide
frequency | equipment class | purpose | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
1 | 2009-09-04 | 2412 ~ 2462 | DTS - Digital Transmission System | Class II permissive change or modification of presently authorized equipment |
2 | 2009-04-03 | 2412 ~ 2462 | DTS - Digital Transmission System | Original Equipment |
app s | Applicant Information | |||||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
1 2 | Effective |
2009-09-04
|
||||
1 2 |
2009-04-03
|
|||||
1 2 | Applicant's complete, legal business name |
ZyXEL Communications Corporation
|
||||
1 2 | FCC Registration Number (FRN) |
0021059092
|
||||
1 2 | Physical Address |
No.2, Industry East Road IX, Science Park
|
||||
1 2 |
Hsinchu, N/A
|
|||||
1 2 |
Taiwan
|
|||||
app s | TCB Information | |||||
1 2 | TCB Application Email Address |
c******@curtis-straus.com
|
||||
1 2 | TCB Scope |
A4: UNII devices & low power transmitters using spread spectrum techniques
|
||||
app s | FCC ID | |||||
1 2 | Grantee Code |
I88
|
||||
1 2 | Equipment Product Code |
NBG417N
|
||||
app s | Person at the applicant's address to receive grant or for contact | |||||
1 2 | Name |
E******** B********
|
||||
1 2 | Title |
Section Manager
|
||||
1 2 | Telephone Number |
886 3******** Extension:
|
||||
1 2 | Fax Number |
886 3********
|
||||
1 2 |
E******@zyxel.com.tw
|
|||||
app s | Technical Contact | |||||
1 2 | Firm Name |
Bureau Veritas CPS (H.K.) Ltd. Taoyuan Branch
|
||||
1 2 | Name |
G****** C****
|
||||
1 2 | Physical Address |
No. 19, Hwa Ya 2nd Rd., Kwei Shan Hsiang
|
||||
1 2 |
Taoyuan Hsien, 333
|
|||||
1 2 |
Taiwan
|
|||||
1 2 | Telephone Number |
886-3******** Extension:
|
||||
1 2 | Fax Number |
886-3********
|
||||
1 2 |
G******@adt.com.tw
|
|||||
app s | Non Technical Contact | |||||
1 2 | Firm Name |
Bureau Veritas CPS (H.K.) Ltd. Taoyuan Branch - Hw
|
||||
1 2 |
Bureau Veritas CPS (H.K.) Ltd. Taoyuan Branch
|
|||||
1 2 | Name |
E******** W****
|
||||
1 2 | Physical Address |
No. 19, Hwa Ya 2nd Rd., Kwei Shan Hsiang
|
||||
1 2 |
Taoyuan Hsien, 333
|
|||||
1 2 |
Taiwan
|
|||||
1 2 | Telephone Number |
886-3******** Extension:
|
||||
1 2 | Fax Number |
886-3********
|
||||
1 2 |
e******@adt.com.tw
|
|||||
app s | Confidentiality (long or short term) | |||||
1 2 | Does this application include a request for confidentiality for any portion(s) of the data contained in this application pursuant to 47 CFR § 0.459 of the Commission Rules?: | Yes | ||||
1 2 | Long-Term Confidentiality Does this application include a request for confidentiality for any portion(s) of the data contained in this application pursuant to 47 CFR § 0.459 of the Commission Rules?: | No | ||||
if no date is supplied, the release date will be set to 45 calendar days past the date of grant. | ||||||
app s | Cognitive Radio & Software Defined Radio, Class, etc | |||||
1 2 | Is this application for software defined/cognitive radio authorization? | No | ||||
1 2 | Equipment Class | DTS - Digital Transmission System | ||||
1 2 | Description of product as it is marketed: (NOTE: This text will appear below the equipment class on the grant) | Wireless N-LITE 3G Router | ||||
1 2 | Wireless N-lite Home Router | |||||
1 2 | Related OET KnowledgeDataBase Inquiry: Is there a KDB inquiry associated with this application? | No | ||||
1 2 | Modular Equipment Type | Does not apply | ||||
1 2 | Purpose / Application is for | Class II permissive change or modification of presently authorized equipment | ||||
1 2 | Original Equipment | |||||
1 2 | Composite Equipment: Is the equipment in this application a composite device subject to an additional equipment authorization? | No | ||||
1 2 | Related Equipment: Is the equipment in this application part of a system that operates with, or is marketed with, another device that requires an equipment authorization? | No | ||||
1 2 | Grant Comments | Output power listed is conducted. The antenna(s) used for this transmitter must be installed to provide a separation distance of at least 20 cm from all persons and must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. End -users and installers must be provided with antenna installation and transmitter operating conditions for satisfying RF exposure compliance. Class II permissive change for adding USB port and collocation with 3G USB devices. | ||||
1 2 | Output power listed is conducted. The antenna(s) used for this transmitter must be installed to provide a separation distance of at least 20 cm from all persons and must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. End -users and installers must be provided with antenna installation and transmitter operating conditions for satisfying RF exposure compliance. | |||||
1 2 | Is there an equipment authorization waiver associated with this application? | No | ||||
1 2 | If there is an equipment authorization waiver associated with this application, has the associated waiver been approved and all information uploaded? | No | ||||
app s | Test Firm Name and Contact Information | |||||
1 2 | Firm Name |
Bureau Veritas CPS (H.K.) Ltd. Taoyuan Branch
|
||||
1 2 | Name |
R****** C********
|
||||
1 2 | Telephone Number |
886-3******** Extension:
|
||||
1 2 | Fax Number |
886-3********
|
||||
1 2 |
r******@tw.bureauveritas.com
|
|||||
Equipment Specifications | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 1 | 15C | 2412.00000000 | 2462.00000000 | 0.3210000 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2 | 1 | 15C | 2412.00000000 | 2462.00000000 | 0.3210000 |
some individual PII (Personally Identifiable Information) available on the public forms may be redacted, original source may include additional details
This product uses the FCC Data API but is not endorsed or certified by the FCC